STEP 5/ST V 7.0 - Siemens Global Website

STEP 5/ST V 7.0 - Siemens Global Website
Preface, Contents
Part 1:
Preparing for Programming
Part 2:
Editing with STEP 5
SIMATIC
Part 3:
Test, Management, Documentation
Part 4:
Other SIMATIC S5 Programs
STEP 5/ST V7.0
Manual
Part 5:
Practical Example
Part 6:
Data Management
Appendix
This manual has the order number:
Glossary, Index
6ES5998-0MA24
ii
Safety Guidelines
!
!
!
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to
protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning
triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are
not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are
not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular
part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
!
Note the following:
Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical
description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been
approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and
operated and maintained as recommended.
Trademarks
SIMATIC ", SIMTIC NET " and SIMATIC HMI " are registered trademarks of
SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks might
infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Copyright " Siemens AG 1997 All rights reserved
Disclaimer of Liability
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be
precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However,
the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary
corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed.
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
GeschaeftsgebietIndustrie-Automatisierungssysteme
Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
" Siemens AG 1997
Subject to change without prior notice.
6ES5998-0MA24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000 G8576 C920 03
Important Information
Purpose of the
Manual
This manual has the following aims:
To explain the basic concepts of the standard software
To introduce its most important functions
The software used to configure and program the SIMATIC S5
programmable logic controllers was developed according to modern
ergonomic principles. Handling the software is therefore easy to learn and
to a large extent self-explanatory.
When procedures are explained, you will find the relevant menu
commands are also described. However, instructions on how to fill out
dialog boxes are not included since this is explained in online help.
Audience
This manual is intended for installation personnel, programmers, and
service personnel who have little or no experience of working with the
software package STEP 5/ST version 7.0.
Scope of the
Manual
This manual is valid for the STEP 5/ST programming software, version 7.0.
It is valid for the STEP 5 Standard software package and is the basis for
the optional software packages.
Standards
The STEP 5 software complies with the International Electrotechnical
Commission’s standard IEC 1131-3 (or EN 61131-3) for programming
languages used with programmable controllers.
Installation and
Authorization of
the Software
Installing the STEP 5 software and transferring the authorization to hard disk
is described in this manual. Please refer to Chapter 3 or the readme file for
detailed information.
Structure of the
Manual
This manual is divided into the following parts:
Part 1 contains general information on terminology, basic handling of
the standard STEP 5/ST software, and on preparing for a programming
session. You should read the first four chapters before you start working
with the software.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 2 describes how to work with the language editors.
Part 3 describes testing, handling and documenting projects.
Part 4 describes working with special SIMATIC S5 programs.
To familiarize you with STEP 5/ST more quickly and to illustrate a
iii
Important Information
practical application, Part 5 contains a sample application. Based on
the task of controlling a carwash, the sample project guides you step by
step through editing, testing, documenting, and archiving a user
program.
Part 6 introduces you to data managment within STEP 5/ST.
If you have already created a small project and gained some experience,
you can read each chapter separately as and when you require information
on the topic it covers.
Conventions
References to other manuals are shown as reference numbers between
slashes /.../. Using these numbers you can check the exact title of the
manual in the list of references at the end of this manual.
Online Help
In addition to the manual, detailed information is also available to you in the
integrated online help system when you are working with the software. You
can call up the help system by pressing the F7 and F8 keys.
Additional
Assistance
If you have any questions about the software described in this manual and
cannot find an answer here or in the online help, please contact the
Siemens representative in your area. You will find a list of addresses in the
catalogs and in Compuserve (go autforum).
You can contact our SIMATIC Customer Support by phone at the number
+49 (911) 895-7000 or by fax at +49 (911) 895-7002. You can also send
questions by email on the Internet or by email to the mailbox listed above.
If you have any questions or comments on this manual, please fill out the
remarks form at the end of the manual and return it to the address shown on
the form. We would be grateful if you could also take the time to answer the
questions giving your personal opinion of the manual.
Siemens also offers a number of training courses to introduce you to the
SIMATIC S5 automation system. Please contact your regional training
center or the central training center in Nuremberg, Germany for details:
D-90327 Nuremberg, Tel. (+49) (911) 895 3154.
Information
Updates
The latest information about SIMATIC products is always available:
on the Internet under http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic
at the fax polling no. 08765-93 02 77 95 00
Our SIMATIC Customer Support can also help you with up-to-date information
and downloads that can be useful when working with SIMATIC products:
on the Internet under
http://www.ad.siemens.de/support/html–00/
in the SIMATIC Customer Support mailbox at the number
+49 (911) 895-7100
To contact the mailbox, use a modem with up to V.34 (28.8 Kbaud), with the
following parameters: 8, N, 1, ANSI, or dial on ISDN (x.75, 64 Bbits).
iv
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Contents
1
2
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1
Contents of the STEP 5/ST V7.0 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.2
New Features Compared with Version 6.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Installing STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2.1
Software Requirements for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2.2
Hardware Requirements for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
INSTALL Installation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Starting Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancelling the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-6
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Dialog Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Server Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Pool Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-14
2-16
2-18
2.5
2.5.1
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 on CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing from CD-ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
2-19
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing STEP 5 under MS-DOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing STEP 5 under Windows 3.x or Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing STEP 5 under Windows 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-23
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorization for STEP 5/ST for PCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorization for UPGRADE Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
2-25
2-26
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
Installing STEP 5 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a PLC to the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an EPROM Programmer to the PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview – Connecting Cables to PLC, Partner PG, Prommer . . . . . . . . .
2-27
2-27
2-27
2-30
2-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
v
Contents
3
4
vi
2.8.5
2.8.6
Installing STEP 5 Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STEP 5 Keyboard Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
2-33
2.9
Working with COM Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
2.10
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3.1
Selecting Functions in the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
3.2
Input Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
3.3
Selecting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
3.4
Using Help Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
3.5
User Interface: Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
3.6
Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
3.7
3.7.1
Tabs and Tab Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
3-12
3.8
Selecting Files and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
3.9
Selecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16
Creating and Handling Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Project As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
4-4
4-12
4-12
4-12
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
Managing Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compress Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
4-13
4-17
4-19
4-20
4-21
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
DOS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display a Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy DOS Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete DOS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
PCP/M File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy PCP/M Files to DOS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy DOS File to PCP/M File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete PCP/M file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4.5
DOS Commands CTRL + F10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
4.6
Exit SHIFT+F4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Contents
5
6
7
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5.1
Selecting an Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Assignment of the Function Keys in the Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting the Library Number (SHIFT F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method of Representation (SHIFT F5 = -> LAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
5-7
5-7
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
Editing Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plant Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segment Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Operand Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8
5-8
5-12
5-15
5-16
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
Appending, Inserting, Transferring, Deleting a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appending or Inserting a New Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring/Moving a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-21
5-21
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
Creating, Displaying Cross References, Block Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with the Function Make XRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Cross References (Function Display XRF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-25
5.6
Searching for Operands, Segments and Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
5.7
Editing Symbolic Operands in the Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27
Editing Statement Lists (STL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6.1
General Aspects of Working with the STL Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
Simple Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statement Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6.3
6.3.1
Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
6-6
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7.1
General Aspects of Working with the LAD Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2
7.2
Simple Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4
7.3
Examples of Editing Logic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
Complex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arithmetic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load and Transfer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift and Rotate Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparator Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-14
7-16
7-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
vii
Contents
7.4.8
7.4.9
7.4.10
8
9
10
11
viii
Digital Logic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-17
7-18
7-20
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
8.1
General Aspects of Working with the CSF Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2
8.2
8.2.1
Simple Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editor Functions: Modifying and Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4
8-5
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6
8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10
Complex Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arithmetic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading and Transfer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift and Rotate Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Latching Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparator Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Logic Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-9
8-11
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-18
8-18
8-20
Editing Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9.1
Structure of a Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.2.7
9.2.8
9.2.9
9.2.10
9.2.11
Editing Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Block Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting the Block Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Influencing the Length of the Block Preheader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the Library Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputting Data Word Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reproducing the DWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing Floating Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting / Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
9-7
9-9
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-11
9-14
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-17
Editing DB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
10.1
Editing DB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10.2
Editing the DX 0 Screen (for the S5-135U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4
10.3
Editing the DX0 Screen (for S5-155U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-6
Editing the Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
11.1
General Aspects of Working with the Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2
11.2
Creating the Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6
11.3
Editing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9
11.4
Modifying the Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Contents
12
13
14
15
16
17
Bus Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12.1
Bus Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2
12.2
Editing a Bus Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3
12.3
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-7
Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1
13.1
Setting Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2
Footer Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1
14.1
Editing Footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-2
Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
15.1
Online Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-2
15.2
Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-3
15.3
Status Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-7
15.4
Force Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15.5
Force Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15.6
Program Test ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
15.7
Program Test OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-1
16.1
Starting the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
16.2
Stopping the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
16.3
Compressing the PLC memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-2
16.4
PLC Info ISTACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-3
16.5
PLC Info BSTACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-5
16.6
Output PLC Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-5
16.7
PLC Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-7
16.8
PLC System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16-8
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-1
17.1
Make XRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-2
17.2
EPROM Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-2
17.3
Automatic Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-7
17.4
Manual Rewiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-8
17.5
17.5.1
17.5.2
17.5.3
Assignment Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert SEQ > INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convert INI > SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Correct INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-11
17-12
17-12
17-13
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
ix
Contents
18
19
x
17.5.4
17.5.5
17.5.6
17.5.7
Convert V1.x and V2.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete SEQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete INI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output error list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17-14
17-15
17-15
17-15
17.6
Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
17.7
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
17.8
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18-1
18.1
Overview of the Documentation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18-2
18.2
18.2.1
18.2.2
18.2.3
18.2.4
18.2.5
18.2.6
18.2.7
18.2.8
Standard Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
STEP 5 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
DB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Cross References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
I/Q/F List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Three-in-One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
18.3
18.3.1
18.3.2
18.3.3
18.3.4
18.3.5
18.3.6
18.3.7
18.3.8
18.3.9
18.3.10
Enhanced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output KOMDOK Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK DB1 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Block List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Cross Reference List (XRF List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK I/Q/F List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK I/Q/F List for S Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18.4
18.4.1
18.4.2
Doc Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
18.5
18.5.1
18.5.2
18.5.3
18.5.4
18.5.5
18.5.6
18.5.7
Editing Doc Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KOMDOK Test Doc Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Doc Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Doc Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Doc Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Doc Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18-25
18-25
18-30
18-31
18-31
18-31
18-32
18-34
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-1
18-11
18-13
18-13
18-13
18-14
18-15
18-16
18-17
18-18
18-19
18-19
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Contents
20
21
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-1
20.1
Key Assignment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-2
20.2
About STEP 5/ST Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-2
20.3
Version of S5 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-2
20.4
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-4
STL Editor/Batch Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-1
21.1
How the the STL Editor/Batch Compiler Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-2
21.2
21.2.1
21.2.2
21.2.3
Creating STEP 5 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-4
21-5
21-7
21-8
21.3
21.3.1
21.3.2
21.3.3
21.3.4
The A1.SEQ Intermediate File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Relationship between the STL Source File and the Intermediate File . . . . 21-9
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-10
Standard Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
Foreign Language STEP 5 Program Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-11
21.4
Editing and Adding to STEP 5 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
21.5
Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
21.6
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12
21.7
Entering STEP 5 Statements with other Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-13
21.8
21.8.1
Working on the Programming Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-15
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-17
21.9
21.9.1
The Control Characters of the STL Editor/Batch Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-20
STEP 5 Operations in the STL Editor/Batch Compiler
and Writing Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22
21.10
Entering Program BLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-25
21.10.1 Using the EDIT Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-27
21.11
Entering Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-31
21.12
Entering Data Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-34
21.13
Editing an STL Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-35
21.14
Compiling with the COMPILER Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-36
21.15
Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-38
21.16
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-38
21.17
SPECIAL Functions for Editing Intermediate Files and Source Files . . . . 21-40
21.18
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-43
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
xi
Contents
22
23
24
25
xii
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22-1
22.1
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
Range of Functions of COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Functions Does COM DB1 Provide? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Features of COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Which PLCs Can You Assign Parameters to with COM DB1? . . . . . . . . . .
22-2
22-3
22-4
22-5
22.2
22.2.1
Working with COM DB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hierarchy of COM DB1 Display Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22-6
22-6
22.3
22.3.1
22.3.2
Layout of the COM DB1 Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
Possible Entries in COM DB1 Dialogs and Rules to Follow . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
COM DB1 Help and Error Handling Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-13
22.4
22.4.1
22.4.2
Example of a Complete DB1 Parameter Assignment with COM DB1 . . . . 22-18
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19
Loading the Default DB1 from the PLC; Entering Comments for DB1;
Selecting the Parameter Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-22
PG Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-1
23.1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-2
23.2
Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-2
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-1
24.1
Introduction to the Example (Control Task) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-2
24.2
24.2.1
24.2.2
24.2.3
Creating a Carwash Program with STEP 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5
Setting up the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-5
Creating the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
Documenting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-15
24.3
Transferring Files, Blocks and Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-16
24.4
Checking and Modifying the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-20
24.5
24.5.1
24.5.2
24.5.3
24.5.4
Loading and Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designing a Program for the Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-24
24-24
24-25
24-25
24-30
STEP 5 Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-1
25.1
RAM Memory Requirements for STEP 5/ST V 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-2
25.2
25.2.1
25.2.2
Memory Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MS-DOS Memory Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizing Hard Disk Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-3
25-4
25-6
25.3
STEP 5 Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-7
25.4
25.4.1
STEP 5 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9
Functions of Certain STEP 5 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
25.5
Available Blocks and Parameter Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-11
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Contents
A
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A.1
A.1.1
A.1.2
Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys in LAD/CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Assignment STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-2
A-2
A-7
A.2
Brief Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-8
A.3
Key Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-15
A.4
A.4.1
A.4.2
Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphical Input in LAD and CSF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input in STL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-16
A-16
A-21
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
xiii
Contents
xiv
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 1:
Preparing for Programming
Product Overview
1
Installing STEP 5
2
User Interface
3
Creating and Handling Projects
4
-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Product Overview
1.1
1
Contents of the STEP 5/ST V7.0 Package
Overview
The exact content of your system software is listed in the Product
Information which is supplied either with your new PG or with your STEP 5
products.
Software Supplied
with the PG
In the PG 740, for example, the system software Windows 95, STEP 5 V7
etc. is installed on the hard disk in compressed form in five languages. The
advantage of this for you is that you can use your STEP 5 software on the
PG after making only a few basic settings and selections.
1.2
New Features Compared with Version 6.x
Overview
With the introduction of STEP 5/ST V7.0, there is now an identical software
package for programming devices and PCs. After installation on either type
of system, STEP 5/ST cannot be copied.
Extended
Functions
STEP 5/ST V7.0 has the following extended or modified functions.
DOS shell call within STEP 5/ST: DOS commands can be called without
closing STEP 5.
Operation on a server. The authorization must, nevertheless, be installed
on the local destination device.
The STL editor/batch compiler is shipped with STEP 5/ST.
Language change within STEP 5.
History (repeat function) for input fields in the dialog boxes and when
selecting the project.
Extended syntax for the block list (uniform for all functions such as editor
and printer).
If you select the option in the project settings, the last active optional
package is noted and is started automatically when STEP 5 is started.
Recording of the five project files last used in the menu.
Extension of the help and information functions in the menu and dialog
boxes.
Integration of color settings in the menu.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
1-1
Product Overview
Inclusion of the COM packages in the menu. The COM packages can be
included in the “Change” menu allowing them to be started directly as
already usual in GRAPH 5/II.
It is now possible to print blocks with calls for missing FBs and to print
ranges of blocks.
Operator
Ergonomics
The ergonomics of the package have been improved:
“Flat” menu structures: in most cases, now only two levels.
New acceleration keys and hot keys: SHIFT, CTRL and ALT supported in
menus and in dialog boxes.
Harmonization of the dialog boxes: uniform structure in dialog boxes,
divided into source, destination, output, and options.
Project settings now in the form of tab pages: simple, extended, and clear
design of the project settings arranged according to the topics: PLC,
Blocks, Symbols, Documentation, Eprom, and Options.
Performance
The performance has been significantly improved:
Direct, fast editor calls: the block editors can be called directly from the
project settings, the DIR and the ISTACK.
Integration of the EPROM driver in the STEP 5/ST standard package: the
EPROM driver must no longer be loaded as a resident program in memory
when the PC/PG is booted.
Revision of the editor for bus selection
Improved installation tool
Reduction of memory requirements (conventional RAM)
Increased performance with reduced package loading times
Modern DOS
Architecture
The architecture has been revised:
Real DOS application
Use of DOS paths
No limitation on the use of drives (not for old COM packages)
Use of extended memory (XMS and EMS)
1-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2
Installing STEP 5
Overview
This chapter is intended to help you in the following situations:
When installing the STEP 5 Basic Package
When creating your working environment
When transferring the authorization to and from the hard disk
When installing the STEP 5 hardware
When working with COM packages
If you have problems involving compatibility
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
2.1
Software Requirements for Installation
2-2
2.2
Hardware Requirements for Installation
2-3
2.3
INSTALL Installation Program
2-3
2.4
Installation Procedure
2-7
2.5
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 on CD-ROM
2-19
2.6
Special Features
2-20
2.7
Authorization
2-25
2.8
Installing STEP 5 Hardware
2-27
2.9
Working with COM Packages
2-43
2.10
Compatibility
2-44
2-1
Installing STEP 5
2.1
Software Requirements for Installation
Operating Systems
To use STEP 5/ST V 7.0, you require at least the MS-DOS 5.0 operating
system. You can also use the following:
Higher MS-DOS versions,
Windows 3.x and
Windows95
Windows NT is not supported.
CONFIG.SYS
The CONFIG.SYS file should include the following commands and
parameters for STEP 5/ST, V7.0:
DEVICE
DOS
DEVICE
FILES
BUFFERS
Windows 95
SYSTEM.INI
=
=
=
=
=
C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
HIGH,UMB
C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM NOEMS
32 (must be 32)
20
When using Windows 95, the following entry is possible in the
SYSTEM.INI file in the section [386Enh]:
LocalLoadHigh=True
You should only use this entry if you have memory problems with COM
packages. This parameter has no influence on the STEP 5 basic package.
This entry is not made automatically by the installation program since this
can cause problems when booting the system.
STEP5/ST V 7.0 is started with the S5.BAT call in the home directory (with
a standard installation DR:\STEP5\S5_HOME).
AUTOEXEC.BAT
The AUTOEXEC.BAT file should include the following commands and
parameters for STEP 5/ST V7.0:
PATH C:\;C:\DOS;C:\STEP5\S5_HOME;
SET S5_HOME= C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_SYSTEM= C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
These entries are made by the installation program.
By including the STEP 5 directory in the PATH statement in
AUTOEXEC.BAT, it is possible to start STEP 5 from any directory.
An entry in AUTOEXEC.BAT allows SIMATIC NET network drivers to be
called automatically. The entry is made when you call S5DRV.BAT.
2-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.2
Hardware Requirements for Installation
Overview
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 for PCs can be installed on PC/AT 03 compatible
devices. The minimum memory requirements are 3 Mbytes of XMS
memory = 4 Mbytes RAM.
If you use the P Tools any disk cache controller present must be
deactivated.
2.3
INSTALL Installation Program
Brief Overview
2.3.1
The package is installed by the Install.exe program, simply called INSTALL
below. INSTALL is a menu-guided MS-DOS program and can therefore be run
under Windows 3.x and Windows 95 in a DOS box.
Before Starting Install
Basic
Requirements
Your programming device must have a drive C:. INSTALL creates the
directories:
C:\S5_INFO and
C:\SINEC.
INSTALL also expects to find the configuration files
C:\CONFIG.SYS and
C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT on the drive.
If the file C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT does not exist, INSTALL will create it.
To run INSTALL, you require at least 400 Kbytes of free MS-DOS memory on
your programming device.
The installation program requires the environment variable TMP. Under
Windows 95, the variable is set automatically. Under Windows 3.x and
MS-DOS, the variable should be set in the configuration file
C:\AUTOEXEC.BAT to an existing directory for temporary files
(for example SET TMP=C:\TMP).
To represent semi-graphic characters correctly, it is advisable to configure an
ANSI driver on your programming device. Please check whether the ANSI
driver is loaded in your configuration file CONFIG.SYS
DEVICE=ANSI.SYS.
When you start in the DOS box in Windows, the screen setting should be set
to full screen to avoid distorting the display of the program. This is included
in the supplied file INSTALL.PIF.
Before you start a server installation, make sure that the read-only attribute
of an existing STEP 5/ST system directory with the same directory name on
your server is canceled using the tools provided by your operating system.
Once the server installation is completed, you can set the read-only attribute
again.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-3
Installing STEP 5
2.3.2
Working with the User Interface
User Interface
INSTALL can be controlled with either the mouse or keyboard. Please refer
to the summary of keyboard operations in Section 2.8.6.
INSTALL
Auto
STEP5/ST
V700.002
INSTALL
[]
Deutsch
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Dialogsprache !
[X ]
English
Select your dialog language !
[]
Français
Choissiez votre langue !
[]
Español
Elija el idioma deseador, por favor
[]
Italiano
Scegliete la vostra lingua !
Copyright (c) 1997 Siemens AG
F
1
Figure 2-1
2-4
F
2
F
3
All Rights Reserved
F
4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
F
8
Quit
Language Selection Dialog
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.3.3
Starting Installation
Ways of Starting
the Installation
To start the installation, insert the diskette STEP 5/ST V7.0 Disk #1 in a 3.5”
drive (for example drive A:), change to drive A: and start INSTALL.
Table 2-1
Installation with the Various Operating Systems
Operating System
Steps
Starting under DOS
1. A:
2. INSTALL
Starting under WINDOWS 3.x
1. Start File Manager
2. Select A:
3. Double-click INSTALL.EXE
Starting under WIN95
1. Start Explorer
2. Select A:
3. Double-click INSTALL.EXE
Starting from CD
1. Select CD-ROM drive
2. Select STEP5.INS directory
3. Type in INSTALL
INSTALL automatically detects the operating system under which it is started.
Call Syntax
The complete call syntax for the installation is as follows:
INSTALL [/h<path>] [/s<path>] [/m] [/c] [/?]
Table 2-2
Parameter
Command Parameters of INSTALL
Description
[/h<path>] With this parameter, you can select the directory for the
STEP 5/ST home directory. The default directory \STEP5
is then overwritten. The home directory is assigned the
directory name \S5_HOME internally.
[/s<path>] With this parameter, you can select the directory for the
STEP 5/ST system directory. The default directory
\STEP5 is overwritten. The system directory is assigned
the directory name \S5_SYS internally.
[/m]
Use this parameter if your programming device is
connected to a monochrome monitor. INSTALL then
provides menus optimized for black and white display.
If there is already a STEP 5/ST home directory with the
same name as the default name used by INSTALL, and if
this contains the file @@@@@@FT.DAT, INSTALL will
automatically be started in black and white. This does not
apply if you select the parameter /c.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
[/c]
This is the default for the installation program. Please
refer to the paragraph above about the parameter /m.
[/?]
With this parameter, you obtain a brief overview of all the
selectable start parameters.
2-5
Installing STEP 5
2.3.4
Cancelling the Installation
You can cancel the installation in the following ways:
With the menu by selecting Cancel Quit, or
directly with the key combination Ctrl + C
Please note that aborting the program with Ctrl + C can lead to an incomplete
installation. If you want to work with STEP 5/ST, it is advisable to repeat the
installation following this program abort.
2.3.5
Installation Log
Overview
The installation is logged. The Install.log file is created in the directory indicated
by the TMP environment variable. If TMP is not configured on your
programming device, the LOG file is written to C:\.
The LOG file contains all the messages from the operating system and the
extractor. If problems occur in the installation, you can open INSTALL.LOG
with a text editor and analyze the entries it contains.
The LOG file is overwritten by any new installation.
Display Detailed
Information
After installing the software, you will find files of the type *.TXT (for
example, STEP5E.TXT) or of the type *.WRI (for example PRODE.WRI) in
the C:\S5_INFO\ directory. You can use a suitable editor (for example EDIT
or WordPad) to read or print the files. These files contain detailed
information on the individual software components.
Example:
Using the MS-DOS command
TYPE STEP5E.TXT | MORE
you can display the file STEP5E.TXT page by page.
Help Directly on
the Screen
You can enter MS-DOS commands with the option /? to display brief
information about the function and the permitted options.
Under Windows, you can obtain help on the current function at any time by
pressing the F1 key. You can also obtain information from the entries in the
Help menu.
On PGs, you can also display help texts on the current function while
working in STEP 5 by pressing SHIFT + F8 or the Help key
(PG 730/750/770).
This Help key has been replaced on the PG 720 and PG 740 by the keys
Fn + F1.
2-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.4
Installation Procedure
Steps in
Installation
Installing your STEP5/ST software involves several steps.
Language
Type of Inst.
User
Standard
Destination
drive
Local
from
Server
Destination
System
directory
Source
System
directory
Server
Data pool
Destination
System
directory
Destination
drive
Home
directory
WIN/DOS
Windows
DOS
Windows
directory
Start
“Run”
End
Figure 2-2
Steps in Installation
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-7
Installing STEP 5
2.4.1
Selecting the Dialog Language
The installation software and the STEP 5/ST software is shipped in five
languages. After you start the installation, you will be prompted to select
the dialog language you require. Five languages are available in the
standard package.
[X]
Deutsch
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Dialogsprache !
[]
English
Select your dialog language !
[]
Français
Choissiez votre langue !
[]
Español
Elija el idioma deseador, por favor
[]
Italiano
Scegliete la vostra lingua !
[]
6th Lang.
(only with the Russian upgrade package)
Figure 2-3
Language Selection
You can select the language with the mouse or cursor up/down keys or the
tab key. INSTALL uses the configured system language on your
programming device set with COUNTRY=. If there is no COUNTRY
setting, English is the default language.
1. Select the required language.
2. Press F6 = Continue to continue with the installation.
After you have selected the language, the subsequent menus and dialogs
are displayed in this language. The STEP 5/ST software is always
installed in five languages.
2.4.2
Types of Installation
There are four types of installation available allowing you to select the
working environment you require.
By pressing the Ins key or the F6 key (Continue) you display the basic
dialog of the installation program. Here, you can decide on the type of
installation. There are four types of installation available:
Please select the type of installation
[X]
Standard
Complete installation in standard directories
[]
User
User-defined installation
[]
Server
System available on a server
[]
Data pool
Copy STEP 5/ST diskettes to a hard disk.
Figure 2-4
2-8
Types of Installation
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.4.3
Standard Installation
The quickest method of obtaining a completely installed version of STEP 5/ST
on your programming device is to select the Standard Installation.
In the standard installation, the directory names for the STEP 5/ST data are
preset and cannot be modified by the user.
The following directory names are preset:
Path
Directory
Content
System Directory
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
STEP 5 /ST system data
Home Directory
C:\STEP5\S5_HOME STEP 5 /ST device data
The only modification available to the user is the drive.
Changing the
Destination Drive
In the standard installation you are first prompted to confirm or modify the default
destination drive for the STEP 5/ST data.
Standard Installation
Please enter destination drive:
[C:]
You can install STEP 5/ST on the default drive or
select a different destination drive.
The program will check that the destination drive can be written to
and that there is enough free space on the drive.
Figure 2-5
Drive Selection for Standard Installation
Before you exit the dialog, the drive you have selected is checked to make
sure that it is suitable for the STEP 5/ST installation. The drive must meet the
following criteria:
It must exist and be ready (for example exchangeable data medium
inserted)
It must be read/write (not a compact disc)
It must have sufficient free hard disk space.
If any of these criteria is not met, error messages will be displayed. In this
case, either select a different drive or correct the problem and then restart the
installation.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-9
Installing STEP 5
Note
Selecting a drive higher than P: is not advised. Although STEP 5/ST can
work with any drive, drives higher than P: are not supported by all COMs
(STEP 5/ST menu item: Change...). If you have selected a drive higher
than P: and potential problems are recognized, a warning is displayed.
Windows
Integration
If you make the installation in a DOS box in the Windows 3.x or Windows 95
operating system, Install displays options for Windows integration in the
following two dialogs. If you work under MS-DOS and have not started
Windows, these dialogs are not displayed.
Standard Installation
[X]
Windows
Integrate STEP 5/ST in the Windows user interface.
[ ]
DOS
No Windows integration.
Select ’Windows’ if the Windows 3.x or Windows 95 operating
system is available on your programming device.
STEP 5/ST will then be integrated in the Windows user interface
and entries made in the Windows system files.
Select ’DOS’ if you don’t want to integrate STEP 5/ST
in your Windows system.
Figure 2-6
Windows Integration
In the first dialog, you are asked whether you want to integrate the STEP 5/ST
program start icons in the Windows user interface. If you select Windows, the
following actions are executed after starting the program:
Working with the Windows 95 operating system
Your STEP 5/ST programs are added to the Windows start menu in the
Simatic\Step5v70 submenu. The PIF files belonging to the programs are
copied from the STEP 5/ST system directory to the Windows start menu
directory and adapted to the current Windows, STEP 5/ST system and
home directory names.
Any existing Step5v70 start menu is first copied to Step5v70.~xx.
Working with the Windows 3.x operating system
Your STEP 5/ST programs are added to a new program group
STEP 5 V7.0 in the Windows Program Manager. The PIF files belonging
to the programs are copied from the STEP 5/ST system directory to the
Windows directory and adapted to the current Windows, STEP 5/ST
system and home directory names.
STEP 5/ST system file Step5v70.grp is saved as Step5v70. ~xx and the
new version transferred from the STEP 5/ST system directory.
The Windows system file Progman.ini is saved as Progman. ~xx and then
extended by the new menu entry Step5v70.
2-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Note
Under Windows 3.x, the group file for the STEP 5/ST program start icons
is only initialized for the standard directory setting C:\STEP5\....
Adapting Group
File
STEP5V70.GRP
The group file STEP5V70.GRP cannot be adapted by INSTALL. If you have
changed the destination drive or directory names, you must adapt the group
file STEP5V70.GRP in the Windows 3.x Program Manager on completion of
the installation.
Select the menu option File Submenu New... to create a new program
group and specify STEP 5 V7.0 as the description and the following file name
as the group file with the corresponding Windows directory name:
DR:\Windows\STEP5V70.GRP
(For DR:\Windows specify your current Windows directory).
After you confirm these entries, the group STEP 5 V7.0 with the STEP 5/ST
program start icons appear in the window of the Program Manager.
If you select DOS, these actions are not executed.
Entering the
Windows Directory
In the second dialog, you are asked to confirm or enter a Windows directory.
INSTALL has already examined the configuration of your programming device
and proposes the current Windows directory. This proposal is taken from the
WINDIR environment variable. If the variable is not set, C:\Windows is
proposed.
Standard Installation
Please enter the WIndows directory:
[C:/Win.95]
What is the directory name of the Windows operating system
on your programming device?
You can change the displayed directory.
The set Windows directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
and to make sure that it can be written to.
Figure 2-7
Windows Integration
The Windows directory you select is not only subjected to the syntax check
described in the section Edit Directory Names but the following criteria are
also checked when you exit the dialog:
The directory must exist.
It must contain the file WIN.COM.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-11
Installing STEP 5
If these criteria are not met, error messages are displayed. In this case select
either a valid Windows directory or return to a dialog and then select the DOS
menu item to suppress Windows integration.
Starting the
Installation
In the Start Standard Installation dialog, you obtain a summary overview of the
type of installation you have selected.
The directories are displayed in which the installation will be made after you
press the function key F6 = Continue.
Start – Standard Installation
You are installing in the following directories:
System
Home
SINEC
Info
Windows
= C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
= C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
= C:\SINEC\BIN
= C:\S5_INFO
= C:\WIN.95
The configuration files AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS,
and PROGMAN.INI, STEP5.GRP and S5*.PIF
will have the information required for STEP 5/ST added to them.
All the configuration and home files will be saved as backup copies.
For more information press the <F1> function key.
Figure 2-8
Starting Installation
During the system installation, the STEP 5/ST archive names currently being
unpacked are displayed in a window Installation active .... During the home
installation, the message Installation active, please wait is displayed.
The STEP 5/ST archives are compressed and are self-extracting. The
following error messages can be sent by the extractor to INSTALL and
displayed in an error message box on the screen:
DISK_FULL,
CTRL_C_ABORT,
the group error message ZIP_ERROR.
If an extractor error occurs, the cause of the error must be eliminated and the
installation restarted. When locating the cause of an error, it is often useful to
open the log file Install.log with a text editor and to analyze the contents (see
2.3.5).
When you install the STEP 5/ST package from diskettes, once a diskette has
been installed, you will be prompted to insert the next diskette. INSTALL
checks whether or not you have inserted the required diskette. If not, INSTALL
prompts you to insert the required diskette.
2-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Completion of
Installation
On completion of the installation, a completion dialog is displayed.
Installation complete
Please check the latest information about this version by
pressing the <F1> function key.
If you want to operate your programmer in a SINEC network,
You can now load the H1, L2 drivers.
Press the <F2> function key.
STEP 5/ST can only be run with an authorization.
You can install the authorization after installing the software
using the authorization diskette!
The settings you make here only become effective after you reboot
your programming device.
Please remove the last installation diskette and restart your programming device.
Figure 2-9
What to Do after
Installation
Installation Completed
With the F1 key, you can now read the latest information about this version of
STEP 5/ST. INSTALL calls the text file STEP5x.TXT (x stands for the language
version).
You can scroll line by line or page by page, forwards and backwards through
the text.
You can print either the current screen page or the entire text file on your
current printer.
Following a complete or home installation, you can load the required H1 or L2
DOS drivers for a SINEC network by pressing the F2 key. INSTALL then
changes to the STEP 5/ST MS-DOS driver load program S5DRV that can also
be called separately.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-13
Installing STEP 5
2.4.4
User Installation
In the user installation, the first variable part of the directory name (for example
C:\Step5) can be selected for the STEP 5/ST data. The second, fixed part of
the directory name (\S5_SYS and \S5_HOME) is added by INSTALL.
When you first install STEP 5/ST V7.x, the following directory names are set
as defaults:
Path
Directory
Content
System directory
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
STEP 5 /ST system data
Home directory
C:\STEP5\S5_HOME STEP 5 /ST device data
With each further installation, the two directory names, are taken from the
STEP 5/ST environment variables S5_SYSTEM and S5_HOME set by the
previous installation and set as defaults.
If you select user installation, there are two different ways in which you can
install the packages. You can do the following:
You can make a complete local installation of the system and device
data
Make a supplementary installation of the device data from a server to
the local home directory
User Installation
[X] Local
Complete Installation.
[ ] from Server
Install Device Data.
Select ’Local’, if you want a complete STEP 5 installation in
definable directories on a programming device.
Select ’from Server’, if the system data are already available
on a server in your network and you only want a copy of the
device data on your local programming device.
Figure 2-10
Local User
Installation
2-14
Installation Options
If you have selected Local User Installation, you must confirm or enter a
destination directory for the installation of the STEP 5/ST system data on your
local programming device.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
User Installation Local
Please enter a system directory:
[C:/STEP5]
You can install the system data of STEP 5/ST in the displayed
system directory on your programming device or select a
different directory.
The set system directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
to make sure it can be written to and that there is enough free
space on the drive.
Figure 2-11
User Installation
From Server
Local User Installation
If you have selected User Installation from Server, you confirm or enter the
source directory (usually a data source on the server) in this dialog. The STEP
5/ST device data for installation on your local programming device are fetched
from this directory.
Select from Server, if you only want to install the STEP 5/ST device data in
a home directory on your programming device. In this case, the system data
must already exist.
Generally, the STEP 5/ST system data are available on a server to which your
programming device is connected via a network (see section Server
Installation).
User Installation from Server
Please enter the system directory:
[C:/STEP5]
Where is the system directory from which your programming device
will read the central STEP 5/ST system data?
The set system directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
and that it can be read.
Figure 2-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Installation from Server (System Directory)
2-15
Installing STEP 5
User Installation from Server
Please enter a home directory:
[C:/STEP5]
You can install device data of STEP 5/ST in the displayed
home directory on your programming device or select a
different directory.
The set home directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
to make sure it can be written to and that there is enough free
space on the drive.
Figure 2-13
User Installation from Server (Home Directory)
The variable part of the system directory name and the home directory can
have different names. The data destination of the two directory names can be
on different drives on your programming device.
In this case, please remember that when you reference the system directory
you must specify a data source.
2.4.5
Server Installation
Use this menu item if you want to keep the STEP 5/ST system data centrally
for more than one user on a server in your network.
Server Installation
Please enter a system directory:
[C:/STEP5]
In which network directory do you want the STEP 5/ST system data
to be available?
You must have write access to the network directory.
After installation, you can protect your STEP 5/ST system data by
assigning the read-only attribute to the directory.
The set system directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
to make sure it can be written to and that there is enough free
space on the drive.
Figure 2-14
Server Installation
The first, variable part of the directory name (for example C:\Step5) can be
changed to any other name for the STEP 5/ST system data. The second, fixed
part of the name (\S5_SYS) is added by INSTALL.
The following directory name is set as default by INSTALL:
Directory
System directory
2-16
Path
Content
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS STEP 5 /ST system data
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
If you start the server installation in the network from your local programming
device and the S5_SYSTEM environment variable has already been set by
a previous installation on this device, the content of this environment variable
is proposed.
You can confirm the proposed directory or enter a different directory.
Note
Please remember, that if you select the server installation, no device data
are installed. The STEP 5/ST home directory is not created. The
configuration files CONGIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT are not adapted.
There is no Windows integration.
Home Installation
You can only call STEP 5/ST when you install the device data extra on your
programming device. To do this start with the home installation as follows:
1. On completion of the server installation, start INSTALL again, this time on
the programming device in your network on which you want to work with
STEP 5/ST.
2. Select the menu item User and from Server.
3. Enter the system directory name of the previous server installation and
then continue with the home installation.
You can repeat the home installation on any number of programming devices
in your network.
Note
To protect your STEP 5/ST system data from unauthorized access, you
can assign write protection to the system directory (exception: the
S5_COM\ subdirectory must not be write protected). To make the directory
read only, use the tools of your operating system after the server
installation is completed. Do not forget to cancel the write-protection
before repeating a server installation in the same directory.
The submenu ...S5_COM\ must not be write-protected!
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-17
Installing STEP 5
2.4.6
Data Pool Copy
This menu item allows all the STEP 5/ST installation diskettes to be put
together in one directory on a hard disk or network drive.
Data Pool Copy
Please enter the destination drive:
[C:\S5_INST]
Which destination drive do you want to copy the data pool of
the installation diskettes to?
The set directory will be checked for MS-DOS convention (8.3)
to make sure it can be written to and that there is enough free
space on the drive.
Figure 2-15
Installation Type Data Pool Copy
Please note that the Data pool option is only available when you install STEP
5/ST from diskette or from CD.
The software is compressed on the diskettes. The data and archive are stored
unchanged in the selected destination directory. With a data pool, it is possible
to install STEP 5/ST quickly from the local hard disk or via the network.
Maintaining the STEP 5/ST data pool on a network drive makes it easier to
maintain and archive.
The following directory name is proposed as default by INSTALL:
Directory
Data pool directory
Path
C:\S5_INST
Content
STEP 5/ST Installation data
You can confirm the proposed directory or select a different one.
The data pool directory you select, is checked for the following criteria when
you exit the dialog:
The drive must exist and be ready (for example exchangeable data
medium inserted),
The drive must have sufficient free space,
You must have write access to the directory.
If the directory does not meet these criteria, error messages are displayed. In
this case select a valid destination directory.
With a data pool, STEP 5/ST is not yet capable of execution. You can only call
STEP 5/ST after running a complete installation with the menu items Standard
or Server.
2-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.5
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 on CD-ROM
Content of the CD
The CD-ROM shipped with the package contains the following:
\STEP5.INS with all files required for the installation (data pool)
\DISK1 content of installation diskette 1
\DISK2 content of installation diskette 2
\DISK3 content of installation diskette 3
\DISK4 content of installation diskette 4
\DISK5 content of installation diskette 5
\ACROBAT
\DOS the Acrobat Reader for MS-DOS.
\DISK1 Note: Acrobat Reader for MS-DOS can only
\DISK2 be installed from diskettes
\WIN3 the Acrobat Reader for WINDOWS 3.x and WIN95
\STEP5.DOC the STEP 5/ST Version 7.0 manual.
2.5.1
Installing from CD-ROM
STEP 5/ST V7.0 can be installed by starting INSTALL.EXE in the \STEP5.INS
directory on then CD-ROM.
Diskettes on the
CD-ROM
You can create sets of diskettes by simply copying the files from the directories
DISK1 to DISK4. You require 3.5” diskettes with at least 1.44 Mbytes. Format
the diskettes before copying from CD.
Example: The CD drive is Drive E:
1. Type in E:CD \STEP5.INS
2. Insert an empty formatted 3.5” HD diskette
3. Type in COPY DISK1\*.*
A:
4. Remove the diskette and label it STEP 5/ST V 7.0 DISK 1.
5. COPY DISK2\*.*
A:
6. Remove the diskette and label it STEP 5/ST V 7.0 DISK 2.
7. Repeat the procedure for DISK4 and DISK5.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-19
Installing STEP 5
2.6
2.6.1
Special Features
Installing STEP 5 under MS-DOS
STEP 5/ST V7.0 can be run under MS-DOS (Version 5.0 or higher). If you run
the package under MS-DOS, note the following points:
Under MS-DOS you can start STEP 5/ST V 7.0 from within any directory with
the S5 call.
COM and optional packages for STEP 5/ST can only be run under MS-DOS.
If you have problems with memory space, use the EMM386.EXE program in
the CONFIG.SYS file to free as much memory as possible. If you are working
exclusively under MS-DOS, it is possible to extend the conventional memory
by 96 Kbytes. (see sample configuration).
Under MS-DOS, a printer interface can be assigned to a serial port to allow
you to work with serial printers.
Effect
MS-DOS Command
2.6.2
MODE COM2:,9600,n,8,1,p
Setting 9600 bps, 8-bit without parity, 1 stop
bit, no time monitoring
MODE LPT1:=COM1:
The printer is connected to COM1:
Installing STEP 5 under Windows 3.x or Windows 95
Setting up STEP 5
in Windows 3.X
If you use the Windows operating system, you can also start STEP 5 from
the Windows user interface by installing STEP 5 as a Windows program.
Select Integrate STEP5/ST in the Windows User Interface (see Section
2.4.3 Adapting Group File STEP5 V 7.0.GRP).
Note
Under Windows 3.x, the group file for the STEP 5/ST program start icons
is created only for the standard directory setting C:\STEP5\....
When you start STEP 5 under Windows, all MS-DOS applications must be
closed.
STEP 5/ST version 7.0 under Windows must only be started using the
STEP 5 icons in the Program Manager in the STEP 5 window!
Starting STEP 5/ST with S5.BAT in a Windows window (for example the
MS-DOS prompt) is not permitted because it can lead to a system crash
due to access conflicts or to errors in online or EPROM functions.
The COM and *** keys (comment and end of segment) are not active
under WIN 3.x. In this case, the corresponding function keys Fx must be
used.
Recommendation
2-20
We strongly advise that you use a full screen mode when using the online
functions. If you use a Window mode, this can result in considerable
disturbances in communication.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.6.3
Installing STEP 5 under Windows 95
Overview
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 can be run under Windows 95. Keep to the following rules:
Other programs can be loaded, but must not access the resources used
by STEP 5/ST (printer, EPROM ...). STEP 5/ST should only be started
once.
We strongly advise that you use a full screen mode when using the online
functions. If you use a Window mode, this can result in considerable
disturbances in communication.
The Copy and Paste Windows functions must not be used for STEP 5/ST.
If you work with online functions via the AS511, no other application should
be active. This can lead to a breakdown of the online connection. It is
strongly advised to work only in the full screen mode.
Online functions via SINEC H1 / L2 are not critical if current Windows 95
drivers (VxD) are used.
Printing with
Windows 95 and
Networks
To print with Windows 95, the printer must be correctly configured. You must
either specify that printing will be from DOS programs when you install the
printer or a printer interface must be assigned later by modifying the properties
of the printer.
Starting
STEP 5/ST
To allow problem-free operation in STEP 5/ST under Windows 95, PIF files
are specified as the default. These files are entered during installation in the
Windows Start menu in a Windows 95 environment.
After installation, STEP5/ST can be called with the sequence Start menu:
Simatic Step5v70 STEP 5/ST.
The following PIF files are available:
Name
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Call
STEP 5 full screen display
S5.BAT call in the full screen mode
STEP 5 window display
S5.BAT call in the window mode
STEP 5 MS-DOS mode
S5.BAT call in the MS-DOS mode
with separate AUTOEXEC.BAT,
CONFIG.SYS
S5 driver installation
Call S5DRV.BAT
S5 Keyboard editor
Call S5KEDIT:BAT
2-21
Installing STEP 5
When using larger files and COM and optional packages, it is recommended
that you start STEP 5/ST, V7.0 under MS-DOS.
Note
The Windows functions copy and paste must not be used for STEP 5/ST.
Other programs can be loaded but must not access the resources (printer,
EPROM ...) used by STEP 5/ST. STEP 5/ST should only be started once.
WIN-NT
2-22
STEP 5/ST can only be operated offline under Windows NT. No EPROMs can
be processed. Windows NT does not recognize the installation. There is
therefore no entry in the start menu.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.6.4
Sample Configuration
Below, you will find examples that can, if necessary, be adapted to your
particular system. You can also delete or “rem” existing entries to save DOS
memory.
The directories for a STEP 5/ST have the default values for the standard
installation.
The lines DEVICE=...DISPLAY.SYS in the CONFIG.SYS file and the two lines
MODE CON ... in AUTOEXEC.BAT can always be ”remmed” out (these apply
to systems using the standard PC character set).
MS-DOS 5.0
CONFIG.SYS:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS
DOS=HIGH,UMB
FILES=32
BUFFERS=20
COUNTRY=049,C:\DOS\COUNTRY.SYS
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /P /E:2048
AUTOEXEC.BAT:
PROMPT $P$G
PATHHT=C:\DOS;C:\;C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_HOME=C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_SYSTEM=C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
LH KEYB GR,,C:\DOS\KEYBOARD.SYS
Optimization
If you work with MS-DOS only, in other words you do not use graphic
applications, you can increase the program memory by 96 Kbytes by changing
the following line (in CONFIG.SYS)
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS
to
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS I=A000-B7ff
!
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Warning
This modification must not be made if you are using Windows 3.x or
Windows 95.
2-23
Installing STEP 5
WIN 3.x
WFW 3.11 makes additional entries during installation. These should not be
modified manually!
MS-DOS 5.0 CONFIG.SYS:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS
DOS=HIGH,UMB
FILES=32
BUFFERS=20
COUNTRY=049,C:\DOS\COUNTRY.SYS
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /P /E:2048
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\IFSHELP.SYS
AUTOEXEC.BAT:
SET S5_HOME=C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_SYSTEM=C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
LH KEYB GR,,C:\DOS\KEYBOARD.SYS
WIN95
CONFIG.SYS:
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\HIMEM.SYS
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS
DOS=HIGH,UMB
FILES=32
BUFFERS=20
COUNTRY=049,C:\WINDOWS\COUNTRY.SYS
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM /P /E:2048
AUTOEXEC.BAT:
PROMPT $P$G
PATH=C:\;C:\WINDOWS;C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_HOME=C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
SET S5_SYSTEM=C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
LH KEYB GR,,C:\DOS\KEYBOARD.SYS
2-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.7
Authorization
Overview
2.7.1
Before you can work with your STEP 5/ST basic package or STEP 5/ST
Mini PLCs, you must install an authorization that allows you to use
STEP 5/ST. Without authorization, you cannot run this protected program.
Authorization for STEP 5/ST for PCs
STEP 5/ST includes an authorization diskette. Using this diskette, you can
install or uninstall the authorization on your computer.
Installing /
Uninstalling
Authorization
To install or uninstall an authorization, you require your authorization
diskette with the AUTHORS.EXE authorization program.
The program is self-explanatory with a comprehensive help system. The
help texts are available in five languages (German, English, French, Italian,
and Spanish).
All the functions of AUTHORS.EXE including the menu selection,
termination and cancellation can be activated both with the mouse or with
the keys displayed. You can select a function from the menu or using the
function key bar at the lower edge of the screen.
Procedure
Follow the steps below:
1. Insert your authorization diskette V7.0 in drive A:
2. Type in A:\>AUTHORS and confirm with RETURN.
Note
The authorization required to run STEP 5 cannot be installed on a
compressed drive (for example DBLSPACE), but only on a physical drive.
If STEP 5 is installed on a compressed drive, the authorization must be
installed separate from the STEP 5 installation on a physical drive using
the AUTHORS.EXE tool.
For STEP 5 to find the authorization on this drive, the standard entry
DriveAuth = C: must be adapted in the S5_HOME\[email protected]@@@CF.INI file
in the section Options.
This file can be edited with any text editor. Enter the physical drive defined
with AUTHORS.EXE.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-25
Installing STEP 5
2.7.2
Authorization for UPGRADE Packages
Overview
To install an authorization for the UPDATE package, you require your
authorization diskette with the program S5UPG7_0.EXE from the disk
packages
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 - Standard package, UPGRADE or
STEP 5/ST V 7.0 - Mini PLCs, UPGRADE.
You also require the authorization diskette for STEP 5/ST V6.5 or V6.6 with
the counter reading 1 for installation on PCs. There must be no
authorization for STEP 5/ST V6.5 or V6.6 on the hard disk.
Procedure
Follow the steps below:
1. Insert your authorization diskette V7.0 in drive A:
2. Type in A:\>S5UPG7_0 and confirm with RETURN.
On PCs follow the steps below:
1. Insert your authorization diskette V7.0 in drive A:.
2. Type in A:\>S5UPG7_0 and confirm with RETURN.
The authorization is uninstalled
AUTHORS.EXE program.
!
2-26
as
described
above
using
the
Warning
Before initializing or reformatting a hard disk drive, the authorization must
be copied back from the hard disk to the original diskette so that it is saved
for a new installation. This is only possible with the original authorization
diskette. Make sure that you put this diskette away for safe keeping.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.8
Installing STEP 5 Hardware
2.8.1
Connecting a Printer
Printer
Ports
For parallel operation of a printer, use the port LPT 1 (PORT 1, Centronics,
Printer) and for serial operation use the ports COM 1 to COM 4.
Printer
parallel
.
.
.
.
PROMMER
parallel
.
..
in LPT 1
(if required)
.
.
Printer
serial
.
.
.
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
LPT 1
.
Mouse
PLC
.
.
.
.
.
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
COM 1-4/ V.24
.
.
COM 1(2)/ TTY,
active
PG/PC
Which Printers
Can Be Used with
the Software?
The software supports Siemens printers (known as standard printers) and
printers from other manufacturers (non-standard printers). The printer
parameters for these printers must be set by loading *DR.INI or using a
printer list box. A description of how to do this can be found in the STEP 5
manual.
Note
The devices must only be connected together using the cables when both
devices are switched off.
Always secure the cable connectors (screw or lock) whenever possible.
This prevents data transfer errors.
2.8.2
Connecting a PLC to the PG
PLC Port
To be able to link up with a PLC, your PG must have an active TTY port
(20 mA).
If the COM 1 port available is a V.24 interface, the AG-S5 interface must be
simulated using an S5 converter
PG with Active
TTY COM 1 Port
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The programmable controller (PLC) and the PG are connected via a direct
connection (4) or by two connecting cables. If the pin assignment
described in section 2.8.4 is not used, the connectors will have to be
adapted accordingly.
2-27
Installing STEP 5
Printer
parallel
.
PROMMER
parallel
.
.
..
.
Printer
serial
.
.
Mouse
PLC
.
.
.
(7), (8)
.
.
.
in LPT 1
(if required)
.
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
.
LPT 1
.
.
(4)
.
.
.
. PLC-S5
(3)
.
COM 1-4/ V.24
.
.
.
COM 1(2)/ TTY,
active
PG/PC
Connecting a PG
with an Active TTY
Port to a PLC
The PG is switched off.
PG - PLC connection with connecting cable (4) direct or via (3), (7) or (8):
The connectors on the connecting cable (3) with the order no. 6ES5
731-6AG00 are labelled with PG 7xx COM 1 and PLC-S5.
1. Plug the connector labeled PG 7xx COM 1 into the COM 1 port of the
PG.
2. Plug the other end of the connecting cable labeled PLC-S5 into the
matching end of the connecting cable (7) or (8) leading to the PLC.
It is impossible to mix up the connectors on this cable because they are
of different types.
3. Connect the PLC to the remaining free connector.
Secure the connectors in place.
Connecting Cables
for a PG with an
Active TTY Port
Connecting cable (3), order no. 6ES5 731-6AG00
Connecting cable (4), order no. 6ES5 734-2xxx01)
Connecting cable (7), order no. 6ES5 731-0xxx01)
Connecting cable (8), order no. 6ES5 731-1xxx01)
1)
xxx is the length key. The cables are available in lengths ranging from 1 m to 1000 m. Please
refer to catalog ST 59 for details on the length key.
PG with V.24 Port
2-28
For a PG with a V.24 port, the port must be converted into an “PLC-S5”
port using a V.24/TTY converter (Köster box). The PG is connected to the
Köster box directly via a connecting cable with an integrated V.24/TTY
converter (6) or via the connecting cable (5). Depending on the type of
PLC, the Köster box is connected using connecting cable (7) or (8). These
connecting cables must be ordered separately.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Printer
parallel
.
PROMMER
parallel
.
.
..
.
Printer
serial
.
PLC
Mouse
.
.
.
.
(7), (8)
.
.
.
.
in LPT 1
(if required)
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
.
LPT 1
.
.
.
COM 1-4/ V.24
(6)
Köster Box
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
PLC-S5
(5)
.
.
.
.
.
COM 1(2)/ TTY,
active
PG/PC
Connecting a PG
with a V.24 Port to
a PLC
The PG is switched off.
PG - PLC connection with connecting cable (6) direct or via (5), (7) or (8):
1. Establish the connection between the COM 1 port of the PG and the
Köster box using the connecting cable (5).
2. Plug the connecting cable (7) or (8) into the 25-pin socket on the Köster
box and establish the connection to the PLC.
3. Secure the connectors in place.
Connecting Cables
for a PG with a
V.24 Port
Connecting cable (5), order no. Köster 224 22x2)
Connecting cable (6), order no. 6ES5 734-1BD20 (length 3.2m)
Connecting cable (7), order no. 6ES5 731-0xxx01)
Connecting cable (8), order no. 6ES5 731-1xxx01)
1)
2)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
xxx is the length key. The cables are available in lengths ranging from 1m to
1000 m. Please refer to catalog ST 59 for details on the length
key.
x stands for the connector type of the PG - Köster box connecting cable
2-29
Installing STEP 5
2.8.3
Connecting an EPROM Programmer to the PG
The PGs have an integrated EPROM programming interface. If you are
using a PC as a programming device, you can connect an external
EPROM programmer. Various devices are available for connection to the
parallel or serial port.
The device connected to the parallel port is known as the external
prommer.
Parallel Prommer
Port: LPT 1
The cable for the parallel connection is supplied with the external prommer.
The external prommer has a connection which extends the parallel port for
a parallel printer.
Connection
PG-Prommer
Printer
parallel
.
.
.
.
in LPT 1
(if required)
Printer
serial
PROMMER
parallel
.
..
.
.
.
.
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
in COM 1-4
(if required)
.
COM 1-4/ V.24
LPT 1
PLC
Mouse
.
.
COM 1...4/ TTY,
active
PG/PC
Connecting your
PG to the Prommer
The PG and the prommer are both switched off.
1. Parallel prommer: using the supplied LPT cable, connect the LPT 1 port
on the PG with the PC port on the external prommer and, if applicable,
connect your parallel printer to the Printer port of the external prommer.
2. Any connectors fitted with screws or clips must be secured.
2.8.4
Overview – Connecting Cables to PLC, Partner PG, Prommer
Connecting
cable no.
Order number
from
Connection
(Connector on PG)
to
3
6ES5 731-6AG00
PC COM 1
(PG 7xx:
25-pin male)
Connecting cable 7 or 8 (PLC)
Connecting cable 10 (partner PG)
4
6ES5 734-2xxx0 1)
PC COM 1, 2
25-pin female
PLC 15-pin female
5
Köster 224 22x
PC COM 1, 2
Köster box
6
6ES5 734-1BD20
PC COM 1, 2 25-pin female
PLC 15-pin female
7
6ES5 731-0xxx0 1)
Connecting cable 3 or Köster box PLC 25-pin male
8
6ES5 731-1xxx0 1)
Connecting cable 3 or Köster box PLC 15-pin female
10
6ES5 733-2xxx0 1)
Connecting cable 3 or Köster box Partner-PG COM 1
1) xxx is the length key. The cables are available in lengths ranging from 1m to 1000 m. Please refer to catalog ST 59 for details on the length key. A
maximum cable length of 3 m is permitted for use with a prommer.
2-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Connector
Assignment of the
Active TTY Port
PG
COM/TTY
25-pin plug connector
active port
Connecting cable
PLC
6ES5 734-2xxx0
15-pin plug connector
passive port
330 ohms
+U
9
19
2
18
21
–U
330 ohms
+U
19
6
9
7
10
–U
Casing
1
3
8
1
Shield/
casing
20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-31
Installing STEP 5
2.8.5
Installing STEP 5 Drivers
Selecting and
Deselecting
Drivers for
STEP 5/ST V 7.0
You can select and deselect MS-DOS drivers for SINEC L2 or H1
(SIMATIC NET network drivers) for STEP 5/ST with the S5DRV.EXE program.
The drivers are activated or deactivated by an entry in the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file. The original file is saved as AUTOEXEC.S5 prior to the modifications. The
changes are only effective after rebooting the PC.
To call the program:
Table 2-3
Calling S5DRV
Operating System
Call
MS-DOS
Type in the command S5DRV.
Windows3.x
Start the program by double-clicking the STEP 5
drivers icon in the STEP 5 program group.
Windows95
Click S5 driver installation in the start menu /
STEP5V70.
Load H1, L2 driver
[X]
No DOS driver (external driver)
[ ]
H1 DOS driver for the CP 141
[ ]
H1 DOS driver for the CP 1413
[ ]
L2 DOS driver for the CP 5410B,
Figure 2-16
Installation Options
The S5DRV.EXE program is menu-guided. You can control the program using
a mouse, a trackball, or the cursor keys and function keys.
In the menu, you can select the MSDOS drivers for SINEC L2 or H1 (SIMATIC
NET network drivers) and SIMATIC NET network functions.
Defaults
2-32
When shipped, no STEP 5/ST software drivers are activated. The current
status of the selection is displayed as follows:
[X] =
[ ] = not selected.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Note
You should select drivers for STEP 5/ST to suit your specific requirements
so that you use as little memory as possible making more memory
available for STEP 5 itself.
You can only select MSDOS drivers for SINEC L2 or H1 (SIMATIC NET
network drivers) when you have already installed the corresponding driver
software on your PC.
2.8.6
STEP 5 Keyboard Editor
You will only need the keyboard editor if you want to use a personal
computer (PC) as a programming device (PG).
Using the keyboard editor, you can adapt the key assignment to match
STEP 5. You can add key combinations or modify existing combinations.
With the keyboard editor, you can also switch over between a color monitor
and a monochrome monitor.
If your PC has a keyboard other than the international standard keyboard
or if you wish to assign additional key combinations for STEP 5, you may
want to change the key assignments. If your PC has a standard keyboard
(MFII keyboard), you will be able to work comfortably with the existing key
assignments.
In the default setting of the editor the keyboard assignments are given in
German; you can, however, select another language.
Files
The files are found in the directory DR:\STEP5\S5_SYS.
File
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Description
Content
S5OES10X.EXE
Keyboard editor
Editor; manages and documents
user interface
S5OES10X.RES
Resource file
Selects preset keytop texts (the
respective keyboard driver must be
loaded)
S5KXS06X.S5K
STEP5.S5K
Keyboard file
File with new keyboard assignment
must be copied to the home
directory where they can be edited.
STEP5.S5K = keyboard file for
STEP 5/ST V7.0 parts
S5KXS06X.S5K= keyboard file for
STEP 5/ST V6.6 parts
S5KXS01X.S5K
or
S5KXS01K.S5K
Keyboard file
Keyboard assignment (in the
directory \STEP5; if this file is not
present, STEP 5 loads the default
setting)
2-33
Installing STEP 5
Data Flow
edit if necessary
User
PC keyboard
Keyboard file
STEP5.S5K
copy
STEP5.EXE
S5OES10X.EXE
S5OES10X.RES
Key editor
Resource file
Sample files
STEP5.S5K
S5KxSO6x.S5K
STEP 5 SW
MS-DOS
PC HW
Requirements
If you want to load another keyboard assignment for STEP 5, you should
be familiar with the following:
the S5 keyboard itself,
the functions of the S5 keyboard, and
the file structure of the S5 software.
You will find an explanation of the S5 keys in the Appendix.
2-34
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Notes
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
!
1
–
Tab
+
ESC
Ctrl
Shift
Shift
CapsLock
Tab
~
\
ESC
F1
A
Q
F1
Z
@
2
X
#
3
Alt
F2
S
W
F2
D
F3
E
F3
F
T
V
%
5
F4
R
C
$
4
F4
Y
H
J
N
M
I
*
8
&
7
U
F7
F6
K
<
,
(
9
O
F8
L
P
Alt
>
.
)
0
F9
:
;
{
[
?
/
–
”
/
+
=
}
]
Shift
Ctrl
Enter
:
\
Backsp.
F10 F11 F12
Scroll Pause
Break
Delete
End
F7
F8
(/)
(#)
FB
X
Enter
Help
Shift
l
Print
2
1
End
5
4
0
Insert
2
CORR
8
.
DEL
3
6
9
X
CURS
.
Pg Dn
3
6
:
7
1
9
***
Enter
+1
–1
Enter
+
–
Scroll
Lock
Pg Up
COM
0
Insert
5
8
/
Caps
Lock
4
7
Home
Num
Lock
Num
Lock
S5 assignment of the MFII keyboard (IBM-AT)
F6
Page
Down
Insert Home Page
Up
Print
Screen Lock
International MFII keyboard (IBM-AT)
B
F5
G
^
6
F5
Installing STEP 5
Keyboard with S5
Default
Assignment
Please note the following limitations:
On the PG 750/770 the keys < COM > (Comment) and <***> (Shut down
network) have no function.
To select these functions use the keys SHIFT F6 <NW–Comm.> (Change
to network title and comment) or F6 <Shut down network> (Shut down
current network and start a new one).
2-35
Installing STEP 5
Num
Lock
/
7
Home
8
9
Pg Up
4
5
6
1
End
2
3
Pg Dn
–
+
MFII Keyboard
(IBM-AT)
Enter
0
Insert
.
.
.
X
COM
CURS
7
8
9
4
5
–1
+1
6
CORR
S5 Assignment
1
2
0
Insert
3
.
DEL
Enter
***
Function Keys
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
(/)
(#)
FB
Table 2-4
Calling the
Keyboard Editor
2-36
F11
F12
Xl
Help
Calling the Keyboard Editor
Operating System
Call
MS-DOS
Type in the command S5KEDIT.BAT
Windows 3.x
To start the program double-click on the icon
S5KEDIT in the STEP 5 program group.
Windows95
Click the Start menu/STEP5V70/S5 keyboard
editor.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Keyboard Editor
Menu
File
Edit
Options
Window
Other
Open
F2
Insert
Ins
Default key language
Next
F6
Save
F3
Delete
Del
Switchover
monochrome <--> color
Zoom
F5
Save as ...
Info ...
Change dir ...
Print
DOS
Alt-X
Exit
Alt-X Exit
Alt-F3 Close window
Ins Insert
Del Delete
User Interface
Menu
File
Menu options
Open
F2
Save
F3
Save as ...
Change
directory
Print
DOS
Edit
Options
Window
Other
Exit
ALT + X
Insert Ins
Function
Opens the keyboard for editing
Saves the current keyboard file
Saves the current file under another
name in the same directory or in
another directory
Opens another directory
Display
Selection box Open file
Current window
Selection box Save file as
Prints current file
Changes back to DOS command
level (return using EXIT and
Return)
Exits the editor
Unchanged
DOS command line
Inserts or changes keytop texts at
the cursor position
Delete Del
Deletes keytop text at cursor
position
Default key lan- Selects a resource file in another
guage
language (S5OnS10X.RES)
Switchover
Switches the screen from
monochrome/
monochrome display to color
color
display
Next
F6
Updates the bottom window when
several are open at once
Zoom
Increases size of current window
Info ...
Information on the release
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Selection box Directory...
DOS level
A further window Assign S5 function
to another key combination
Window with deleted assignment
Selection .RES Open file
Screen in black/white or color
Current window
Current window
Information screen
2-37
Installing STEP 5
Default Keyboard
Language
You will need to use this language selection for a new file and if you require
a keyboard language other than German.
Otherwise, German is the default keyboard language for any new file.
Language
Selection
1. Select Default key language in the Options menu.
The dialog box Open file (file type *.RES) appears with a selection of
the existing resource files.
2. Select the resource file for the required language or enter a new name
in the following syntax:
S5O x S10X.RES
x= D
German
E
English
F
French
I
Italian
S
Spanish
Click on the Open button.
The keyboard language is set.
Open File
1. Select the menu command File Open (F2).
A list of files of the type *.S5K is displayed.
2. Select a file or enter a file name.
3. Click on the Open button.
The file is opened for editing. For a new file the default assignment is
displayed.
4. Open any additional file(s) as in steps 1 to 3.
2-38
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
“Open File” Dialog
Box
[]
Open file
Name
#
EXAMPLE S5K
Open
Files
Cancel
EXAMPLE.S5K
TEST.S5K
..\
C:\STEP5\*.S5K
EXAMPLE.S5K
Inserting a Key
Assignment
378
Apr 15, 1997
11.35a
Requirement: you have opened a key assignment file.
1. Select the required key in the current file using the mouse or cursor
keys.
The selected line is highlighted on a colored or gray background, the
line number is shown in the lower left corner of the window.
2. Select Edit Insert or press the Insert key.
In the lower third of the screen an additional window appears Assign S5
function to another key combination. The description of this function is
shown in the first line of this window.
Note: After using the PRINT and PAUSE keys, the input must be
enabled again via the keyboard with the key combination CTRL +
SHIFT.
3. Select the new key combination by pressing the corresponding keys.
The Save assignment window appears or the message The key
(combination) is already assigned internally.
4. Assign the new key combination by overwriting or inserting the new
key combination.
Restrictions
For some key combinations the keytop text displayed does not correspond
to the printed alphanumeric key.
The D key on the PG keyboard cannot be assigned any function.
Hotkeys which are preassigned by resident programs at the time when
the key editor is being used cannot be assigned.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
2-39
Installing STEP 5
Key Descriptions
in the Editor
.
.
7
X
COM
CURS
8
9
–1
+1
(num)
4
5
1
2
0
Insert
Default
Assignments
(gray)
6
CORR
3
.
Enter
***
DEL
Keytops which are only present on a 101/102 keyboard are
marked with (101).
Keytops which are only present on a PG keyboard are marked with
(PG).
S5 functions which are only for GRAPH 5 are marked with (GRAPH 5).
Deleting a Key
Assignment
Requirement: You have opened a key assignment file.
1. Select the key assignment you want to delete.
The selected line is highlighted on a colored or gray background, the
line number is shown in the lower left corner of the window.
2. Select Edit Delete or press the Del key.
The key assignment in the selected line is deleted from the screen.
Note: After using the PRINT and PAUSE keys, the input must be
enabled again via the keyboard with the key combination CTRL +
SHIFT.
3. If necessary, undelete the assignment by clicking on the square box in
the top left of the window frame and clicking on No.
With No, all the changes made since you last saved are lost.
2-40
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
Saving Key
Assignments
Select File Save or
Select File Save as to save the file under another name or in another
directory.
Changing the
Working Directory
1. Select the menu command File Change dir...
2. Browse through the displayed tree structure. If you double-click on a
directory, its subdirectories are displayed.
3. Click on the required directory and the Chdir button.
4. Save the setting by clicking on the OK button.
Activating the Key
Assignment
Using the menu function File Save as you can copy your file
(assignment) to a new file. When you want to activate your new key
assignment for STEP 5, you must copy it into the STEP5\ST home
directory under the name STEP5.S5K (STEP 5/ST V7 parts) or under the
name S5KxS06x.S5K (STEP 5/ST V6.6 parts).
Copying the
Assignment
1. Open the key assignment with the menu command
File Open and open the file of the type *.S5K.
2. Select File Save as.
3. Open the directory STEP5\ST home directory.
4. In place of the asterisk, enter the name of the keyboard file STEP 5 or
S5KXS06K.
5. Click the OK button or press ALT + W.
Printing the
Assignment
1. Open the key assignment with the menu command
File Open and open the file of the type *.S5K.
2. Select File Print.
Switching to the
DOS Level
You can only call the DOS command level when there is sufficient free user
memory.
1. Select File DOS.
The command line of the DOS level is shown.
2. Type in a DOS command.
3. To return to the editor, type in the EXIT command.
Switching Between
a Color and
Monochrome
Screen
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
In the keyboard editor, select the menu items Options Switchover
monochrome ↔ color.
2-41
Installing STEP 5
Testing the
Resource File
1. Open a new file of the type *.S5K with the keyboard editor
menu File Open Enter file name.
2. Save without any changes with File
Save.
3. Close the window with ALT + F3.
4. Open the same file again.
Result: If no error occurs when the file is read, the assignment is correct.
If an error occurs, check whether any key combinations are occupied by
two or more assignments.
Information
Information about the release of the software can be obtained by selecting
Other and then Info... in the menu.
You quit the screen by clicking OK.
Returning to the
DOS Level
2-42
You can return to DOS by pressing the keys ALT + X or by selecting the
menu command File Exit.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Installing STEP 5
2.9
Working with COM Packages
When working with COM packages, remember the following points:
When using COM packages, only one DOS directory per drive can be
used.
No drives with a driver letter higher than P: must be used since the COM
packages have not been upgraded to the V7.0 level.
With COM packages, remember that the system directory of STEP6 V7.0
is different from the system directory of the COM adapter. The COM
packages use their own system directory ...\S5_SYS\S5_COM.
This division is necessary to allow the COM packages to run.
COM packages can be included in the Change menu so that they can be
started directly.
COM 155H and COM 95F can be operated under STEP 5/ST V 7.0 in the
Change Others menu as optional packages. Their previous link to the
user interface of Version 6.x can no longer be used in Version 7.0.
Various COM packages require the default files from the project settings
(??????PX.INI).
The set file DR:\<Directory>\<Filename> in the tab page is
therefore only valid for the STEP 5 session.
COM packages use some of the names of the file(s) set in your defaults,
but they cannot access them. To be able to use the set files in COM
packages, these must be copied to the directory of the COM package.
This can involve the following files that are required by various COM
packages in their own directory:
Name
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
File Name
Program file
??????ST.S5D
Symbol file
??????Z0.INI
Footer file
??????F1.INI (80 characters)
??????F2.INI (132 characters)
Printer file
??????DR.INI
Output file
??????LS.INI
Path file
??????AP.INI (+ path name)
2-43
Installing STEP 5
2.10 Compatibility
STEP 5/ST V7.0 is compatible in terms of software with Version 6.6. Using the
menu item Change Others... you can load parts of Version 6.6.
In terms of compatibility, note the following points:
The PG 710 I/II is no longer supported (for STEP 5 V7.0, a minimum of 4
Mbytes of memory is required. These PGs cannot be upgraded.)
Serial prommer no longer supported.
Existing key macros must be recreated.
The alternative BTRIEVE data management is no longer supported.
Support for diagnostic/setpoint data based on the CP 551 is no longer
available.
GRAPH 5/II V6.x cannot be operated under STEP 5/ST “V7.0”.
Older project files (PJ.INI) can be converted to the V7.0 level using
integrated conversion tools to allow the features above to be used. By
keeping to compatibility criteria (no drives higher than J: or P:, only one
directory per drive) it is possible to reconvert project files to the V6.x level.
To distinguish them, the new project files end with PX.INI.
Under certain circumstances, minor adaptations of existing user files for
Version 6.x maybe necessary to allow you to use the extended options of
the DOS file system. This applies not only to the project files (PJ.INI) but
also to bus path files (AP.INI) and DOC command files (SU.INI).
If you make use of the new options of working with several DOS
directories, you will receive a message indicating that compatibility with
older STEP 5 versions will be lost.
2-44
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3
User Interface
Overview
The STEP 5 software was developed according to modern ergonomic
principles and is therefore to a large extent self-explanatory.
If you have not yet worked with this type of user interface, reading this
chapter will familiarize you with the most important input elements and the
terminology.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
3.1
Selecting Functions in the Main Menu
3-2
3.2
Input Elements
3-4
3.3
Selecting Functions
3-6
3.4
Using Help Functions
3-7
3.5
User Interface: Dialog Boxes
3-8
3.6
Job Box
3-9
3.7
Tabs and Tab Pages
3-12
3.8
Selecting Files and Directories
3-14
3.9
Selecting Blocks
3-16
3-1
User Interface
3.1
Selecting Functions in the Main Menu
Overview
A
B
C
STEP 5 functions are activated using the menu bar with its main menus
and submenus. With either the mouse or keyboard, you can select the
tools and utilities you require for your session. If you prefer to continue
using the function keys as in previous STEP 5 versions, you can, of
course, do so.
STEP5 Window Mode - S5KXS01Z
File
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
Project >
Blocks >
DOS File >
PCP/M File >
Documentation
Set
Load...
Save
Save As...
DOS Commands
Ctrl+F10
Exit
Shift+F4
Change
Help
F4
F10
D
H
Project: E:\..\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700\[email protected]@PX.INI
F
G
F Edit PLC
1 Edit
F DB PLC
2 DB
F Bdir PLC
3 Bdir
F Exit
4 Proj Sett
STEP 5/ST
F Force Out
5 Trans BLK.
F Blk Stat
6 Comp BLK
E
>>
Other key assignments with TAB
The project settings can be modified
(A) Title Bar
The title bar has the name STEP 5. The buttons shown in the title bar are
those familiar from Windows95. The title bar is not displayed in the full
screen mode or under MS-DOS.
(B) Menu Bar,
(C) Menus
When you select a menu item in the menu bar either by clicking it with the
mouse or by positioning the cursor on it and activating it with the Return
key, you open the menu. This menu contains options or functions related to
the main item.
If you select menu items with an arrow > to the right of them, you open a
further submenu.
If you select menu items with dots (...) to the right of them, you open a
dialog box.
(D) Working Area
3-2
The dialog boxes in which you make settings, the information and message
boxes and the windows of the program editors are displayed in the working
area of the screen.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
(E) S5 Identifier
This displays the package you are currently working with, for example,
STEP 5/ST or another S5 package such as GRAPH 5.
(F) Function Key
Menu
The function key menu allows you to call certain list boxes or editors
directly without a longer series of keystrokes.
To display the remaining function keys simply press the TAB key or click
the symbol >> to the extreme right of the display.
You can trigger functions provided by the function key menu in the
following ways (see also Section 3.2):
Click the field containing the name of the function using the mouse.
The functions in the lower row can be activated by pressing the function
key with the number shown to the left (F1 to F12).
You activate the functions displayed in the top row on a shaded
background by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing the function
key with the number displayed to the left of the field (SHIFT F1 to
SHIFT F12).
In some situations, a combination of the function keys with the
Ctrl/SHIFT + Ctrl key is also possible.
Help
You can obtain more detailed information about the functions assigned to
the keyboard by activating the Key Assignment List function in the Help
menu with Ctrl+F12.
Help
Key Assignment List.
About Step 5/ST Version...
Version of S5 Packages...
..Ctrl+FI2
F12
Ctrl+F11
User Interface >
Using Menus
Using Dialog Boxes
Using Proj Settings
General Information
Compatibility
Notes
Figure 3-1
Help Menu
(G) Info Line
The information line provides information about the menu item you have
selected (submenu or menu function) but not yet activated.
(H) Project File
This information line displays the project file (PX.INI) you are currently
working with.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-3
User Interface
3.2
Input Elements
User Interface
The user interface of STEP 5/ST was designed so that all functions can be
activated with the keyboard or with a mouse.
Hotkeys
To allow more convenient operation with the keyboard, the display includes
hotkeys. These hotkeys are letters and numbers highlighted in a color and
by pressing the corresponding key you can select and activate functions
more quickly. After you press a hotkey, wherever the cursor is currently
positioned, the software jumps to the corresponding point on the screen or
triggers the required function in a menu.
Upper Menu Bar
Using the key combination ALT+ Letter, you open the required submenu from
any point in the program.
ALT+F
: Opens the File menu or
ALT+T
: Opens the Test menu
Submenus
In these menus you activate or select a function simply by pressing the colored
hotkey. Only the hotkeys of the currently opened menu are active.
Dialog Boxes
Within dialog boxes you can use the hotkeys to navigate to different positions
in the boxes. In dialog boxes, you once again use the combination of the ALT
key with the hotkey.
Key Macros
Within STEP 5, it is possible to record key strokes, for example within the
block editor.
This allows you to automate various steps.
You select the key macro program as follows:
CTRL+ALT+D
The Select macro dialog box is displayed in which you can make the
following settings:
Type in (or select) the macro file (......TX.INI)
Type in a title
Run a recorded key macro
Record a key macro of your input
Run a recorded key macro in the single step mode
If the option [ ] Run in single-step mode is set, you must press
the key combination CTRL+ALT+T when running the recorded macro to
activate each single step.
You complete a recording with
CTRL+ALT+D
You can cancel the key macro mode with the ESC key.
3-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
Note
It is not possible to operate STEP 5/St with the mouse or cursor during the
recording of a key macro.
When using the hotkeys, you should note that the key assignment differs
from language to language.
The [email protected] macro automatically starts the running of a recorded
macro when you start STEP 5/ST.
Key macros cannot be continued after you use the command File DOS-Commands or Change Others.
Make sure that you note down the start and end of a recording.
Keys in the
Function Key
Menu
Some of the submenus are nested when they are open. You can close a
submenu with the ESC key without triggering a function. If you press the Return
key, you trigger a function or open a submenu.
To keep the selection of commonly used functions as simple as possible,
function keys (F1 to F12) were defined for most submenus and these are
effective at any point in the menu.
The F1 key, for example, calls the job box for the block editor, Shift+F3
displays the block directory on the PLC.
The assignment of the function keys is displayed at the lower edge of the
screen when you are at the menu level. Since this assignment also includes
the combination of function keys with Shift or Ctrl, you can display the next
function key assignment level using the TAB key.
If you select Help Key Assignment List, you can display an overview of the
function keys used.
The assignment of the function key bar is always visible when the menu is
active. Optional packages may have their own assignment for the function
keys.
With the TAB key, you can move from one function key assignment level to
the next. If you prefer to use the mouse, click the >> at the bottom right of the
function key bar.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-5
User Interface
3.3
Selecting Functions
Calling Functions
You call a function or an editor in two steps:
1. Select the function in a main or submenu
2. Complete the input fields in the job box and confirm your input.
The function is started/executed or the editor is called.
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
10 x 18
File
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block ...
Data Block ...
DB Screen ...
Documentation
Change
Help
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Edit Step 5 block(s)
SOURCE
(X)
Program file
(X)
PLC
NONAMEST.S5D
–> C:\STEP5\S5_ST
Selection
Block list
[
]
Project: E:\..\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700\[email protected]@PX.INI
STEP 5
Search key
[
]
F Edit AG F DB AG
F BstVz AG F Beenden
F Steu Ausg F Stat Bst
>>
2 DB
3 BstVz
4 ProjEinst 5 Bst kop.
6 Vgl Bst
Optionen 1 Edit Block
[C:\STEP5\S5_ST\NONAMEST.S5D
]
mit TAB–>
weitere
Tastenbelegungen
< History
F1 >
E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700
[X] Confirm before overwriting
STEPassignment
5 Blocke –>
ind
Programmdatei oder im AG editieren
E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP
[X] Update
lister
File
(??????ST.S5D)
Block types
< Select
F3 >
[X] Update XRF
NONAMEST.S5D
PB Program blocks
PC >Comment blocks
< Info
F7
< Edit >
< Cancel ESC >
< Help Shift+F8FB> Function blocks
FC Comment blocks
FX Function blocks
FCX Comment blocks
OB Org. blocks
OC Comment blocks
<<*
>>
< Enter >
Figure 3-2
3-6
< Cancel ESC >
*
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+ F8 >
Selecting Functions in Main and Submenus
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
3.4
Using Help Functions
Online Help
The online help system provides information at the point at which you
require it. You can find specific information quickly without having to refer
to the manuals. The online help includes the following:
Help topics: Provides various ways of displaying help information, see
Figure 3-3.
Context-sensitive Help: The button <INFO F7> or F7 key: these display
information about the selected object or the active dialog box or window.
Using Help: See Figure 3-3 menu Help User Interface or the Help
Shift+F8 key displays a description of the options available to find certain
information in the help system.
About: Displays information about the current version of the
application.
Calling Online Help
You can call the online help system in various ways:
1. In a dialog box, click the button Help Shift+F8 or press the SHIFT+F8 key.
You then obtain general help about this dialog box. You can scroll and page
through these multi-page texts.
2. Position the mouse pointer in a window or dialog box on the topic about
which you require help and click the Info F7 button or press the F7 key.
3. Select a menu command from the Help menu in the menu bar.
ment
Documentation
Change
Help
Key Assignment List... Ctrl+FI2
About STEP 5/ST Version...
F12
Version of S5 Packages.. Ctrl+F11
User Interface >
Using Menus
Using Dialog Boxes
Using Proj Settings
General Information
Compatibility
Notes
Figure 3-3
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Help Menu
3-7
User Interface
3.5
User Interface: Dialog Boxes
Making Entries in
Dialog Boxes
In dialog boxes, you can enter information that is required to execute a
particular task. There are four types of dialog box available:
Job box (see Section 3.6)
Tabs and tab pages (see Section 3.7)
File/directory selection (see Section 3.8)
Block selection (see Section 3.9)
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
Auto
Transfer block(s)
Input and
information fields
Transfer from
(X) Program file
(X) PLC
to
(X) Program file
(X) .PLC
Selection
(X) Block list
[
(X) Block
(X) Entire file
Figure 3-4
3-8
[NONAMEST.S5D]
–> C:\V_700.001\S5_SYS
[NONAMEST.S5D]
–> C:\V_700.001\S5_SYS
[
]
to
[
Example of a Dialog Box (here a Job Box)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
3.6
Job Box
Function
The job box is a dialog box for calling an editor or a function. The
information used in these forms can have effects on the elements with the
same name in the project settings. The most important components of
dialog boxes are explained based on an example in Figure 3-5.
Input Elements
As far as possible working with dialog boxes has been made uniform and is
based on the strategies used in Windows programs.
Table 3-1
The Dialog Elements
Element
Dialog Elements
Function
( ) Option button
You can select one option from several alternatives
using the cursor keys or the mouse.
[ ] Check box
You can select one or more optional settings with
the F3 key, spacebar or mouse.
Select box:
If you press the F3 key, a list box appears in which
you can select predefined settings.
If there are only two options available, you can
toggle between them with the F3 key.
List box
You select an element in the list using the Return
key or by double-clicking with the mouse (see
also Section 3.8 or 3.9)
Text box [...]
In text boxes, you type in your input using the
keyboard, for example file names.
In these boxes, alphanumeric characters are
permitted (but no umlauts).
< History
F1 >
You can select one of the last 20 entries.
< Edit
F2 >
Calls the editor for the specified file.
< Select
F3 >
Activates a selection in a dialog box or list box or
by marking an element.
< Info
F7 >
Information about completing the text boxes.
< Help Shift+F8 >
General information about dialog boxes.
< Cancel ESC>
Input is canceled.
You can also achieve the same effect as clicking a <...> button by pressing the
corresponding function key (see Table 3-2).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-9
User Interface
Table 3-2
Function Keys
Function Keys Corresponding to the < > Buttons
Function Keys
Effect
F1 = History
Selects one of the last 20 entries.
F2 = Edit
Calls the editor for the specified file.
F3 = Select
Activates selection via a dialog box or list box or by
selecting an element.
F4
F5
F6
F7 = Info
Information about completing text boxes.
Shift+F8 = Help
General help on dialog boxes.
Different function keys are permitted depending on the position of the
green cursor bar. Disabled function keys are displayed in gray.
Table 3-3
Keys with
Special
Functions
Special Keys for Text Boxes
Keys
Effect
Num. 5:
Switchover between the insert and overwrite mode.
SHIFT+Del:
Text box is cleared.
Applies only to text boxes!
Table 3-4
Mouse,
Keyboard
3-10
Keys
Working with the Mouse and Keyboard
Effect
Cursor keys
Changes between option boxes
TAB key
Changes between the input elements of a dialog box,
TAB moves forwards right/down, Shift+TAB
backwards left/up
Mouse
Positioning with a single mouse click, double-click has
the same effect as the return key
Hotkeys
Direct selection of an element with ALT+letter or
ALT+number.
Return key
You trigger a function with the RETURN or Insert key
if the entries in the dialog box are correct.
You activate a search dialog in text boxes with (?) and
(*)
You activate the drive/directory in the Dr/directory list
boxes
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
“Memory” of the
Job Boxes
The STEP5 job boxes have a so-called “memory” that buffers the last
specified contents on hard disk so that the contents of the dialog boxes are
recorded for the present STEP 5 session or for more than one session and
are ready the next time the box is called. The memory includes the
following:
Status of text boxes and other dialog elements
History of text boxes
Output to screen or not to screen.
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
Auto
Transfer block(s)
Transfer from
(X) Program file
(X) PLC
to
(X) Program file
(X) PLC
Selection
(X) Block list
[
(X) Block
(X) Entire file
[NONAMEST.S5D]
–> C:\STEP 5\S5_DATEN
[NONAMEST.S5D]
–> C:\STEP 5\S5_DATEN
[
Option
[X] Confirm before overwriting
< Transfer >
Figure 3-5
< Cancel ESC >
]
]
to
[
]
< History
F1 >
< Select
F3 >
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+F8 >
Example of a Job Box
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-11
User Interface
3.7
Tabs and Tab Pages
Function
3.7.1
The content of the dialog box that you obtain after activating the menu command
File Project Set F4 is organized in tabs to make it easier to work with. Each
tab is clearly named and you simply click the name tab to bring a particular tab
page to the foreground.
Working with Tabs
The elements available for working with tabs are basically the same as in
dialog boxes.
The dialog consists of several tab pages with the current tab page covering
the others.
Using the hotkeys ALT + number, you can change between the tab pages.
You can also change to a different tab page by clicking the tab with the
mouse.
Function Keys in
Tab Pages
Keys
F3
Effect
The cursor must be located on the name of a text field.
1. Parameter settings can be changed with F3
(for example YES/NO or RW/PROT).
2. A list box is activated.
Select entries with the cursor.
You accept an entry from the list by pressing the
Return key or by double-clicking.
3. A file list box is displayed..
You can navigate through the box and select
a file (job box).
3-12
ALT + Tab
Number
Changes to the tab page, for example ALT + 2 brings
tab page 2 to the foreground.
F7
An information text is displayed for the field marked by
the cursor.
Shift F8
Displays general help information.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
Memory
When you exit the tab dialog, STEP 5 records the currently active page
and the cursor position in this page and selects this the next time you open
the project settings. This applies only within a STEP 5 session.
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
10 x 18
E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700\[email protected]@PX.INI
4 Documentation
1
PLC
5 Options
3 Symbols
2 Blocks
Mode:
Online
PLC type:
6 EPROM
PLC 100 UCPU Code
Interface:
Parameter:
Modifiable: cyclic
CPU
90
AS511
STANDARD
Path name
[
Path file
[NONAMEAP.INI]
-> K:\
Path option: No
]
< History
< Edit
< Select
< Enter >
Figure 3-6
< Cancel ESC > < Project... F6 >
F1 >
F2 >
F3 >
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+ F8 >
Project Settings Tab Pages
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-13
User Interface
3.8
Selecting Files and Directories
Function
In this dialog box, you can select files (file list box) or directories (directory
list box) by navigating through drives and into directories. The structure of
both list boxes is identical.
If the job box expects a directory name (directory list box), you can select
DOS directories. After exiting the dialog box, the selected directory name is
entered but not file names you may have selected.
This dialog box provides additional support for certain file types that is
explained in the Help for the corresponding list box.
How to Select Files
and Directories
You can move between the fields with the TAB (forwards) or Shift+TAB
(backwards) keys. You can obtain general information about working in file list
boxes by pressing the SHIFT + F8 key or by clicking the <Help Shift+F8>. The
help text also provides information about the individual elements and how to
use them.
You can obtain additional information about a selected input box by pressing
the F7 key or by clicking <Info + F7>.
File
In this text box, you can enter a file name or a search mask for file names. If
the end of the file name is fixed, for example ST.S5D), this ending cannot be
modified.
In this box, you can also specify a drive letter or a directory path. After pressing
the return key, the information is entered and the display in the file list and Dr/
directory list is updated. Using question marks as place holders, you can also
enter a so-called search mask.
Search Mask
If you enter a search mask in the File box using question marks ???, you update
the file list when you press the return key.
The search mask is displayed again when the list is displayed so that you can
check the entry. As long as the search mask is active, in other words no single
file name has been selected, you can only cancel the file list box.
If the job box from which the file selection was started permits question marks
in the file name box, the file list box can also be exited with question marks
in the File box.
File List
In this section of the dialog box, a list of all the files in the selected directory
path is displayed. This display also depends on a search mask if a mask has
been specified.
If you change to this list box, either a green or blue cursor appears. The blue
cursor means that no element has yet been selected in the list and that no file
name has been specified in the File text box. Otherwise the cursor is green.
When you enter an alphanumeric character (number or letter), the cursor
moves to the next file that starts with this character, if one exists.
Dr/directory
3-14
Using this list box, you can navigate through the DOS drives and directories,
in other words you can change the current DOS directory path. If you type in
an alphanumeric character (number or letter), the cursor moves to the next
directory that starts with this character, if one exists.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
Sorted
The file list can be sorted upwards or downwards according to the names, time
(date and time) and size. The Dr/directory list can be sorted in ascending and
descending order.
Note
When the cursor is in the file or Dr/directory list, if you type in an
alphanumeric character, the cursor jumps to the next element beginning
with this character if such an element exists.
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
12 x 22
E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700\[email protected]@PX.INI
File [C:\STEP5\S5_ST\NONAMEST.S5D
–> E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700
–> E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP
Files
(??????ST.S5D)
NONAMEST.S5D
<<*
sorted: up
NONAMEST.S5D
< Enter >
Figure 3-7
>>
by: Name
3.200
03.02.97
< Cancel ESC >
12:57:48
]
Dr/directory
..
Data
Home
[–C–]
[–D–]
[–E–]
[–F-]
[–G–]
[–H–]
*
sorted: up
< Select
F3 >
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+ F8 >
File/Directory List Dialog Box
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-15
User Interface
3.9
Selecting Blocks
Function
With this dialog box, you select blocks. The block list box is displayed by
pressing the F3 key or clicking < Select F3 > in a text box for blocks. You can
obtain information about the input options by pressing the F7 key or by clicking
< Info F7 > .
Using the block selection function, simplifies your input and restricts it to the
blocks actually used. You can move from one field to the next in the block list
box using the TAB or Shift+TAB keys. The following elements are available:
Block
Block list
Block types
Working in the
Dialog Box
You can change from one field to the next using the TAB (forwards) or Shift+TAB
(backwards) keys. Information about working generally in the dialog box is
displayed if you press the SHIFT + F8 key or click the < Help Shift+F8 > button.
This also provides you with information about individual elements and how to
work with them.
You can obtain additional information about a selected text field by pressing
the F7 key or clicking < Info F7>
3-16
Block
You can enter a block name in this input box. You can use all block types that
are visible in the block type list. This list of permitted block types depends on
the dialog box in which the display of the block list was activated.
Block List
This is a list of all the existing blocks (in the program file or on the PLC) whose
type matches the currently set block type. When you change to this list box,
either a green or blue cursor appears. The blue cursor means that no element
in the list has been selected and that no block name has been specified in the
upper “Block” input box. Otherwise the cursor is green.
Block Types
This list of block types displays the currently permitted types. After you select
a block type with the mouse (double-click) or with the return key, the content
of the block list is updated.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
User Interface
Note
When the cursor is in the file list or in the Dr/directory, if you type in an
alphanumeric character, the cursor jumps to the next element that begins
with this character if such an element exists.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S5KXS01Z
Edit STEP5 5 block(s)
Block
[
Program file:
WASCHAST.S5D
–>C:\S5_DATA\EXAMPLE
]
PB Program blocks
PB002
PB010
PB011
<<*
*
>>
< Enter>
Figure 3-8
Block types
PB
Program blocks
PC
Comment blocks
FB
Function blocks
FC
Comment blocks
FX
Function blocks
FCX Comment blocks
OB
Org. blocks
OC
Comment blocks
< Cancel ESC >
< Help Shift+ F8 >
Block List Dialog Box
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
3-17
User Interface
3-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4
Overview
Projects represent the entire data and programs for an automation task.
They are used to save the data and programs that result from programming
an automation task. The main object in creating a project is to provide the
data and to write the programs.
Note for the
Reader
The first part of this chapter describes the essential components that make
up a project. You should first familiarize yourself with the most important
objects in a STEP 5 project based on this chapter. The second part of the
chapter explains the main aspects of handling the objects of a project, for
example copying, transferring, comparing and deleting.
File
Editor
Test
PLC Management
Project >
Blocks >
DOS File >
PCP/M File >
1 C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN\TEST1EPX.INI
2 C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN\TEST2EPX.INI
3 C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN\TEST3EPX.INI
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
DOS Commands
Ctrl+F10
Exit
Shift+F4
Chapter
Description
A maximum of 5
saved project files can be
displayed here
Page
4.1
Project Settings
4-2
4.2
Managing Blocks
4-13
4.3
DOS File
4-22
4.4
PCP/M File
4-26
4.5
DOS Commands CTRL + F10
4-30
4.6
Exit SHIFT+F4
4-31
4-1
Creating and Handling Projects
4.1
Project Settings
Overview
Before you begin to program with STEP 5, you should plan the following
information:
Some or all the required file names of the user program
A working directory containing all the files
Project-specific parameters such as type of representation or mode
You only need to make these settings once with STEP 5. Specifying a
unique directory which will contain the files belonging to one project makes
it far easier to organize your programming. STEP 5 saves all these settings
in a project file (*PX.INI) of which you can make copies. With this, you
have a list of all the relevant data for a project.
You can change the settings at any time to match them to new conditions.
Once you load a project file, the data are available immediately and you
can begin programming without having to create new settings.
Project structure
Figure 4-1 shows how the project file and corresponding program files are
organized. The project file is in the same working directory as the files. The
settings in the project file relate to these files. Exceptions to this are the
printer file and the path file. These are always in the S5_SYS directory and
then in the S5_HOME directory after they have been modified.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Project directory
C:\PLANT1\MOTORHA
(set in project file)
Project file (*PX.INI)
MOTOR1PJ.INI
MOTOR1PX.INI
With the settings of the project file
Working directory:
Program file:
XRF file:
Symbols file:
Sequential File:
Footer file:
SYSID-file:
Path file:
Doc command file:
Printer file:
Doc file:
MOTOR1ST.S5D
C:\PLANT1\MOTORHA
C:\MOTOR1ST.S5D
C:\MOTOR1XR.INI
C:\MOTOR1Z0.INI
C:\MOTOR1Z0.SEQ
C:\SAFETYF2.INI
C:\EPROM2SD.INI
PATH11AP.INI
C:\DCOM11SU.INI
DR210HDR.INI
C:\MOTOR1LS.INI
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
MOTOR1XR.INI
MOTOR1Z0.INI
MOTOR1Z0.SEQ
.
.
.
System directory (S5_HOME or S5_SYS)
DR210HDR.INI
PATH11AP.INI
S5.BAT
Figure 4-1
Organization of the Project File and Program File
The project structure shown here is only one of several different possibilities (refer to the Options tab
in Section 4.1.1).
4-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
Functions
The following functions are available in the File menu.
File
Project >
File Project
Set F4. You can set all the parameters required for a
specific project. These include the following:
– Files belonging to a project. These files are always set in the job and list
boxes or dialogs in which they will be addressed.
– Parameters, e.g. symbols, method of representation (LAD, CSF, STL),
character set etc. Once you have selected the settings for a project, you
can only edit this project.
File Project
Load... F10. All the settings for the selected project
are loaded. Once the project is loaded, only the files belonging to this
project can be selected for editing.
File Project
Save. All the settings are saved in the file for the
specific project.
File Project
Save as.... All the settings are saved in a selectable
(new) file for the specific project.
Note
The settings are retained even when you exit STEP 5. When you start the
next session, the last settings are adopted.
By activating <Edit F2> in the Blocks, Symbols and Documentation tab
pages, you can call the relevant editor directly.
One part of the names of system files is fixed (e.g. *Z0.INI), and one part
has 1 to 6 characters that you can select. For example, the symbols file
EXA409Z0.INI consists of the fixed part in bold print and the name
EXA409.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-3
Creating and Handling Projects
4.1.1
Project Settings
Before beginning with the actual programming, you select all the parameters required for a project in the displayed tab pages. Select the menu
command File Project Set F4. The dialog box as shown in Figure 4-2
is opened.
File
Project >
Set F4
The dialog box is organized in tabs (Figure 4-2 shows the PLC tab page).
The selected parameters (for example file names) are later entered
automatically in the job or list boxes.
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
10 x 18
E:\STEP5.RUN\PROTOTYP\PROTOTYP.700\[email protected]@PX.INI
4 Documentation
1
PLC
5 Options
Online
Interface:
Parameter:
3 Symbols
2 Blocks
Mode:
PLC type:
6 EPROM
S5 100 U CPU ID
Modifiable: cyclic
CPU 90
AS511
STANDARD
Path name
[
Path file
[NONAMEAP.INI]
–> in system dir
Path option: No
]
< History
< Edit
< Select
< Enter >
Figure 4-2
Operation
4-4
< Cancel ESC > < Project... F6 >
F1 >
F2 >
F3 >
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+ F8 >
Project Settings (Tab 1, PLC)
You can move to the input files either using the cursor keys or using the
TAB key (forwards) and SHIFT+TAB (backwards). For further information,
refer to Section 3.7 or call the online help with the SHIFT + F8 key or the
<Help Shift F8> button.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
PLC Tab
Mode:
PLC type:
Online
S5 100 U CPU ID
Interface:
Parameter:
Modifiable: cyclic
CPU
90
AS511
COM1: STANDARD
Path name
[
Path file
[NONAMEAP.INI]
–> in system dir
Path option: No
]
Mode:
Offline
No connection to the PLC.
Online
Establishment of a permanent connection to the PLC. The user programs
(blocks) can be tested and edited in the PLC via the physical and logical
connection:
If a path name is set, the connection is via the bus path.
If no path name is set, the connection is direct.
The establishment of the connection is checked. If no connection can be
established, the message PLC timeout appears.
If the PG-PLC connection is interrupted, the PG is only operational again
when the monitoring time set has elapsed.
Dynamic
Modifiable
No
Stop
Cyclic
This mode is only possible when there is a connection via a bus path.
The connection is only established when access is required and it is
terminated again as soon as access is complete.
You can select whether and how a program can be modified on the PLC.
With the F3 key, a box is displayed with the possible modification modes
in which you can set the following:
You cannot modify a program on the PLC.
You can only modify a program on the PLC when the PLC is in the stop
mode.
You can modify a program on the PLC during the processing cycle.
PLC type:
If there is a connection to the PLC, the type of PLC is displayed here.
Interface:
If you press F3, various interfaces are displayed from which you can
select one. The AS 511 interface is the default. With these interfaces, you
can select the mode directly. If you select a different interface, a bus path
must be edited before you can select the mode.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-5
Creating and Handling Projects
In conjunction with the activated interface, the following settings are
possible:
Parameter:
Standard: Default for the particular interface
For AS 511: COM 1 to COM 4 and additional special drivers 1 to 7.
With this parameter, you can assign values (wait times, repetition times
etc) for the H1 or L2 interface. The selectable parameters are read for H1
from the [email protected]@@@H1.INI and for L2 from the [email protected]@@@L2.INI file.
For the AS511 interface, the parameters of the files AS511S01.DAT to
AS511S07.DAT were included in the [email protected]@@@AS.INI file.
Name under which an edited path (Section 12.1 Bus Paths) is stored. If
you specify this path name and a path file, the system attempts to
establish or terminate the connection stored under this path when you
change modes.
Path name
Successful establishment of a connection is indicated by the message
Path ACTIVE. If no connection can be established, this is indicated by
the message PLC timeout.
Name of the file in which the path names are stored. This file is stored in
the directory S5_SYS\AP.INI as a template and after modification it is
located in the S5_HOME directory. If you create a new AP.INI this is
always stored in S5_HOME.
Path file
Path option
No Files assigned to a bus path are not entered.
Confirm If files are assigned to a bus path, and if the path is set, the files are only
entered globally in the settings after user confirmation.
Always If files are assigned to a bus path, and if the path is set, the files are entered globally in the settings without user confirmation.
4-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
Blocks Tab
Program file
[NONAMEST.S5D
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
]
RW
X reference list -NONAMEXR.INI
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
Representation:
STL addresses:
LAD
WORD
[ ] with comments
[ ] with checksum
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
You can assign any name to the file, the extension is ST.S5D. All S5
blocks are managed in this file.
Program file
If you select the name of an existing program file and if there is no
current cross-reference list (XRF file), a box appears in which you can
generate a current cross-reference list immediately.
1. If you do not enter a name, the last name entered is used
automatically.
2. If you enter less than 6 characters, the name is padded out with the @
character.
File mode
Selectable file mode:
Read, write possible
RW:
PROT: Reserves exclusive access rights to the file. Access by
other S5 systems is no longer possible.
File mode set by STEP 5:
RESD:
The file is currently being written to. A different S5 system is
accessing the file. Once the access is complete, this entry is
cleared.
RO:
Read only.
X reference list
The name of the file (*XR.INI), which will contain the cross reference list,
is only displayed here and cannot be modified. For information on
creating the XRF file, refer to Section 17.1 Management, Generate XRF
Representation
You can select between one of the three methods of representation, LAD,
CSF, STL.
STL-addresses
When editing in STL, the relative command addresses are displayed as
follows:
In words
In bytes
WORD
Byte
[x with comments
[
[x with checksum
Comments are also displayed.
The line comment, segment comment and segment title are also
displayed.
When you read blocks from the PLC, the checksum is used to check the
transfer
If you press the F2 key or click the <Edit F2> button, you can call the editors directly. The confirmation and updated cross-reference
list and assignment list options are taken from the job box.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-7
Creating and Handling Projects
Symbols Tab
Symbols file
[NONAMEZ0.INI
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
]
RW
Assignment list [NONAMEZ0.SEQ
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
]
RW
Symbol length
Comment length
[8 ]
[24]
[ ] Display symbolic
[ ] Operands symbolic
Symbols file1)
The name of the symbols file (*Z0.INI). If you set this file, then providing
you have set Display symbolic, you work with symbolic operands (in
the editors and in documentation output). This means that symbols and
symbol comments are assigned to the absolute operands. You create this
assignment with the symbols editor.
As soon as you set this file, the setting for the sequential file is made
automatically.
Assignment list1)
The source file (*Z0.SEQ) which contains the assignment list is set as
soon as you have named the symbols file. This is the file that you edit
with the symbols editor. On completion of editing, the symbols file is
generated.
If there is no assignment list, it can be recreated from the symbols file.
Symbol length
You can select this setting between 8 and 24 characters. After making
this setting, you can increase it at any time. You can only reduce the
length to that of the longest actual symbol. Before doing this, delete the
*Z*.INI file.
Comment length
The first time you create the settings, you can select this setting with a
maximum of 40 characters.
You can increase the comment length at any time. You can only reduce the
length to that of the longest actual comment. Before doing this, delete the
symbols file assigned (*Z*.INI).
[x ] Display
symbolic
[]
[x ] Operands
symbolic
[]
The input and output of symbolic operands is possible.
To do this, you must however specify a symbols file. The input and output
of symbolic operands is in absolute format.
Operands are displayed symbolically. If symbols are longer than 8
characters, they are truncated (only in LAD, CSF).
Operands are displayed in absolute form. Symbols are displayed in line 3
in LAD/CSF. In STL they are displayed in absolute and symbolic form.
1) The two files ZO.INI, ZO.SEQ can be selected. As soon as one of these two files is set or selected, the other is updated
(in other words the two files have the same name except for the ending).
If you press the F2 key or click the <Edit F2> button, you can call the editors directly. The confirmation and updated cross-reference
list and assignment list options are taken from the job box.
4-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
Documentation
Tab
Footer file [NONAMEF1.INI
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
Doc command file [NONAMESU.INI
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
Printer file [NONAMEDR.INI]
–> im Systemkatalog
Printer interface: from printer file
Character set: ASCII
]
]
Footer: No
Documentation to
(X) Printer
(X) File
[NONAMELS.INI]
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
Footer file
The name of the footer file. A footer is stored in this file. The footer is
created with the footer editor and automatically printed out at the end of a
page if you select a size for the footer. This footer is output automatically
when you document your work. Depending on the entry you make in the
Footer input field,
F1.INI for an 80 character wide footer or
F2.INI for a 132 character wide footer is entered.
Doc command file
In this file, you can store commands for creating extensive
documentation with KOMDOK. Refer to editing doc commands or editing
the structure (Section 18.4).
Printer file
This file must contain the control characters of your printer for setting the
pitch:
It also includes the following parameters:
Format (A4/A3)
Lines per page
Optional parameters
The file is available as a template in the S5_SYS\AP_INI directory. If you
edit the template, the file is copied to the S5_HOME catalog and the
changes are made there. If you create a new DIR.INI file, this is always
stored in the S5_HOME catalog.
If no file is specified, the parameters of the PT88 apply.
Printer
interface
from printer file:
The printer port is read from the printer parameters (DR.INI).
LPT 1, LPT 2, LPT 3
You can select the printer port, these settings do not affect the printer
parameters (DR.INI).
Character set
Only valid for enhanced output (see Section 18.1). The following can be
selected:
ASCII:
Documentation is only printed with the characters of the ASCII character
set e.g.: !––][––––––––––( )––]!
SEMI GRAPH.:
Documentation is printed with the IBM character set
e.g.: |––][––––––––––( )––|!
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-9
Creating and Handling Projects
Footer
No:
80:
132:
No footer is printed out with the documentation.
A 80 character long footer is printed
A 132 character long footer is printed
Documentation to
[x] Printer
Documentation on printer
[x] File
All printouts are written to the file (*LS.INI) specified here. If this file
already exists, the new data are appended.
[**.INI]
1) The two files ZO.INI, ZO.SEQ can be selected. As soon as one of these two files is set or selected, the other is updated (in other
words the two files have the same name except for the ending).
If you press the F2 key or click the <Edit F2> button, you can call the editors directly. The confirmation and updated cross-reference
list and assignment list options are taken from the job box.
Options Tab
Project directory [NONAMEST.S5D
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
]
on exiting STEP 5/ST:
[X] Confirm always
[X] Save project settings
[X] Note active optional package
[ ] Warnings if incompatible with V 6.x
Project directory
By specifying this DOS path you set the paths for all files in the project
settings to the same path (except for *AP.INI and *DR.INI). If the
individual paths of the files are different, no path is displayed in this box.
[X]Confirm always
You are prompted for confirmation whenever you exit STEP 5.
[X]Save
settings
project If you activate this setting, modified project settings are automatically
saved in the selected project file when you exit STEP 5. If no project
settings were modified, the settings are not saved.
[ ] Note active
optional package
If you activate this setting, any optional package (GRAPH 5, COM 155H,
COM 95F) active when you exit STEP 5 is started automatically when
you restart STEP 5.
[ ]Warnings if
incompatible with
V 6.x
If you select this setting, the program automatically checks whether DOS
paths you have selected are within the restrictions imposed by STEP 5
Version 6.x. These are as follows:
–
Drives A: to J: for the program file
–
Drives A: to P: for other files
–
For each drive a maximum of one directory can be used.
If these criteria are not met, STEP 5 displays a warning. With this setting
you can make sure that the files you have currently set are compatible
with project settings for Version 6.x.
4-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
EPROM Tab
Prommer type: internal
SYSID file
[NONAMESD.INI
–> C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
]
Storage mode: WORD
Prommer type
no
internal
external LPTn
Select by double-clicking or with the F3 key.
No prommer being used
The internal prommer is used
An external prommer is used via the parallel port.
SYSID file
Contains the system identification, selected in a file list box, by
double-clicking or with the F3 key.
With the SYSID OUT function, the SYSID blocks found in the submodule
are automatically stored in the SYSID file. With the SYSIDINP function,
the block in the SYSID file is written to the submodule starting at address
0.
Storage mode
This setting decides how the data (programs and data blocks) are stored
on the EPROM. You can select the type of storage by double-clicking or
with the F3 key.
WORD
WORD/BLOCK
BYTE
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Write/read word-oriented, for example S5-135 and S5-150 (all types)
Write/read byte-oriented, for example for S5-155U (all types)
Mandatory for the CPU 946/947 (memory module 355). For the S5-155H,
the first character of the user data of a block is at the paragraph boundary
(16th byte).
4-11
Creating and Handling Projects
4.1.2
Load Project
File
Project >
Load ...F10
With this function, you load the settings you selected under File Project
Set and saved in a *PX.INI file (see Section 4.1.1). All the currently valid
settings are overwritten when you use the load function. As soon as you
load new settings, only those in the current PX.INI file are valid. You can,
however, change these as required. The preset parameters (e.g. file names) are automatically entered in the job and selection boxes in which they
are required.
Select the menu command File Project Load...F10 The Load project
settings job box is displayed. Here, you can select a *PX.INI file. After
selecting Load, all the settings are loaded from the *PX.INI file.
4.1.3
Save Project
File
Project >
Save
With this function, you save the current settings you have made under File
Project Set (see Section 4.1.1). The settings are saved in the currently selected *PX.INI file.
With File Project Save a message box is displayed in which you
decide whether or not to save the settings.
4.1.4
Save Project As
File
Project >
Save As ...
With this function, you save the current settings you made under File Project Settings (see Section 4.1.1). The settings are saved in a *PX.INI file that you select.
With File Project Save As the Save project settings job box is
displayed. Here, you can select a *PX.INI file or create a new one.
4-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.2
Managing Blocks
File
Blocks >
With the functions of this submenu, you can manage blocks and documentation files belonging to the working directory.
With these functions, you can do the following:
output a directory (DIR)
transfer blocks and documentation files
compare blocks
delete blocks and documentation files
check and compress blocks in the program file
4.2.1
Block Directory
Overview
The following directories can be output:
From the current program file:
of all blocks
of all documentation files
of all blocks entered in the block list
of all blocks of one block type
From the programmable controller, the block address list
of all blocks entered in the block list
of all blocks
of all blocks of one block type depending on the PLC type
Note
When you display blocks on the screen, you obtain a further job box in
which you can branch directly to the editor by selecting one of the
displayed blocks (see screen display).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-13
Creating and Handling Projects
If you select the menu command File Blocks Directory...F3, the Blocks
- Directory: Settings job box is displayed. Here you can navigate through the
job box and select blocks (see Section 3.9). Once you have set a block and
clicked the < Output > button, the directories of selected blocks are output on
the required output device.
File
Blocks >
Directory...F3
If you select screen display, you can also branch to the editor with the F2 key.
Input
Explanation
Directory of
This field displays the currently selected program file.
You can edit this name or replace it with an existing file name from the file
list box using the F3 key.
(x)Program file
Displays the PLC on which the block is stored. The PLC is selected in the
project settings (see Section 4.1.1) and this is only possible in the online
mode.
(x)PLC
Selection
Here you select the blocks. You can specify blocks in absolute or
symbolic form (or as a mixture of both). If you want to edit an existing
block or want to display the currently permitted block types, press the F3
key or click the < Select F3 > button. STEP 5 displays a list of the
currently possible inputs if you press the F7 key or click the < Info F7>
button.
Block list
[
]
Output to
(x) Screen
The directories are displayed on the screen.
(x) Printer
The directories are logged on the printer.
(x) File [
]
Options
Printout type:
[x]mixed with
preheaders
The directories are written to a selectable file. A file list box is displayed
when you press the F3 key or double-click the input box.
You can select the type of printout by double-clicking the input box or by
pressing the F3 key.
If you select this option, the preheaders of the blocks are also output.
[x]FBs with name
If you select this option, FBs and their names are printed out.
< Output >
The PG transfers the selected blocks. If errors occur, various alternatives
are displayed in list boxes in which you can make your selections.
4-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
Examples of Input
Block list [
] you specify blocks either in absolute or
symbolic form, or a mixture of both.
Single Block
Single block, in absolute or symbolic form.
Block List
[PB100
[DX 14
[OB 10
]
]
]
[FCX 231
[–Plant1
]
]
List with a maximum of six single blocks. The blocks are separated by commas.
If the comma follows a symbolic name, the comma must be preceded immediately by “\” to delineate the symbol.
[PB100 , PB123
[–Plant1\, –Plant2
[–Plant1\, FB45, –Plant2\,–Control
Block Range
A range indicated by two single blocks. The blocks are separated by a hyphen.
If the hyphen follows a symbolic name, the hyphen must be preceded immediately by a “\” to delineate the symbol. Both blocks of the block range must be
the same type, the first block number must be lower than the second block number.
[PB100 – PB123
[ –Plant1\– –Plant2
[–Plant1\– FB45
Block Type
]all
]all
]all
]all
]all
program blocks
blocks (but not the DOK block)
OB comments
data blocks
DOC blocks
Block preceded by the # character
[#MOT_P
[#DBDO.003
[OC#OBDO.024
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
]
]
]
You can specify one or all block types
[PB
[A
[OC
[DB
[#
DOC Block
]
]
]
]
]
]
4-15
Creating and Handling Projects
Output to Screen
The blocks are displayed on the screen in a separate job box:
Block-directory-program file: output
To edit or modify the list, follow the steps below:
1. Select a block from the list.
2. Press the F2 key or click the < Edit F2 > button. STEP 5 then opens this
block in the appropriate editor window (fast jump to the editor).
STEP 5 Window Mode – S5PXSOBZ
Blocks – directory – program file: output
Program file:
Block
FB
FV
OB
OB
OB
OB
DB
DV
10
10
1
20
21
22
10
10
C:PROEXAST.S5D
Len.
174
10
8
11
11
11
17
28
LIB number
2
1
Total blocks / MC5 blocks:
< Exit >
Figure 4-3
FB name
CAR-WASH
4065 / 232
< Cancel ESC >
words
< Edit
< Info
< Help
>
F2 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8
Blocks-Directory-Program file: Output
1) The two files ZO.INI, ZO.SEQ can be selected. As soon as one of these two files is set or selected, the other is updated (in other
words the two files have the same name except for the ending).
If you press the F2 key or click the <Edit F2> button, you can call the editors directly. The confirmation and updated cross-reference
list and assignment list options are taken from the job box.
4-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.2.2
Copy (Transfer) Blocks
Overview
With the Transfer function, you can copy blocks from the programming
device to the PLC and vice-versa, as follows:
a range of blocks of one block type
all blocks of one block type
a group of blocks with block list
all blocks of a program file
one or all documentation blocks
the entire program file
from the selected program file to a selectable drive and selectable
program file (file - file). Both files can be selected.
from a selectable drive with a selectable program file to the
programmable controller (file - PLC)
from the programmable controller to a selectable drive with a selectable
program file (PLC - file).
Note
The preheaders of these blocks contain format information and jump label
information which can only be evaluated by the PG. For this reason, they
are not transferred to the PLC.
When a block that is assigned a preheader in the PG (FB/FV, FX/FVX,
DB/DV, DX/DVX) is transferred, the block preheader can be deleted
following a user prompt. Since the PG makes you aware of this with the
message
Overwrite preheader on FD?
no data can be accidentally lost.
By modifying a data block (DB and DX) during editing online in the PLC
and transferring it back to the program file in the PG, the correlation
between the DB (DX) and DV (DVX) may no longer exist and it is therefore
often advisable to overwrite the data block preheader. The data in this data
block is then displayed in the format that was previously set.
In function blocks (FB and FX) the names (e.g. LEVEL) of the jump
labels can be lost when they are transferred back. These are then replaced
by STEP 5 with substitute names, e.g. M002.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-17
Creating and Handling Projects
File
Blocks >
Transfer ...F5
Select the menu command File Blocks Transfer..F5. The Transfer
blocks(s) dialog box is displayed. Here, you can navigate to directories and
select single blocks (User interface see Section 3.9)
Note
The transfer of blocks depends on the particular PLC being used. This
means that not all blocks that are displayed can actually be transferred.
Only blocks up to a maximum of 4 Kwords (8 Kbytes) can be transferred.
The blocks are transferred to the PLC in the following sequence: SB, PB,
FB, FX, OB, DB and DX.
Inputs
Explanation
Transfer from
(x)Program file
The preset program file is displayed in this field. You can edit this name or
replace it with an existing file name from the file list box using the F3 key.
Specifies the PLC on which the block is stored. This entry is made in the
project settings and is only possible in the online mode (see Section
4.1.1).
(x)PLC
to
(x)Program file
The program file name is displayed in this field. You can edit this name or
replace it with an existing file name from the file list box using the F3 key.
Selection
After selecting this parameter, you can enter your block selection in absolute or symbolic form (or a mixture of both) in the following input field. You
can display currently permitted block types with the F3 key. You can display information about the entries in the block list field with the F7 key.
Input examples are given in Section 4.2.1.
(x)Block list
[
]
Block
[
] to [
]
If you want to copy a single block and store it under a different name,
mark the line and enter the source block in the Block field (for example
PB7) and the new block name (for example PB22) in the to [ ] field.
When you copy blocks you must not change the block type. You can obtain more information with the F7 key.
(x)Entire file
With this option, you can select the whole program file (including docfiles).
Option
[x]Confirm
before overwriting
Modifications are only entered when you save after you confirm a system
prompt.
<Transfer>
The PG transfers the selected blocks. If errors occur during the transfer,
you will see alternatives displayed in the selection boxes and you can
select the best course of action in the situation.
When transferring to the PLC, remember that you can only transfer block types that can be selected in the job box. If you
select an illegal block type, the transfer request will be denied.
4-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.2.3
Compare Blocks
Function
With this function, you can compare a block, a group of single blocks or all
blocks of the first named program file with those of the second named
program file.
The comparison operation is between the program file preset on the PG
and any other program file or the blocks on the PLC. It is also possible to
compare the program in the PLC with a selectable program file.
Note
Data blocks you want to compare must not be larger than 2 Kwords.
Select the menu command File Blocks Compare..F6 or press the F6 key.
The Compare block(s) dialog box is displayed. Here, you can browse through
the box and make your selection (see Section 3.9).
File
Blocks >
Compare ...F6
Inputs
Explanation
Compare
(x)Program file
The preset program file is displayed in this field.
(x)PLC
Specifies the PLC on which the block is or will be stored. This entry is
made in the project settings (Section 4.1.1) and is only possible in the
online mode.
with
(x)Program file
The program file name is displayed in this field. You can edit this name or
replace it with an existing file name from the file list box using the F3 key.
(x)PLC
Specifies the PLC on which the block will be stored. This entry is made in
the project settings (Section 4.1.1) and is only possible in the online
mode.
Selection
After selecting this parameter, you can enter your block selection in absolute or symbolic form (or a mixture of both) in the following input field. You
can display currently permitted block types with the F3 key. You can display information about the entries in the block list field with the F7 key.
(x)Block list
[
]
Here you specify single blocks that you want to compare.
Block
[
] with [
]
Output to
(x) Screen
(x) Printer
(x) File
Output is displayed on the screen.
Output is printed on the selected printer.
Output is made to the selected file.
<Compare>
The PG compares the selected blocks.
When you compare blocks on the PLC, remember that only block types are permitted that can be selected in the job box.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-19
Creating and Handling Projects
4.2.4
Delete Blocks
Function
With this function you can delete the following:
single blocks
a range of blocks of one block type
all blocks of one block type
all blocks
one or more documentation files (only on the PG)
the whole program file (only on the PG)
PLC: overall reset (only in the STOP mode)
File
Blocks >
Delete ...
Select the menu command File Blocks Delete......The job box Delete
block(s) is displayed. Here, you can browse through the box and make
your selection (see Section 3.9).
Inputs
Explanation
Delete
The preset program file is displayed in this field. You can edit this name or
replace it with an existing file name from the file list box using F3.
(x)Program file
(x)PLC
Selection
(x)Block list
[
]
Specifies the PLC on which the block will be deleted. This entry is made
in the project settings (Section 4.1.1) and is only possible in the online
mode.
After selecting this parameter, you can enter your block selection in absolute or symbolic form (or a mixture of both) in the following input field. You
can display currently permitted block types with the F3 key. You can display information about the entries in the block list field with the F7 key.
(x)Entire file
By marking the field with an X you can select and delete the whole
program file (including docfiles).
(x)Delete entire
PLC
All blocks on the PLC are deleted (only in the STOP mode). The PLC sets
defined start statuses in its memory (RAM). For more information, refer to
the programming instructions for the particular PLC..
Option [x]
Confirm before
deleting
The delete function is only started after you confirm a prompt.
<Delete>
The function is executed.
4-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.2.5
Compress Blocks
File
Blocks >
Compress
Select the menu command File Blocks Compress. This function
eliminates gaps in the program file that result from deleting or reloading
blocks. The STEP 5 blocks in the program file are checked and compressed.
If any error occurs, this is displayed.
During the checking process you can establish whether the structure of the
program file is really correct, or whether it has been damaged by a power cut
or a system crash during saving.
Files which are 0 Bytes long are also registered as faulty.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-21
Creating and Handling Projects
4.3
DOS File
File
DOS File >
With the functions in this submenu, you can manage files without returning
to the operating system level. The following functions are available:
Display single files or groups of files from the currently selected
directory on the screen.
Copy single files or groups of files (source file name # destination file
name).
Delete single files or file groups in the currently selected directory.
Using the
Functions
You select the files from a file list box assigned to each menu command.
The structure and use of the list box is the same as for all functions and is
described in Section 3.8.
Significance of the wildcards
? A question mark can stand for any character within a file name.
*
An asterisk can only be the last or the only character in a file name or
file extension. The operating system replaces the asterisk by one or
more question marks up to the end of the file name or file extension.
STEP 5 Window Mode – S5PXSOBZ
DOS - file(s) - directory
File [????????.???]
–> C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN
Files
Length
MOTOR1PX.INI
973
NONAMEPX.INI
971
NONAMEST.S5D
640
NONAMEXR.INI
128
NONAMEZ0.SEQ
0
TONAMEZ0.INI
2.048
TONAMEZ0.SEQ
128
TONAMEZ1.INI
2.048
TONAMEZ2.INI
2.048
TONAMEZF.SEQ
256
(????????.???)
sorted: up
Date
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
23.07.97
Time
16:53:20
16:52:38
16:22:16
16:22:16
16:29:28
16:30:16
16:29:56
16:59:56
16:29:56
16:29:56
by: Name
*
Dr/Directory
..
[–A–]
[–C–]
[–D–]
[–E–]
[–H–]
[–I–]
[–J–]
[–K–]
[–L–]
sorted: up
< Select
< Update >
Figure 4-4
4-22
< Cancel ESC >
*
< Info
< Help
F3 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8 >
File List box for DOS Files
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.3.1
Display a Directory
Function
This function displays a list with the directory or directories of one or more
files.
File
DOS File >
Directory ...
Select the menu command File DOS File Directory or press Ctrl + F7.
The DOS files directory job box is displayed. Here, you can browse
through the box and make your selection. Depending on the entries you
make, a list of files is displayed.
Inputs
Explanation
The file name marked by the cursor in the list of field names is displayed here.
File
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can enter the name here.
Wildcards are allowed, for example ??????.INI. Files matching the search key are
displayed in the Files field after you click the <Update> button or press the Insert
key.
Here, you can select a drive and a directory on this drive. Once you have made
the selection, the content of the directory appears in the display field.
Dr/
directory
STEP 5 Window Mode – S5PXSOBZ
DOS file(s) directory
File [PROEXAST.S5D]
–> C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE
Files
ACC20NET.ADD
AUTOEX.MIG
KONFIG.MIG
EXC50NET.ADD
M95–010.ADD
MERLIN95.SWP
MOREIW95.ADD
PT4ONET.ADD
<<*
sorted: up
Length
400
1.763
1.956
400
26
50
36
400
Date
29.09.95
29.07.97
29.09.95
29.09.96
29.09.96
10.06.97
29.09.95
29.09.95
Time
11:11:44
10:11:42
11:14:34
11:19:25
15:56:39
13:11:44
18:11:44
12:10:29
Dr/directory
..
[–A–]
[–C–]
[–D–]
[–E–]
[–H–]
[–I–]
[–J–]
>>
by: Name
sorted: up
< Select
< Update >
Figure 4-5
*
< Cancel ESC >
< Info
< Help
F3 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8 >
DOS Files Directory
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-23
Creating and Handling Projects
4.3.2
Copy DOS Files
Function
This function copies one or more files between different drives or
directories.
With the copying function, you can either
retain the file name or
use a different file name (only with single files).
Select the menu command File DOS File Copy or press Ctrl + F8. The
function copies one or more files between different drives or directories.
File
DOS File >
Copy ...
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Source file [ ]
Name of the file you want to transfer.
Dest file
Name of the file transferred
[ ]
For information about using the function press the F7 key or click
< Info F7>.
Source dr/dir
Here, you select a source drive and directory. This is displayed in the
Source drive field.
Source files
Displays the files that exist on the source drive. You can only select with
the cursor/ mouse click. All the files are only displayed if question marks
(or *.*) are entered in the Source file field.
<Copy>
The function is executed.
Procedure
Follow the steps below:
1. Select the drive and directory in the Source dr/dir field from which you
want to transfer (copy) one or more files.
2. You can either transfer single files or all the files listed in the Source
files field.
Single files: Either type the name of the file in the Source field (no
wildcards permitted) or select the file in the Source files field by clicking
with the mouse and click single in the Copy mode field.
Several files: If you specify ??????.??? or *.*, all the files are
displayed and transferred. If, for example, you only want to transfer
STEP 5 program files, type in *ST.S5D as the search key.
3. If you want to save the destination files under a different name, type in
the new name or a group name.
If, for example you specified *.DOC as the search key for the text files
to be transferred, you could for example specify file type *.TXT in the
destination field.
4. Click <Copy> to start the copy function.
4-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
STEP 5 Window Mode – S5PXSOBZ
Copy DOS file(s)
Source file [PROEXAST.S5D]
–> C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE
Dest file [????????.???]
–> C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN
Source files(????????.???)
ENSAYOF1.INI ENSAYOZ1.INI EXINSTXR.INI
ENSAYOF2.INI ENSAYOZ2.INI EXINSTZ0.INI
ENSAYOPJ.INI ENSAYOZF.SEQ EXINSTZ0.SEQ
ENSAYOPX.INI EXINSTF1.INI EXINSTZ1.INI
ENSAYOST.S5D EXINSTF2.INI EXINSTZ2.INI
ENSAYOXR.INI EXINSTPJ.INI EXINSTZF.SEQ
ENSAYOZ0.INI EXINSTPX.INI PROEXAF1.INI
ENSAYOZ0.SEQ EXINSTST.S5D PROEXAF2.INI
<<*
sorted: up
by: Name
ENSAYOF1.INI
640 21.07.97 07:00:00
Option
[X] Confirm before overwriting
< Copy >
Figure 4-6
4.3.3
< Cancel ESC >
PROEXAPJ.INI
PROEXAPX.INI
PROEXAST.S5D
PROEXAXR.INI
PROEXAZ0.INI
PROEXAZ0.SEQ
PROEXAZ1.INI
PROEXAZ2.INI
>>
Source dr/dir
..
[–A–]
[–C–]
[–D–]
[–E–]
[–H–]
[–I–]
[–J–]
*
sorted: up
< Select
< Info
< Help
F3 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8 >
Copy DOS File(s)
Delete DOS File
Function
File
DOS File >
Delete ...
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
This function deletes files (one or all) in a selected directory.
Select the menu command File DOS File Delete
The Delete DOS file(s) job box is displayed. You can browse through this
box and make your selection (see Section 3.6).
4-25
Creating and Handling Projects
4.4
PCP/M File
The following functions are available:
File
Output directory of PCP/M files from selectable USER areas
PCP/M File >
Conversion of PCP/M files to S5-DOS ST/MT files. They can then be
run and edited under the S5-DOS operating system .
Conversion of STEP 5 files created with S5-DOS/ST or S5-DOS/MT to
PCP/M files. You can then run these converted files and edit them
under the PCP/M operating system.
Here, you have functions available to process PCP/M media. PCP/M
media are disks formatted under PCP/M.
Delete PCP/M files
Using the Function
You select the file(s) in a file list box assigned to each menu command.
The structure and how to work with this list box is essentially the same for
all functions and is described in Section 3.8.
STEP 5 Window Mode – S5PXSOBZ
PCP/M file(s) directory
File [S5WX002H.CMD]
Drive:
A
User:
Filees
Byte
S5OXS0HX.CMD
16.384
S5OXS0IX.CMD
26.624
S5PES01X.DAT
55.296
S5PES03X.DAT
36.864
S5PES04X.DAT
26.624
S5PES05X.DAT
22.528
S5PES08X.DAT
38.912
S5WX000H.CMD
22.400
S5WX001H.CMD
32.256
S5WX002H.CMD
35.968
(????????.???)
sorted: up
128
208
432
288
208
176
304
175
252
281
0
Recs
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
Dir
by: Name
Attrib.
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
RW
Drive
A
*
User
*
0
1
2
3
4
5
*
sorted: up
< Select
< Update
Figure 4-7
4-26
>
< Cancel ESC >
< Info
< Help
F3 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8 >
File List Box for PCP/M Files
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.4.1
Display Directory
Overview
File
PCP/M File >
Directory ...
You can display a file list of a selectable USER area from a PCP/M disk.
Select the menu command File PCP/M File Directory... The PCP/M
file(s) directory job box is displayed. Here you can browse and make your
selections (see Section 3.8). Depending on your input, a directory known
from PCP/M is displayed in a window:
Files
Bytes
Recs
Attrib.
File List Box
STEP5 files (e.g. *F1.INI)
Number of bytes in the file
Number of records
File access mode
You can make the following entries:
User
The file name marked by the cursor in the directory is displayed here.
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can enter the
name here. Wildcards are allowed, for example ??????.INI. Files
matching the search key are displayed in the Files field.
Drive containing the files. This field is only for information and no inputs
can be made in it.
USER area in which the source is located. This field is only for
information and no inputs can be made in it.
Display of the files in the USER area on the selected drive. No input can
be made here.
All the existing PCP/M drives are displayed. You can select one from this
list.
List of all USER areas. You can select one of the user areas in this list.
<Update>
The function is executed
File
Drive
User
Files
Drive
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-27
Creating and Handling Projects
4.4.2
Copy PCP/M Files to DOS File
Overview
File
PCP/M Files >
Copy
PCP/M -> DOS
File List Box
Source file
Source dr
Source user
Source files
With this function, you can convert PCP/M files to S5-DOS files:
Select the menu command
File PCP/M File
Copy PCP/M → DOS...
The Copy PCP/M file(s) to DOS file(s) job box is displayed. You can
browse through this box and make your selection (see Section 3.8).
Depending on our entries, a list of PCP/M files is displayed.
Explanation of the file list box:
Name of the file to be transferred.
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can enter the
name here or enter a search mask with wildcards (? or *).
Search mask: for example ???A*.* ??AB??.I??
If you use a search mask, the files in the Source files field are updated.
Then only the files whose names match the mask are displayed.
Here you select the drive from which the file will be transferred. This is
then displayed in the Drive field. You can select a drive by double–clicking
or with the F3 key.
Here you select the user area of the source. This is displayed in the User
field. You can select a user area by double–clicking or with the F3 key.
Display of the files existing on the source drive You can select files with
the cursor or mouse click. All files are only displayed when question
marks (or *.*) are entered in the Source file field.
Drive: –––
Drive from which the file will be transferred. This field is only for
information, no input possible.
User: –––
USER area containing the source. This field is only for information, no
input possible.
Dest file
Name of the destination file.
You specify one destination file by entering a file name without wild cards,
for example ABCDEFGH.123. You can only specify the destination file in
this way if the source file was specified as a single file without wild cards.
You can specify more than one destination file by entering only wild
cards (question mark or asterisk) in the file name for example
????????.??? or *.*. You can enter the destination file in this form when
a single file or more than one file (with wild cards) was used as the source
file.
[X] Confirm
before
overwriting
If you select this option, files are only overwritten after you have
confirmed a system prompt.
<Copy>
The function is executed.
4-28
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.4.3
Copy DOS File to PCP/M File
Overview
File
PCP/M File >
Copy
DOS -> PCP/M
File List Box
Source file
Source dr/dir
Source files
Dest file
With this function, you can convert S5-DOS files to PCP/M files:
Select the menu command
File PCP/M file
Copy DOS → PCP/M...
The Copy DOS files to PCP/M job box is displayed. You can browse
through this box and make your selection (see Section 3.8). Depending on
our entries, a list of PCP/M files is displayed.
Explanation of the file list box:
Name of the file to be transferred.
If you want to find a particular file or group of files, you can enter the
name here or enter a search mask with wildcards (? or *).
Search mask: for example ???A*.* ??AB??.I??
If you use a search mask, the files in the Source files field are updated.
Then only the files whose names match the mask are displayed.
Here you select the drive from which the file will be transferred. This is
then displayed in the Drive field. You can select a drive and directory by
double-clicking.
Display of the files existing on the source drive You can select files with
the cursor or mouse click. All files are only displayed when question
marks (or *.*) are entered in the Source file field.
Name of the destination file.
You specify one destination file by entering a file name without wild cards,
for example ABCDEFGH.123. You can only specify the destination file in
this way if the source file was specified as a single file without wild cards.
You can specify more than one destination file by entering only wild
cards (question mark or asterisk) in the file name for example
????????.??? or *.*. You can enter the destination file in this form when
a single file or more than one file (with wild cards) was used as the source
file.
Drive: –––
Drive to which the file will be transferred.
User: –––
USER area containing the destination.
[X] Confirm
before
overwriting
If you select this option, files are only overwritten after you have
confirmed a system prompt.
<Copy>
The function is executed.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-29
Creating and Handling Projects
4.4.4
Delete PCP/M file
Overview
PCP/M files are deleted on a PCP/M medium. You can delete a single file
or all files in a USER area.
Select the menu command
File
PCP/M File >
Delete ...
File PCP/M file
Delete...
The Delete PCP/M file(s) job box is displayed. You can browse through this
box and make your selection (see Section 3.8). The significance of the
input fields is the same as described in Section 4.4.2.
Note
All files in a USER area are only displayed when question marks are
entered in the File field.
4.5
DOS Commands CTRL + F10
MS-DOS Prompt
Select the menu command File DOS Commands or press CTRL+F10.
The MS-DOS system prompt is then displayed. You can now enter
MS-DOS commands.
S5SHELL.BAT
The current command processor (usually COMMAND.COM) is loaded.
In STEP 5/ST you can open a DOS environment without exiting the
package. You return to the STEP 5/ST package by typing in the command
”EXIT”.
If a file with the name S5SHELL.BAT is created in the home directory, this
is executed when you call the DOS commands function. This, for example,
allows File Managers such as the DOSSHELL (of MS–DOS 5.0) to be
started.
The DOS commands should only be used when you want to perform
functions with operating system tools.
Caution: Make sure that no resident programs such as DOSKEY, KEYB
etc. are loaded. Also make sure that no functions that make drive
assignments such as SUBST or ASSIGN are active. This also applies to
logging on in a network.
Exiting DOS
4-30
Type in the command EXIT to return to the STEP 5 user interface.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Creating and Handling Projects
4.6
Exit SHIFT+F4
Function
With the menu command File Exit or SHIFT + F4 you terminate STEP 5.
If you selected Confirm always in the project settings, you are prompted to
confirm that you want to exit the program so that you cannot terminate it
accidentally.
Answer with Exit if you really want to exit STEP 5.
Answer with Cancel if you want to return to the user interface.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
4-31
Creating and Handling Projects
4-32
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 2:
Editing with STEP 5
Editing STEP 5 Blocks... F1
Common Functions
5
Editing STEP 5 Blocks... F1
STL
6
Editing STEP 5 Blocks... F1
LAD
7
Editing STEP 5 Blocks... F1
CSF
8
Editing Data Blocks... F2
9
Editing DB Screens (DB1, DX0)
Ctrl+F1
10
Assignment List
F7
11
Bus Paths
F8
12
Printer Parameters Ctrl+F4
13
Footer Editor
14
Ctrl+F5
4-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Overview
This section describes all the functions that you can use in the three types
of representation when editing.
Editor
Test
STEP 5 Block
Data Block
DB-Screen...
PLC
Management
...
...
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Docu
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
Chapter
Overview
5
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Page
5.1
Selecting an Editor
5-2
5.2
Assignment of the Function Keys in the Output Mode
5-6
5.3
Editing Comments
5-8
5.4
Appending, Inserting, Transferring, Deleting a Segment
5-17
5.5
Creating, Displaying Cross References, Block Change
5-22
5.6
Searching for Operands, Segments and Addresses
5-26
5.7
Editing Symbolic Operands in the Block
5-27
5-1
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.1
Selecting an Editor
Overview
To edit
STEP 5 blocks in the methods of representation LAD, CSF or STL
comment blocks
documentation blocks and
plant comments
you must select an editor . The method of representation depends on the
project setting (see File Project Set F4, Section 4.1.1) but this can be
changed when editing in the output mode using a function key.
Select the menu command Editor STEP 5 Block. The dialog box as
shown in Figure 5-1 is displayed.
Editor
STEP5 Block
STEP5 - S5KXS01Z
Edit STEP 5 blocks(s)
Source
(X)
Program file
(X)
PLC
Selection
Block list
Search key
NONAMEST.S5D
–> C:\STEP5\S5_ST
[
[
]
]
Options
[X] Confirm before overwriting
[X] Update assignment list
[X] Update XRF
< Edit >
Figure 5-1
< Cancel ESC >
< History
F1 >
< Select
F3 >
< Info
F7 >
< Help Shift+F8 >
Edit STEP 5 Block(s) Dialog Box
Select your source and the options you require. The meaning of the fields
is as follows:
5-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Source
[x] Program file
Specifies where the file is stored or will be stored. This entry is made in the
project settings (see Section 4.1.1)
[x] PLC
Specifies the PLC on which the block is stored or will be stored. This entry
is made in the project settings and is only possible in the online mode (see
Section 4.1.1)
Selection
Block list
Block list [
]
In this input field, you can make the following entries depending on the dialog
box:
Single block
Block list
Block range
Block type
DOC block
If you press the F7 key or click the < Info F7> button, STEP 5 displays a list
of the currently possible selections.
If you want to edit an existing block or display the currently permitted block
types, press the F3 key or select the < Select F3 > button.
You can specify the block in absolute or symbolic form, a mixture is also
possible.
Single block
Block list
Single block, specified in absolute or symbolic form.
[PB100
[DX 14
[OB 10
]
]
]
[FCX 231
[–Plant1
]
]
A list with a maximum of six single blocks. The blocks are separated by commas.
If the comma follows a symbolic name, the comma must be preceded
immediately by “\” to delineate the symbol.
[PB100 , PB123
[–Plant1\, –Plant2
[–Plant1\, FB45, –Plant2\,–Control
Block range
A block range indicated by two blocks. The blocks are separated by a dash.
If the dash follows a symbolic name, the dash must be preceded immediately
by “\” to delineate the symbol. Both blocks must be of the same type and the
first block number must be lower than the second.
[PB100 – PB123
[ –Plant1\– –Plant2
[–Plant1\– FB45
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
]
]
]
]
]
]
5-3
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Block type
All blocks of one type.
[PB
[A
[OC
[DB
[#
DOC block
]all
]all
]all
]all
]all
program blocks
blocks
OB comments
data blocks
DOC blocks
A block preceded by the # character
[#MOT_P
[#DBDO.003
[OC#OBDO.024
Selection
Search key
]
]
]
Search key [
]
If you want to search for a term in one or more blocks, enter the block or
blocks (maximum 6) in the block list in absolute or symbolic form.
Then enter an operand as the search key in absolute or symbolic form.
Press the F7 key or click <Info F7> to display the permitted search keys.
The key is searched for in all the specified blocks.
Note
You can specify comment blocks, documentation blocks and
documentation files but they will be rejected since it is not possible to
search in these blocks.
Exit the field with the Return key or select a different field with the mouse.
The key is searched for in all the specified blocks.
When a term is found, the segment is displayed in the output mode. If the
first block entered does not exist, then after entering the parameters and
options, the first segment (empty) of this block is displayed in the edit
mode. After you exit the block, the program continues to search through
the specified blocks. If a non-existent block is specified after the first block,
the missing block is skipped.
You can continue the search for the key as follows:
in the following segments with F3 = Search,
in the next blocks with the Enter key confirmed by the Return key.
Note
If you select an editor with search and modify the block, the modified block
must first be saved before you can continue searching.
1. Press F7 = Enter in the Edit mode and confirm the message Enter
modified segment? with Yes. The editor changes to the output mode.
2. Now press F7 = Enter and confirm the message Enter modified block?
with Yes. If you confirm the message Continue with Yes the search is
continued, if you reply No you return to the main menu.
5-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Options
[x] Confirm before overwriting (yes)
When you store changes, you are first prompted to confirm the changes
within the individual blocks:
program block, comment block, documentation block, documentation file
[x] Confirm before overwriting (no)
Modified blocks are overwritten as soon as you enter the changes. In
program blocks OB, PB, SB, FB/FX you are always prompted to confirm
the changes.
[x] Update assignment list (yes)
If you want to edit symbolic operands, i.e. change the symbols file *Z0.INI,
the sequential source file *Z0.SEQ is updated when you save your input.
[x] Update assignment list (no)
The assignment list is not updated. You can, however, update or create the
assignment list file later using the function → INI > SEQ
[x] Update XRF (yes)
The cross reference list (file *XR.INI) is updated when a block is modified.
[x] Update XREF (no)
The cross reference list is not updated. You can, however, update or create
the cross reference list later using the function Management Make XRF
(see Section 17.1)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-5
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.2
Assignment of the Function Keys in the Output Mode
Overview
The following description of the keys provides you with an overview of the
tools and functions available to support editing regardless of the type of
representation.
F Addresses
F Lib No
F Symb. SYM
F
F
1 Disp Symb
2 Reference
3 Search
4
5 Seg Fct
Table 5-1
–> LAD
F
Seg Com
6 Edit
F
7
Save
Enter
F
Help
8 Cancel
Function Keys in the Output Mode
Function Key
Explanation
F1
Edit symbolic operands directly in the block.
= Disp Symb
F2
Create, display references (cross references), change block.
= Reference
F3
Search for single operands.
= Search
F4
–
F5
Page, copy, mark, insert, append and delete segments.
= Seg Fct
F6
Change to the edit mode, also possible with the CORR key.
= Edit
F7
Save the block if it has been changed, or return to the main menu.
= Enter
F8
Return to the main menu. Any changes to a block are discarded.
= Cancel
SHIFT F1
= Addresses
SHIFT F2
Display relative operation addresses in bytes or words; only in STL
(→ Editing Statement Lists, Displaying Addresses)
Input library number
= Lib No
SHIFT F3
Switch symbols on and off.
= Symb. SYM/ABS/OFF
SHIFT F4
Switch line and symbol comments on and off.
= No Com/Line
Com/Symb com
SHIFT F5
= → LAD
SHIFT F6
Switch over to the indicated method of representation, LAD, CSF or
STL.
Edit the segment title or segment comments.
= Seg Com
SHIFT F7
Save block without confirmation. You do not exit the editor.
= Save
SHIFT F8
Explains the function keys.
= Help
5-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.2.1
Inputting the Library Number (SHIFT F2)
Overview
The library number is a 5-digit number (0 to 99999) to identify blocks.
Ready to Start?
The block in which you want to enter the library number is open. STEP 5 is
in the output mode.
How to Input the
Library Number
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib No
the cursor is located in the displayed LIB field.
2. Type in the required LIB number or modify the existing LIB no.
3. To exit the LIB field: press the Return key.
If you enter 5 numbers the cursor automatically leaves the library number
field. If you do not want to enter a number, exit the field with the ESC key.
5.2.2
Method of Representation (SHIFT F5 = -> LAD)
Overview
With this function you can switch over the method of representation without
having to call up the project settings (see Section 4.1.1).
Ready to Start?
STEP 5 is in the output mode. The displayed segment must be capable of
translation into the required method of representation.
How to Change the
Representation
Press SHIFT F5 = → LAD or click it with the mouse.
The segment now appears on the screen as a Ladder Diagram. If the
segment cannot be represented in LAD or CSF, STEP 5 displays the
message LAD/CSF segment not translatable.
The function key display is now → CSF.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-7
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.3
Editing Comments
Overview
You can add the following comments to the STEP 5 blocks of the types
OB, PB, SB, FB and FX:
Plant comments
Statement comments (Editing Statement Lists, Chapter 6)
Segment comments
Segment titles
Operand comments (Editing Assignment Lists, Chapter 11)
Comments for data blocks DB and DX can be found in Editing Data Blocks
(see Chapter 9).
Type of comment
Where can you edit it?
Where is it stored?
Plant comment
Documentation file
# Documentation file
Statement
comment
STL : OB, PB, SB, FB, FX
Documentation block: OC, PC, SC,
FC, FCX
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
Segment comment
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB,
FX Documentation file:
#OBDO.nnn, #PBDO.nnn,
#SBDO.nnn, #FBDO.nnn,
#FXDO.nnn
#OBDO.nnn, #PBDO.nnn, #SBDO.nnn,
#FBDO.nnn, #FXDO.nnn
Segment title
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB,
FX
Documentation block:
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
OC, PC, SC, FC, FCX
Operand comment
STL, LAD, CSF : OB, PB, SB, FB,
FX
Assignment list
*Z0.INI
*Z0.SEQ
5.3.1
Overview
Plant Comment
A plant comment is a text file (documentation file) and in contrast to the
segment comment is not oriented to one block. With the S5-DOS data
management, the number of characters of all the plant comments in a
program file must not exceed 16 K characters per block. The maximum
number of documentation files in a program file is 255.
A plant comment is stored on diskette or on hard disk and is not transferred
to the PLC or to the EPROM/EEPROM.
When editing the plant comment, you can call up the command mode and
editing aids for text processing.
5-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Name
The name begins with the # character, following this, the name can have a
maximum 8 further characters, e.g. #EXAMPLES. When you type in a
plant comment, make sure that the second character of the name is not a
colon.
Working with the
Editor
To enter or modify plant comments, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Select the menu command Editor STEP 5 Block.
2. Type in the name of the documentation block preceded by the character
# and enter your selection .
Type in your texts using the alphanumeric keyboard. The text editor
includes the following functions:
F
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
3 Command
4
5 Insert L
F1
= Insert
F2
= Delete
F3
= Command
F5
= Insert L
F6
= Delete L
F
1 Insert
Switchover between the insert and overwrite modes. The
selectable mode is displayed.
Delete a string of characters in the text.
Commands for fast text editing.
Insert a line at the cursor position.
Delete the line at the cursor position.
You can insert ASCII characters within a text. Follow the steps outlined
below:
1. Press F1 = Insert. (change to the insert mode)
2. Type in the required string.
3. Change to the overwrite mode by pressing F1 = Overwrite.
The entry of the text in the insert mode is completed.
F
2 Delete
Within a text, you can delete character strings and sections of text of any
length.
1. Position the cursor on the first character you want to delete.
2. Press F2 = Delete.
STEP 5 displays the start marker @ at the cursor position.
3. Position the cursor after the last character you want to delete.
4. Press F2 = Delete again.
The text between markers is deleted. The remaining text is
automatically repositioned.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-9
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
The text editor has 8 commands for fast text processing. You call the
command mode by pressing F3 = Command. The keystrokes for all
commands are the same:
F
3 Command
1. Position the cursor in the text.
2. Press F3 = Command.
3. Type in one of the 8 possible commands.
4. Press the Insert key.
The PG executes the command.
Table 5-2
Text Commands
Command
Effect of the Command
JTT
(jump to the top).
From any position, the cursor jumps to the start of the comment.
JTE
(jump to the end).
From any position, the cursor jumps to the end of the comment.
ST1, ST2, ST3, ST4
(set tag 1 etc.).
You can set a maximum of 4 tags within the text.
JT1, JT2, JT3, JT4
(jump to tag 1 etc.).
From any position in the text, the cursor jumps to the specified tag.
F/xyzrst/
(find ).
The cursor jumps to the selected text xyzrst, otherwise STEP 5 displays
the message not found.
CTm, Tn
(copy; m and n represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4).
You copy the text from tag Tm (inclusive) to tag Tn, the cursor must not be
located between the two tags. Otherwise, STEP 5 displays the error
message Illegal between tags. When you copy text, the tags are copied
along with the text.
MTm, Tn
(move, m and n represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4).
The text from tag Tm (inclusive) to tag Tn is moved. The cursor must not be
located between the two tags. Otherwise STEP 5 displays the error
message Illegal between tags. When you move text, the tags are moved
along with the text.
DT1, DT2, DT3, DT4
(delete).
You can delete tags in any order.
Note
The printer control character $EJECT triggers a form feed in a segment,
block or plant comment.
$EJECT must be in upper case letters, otherwise STEP 5 does not
recognize the command.
5-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Example
You want to copy the empty line (7) and the title in line (8) into line (2).
Printer control Î
(2) Î
Copy texts Î
Move texts Î
Set marker Î
Delete marker Î
(7) Î
( 8 ) EDITING TEXTS: Î
The editor allows you to write...
F
1 Insert
Figure 5-2
F
2 Delete
F
3 Command
F
4
F
5 Insert l.
Printer Control
First, you must select the text you want to copy by setting the start and end
tags.
Defining the Start
1. Position the cursor on the arrow in line (7) and press F3 = Command.
The cursor jumps to the top left corner of the screen.
2. Type in the characters ST1 and press the Insert key.
The cursor returns to the text.
Defining the End
1. Position the cursor after the last character (here arrow) in line (8) and
press F3.
The cursor returns to the top left-hand corner of the screen.
2. Type in the characters ST2 and press the Insert key.
The cursor returns to the text.
Copying a Block of Text
1. Position the cursor on the arrow in line (2) and press F3.
2. Type in the characters CT1,T2 and press the Insert key. The selected
section of text including the empty line is inserted in line (2) as shown in
the following figure. The tags are at the beginning and end of the copied
text.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-11
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Printer control Î
(2)Î
EDITING TEXTS: Î
Copy texts Î
Move texts Î
Set marker Î
( 7 ) Delete marker Î
(8)Î
EDITING TEXTS: Î
The editor allows you to write ...
F
1 Insert
Figure 5-3
F
2 Delete
F
3 Command
F
4
F
5 Insert l.
Printer Control
Moving a text
With this function, a marked block of text is moved and the gap left by the
text is closed automatically. The text marked for copying is moved to the
current cursor position using the command MT1,T2 followed by the Insert
key.
5.3.2
Overview
Segment Comment
Segment comments are texts with which you can write extra information
about programs in segments or blocks. The number of characters in all the
segment comments in a program file must not exceed 16 K characters per
block. The maximum number of possible documentation blocks in a
program file is 255.
It is best to edit segment comments directly in the blocks and not in the
documentation blocks. If you want to edit comments in documentation
blocks, follow the procedure outlined in Section 5.3.1.
The block and documentation file are stored in the program file.
Documentation files cannot be transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
The block number and the number of the documentation file are the
same, e.g. #PBDO.013 belongs to PB13.
Each block type has a corresponding documentation file in each case
preceded by the character #:
OBn → #OBDO.nnn
PBn → #PBDO.nnn
SBn → #SBDO.nnn
FBn → #FBDO.nnn
FXn → #FXDO.nnn
Note
You trigger a form feed with the printer control character $EJECT. This
string must be written in upper case letters.
5-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Ready to Start?
You have selected comments [X] in the project settings (Section 4.1.1) or
by pressing SHIFT F4 in the editor.
The segment for which you want to write a segment comment is open.
STEP 5 is in the output or edit mode.
Working with the
Editor
F No Com
4
F -> LAD
5 Seg Fct
F Seg Com
6 Edit
F
7
Save
Enter
F Help
8 Cancel
F
4
F
5
F Title
6
F Comment
7
F Help
8 Return
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
3
F
4
F
5 Insert L
To enter or to modify a segment comment follow the steps below:
1. Select the menu command Editor STEP 5 Block.
2. Enter the block name
3. Press SHIFT F6 = Seg Com and SHIFT F7 = Comment
STEP 5 opens the empty editing field for the segment comment or displays
text you have already input. To allow the comment to be assigned to the
segment, STEP 5 generates a 7 character string $1 @ with the number of
the segment. Do not delete this number, otherwise the connection between
the segment and comment is lost. Press the F1 key (Insert).
4. Edit the text using the alphanumeric keyboard.
5. Complete each line with the Return key.
The end of the line is marked by a vertical arrow.
If your text takes more than one line, a line break is set at the end of the
line automatically.
Inserting Characters
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
5 Insert L
F
6 Delete L
F
1 Overwrite
1. Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert characters.
2. Press F1 = Insert.
3. Insert the required text.
4. Press F8 = End to complete inserting text.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-13
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Deleting
Characters
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
1
F
2 Delete
1. Position the cursor on the first character to be deleted.
2. Press F2 = Delete.
3. Position the cursor after the last character to be deleted.
4. Press F2 = Delete.
Inserting a Line
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
5 Insert L
6 Delete L
1. Position the cursor in the line before which you want to insert an empty
line.
2. Press F5 or click the Insert L button.
Deleting a Line
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Delete
5 Insert L
6 Delete L
1. Position the cursor in the line you want to delete.
2. Press F6 or click the Delete L button.
Completing the
Segment Comment
Press F8 = Return.
Saving the
Segment Comment
Press the Insert key.
5-14
STEP 5 displays the corresponding segment on the screen. The text
entered up to now is retained. When you save the block, STEP 5 also
saves the segment comment.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.3.3
Segment Title
Overview
With the segment title, you can identify a segment. A segment title has a
maximum of 32 characters. You can enter it directly in the block or
separately in the corresponding comment block. The first method is
advisable, since the assignments are automatically updated if you make
changes and save the segment. STEP 5 stores the segment title in the
comment block.
The comment block is stored in the preset program file.
Comment blocks cannot be transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
The block number and the number of the comment block are the same,
e.g. PC 13 belongs to PB 13.
STEP 5 automatically assigns the comment block name as follows:
OBn → OCn
PBn → PCn
SBn → SCn
FBn → FCn
FXn → FCXn
Ready to Start?
Working with the
Editor
You have selected comments: yes in the Settings (Section 4.1.1).
If this is not the case, you can switch over by pressing SHIFT F4 = Line
Com. The segment in which you want to enter a title is open. STEP 5 is in
the output or edit mode.
F No Com
F
F Seg Com
F
Save
F
Help
4
5 Seg Fct
6 Edit
7
Enter
8
Cancel
F
F
F Title
F Comment
F
Help
4
5
6
7
8
Return
–> LAD
To enter or to modify a segment title follow the steps below:
1. Select the menu command Editor STEP 5 Block.
2. Type in and enter the name of the documentation block.
3. Press SHIFT F6 = Seg Com and SHIFT F6 = Title or press COM and
SHIFT F6 = Title.
The cursor jumps to the input field of the segment title.
4. Type in text or correct an existing text
5. Press the Return key.
The title is buffered, but is only stored in the comment block in the
program file when the block is saved.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-15
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.3.4
Display Operand Comments
Overview
When a segment is open, you can display the operand comments for
symbolic operands at any time.
Ready to Start?
The symbols file is entered in the project settings and Symbols and
Display: symbolic were selected. If this is not the case, you can switch over
by pressing SHIFT F3 = Symb SYM.
Display in
LAD/CSF
Position the cursor on a symbolic operand in the segment. The symbolic
operand with the operand comment is displayed in the third screen line.
Display in STL
Regardless of the project setting Comments: yes/ no, you can switch over
between the different displays with SHIFT F4 as follows:
no comments
line (statement) comments
symbol (operand) comments
The setting you select is entered in the project settings
5-16
F No Com
F
4
5 Seg Fct
–> LAD
F Seg Com
F Save
F
Help
6 Edit
7 Enter
8
Cancel
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.4
Appending, Inserting, Transferring, Deleting a Segment
Overview
F No Com
4
F –> LAD
5 Seg Fct
F Seg com
6 Edit
F Save
7 Enter
F Help
8 Cancel
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
The segment is in the output mode.
If you want to work with segments in the block, i.e.:
to append or insert,
to file (save temporarily)
to delete,
you can perform these functions using the function keys or the keys in the
numeric pad (see Appendix, Keyboard).
Segment editing function
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Function keys
Key in numeric pad
Save segment temporarily
F4 = File
–
Insert before current segment
F5 = Insert
Insert segment
Append after current segment
F6 = Append
Segment end
Delete segment
SHIFT F4 = Delete
Delete segment
Page to existing segment
F1 = –1
F1 = +1
–
+
5-17
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.4.1
Appending or Inserting a New Segment
Overview
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Open the segment before or after which you want to add a new
segment.
2. Press F5 = Seg Fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
1
F
2 Buffer
F
3
New
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
From seg
3. Press F5 = Insert again if you want to insert a segment in front of the
current segment or F6 = Append if you want to append a segment after
the current segment.
4. Press F1 = New.
STEP 5 displays a new segment
5.4.2
Copying a Segment
Overview
You can copy a segment within the same block or to a different block in the
same program file. The segment title and comment are also copied. After
you have copied a segment, it is advisable to update the cross reference
list if you have not already selected Update XRF in the job box.
Ready to Start?
The block to which you want to copy a segment exists in the program file.
You copy in the output mode.
Copying a Segment in the Same Block
Note
Segments within a function block that contain functions for the specific
function block, for example labels cannot be copied to another position
within the block.
When you copy a segment, jump labels with symbolically defined names
(e.g. MARK) can only be represented in absolute format (e.g. M0001).
5-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Copying a
Segment
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Open the block before or after the segment to be copied.
2. Press F5 = Seg Fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
1
F
2 Buffer
F
3
New
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
From seg
3. Press F5 = Insert again if you want to copy before the current segment
or F6 = Append if you want to append a segment after the current
segment.
4. Press F3 = From seg.
STEP 5 displays the message line Seg no.
5. Enter the segment number of the segment to be copied (e.g. 2) and
press the Return key.
The segment is copied.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-19
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
Copying a
Segment to a
Different Block
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Display the segment to be copied using page forwards/backwards.
2. Press F5 = Seg Fct.
Filing (copying) the Segment
3. Press F4 = File.
The segment is temporarily stored.
4. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
5. Save any changes with SHIFT + F7 or F7=Enter. If you have made no
changes, exit the block with the ESC = Cancel key.
Inserting the Segment
6. Change to the destination block with F2 Reference and F4 Dest Blk.
7. Press F5 = Seg Fct.
F Delete
4 File
F
5 Insert
F
6 Append
F
1
F
2 Buffer
F
3
New
F
7
F
8
Help
Return
From seg
8. Press F5 = Insert again, if you want to insert before the current segment
or F6 = Append if you want to append the segment after the current
segment.
9. Press F2 = Buffer.
The buffered segment is copied.
10. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
5-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.4.3
Deleting a Segment
Overview
You can delete individual segments in the block. The segment title and
comment are also deleted. After deleting a segment, you must update the
cross reference list (XRF).
Ready to Start?
The segment to be deleted is open. STEP 5 is in the output mode.
Deleting a
Segment in the
Block
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Press F5 = Seg Fct.
2. Press SHIFT F4 = Delete and acknowledge with yes if you really want
to delete the segment.
The segment along with its title and comment is deleted, but not removed
from the program file. This only occurs at the end of the editor editing
session when you store the block.
3. Press F8 = Return.
Returns you to the block editor in the output mode.
Note
With SHIFT and delete segment in the numeric pad you can also delete a
segment.
5.4.4
Transferring/Moving a Segment
Overview
You can move a segment within the same block or transfer it to a different
block in the same program file. This function is a combination of copying a
segment (Section 5.4.2) and deleting a segment (Section 5.4.3). After the
transfer you must update the cross reference list 〈Section 17.1).
How to Transfer a
Block
The procedure for transferring segments is the same as for copying
segments (Copying a segment to a different block) with the difference that
after you have buffered the segment (file) the segment must be deleted at
its old position using F4.
Press SHIFT F4 = Delete and confirm with yes.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-21
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.5
Creating, Displaying Cross References, Block Change
Overview
The cross references of all blocks in a program file are stored in a special
program file *XR.INI. You can access this data in the editor window using
the function F2 = Reference (see Section 5.2, Output Mode).
With this function, you can do the following:
Create a cross reference list with F1 = Gen XRF.
Display cross references of an operand on the screen using F2 =
Disp XRF.
Trigger a block change by selecting a reference in the cross reference
list using the cursor and pressing F2 = Jump,
Change blocks by specifying the destination block and segment using
F4 = Dest Blk and...
if you have changed blocks, you can return to the original block with F5
= Orig Blk.
You can display a cross reference list of the following operands:
inputs/outputs
flags/extended flags
timers/counters
block calls
process I/Os
data and symbols.
Ready to Start?
STEP 5 is in the output mode. The file XR.INI exists and has been
updated. You can achieve this situation as follows:
by setting Update XREF in the Edit STEP 5 block(s) job box; XR.INI is
then updated when you save a block,
as an alternative, you can use the management function Make XRF.
5-22
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.5.1
Working with the Function Make XRF
Overview
With this function, you create the cross reference list for the preset
program file with the name *XR.INI:
After you start the function, it is executed automatically.
The created cross reference list is required in the block editor for
documentation in KOMDOK format and in GRAPH 5 for executing the
functions associated with F2 = Reference.
Restrictions
5.5.2
When creating the XRF within the editor, there is less memory available
than for generating an XRF starting directly from the menu. This means
that with large program files, data must be written to temporary files earlier.
This slows down the creation of the XRF.
Display Cross References (Function Display XRF)
Overview
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Position the cursor on the statement containing the operand whose
cross references you want to display or if the operand does not exist in
the current segment, start at step 2.
2. Press F2 = Reference.
3. Press F2 = Disp XRF.
STEP 5 displays the message: XRF display of the operand: e.g. I 32.0.
4. Enter the operand or overwrite it and press the Insert or Return key.
The cross reference list of the operand is displayed for example:
5. F4 = Overlap/Single:
Overlap: the cross reference list also contains the byte, word or double
word addresses that overlap the bit or byte address of the displayed
operands.
Single: only cross references of the specified operand. If the cross
reference list is long or if you do not have enough memory, overlapping
can be switched off.
6. F5= With Dupl/No Dupl:
With Dupl: if an operand occurs with the same operator more than once
in a segment, it is displayed as often as it occurs.
No Dupl: the operand with the same operator in a segment is only
displayed once. This setting is advisable in long cross reference lists
and when you do not have a lot of memory.
7. You can return to the previous level with F8 =,Return or ESC. You can
jump to a different block using F2 = Jump.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-23
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
FB 10
C:PROEXAST.S5D
LIB=2
LEN=175
Cross references
I
32.0
MAINSWIT
Key switch “Plant on”
IB
32
INP B
Load input byte 32 for test
PB 10:1/L IB
PB 10:3/A
FB 10:3/A
PB 10:1/T IB
PB 10:3/=
PB 10:2/L IW
PB 10:2/AN
PB 10:2/T IW
FB 10:2/O
Jump to: PB 10
Help
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2 Jump
3
4 Singl
e
5 No Dupl 6
7
8 Return
F
1
F
2 Jump
F
3
F
F
F
4 Overlap 5 With Dupl 6
F
7
Help
F
8 Return
Select help (SHIFT F8) and reply yes to the Continue? prompt, you will
obtain detailed information about the functions.
Note
Commands which are marked with # are commands with editing functions
(B MW... or B DW...). The command which is actually executed during
run-time is in this case unknown.
5-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.5.3
Changing Blocks
Jumping to a
Block
Follow the steps below:
1. With the cursor in the cross reference list, select the block you want to
change to.
2. Press F2 = Jump.
The selected block is displayed.
3. You can return to the previous segment with:
F8 = Return followed by F5 = Orig Blk.
Changing Blocks
Follow the steps below:
1. Press F2 = Reference.
2. Press F4 = Dest blk.
STEP 5 displays Jump to block:
Segment: 1
3. Type in the block and overwrite the segment number if you require a
different one.
4. Press the Insert key.
The selected block is displayed.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-25
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.6
Searching for Operands, Segments and Addresses
Overview
Using the search function you can find certain terms, for example
operands, quickly in the open block. The key is searched for from the
cursor position or from the first segment. If STEP 5 finds the key, it is
displayed in the corresponding segment.
What can you search for ?
Absolute operands
I, F, S, Q, T, C
Block calls
OBn, PBn, SBn, FBn, FXn, DBn, DXn
Peripheral bytes/words
PYn, PWn
Data
DRn, DLn, DWn, DDn, Dn.m
Symbolic operands
e.g. -INPUT
Assignment for absolute or symbolic operands e.g.* Q1.0, * –INPUT
Segments
Addresses
Ready to Start ?
STEP 5 is in the output mode.
How to Search for
a Key
Searching in the block
1. Press F3 = Search.
2. Type in the key in absolute or symbolic form, e.g. I 1.1 .
3. Start the search, as follows:
from the 1st segment - press F2 = From Seg1 or
from the next statement line - press F3 = Continue.
Continuing the search
Press F3 = Search, see above.
Searching for a Segment
1. Type in the segment as a decimal number.
Searching for an Address
1. Type in the address as a hexadecimal number. The last character of the
number must be ’H’. In LAD/CSF, only the segment for this address is
found. In STL, the cursor is positioned exactly on the address. If the
address is too high, the end of the block is displayed as the result of the
search.
5-26
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5.7
Editing Symbolic Operands in the Block
Overview
Symbolic operands can be edited in a list directly in the block. This list is
an excerpt from the symbols file *Z0.INI and the operands of the open
segment are displayed.
If you change anything, the sequential source file *Z0.SEQ should be
updated as follows:
by setting Update assignment list in the Edit STEP 5 block(s) job box,
so that the *Z0.SEQ is updated when the block is stored,
or you can generate the sequential source file from the symbols file
(Management, Assignment Lists, Convert INI > SEQ).
Ready to Start ?
You have selected Symbols in the project settings (Section 4.1.1). If this is
not the case, you can switch over with SHIFT F3.
STEP 5 is in the Output mode.
How to Edit
Symbolic
Operands
Follow the steps below:
1. Press F1 = Disp Symb.
A list containing the operands is displayed on the screen.
2. Select the operand with the cursor.
3. Press F2 = Edit symb.
The character cursor is located in the symbols column.
SYMBOLS FILE: B:ALPHA1Z0.INI
OPERAND
SYMBOL
COMMENT
INPUT 3.1
I
3.1
INP 3–1
I
4.3
INP 4–3
I
4.4
F
2.5
FLAG 25
FLAG 25
4. Enter the symbolic name in upper and lower case characters.
5. Position the cursor in the comment column with SHIFT and the cursor
right key or with the Return key.
6. Type in the comment in upper and lower case characters.
7. Complete the edited line by pressing F2 = Insert.
8. To complete editing, press F8 = Return or the Insert key.
Note
Symbolic names should begin without a hyphen. Do not use umlauts
(ä, ü, ö).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
5-27
Common Functions in STL, LAD, CSF
5-28
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
6
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
Overview
This section describes the functions you can use in the STL type of
representation.
Editor
Test
PLC
STEP 5 Block
Data Block
DB-Screen...
Management
...
...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Chapter
Overview
Statements
Section
Docu
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Page
6.1
General Aspects of Working with the STL Editor
6-2
6.2
Simple Editing Functions
6-3
6.3
Function Block
6-5
The STEP 5 statement is the smallest independent unit of a program. It
represents a task description for the processor. In the Statement List (STL)
method of representation, a statement is typed in per line in either absolute
or symbolic form (possible blocks: OB, PB, SB, FB/FX). A statement
consists of the operation and the operand as follows:
Operation
Example
Operand
Absolute statement
AN
I 1.1
Symbolic statement
AN
–INPUT
You can write a maximum of 255 words per segment.
Note
For a detailed example of editing a Statement List, refer to Chapter 24
Practical Application of STEP 5.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
6-1
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
6.1
General Aspects of Working with the STL Editor
Ready to Start?
Before you start editing, check the project settings with the menu command
File Project Set F4. Make sure that the entries for the program file,
symbols file, mode, type of representation and comments are correct.
Statements are always entered in the Edit mode. If you open a new block,
STEP 5 is in the Edit mode, if you open an existing block, STEP 5 is in the
output mode. In this case, you can change to the Edit mode with F6 = Edit.
Starting the Editor
Editor
STEP 5 Block
F1
Select the menu command Editor STEP5 Block. The Edit STEP 5
block(s) dialog box is displayed.
Once you have named your block, it is advisable to select the options
Update XRF and Update assignment list if you are working with symbolic
operands.
After confirming your entry with Edit, the STL editor is started.
Screen Layout
A screen with a working field and a function key bar is displayed. Press
SHIFT F8 = Help to display explanations of the function keys.
Typing in
Statements
When typing in a statement, you do not have to keep to the strict format, in
other words, STEP 5 enters the blanks automatically after you have
entered the line. Complete each line with the Return key.
Type in the first statement or position the cursor on the required line and
type in the statement, e.g. AN I 1.1 or AN–INPUT and press the Return
key.
Correcting
Statements
Position the cursor on the statement and overwrite. You can delete
individual characters with the DEL key.
Saving the Block
Press the Insert key. STEP 5 switches to the output mode. Press the
Insert key again.
6-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
6.2
Simple Editing Functions
6.2.1
Displaying Addresses
Overview
With this function you can display the relative operation addresses in bytes
or words when editing in STL. While the addresses are displayed, you
cannot edit statements and cannot enter a library number.
How to Display
Addresses
Follow the steps below:
1. Press SHIFT F1 = Addresses.
STEP 5 displays the relative addresses in words.
2. Set the STL addresses to WORD or Byte
(see Section 4.1.1)
3. Press SHIFT F1 = Addresses. The display with addresses disappears
and STEP 5 returns to the Statement List without addresses.
Note
If you display the addresses from the PLC online, they are only displayed
in words or bytes depending on the PLC. If you press SHIFT F1 =
Addresses a second time, the address information is cleared from the
screen. The addresses are displayed in hexadecimal format !
6.2.2
Statement Comment
Overview
Statement comments are stored in comment blocks just as → Segment
titles. While the input of segment titles is not dependent on the method of
representation, you can only assign a (line) comment to a single statement
in the STL editor. A statement comment has a maximum of 32 characters.
You can type in a statement comment directly when programming the
statement without having to open the comment block in the program file. In
this case, the comment block is generated automatically when you save
the STEP 5 block.
You can also enter statement comments separately in the comment block.
We recommend the first method, since the comment block is automatically
updated if you make any changes. The names of the comment blocks are
assigned automatically by STEP 5 as follows:
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
OCn
for
OBn,
PCn
for
PBn,
SCn
for
SBn,
FCn
for
FBn,
FCXn
for
FXn.
6-3
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
Ready to Start ?
You have selected [X] with comments in the project settings (Section
4.1.1). If this is not the case, you can switch over with SHIFT F4.
STEP 5 is in the Edit mode.
How to Enter
Statement
Comments
Follow the steps below:
1. Position the cursor on the required statement.
2. Move the cursor to the right to the comment field (SHIFT + cursor
right).
3. Type in a text with a maximum of 32 characters or correct an existing
text.
After the 32nd character, the cursor jumps to the beginning of the
comment field.
4. Press the Return key.
6.2.3
Overview
Saving the Comment
The first time you save the block with comments, the comment block
(OC, PC, SC, FC/FCX) is generated automatically.
If the comment block already exists, STEP 5 displays the message:
Enter comment in file?.
Enter the comment with the Insert key or discard it with ESC = Cancel.
6-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
6.3
Function Block
Overview
A function block (FB, FX) is a STEP 5 program block similar to OBs, PBs
and SBs. While these blocks only contain the basic STEP 5 operations, an
FB or FX can contain the following:
basic operations,
supplementary operations and
system operations.
An FB occurs only once in the program memory of the programmable
controller. When you program the block, you decide on its function, and the
operands you enter can be formal operands which have a token function.
When the block is called (Calling a function block) the higher ranking block
replaces the formal operands by actual operands.
Structure of an FB
A function block consists of the following:
a block preheader (FV, FXV),
a block header (as with all other blocks),
a block body (as with all other blocks).
Block Preheader
The block preheader contains the identifiers of the jump labels that you
have entered in the block. The block header is
automatically generated by STEP 5 when the block is translated,
stored in the preset program file as an FV or FXV,
not transferred to the PLC and not to EPROM/EEPROMs,
automatically deleted when its FB or FX is deleted.
If the block preheader does not exist when a function block is transferred
from the PLC memory to the selected program file, STEP 5 displays the
following message: Preheader does not exist for this block.
Block Header
The block header contains the following:
the block type and block number,
the library number,
the block length.
Block Body
The block body contains the STEP 5 program and a parameter list with the
block parameters of all segments of the function block. This parameter list
contains all the information necessary to perform the following tasks:
to represent the block graphically (e.g. input, output parameters),
to check that the data type is entered correctly when the actual
operands are input (parameter assignment).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
6-5
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
6.3.1
Editing a Function Block
Overview
A function block can contain the STEP 5 statements, a block name and a
parameter list of the formal operands. Jumps or branches can be
programmed within a segment.
Programming is also possible in LAD and CSF. Except for the first
segment, all the new language elements can be used in graphic form
within a segment (→ Editor, LAD/CSF)
The formal operands defined in the first segment cannot be used in a
LAD or CSF segment.
The FB name is displayed in the Directory function
(Editor STEP 5 Block with the option [x] FBs with name.)
FB 200
Name
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
Decl
: EXAMPLE
: INP1
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: INP2
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: OUTP
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: BLK
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: TIME
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: CTR
I/Q/D/B/T/C:
: DO
:A
:A
: JC
:L
:T
MARK : SP
:A
:=
:* * *
BI/BY/W/D:BI
BI/BY/W/D:BI
BI/BY/W/D:BI
Block call C DB
Conditional jump to MARK
load DW 10
Jump label; start time
Segment end
FSynb.SYM F No com
1 Disp Symb2 Reference 3 Search
6-6
LIB=12345
LEN=45
OUTPUT
EXAMPLE is the name of FB 200
I
I
Q
B
T
C
= BLK
= INP1
= INP2
= MARK
Dataw10
FW 2
= TIME
= TIME
= OUTP
F Addresses F Lib No
4
F ––>LAD F Seg Com F Save
F
5 Seg Fct 6
8 Cancel
Figure 6-1
Example of a Function Block (FB 200)
Table 6-1
Meaning of the Fields
Field
Field Names
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
C:[email protected]@@ST.S5D
0000
Segment 1
Edit
7 Enter
Help
Meaning
Name
The block name can be up to 8 characters long
and must begin with a letter.
Parameter List
The parameter list contains the name, the
parameter type and the data type of the formal
operand. You can include a maximum of 40
formal operands per function block.
Decl
Name of the formal operand, with a maximum of 4
characters, the first of which must be a letter.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
Table 6-1
Meaning of the Fields, continued
Field
Editing a new
function block
Meaning
I/O/D/B/T/C
The type of formal operand:
I Input parameter
O Output parameter
D Data (constant)
B Block call (C DBn/DXn, JU OBn, PBn, SBn,
FBn/FXn)
T Timer
C Counter
BI/BY/W/D
The type of formal operand:
BI Operand with bit address
BY Operand with byte address
W Operand with word address
D Operand with double word address
STEP 5 is in the edit mode (STL). Segment 1 is open. If you are using
symbolic operands, a symbols file must exist and symbols: yes must be set
in the project settings. With a new function block, follow the steps below:
1. Type in a name with a maximum of 8 characters, e.g. EXAMPLE1
If the name is 8 characters long, the cursor jumps to the comment file
(→ Statement comment).
2. Press the Return key.
The parameter list for the formal operands is opened and Decl: is
displayed.
FB 200
C:[email protected]@@ST.S5D
Segment 1
LEN=0
Edit
Name : EXAMPLE
Decl
Figure 6-2
:
Parameter List for Formal Operands
3. Type in a maximum 4 character string for the first formal operand.
After 4 characters, the cursor jumps to the next input field. If you use
less than 4 characters, jump to the next field with the Return key.
4. Select the type of formal operand, e.g. type in I
The cursor jumps to the next input field.
5. Select the type of data, e.g. type in BI
If you only use one character here, press the Return key. The cursor
jumps to the next line in the parameter list.
6. Continue to enter the parameters as described above.
7. Complete the parameter list by pressing the Return key.
The cursor jumps to the first line of the block body, where you can enter the
first statement.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
6-7
Editing Statement Lists (STL)
Note
You can only add parameters later between the lines of the parameter list
if the parameters already entered do not yet exist in any statement line in
the block body.
Modifyng a
Function Block
When you call the function block, the actual operands are assigned to the
formal operands. STEP 5 is in the edit mode. The function block to be
called is in the program file.
How to Assign
Parameters
Follow the steps below to modify a block:
1. Type in the block call, as follows:
JU FB
for an unconditional FB call
JC FB
for a conditional FB call
DO FX
for an unconditional extended function block call
DOC FX
for a conditional extended function block call
2. Press the Return key.
The PG displays the name of the FB.
3. Press the Return key.
In the next line, STEP 5 displays the first formal operand and waits for
you to type in the first actual operand.
4. Type in the actual operand in absolute or symbolic form and press the
Return key.
Note
Absolute actual operands for BI, T, C must be entered with a blank, for
example I 1.0.
5. Type in the remaining actual operands and complete each one with the
Return key.
STEP 5 sets the type of parameter and data type automatically which you
can either accept or change.
1. Press the Return key in the line of the formal operand or move the
cursor to the right.
STEP 5 displays the type of parameter you selected in the parameter
list.
2. Either accept the displayed parameter type or overwrite it with a
different type.
3. Press the Return key.
Note
To insert segments, use the function keys F5 or F6. Using the STL
command *** can lead to undesired program structures.
6-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Overview
In the Ladder Diagram method of representation (LAD) the control task is
described based on the symbols used in circuit diagrams. Based on these
symbols, the block operations are represented by contacts (NC contacts,
NO contacts, outputs) and function symbols for counters, timers and
arithmetic operations.
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
Docu
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
You can program in LAD in the following STEP 5 blocks:
organization blocks OB
program blocks PB
sequence blocks SB
function blocks FB
extended function blocks FX.
STEP 5 stores the corresponding segment comments in the blocks
OBDO.nnn, PBDO.nnn etc. Segment titles are stored in the comment
blocks OC, PC etc.
It is advisable to enter and correct comments when editing a block and not
to write them directly in the documentation or comment blocks.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
7.1
General Aspects of Working with the LAD Editor
7-2
7.2
Simple Editing Functions
7-4
7.3
Examples of Editing Logic Operations
7-7
7.4
Complex Functions
7-9
7-1
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.1
General Aspects of Working with the LAD Editor
Ready to Start?
Before you start editing, check the project settings with the menu command
File Project Set F4. Make sure that the entries for the program file,
symbols file, mode, type of representation and comments are correct.
When editing existing blocks, you can change the type of representation
with SHIFT F5 = LAD (press once or twice).
Starting the Editor
Editor
STEP5 Block
Select the menu command Editor STEP5 Block. The Edit STEP 5
block(s) dialog box is displayed.
Once you have named your block, it is advisable to select the options
Update XRF and Update assignment list if you are working with symbolic
operands.
After confirming your entry with Edit, the LAD editor is started.
Screen Layout
A screen with a working field and a function key bar with symbols for
entering contacts and editing LAD segments is displayed.
The screen is divided into 48 fields (8 columns and 6 horizontal sections).
The horizontal sections are 3 lines high. The first 7 columns contain logic
operations, the 8th column is reserved for the outputs.
The label and the corresponding contact are arranged one above the other
in one of the 48 fields.
The content of the screen can be scrolled 2.5 times up or down. Press
SHIFT F8 = Help to obtain an explanation of the function keys on the
screen.
Making Input
The editing field is divided into lines and columns in which you enter rungs,
branches, contacts, outputs and function elements using function keys or
the mouse.
Connections and symbols of all types (e.g. signal inputs/outputs for counter
or arithmetic functions) are generated automatically. Input fields for
labelling and assigning parameters are displayed and can be reached with
the automatic cursor control. STEP 5 rejects inconsistent configurations.
7-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Ladder Diagram
Representation
Figure 7-1 shows an example of a segment in the LAD representation.
(1)
PB 3
-PROG 3
SEGMENT 1
I 1.1
-INP 1
(2)
(3)
-INP 1
][
(4)
I
(5)
I
C:[email protected]5D
Segment title
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Edit
Input 1.1
M 3.0
2.2
][
S
3.1
][
I
(6)
3.2
][
(.)
(.)
F 3.3
][
(.)
(22)
(23)
I
4.2
][
I
5.5
][
F
2.0
]/[
Q 1.0
R Q
-()Message line
(24)
(25)
F
Math
1
Figure 7-1
F Blocks
F
2
3
(2)
Convert
4
F Compare
F Seg Com
F
5 Bin Oper
6 Seg End
7
Extras
Enter
F
Help
8
Cancel
The screen lines have the following meaning:
Explanation of the Screen Lines
Display
Line
(1)
F
A Segment in Ladder Diagram Representation (Example)
Screen Lines
Table 7-1
Shift
Explanation
PB3
Block type and number
–PROG3
Symbolic block name
C:[email protected]
Drive and program file
LIB=12345
Library number
LEN=19
Segment 1
Block length in words
Segment number
Segment title
Text with max. 32 characters
Edit
STEP 5 mode
(3)
Symbolic operands
(4)... (22)
Editing area
Assignment absolute operand → symb. operand → operand
comment, when the cursor is located on an operand identifier
Input fields for logic operations, calls and operands
(23)
Message line
STEP 5 messages or prompts (red or on a black background)
(24) (25)
Function keys
Key assignment for the currently active functions
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-3
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.2
Simple Editing Functions
Logic Operations
After you have selected the editor, STEP 5 opens the block selected in the
job box at segment 1. If you are working with a new block, this is empty
apart from the power rail on the left-hand side.
Using the function keys, you can now input contacts, outputs and function
elements (Table 7-2) The left-hand column of these tables contains the
operation for processing the contact(s) which you call in the edit mode
using the keystrokes shown.
Table 7-2
Logic Operations in LAD (Ladder Diagram)
Operation
Function Keys
Explanation
F1
NO contact
F2
NC contact
F3
Branch, close branch
F4
Output
F5
Call complex functions
(#)
F5+F4
Connector
( )
F5+F5
Negated connector
→ (Cursor right)
Empty element
( )
Bin Oper
Note
In LAD it is only possible to use assignments (=) for outputs. Programs
produced in STL with the outputs Set (S) and Reset (R) are issued with S
and R in LAD.
Naming Operands
After you input a LAD symbol, the cursor jumps to the name field (max. 8
characters) for the operand. If you have selected a symbol length greater
than 8 characters in the Settings, STEP 5 only displays the first 8
characters. If you use longer symbol names, make sure that the names are
unique within the first 8 characters.
Example: you have the following assignment:
Operand
Symbol
F 100.1
F 1.1
F 1.7
Myflag 100
Myflag 1.1
Myflag 1.7
Comment
The selected symbolic operand names are displayed or printed out as
follows:
-Myflag 1
7-4
-Myflag 1
-Myflag 1
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
There are two methods of naming operands, as follows:
1. The operand can be named immediately after selecting a symbol
(automatic cursor positioning), or after exiting the name field [?????]
with the Return key.
2. Entering the operand names in the name fields of the completed
segment, guided by the long cursor.
Editing Symbolic
Operands
When you press F1 = Disp Symb in the output mode, STEP 5 displays a
list of operands in absolute and symbolic form for the open segment.
You can then edit this list. If you use longer symbol names make sure that
the names are unique within the first 8 characters. The symbolic operand
names are reduced to 8 characters on the screen and when printing in LAD
and CSF.
If you make changes, it is advisable to update the assignment list if you
have not already selected this function in the job box.
Editing Series and
Parallel Rungs
When you input the first contact at the position marked by the long cursor
in the empty segment, you generate a continuous rung including the output
symbol. You can include up to 7 contacts in series within this rung by
positioning the long cursor on the empty element and selecting the
required function (Table 7-2).
Further parallel rungs are connected to this continuous rung. A parallel
rung must be continued as far as the close branch point, if necessary by
inserting empty elements. Only then is it possible to label elements or
make corrections.
You can always connect a parallel rung to the power rail. Branches can be
generated by positioning the long cursor below a contact. The branch point
is then generated before this contact. You select the close branch point if
necessary by including empty elements using F3 = Close branch.
If you attempt to branch from an empty element, this is rejected with the
message parallel circuit illegal.
Inserting Contacts
You can always insert a contact where there is an empty element. Before
you can insert a contact in a rung, you must first expand the rung with
SHIFT F7 = Extras, F6 = Exp Hor or the expand (horizontal) key.
Series
Position the long cursor on the contact after the insertion point and
press SHIFT F7 = Extras and F6 = Exp Hor.
All the lines of the segment are moved one column to the right.
Now position the long cursor on the inserted empty element and insert
the contact using F1 or F2 or the connector with F5 = Bin Oper + F4 = #
or F5=/.
When you store the segment (Insert) or reconfigure the screen (half
screen) unnecessary empty elements are discarded.
Parallel
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-5
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
You can generate parallel circuits within a segment as described above by
positioning the long cursor between the paths below the contact in front of
which you want to start a parallel circuit.
Select the required contact with F1 ... F4 .
STEP 5 now expands your segment implicitly without you pressing SHIFT
F7 = Extras, F7 = Vert exp or the expand vertical key and makes room for
a new parallel rung.
Redisplaying a
Segment
If you have a segment that has become an awkward shape (for example due
to repeated expanding), you can press SHIFT F7 = Extras and F2 = New Disp
and redisplay the segment even if it does not yet have all the parameter values.
The display is then refreshed and the presentation is optimized.
Note
You can only exit a segment or block when all the names and parameters
have been input correctly.
7-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.3
Examples of Editing Logic Operations
Initial Situation
Initial display after pressing F1 = NO contact and entering the operand
identifier I 10.0 and pressing the Return key and Q 10.0
for output and pressing the Return key.
Initial situation:
I 10.0
Q 10.0
( )
Series and Parallel
Contact
Series contact:
1. Position the cursor in the second column of the displayed rung and
press F2 = NC contact type in I 10.2 and press the Return key.
Parallel contact:
2. Position the cursor below the contact I 10.0 and press F1 = NO contact.
The parallel branch is opened. Then move the cursor to the right , press
F3 = Close branch, type in I 10.2 and press the Return key.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
Q 10.0
j j
( )
I 10.2
j j
Implicit Expanding
Inserting an NO contact in a further parallel branch:
3. Position the long cursor below contact I 10.0 once again and press F1 =
NO contact and F3 = Close branch.
Replacing an
Empty Element by
a Contact
Contact I 10.3 is generated by positioning the cursor on the empty element
and pressing F2 = NC contact.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
Q 10.0
j j
( )
?????
j j
I 10.2
j j
Bridge Circuit
I 10.3
j j
You can obtain the bridge circuit below as follows:
4. In the upper rung: position the cursor on the second column and press
F2 = NC contact then position the cursor in the third column and press
F1 = NO contact.
5. Creating the parallel branch: position the cursor below contact I 10.0,
press F2 = NC contact and F3 = Close branch and position the cursor
in the second column of the parallel branch, press F1 = NO contact and
F3 = Close branch.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.2
j j
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
I 10.1
j j
I 10.4
j j
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.3
j j
7-7
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Opening a Branch
after a Contact
The following segment shows a parallel path opened after the first contact.
6. In the upper rung, position the cursor on the second column and press
F2 = NC contact for I 10.1.
7. Creating the parallel branch: position the cursor below contact I 10.1,
press F2 = NC contact, F1 = NO contact and F3 = Close branch.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
I 10.5
j j
Assignment
Q 10.0
j j
( )
I 10.6
j j
Connecting an output or an assignment:
8. Position the long cursor under output Q 10.0 and press F4 = Output.
I 10.0
Q 10.0
( )
F 2.1
( )
Using Connectors
Connectors and negated connectors (Table 7-2) are intermediate flags in
binary logic operations. They store the RLO formed up to that point. A
connector is input in LAD in the same way as a contact. If it is located after
the last contact of the rung it is represented as an output after the rung is
entered and stored.
Immediately after the parallel branch is closed, the intermediate RLO is
written to flag F 10.7.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
I 10.4
j j
I 10.5
j j
Q 10.0
j j
( )
I 10.6
j j
Since it is not possible to expand the rung horizontally at this point, contact
I 10.4 must first be deleted and then inserted again after the connector, as
follows:
9. Position the cursor on the contact below I 10.4 and press DEL.
10. Now position the cursor on the empty element and press F5 = Bin Oper
and F4 = Connector to create a connector which you can then label F
10.7. Following this, insert contact I 10.4 again.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
I 10.5
j j
7-8
F 10.7
j j
(#)
I 10.4
j j
Q 10.0
( )
I 10.6
j j
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4
Complex Functions
Overview
Table 7-3
In the editing mode, the following functions can be called with SHIFT and a
function key or F5 = Bin Oper:
Complex Functions in LAD
Operation
Keys ( function keys)
Math.
ADD, SUB
MULT, DIV
SHIFT F1
and
(with FBs/FXs)
AND
OR
XOR
SHIFT F1
and
Blocks
JU FB, JC FB
DO FX, DOC FX
JU..., JC...
C DB, CX DX
SHIFT F2
and
(SHIFT)
SHIFT F3
and
L/T
SHIFT
(with FBs/FXs)
SLW, SLD
SRW
SSW, SSD
RLD, RRD
SHIFT F3
Convert (FBs/FXs)
DEF, CFW
DUF, CSW
DED, CSD
DUD
FDG, GFD
SHIFT F4
Compare
!=
><
>=
<=
>
<
SHIFT F5
and
and
and
Bin Oper
CD, CU
F5
and
Bin Oper
SP, SE
SD, SF
SS
F5
and
F1, F2
F3, F4
#
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F6 and
(1) Arithmetic operations:
Addition, subtraction multiplication, division
F5
F6
F7
(8) Digital logic operations:
AND operation, words
OR operation, words
Exclusive OR operation, words
F1, SHIFT F1
F2, SHIFT F2
F4, SHIFT F4
F6, SHIFT F6
(2) Call blocks as follows:
FB unconditional, FB conditional
FX unconditional, FX conditional
OB, PB, SB unconditional, conditional
DB, DX
F7
(3) Load and transfer operations
Load and transfer operand
F1, SHIFT F1
F2
F3, SHIFT F3
SHIFT F4
SHIFT F5
F1, SHIFT F1
F2, SHIFT F2
F3, SHIFT F3
F4
F5, F6
(4) SHIFT and rotate operations
SHIFT word/double word left
SHIFT word right
SHIFT word/double word with sign right
Rotate left, right
(6) Convert operations
BCD->binary, form 1’s compl., 16 bit
Binary->BCD, form 2’s compl., 16 bit
BCD->binary, form 2’s compl., 32 bit
Binary->BCD, 32 bit fixed point -> floating point,
floating point -> fixed point, 32 bit
F4, F6
(7) Comparator operations (between two
operands):
Compare for “equal to”, “not equal to”
Compare for greater than or equal to, less than or
equal to
Compare for “greater than”, “less than”
F1, F2
(9) Counter operations: counter value
incremented, decremented by 1
SHIFT F1
/F2
SHIFT F3/F5
SHIFT F4
(10) Timer operations:
Start timer as pulse, extended pulse
Start timer as ON/OFF delay
Start timer as stored on delay
SHIFT F6
SHIFT F7
(5) Binary latching operations:
Priority setting flip-flop
Priority resetting flip-flop
F4
Connector
F1, F2
F3, F5
F5 and
R/S
S/R
Explanation
7-9
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Rules for
Representation
The following rules apply to the non-elementary operations listed in
Table 7-3 in LAD:
1. All operations (1) to (10) in Table 7-3 are represented as long boxes in
which the operands are displayed on the left before the processing and
on the right the result of the processing. STEP 5 enters the operation
selected with the function keys in the long box itself.
2. Only one complex function is possible in a segment, i.e. a new segment
must always be opened.
3. Some function elements can be extended, i.e. the number of inputs can
be increased provided the operation allows. To do this, position the
cursor on the ”roof” of the box and press the vertical expand key.
4. The shift/rotate function (4) requires the shift parameter n to be entered
in the long box, i.e. the number of bits by which the content of the
ACCU is shifted left or right. The maximum possible shift depends on
the format of the operand (16 or 32 bits).
5. With the functions Math and Compare you can specify a different
operand type in the long box. The type fixed point number = F is the
default.
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long box.
7-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4.1
Arithmetic Operations
Overview
The operators ADD, SUB, MULT and DIV combine two operands in ACCU
1 and 2 to form a result in ACCU 1. The function corresponds to the
following STL statements:
load operand 1
load operand 2
execute the selected logic operation
transfer result to operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types : KF, DW, IW...
Example
Editing an ADD operation for two fixed point numbers:
1. Press *** or F6 =Seg End and then SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required operation, here F1 = ADD.
STEP 5 displays the long box with undefined inputs and outputs and the
default operand format F.
?????????
?????????
+F
KF + 12345
?????????
DW 12
+F
DW 14
3. Confirm the operand format by pressing the Return key.
4. Type in the 1st operand, in this case KF + 12345 and press the Return
key.
5. Type in the 3rd operand, in this case DW 12 and press the Return key.
6. Name the operand to which the result will be transferred (DW 14) and
press the Return key.
The segment now appears as shown on the right-hand side of the figure.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-11
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4.2
Block Calls
Overview
Using the STEP 5 block calls with which other blocks in the user program
can be called from any block allows structured programming. A block call is
represented in LAD either as an output (assignment) or as a long box when
calling a function block (FB/FX).
In an empty segment, you can input a call directly using the function keys.
In existing segments, you can insert and append calls with/without implicit
expanding of the rung.
Note
A LAD segment contains either only an unconditional block call or a logic
operation with a conditional block call. For this reason, if you press F4 =
Output the default JU or (=) (assignment) is displayed.
Example 1
Conditional program block call:
1. Position the cursor below the output symbol and press SHIFT F2 =
Blocks and SHIFT F4 = JC ....
2. Enter the destination block, in this case PB 24, in the input field above
the call symbol and complete the entry with the Return key.
I 10.0
j j
I 10.1
j j
I 10.2
j j
Example 2
Q 10.0
( )
PB 24
( JC )
Unconditional program block call:
Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F4 = JU ....
PB 24
( JU )
7-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Example 3
Unconditional FB call in an empty segment:
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F1 = JU FB.
The editor displays the “roof” of the block with the cursor in the labelling
field.
2. Type in the name of the function block to be called, in this case FB 10.
The function block with its formal operands is displayed in the form shown
on the left-hand side.
3. The cursor is positioned on the input field of the first actual operand.
Now type in the operand in absolute or symbolic form. Move to the
other fields using the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side.
FB 10
FB 10
TEST
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
7.4.3
INP1 OUTP
TEST
?????????
INP2
INP2
COUN
I 1.0
I 1.2
T 32
C8
INP1 OUTP
Q 1.0
INP2
INP2
COUN
Load and Transfer Operations
Overview
The function is displayed as a long box with the operand to the left and the
result to the right. The function SHIFT F3 = Shift and F7 = L/T correspond
to the following STL statements:
load operand (DW, DD, IW...),
transfer to operand (DW, DD, IW...).
After generating the long box (see above) you simply enter the operands
displayed as [?????].
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-13
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4.4
Overview
Shift and Rotate Operations
Shift and rotate operations belong to the supplementary operations (only
FB, FX). A shift/rotate operation is displayed in an empty segment as a
long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to the left before the shift operation
and the result to the right. After pressing the function keys SHIFT F3 =
Shift and the required function at the second key level, STEP 5 generates
the “undefined” long box in which you enter the required operation.
The character cursor flashes below the parameter n. Here, you enter the
number of bits by which the content of the operand will be shifted.
The function corresponds to the STL statements:
load operand
shift/rotate operand by n bits
transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Example
Shifting the input operand IW 12 seven bits to the right and transferring to
DW 12.
1. Press *** or F6 =Seg End followed by SHIFT F3 = Shift.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F1 = SRW.
STEP 5 displays the long box (left).
3. Position the cursor on the parameter n in the box, in this case 0, and
type in the number 7.
4. Type in the input and output operands.
Note
It is possible to change parameter n by selecting the long box and
positioning the cursor on the parameter with Shift –>.
7.4.5
Overview
Latching Operations
Using the latching functions, the RLO can be stored. You can specify how
the latching function works after pressing F5 = Bin Oper and then selecting
either F6 priority set or with F7 priority reset at the second key level. STEP
5 enters the operands with priority at the top of the long box.
The latching function is displayed as a box with 2 inputs and 1 output, S is
the set input, R is the reset input and Q is the output. Only one latching
function can be inserted in a segment.
The latching function corresponds to the following statements (STL):
7-14
A (N)
1st input operand
S (R)
Operand
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
A (N)
2nd input operand
R (S)
Operand
A
Operand
=
Operand (assignment)
Operand types: F m.n, Q m.n, D m.n ...
The latching function reacts in the following way to changes at the single
inputs depending on the function selected:
State at input
Binary output Q
S
R
0
0
Old state retained
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0 with S/R element 1 with R/S element
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and the required function key at the second
key level, STEP 5 generates an undefined long box at the position of the
long cursor in a LAD segment.
Example
Editing a latching operation with “reset” priority.
1. Position the cursor on an empty element or the contact for the set/reset
input and press F5 = Bin Oper and F7 = S.
STEP 5 displays the long box or inserts it in the segment.
?????????
?????????
S
?????????
R
I 2.1
j j
Q
F 1.0
S
Q 14.0
I 2.2
j j
?????????
R
Q
( )
2. Type in the operand ID for the memory location, in this case F 1.0 and
press the Return key.
3. Enter the input operands with F1 = NO contacts I 2.1 and I 2.2. Exit
each input field with the Return key.
4. Type in the output (Q) for scanning the binary signal state, in this case
Q 14.0 and press the Return key. Following this, press the Insert key.
Alternatively, press F4 = –()–, and then type in Q 14.0 and press the
Return key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-15
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4.6
Overview
Conversion Operations
Conversion operations (BINARY ↔ BCD, 1’s/2’s complement) belong to
the supplementary operations (only FB, FX). A conversion operation is
displayed in the empty segment as a long box with the operand in ACCU 1
to the left before the conversion and the result to the right. After pressing
SHIFT F4 = Convert and selecting the required function at the second key
level, STEP 5 generates the long box in which you can enter the operation.
This function corresponds to the statements (STL):
load operand
convert the operand
transfer the result to the operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types: DW, DD, IW...
After generating the long box (see above) you must simply type over the
token operands ?????.
7.4.7
Overview
Comparator Operations
The comparator operations combine two digital operands in ACCU 1 and
ACCU 2 to produce a binary result in ACCU 1.
The function corresponds to the statements (STL):
load operand 1
load operand 2
execute the selected comparison
result of logic operation.
A comparison is represented in an empty segment as a long box with the
operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to the left and the result of the comparison to
the right.
After pressing SHIFT F5 = Compare and selecting the required function at
the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box in which
you can enter the selected operation.
The selected comparator operation (! =, ><, >=, >, <=, <) is entered in the
left-hand side of the long box and the format of the operands to the right,
as follows:
F = fixed point number (16 bits)
D = double word (32 bits)
G = floating point number (32 bits)
Note
The type can only be modified directly once after activating the long box.
To change the type:
1. Position the long cursor on type
2. With Shift + cursor right, position the small cursor on the type identifier
3. Change the type
7-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Example
Operation to compare two fixed point numbers:
1. Open a new segment with *** or F6 =Seg End and then press SHIFT
F5 = Compare.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = >< Compare for not
equal to.
STEP 5 displays the long box with token inputs/outputs and the default
operand format F.
?????????
><F
?????????
?????????
KF + 100
><F
F 12.1
DW 34
( )
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the first operand, in this case KF + 100, and press the Return
key.
5. Type in the second operand, in this case DW 34, and press the Return
key.
6. With the cursor on the output, press F4 = –()–.
7. Identify the operand to which the result will be assigned, in this case
F 12.1, and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown above.
7.4.8
Digital Logic Operations
Overview
Digital logic operations belong to the supplementary operations (only FB,
FX). The operators AND, OR and XOR combine two digital operands in
ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 and the result is entered in ACCU 1. The functions
correspond to the statements:
load operand 1 (DW, IW, FW...),
load operand 2 (DW, IW, FW...),
combine the operands as words (AW, OW, XOW),
transfer the result to operand (DW, IW, FW...).
Example
AND operation of two operands in words.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 =Seg End and then press SHIFT F1 =
Math.
2. Select the required function, here F5 = AND.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-17
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs and outputs and the
selected format AW.
?????????
?????????
IW 124
AW
AW
????????? FW 10
DW 16
3. Type in the first operation, in this case IW 124, and press the Return
key.
4. Type in the second operand, in this case FW 10 and press the Return
key.
5. Identify the operand to which the result will be transferred, in this case
DW 16 and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side of the figure.
7.4.9
Overview
Counter Operations
A counter operation is displayed as a long box in the empty segment. The
counter operand is above the box. Depending on your selection at the
second key level, F1 = count down, F2 = count up, the first input of the
counter input is either a decrementing counter CD or an incrementing
counter CU and the second input is the opposite of the first. This results
from the rule that the first input of a counter must always be connected.
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and selecting the required function at the
second key level, STEP 5 generates the “undefined” long box with the
following inputs/outputs:
CD Decrement the counter value by one when the RLO changes from 0
to 1 at this input (positive going edge).
CU Increment the counter value by one when the RLO changes from 0
to 1 at this input.
S
Load the counter value from input CV when there is a positive
signal change (0 → 1) at the “set” input S.
CV Value to which the counter is set, decimal (BCD) coded
0 ... 999, operand type: KC, IW, FW, QW, DW.
R
Reset the counter to the value 0 when there is a 1 at this input.
The output Q is set to “0”.
BI
Current counter value in binary.
DE Current counter value in BCD.
Q
The output indicates whether the counter value is
zero = “0” or > zero: = “1”.
Counter operand:
Range of values:
7-18
C 0 ... C 255
0 ... 999
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Example
Editing a counter function count up.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 =Seg End and then press F5 = Bin Oper
and F2 = CU.
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs/outputs.
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
?????????
R
I 32.0
j j
F 2.0
j j
KC 255
E 32.1
j j
Q
?????????
?????????
?????????
C 10
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
DW 64
DW 66
F 12.1
R
Q
( )
2. Type in the operand (C10) and press the Return key.
3. Type in the operation for CU, in this case press F1 = NO contact and
type in I 32.0. Complete the input with the Return key.
4. Skip the operation for CD by pressing the DEL key.
5. Type in the operation for setting the counter, in this case press F1 = NO
contact, and type in F 2.0. Complete the input by pressing the Return
key.
6. Type in the counter value, in this case KC 255, and press the Return
key.
7. Press F1 = NO contact to reset input and type in the operand identifier
I 32.1, and press the Return key.
8. Type in the transfer of the counter value to the operands DW 64 and
DW 66 and press the Return key.
9. Press F4 = –()– at output Q and type in F 12.1 and press the Return
key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-19
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7.4.10
Overview
Timer Operations
Using the timer operations, you can program timed program sequences
and monitoring functions. You select the required timer function by pressing
F5 and selecting the function at the second key level with
SHIFT F1... SHIFT F5. STEP 5 enters the selected function in symbolic
form at the start input of the long box. The timer operand is above the box.
A timer function is started when the RLO at the start input changes. With
an OFF delay (SF) the RLO must change from 1 to 0, in all other cases
from 0 to 1. The parameters at the start input have the following meaning
(see also SHIFT F8 = Help):
Symbol
1–-–
1–-V
T ! – !0
T ! – !S
0 ! – !T
Key
SHIFT F1 (SP)
SHIFT F2 (SE)
SHIFT F3 (SD)
SHIFT F4 (SS)
SHIFT F5 (SF)
Meaning
Start timer as pulse
Start timer as extended pulse
Start timer as ON delay
Start timer as stored ON delay
Start timer as OFF delay
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and selecting the required function at the
second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box with the
following inputs/outputs:
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Symbol
TV
R
7-20
Operand for starting the timer function (the symbol corresponding to the timer function is shown in the table above).
Input for inputting the timer value.
Operand type: KT, IW, DW ...
The time is a combination of the timer value and the time
base. The timer value represents the number of time periods
for which the timer function is active. The time base specifies
the interval at which the timer value is changed.
e.g. KT = n.i;
n = timer value: 0 ... 999;
i = time base: 0 = 0.01s, 1 = 0.1s, 2 = 1s, 3 = 10s.
Reset input for the timer function. When this operand
changes to 1, the timer and Q are set to 0.
BI
Current timer value, binary coded.
DE
Current timer value, BCD coded.
Q
Output indicating that the timer is running (Q = 1) or stopped
or elapsed (Q = 0).
Timer number: T 0 ... T 255
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
Example
Editing a timer function with OFF delay.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 =Seg End and then press F5 = Bin
Oper+ SHIFT F5 = SF.
STEP 5 displays the long box
?????????
?????????
0!
?????????
TV BI
DE
?????????
?????????
R
Q
?????????
T20
0!
!T
?????????
I 20.0
KT 100.1
I 20.3
!T
TV BI
DE
R
DW 20
DW 22
F 22.1
Q
2. Type in the timer number, in this case T 20 and press the Return key.
3. Press F1 = NO contact as the operand to start the timer and type in
I 20.0 and press the Return key.
4. Type in the time KT 100.1 (10s) and press the Return key.
5. Press F1 = NO contact, type in the reset input I 20.3, and press the
Return key.
6. Enter the transfer of the timer value to the operands DW 20 and DW 22
and complete each input with the Return key.
7. Press F4 = –()– at output Q, type in F 22.1 and press the Return key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
7-21
Editing Ladder Diagrams (LAD)
7-22
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Overview
8
In the Control System Flowchart method of representation (CSF) the
control task is described by connecting function symbols. Based on the
circuit logic symbols complying with DIN 40700, the block functions are
displayed on the screen with operation symbols (DIN 40719, DIN 19339).
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
Docu
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
You can program in the Control System Flowchart representation in the
following STEP 5 blocks:
organization blocks OB
program blocks PB
sequence blocks SB
function blocks FB
extended function blocks FX.
STEP 5 stores the corresponding segment comments in the blocks
OBDO.nnn, PBDO.nnn etc. Segment titles are stored in the comment
blocks OC, PC etc.
It is advisable to enter and correct comments when editing a block and not
to write them directly in the documentation or comment blocks.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
8.1
General Aspects of Working with the CSF Editor
8-2
8.2
Simple Editing Functions
8-4
8.3
Complex Functions
8-9
8-1
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.1
General Aspects of Working with the CSF Editor
Ready to Start?
Before you start editing, check the project settings with the menu command
File Project Set F4. Make sure that the entries for the program file,
symbols file, mode, type of representation and comments are correct.
When editing existing blocks, you can change the type of representation
with SHIFT F5 = CSF (press once or twice).
Starting the Editor
Editor
STEP5 Block
Select the menu command Editor STEP5 Block. The Edit STEP 5
block(s) dialog box is displayed.
Once you have named your block, it is advisable to select the options
Update XRF and Update assignment list if you are working with symbolic
operands.
After confirming your entry with Edit, the CSF editor is started.
Screen Layout
A working field appears on the screen and the function key menu with the
symbols for entering functions and editing CSF segments.
The screen is divided into 48 fields (8 columns and 6 horizontal sections).
The horizontal sections are 3 lines high. CSF symbols are edited in the
columns 2 to 7.
The Control System Flowchart screen can be scrolled a maximum of 2.5
times up or down. Press SHIFT F8 = Help to obtain an explanation of the
function keys on the screen.
Editing
The editing field is divided into lines and columns in which you enter CSF
symbols using the function keys menu or the mouse. A symbol itself takes
up one column width. The identifiers of the inputs and outputs before and
after the symbol take up a further column.
As you build up your segment, you are supported intensively by STEP 5.
Connections and symbols of all types (e.g. symbol inputs/outputs for
counter or arithmetic functions) are generated automatically and can be
reached with the automatic cursor control. STEP 5 rejects inconsistent
configurations.
8-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
CSF
Representation
(1)
PB 3
-PROG 3
Segment 1
I 1.1
-INP 1
(2)
C:[email protected]
Segment title
0000
Input 1.1
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Edit
(3)
I
I
1.1
2.2
&
>=1
(4)
I
I
I
3.1
3.2
3.3
0
F 3.0
I 4.2
F 2.0
&
0
S
I
5.5
R
=
Q
Q 1.0
:BE
(22)
(23)
Message line
(24)
(25)
F
Math
1
&
Figure 8-1
F Blocks
2
3
F
4
Convert
F
Compare
5 Bin Oper
F Seg Com
6 Seg End
F
7
Extras
Enter
F
Help
8
Cancel
Segment in Control System Flowchart (Example)
Screen Lines
Table 8-1
F
>=1
Shift
The lines on the screen have the following meaning:
Explanation of the Screen Lines
Line
Display
Explanation
(1)
PB3
–PROG3
C:[email protected]
LIB=12345
LEN=19
Block type and number
Symbolic block name
Drive and program file
Library number
Block length in words
(2)
Segment 1
Segment title
Edit
Segment number
Text with max. 32 characters
STEP 5 mode
(3)
Symbolic operands
Assignment absolute operand → symb.
operand → operand comment, when the
cursor is located on an operand identifier
(4)... (22)
Editing area
Input fields for logic operations, calls and
operands
(23)
Message line
STEP 5 messages or prompts (red or on a
black background)
(24)...(25)
Function keys
Key assignment for the currently active
functions
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-3
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.2
Simple Editing Functions
Logic Operations
After you have selected the Editor, STEP 5 opens the block selected in the
job box at segment 1. If you are working with a new block, this is empty.
Using the function keys, you can now input the basic CSF symbols for
AND/OR operations on binary operands (Table 8-2). The left-hand column
of this table contains the operation for processing the operands which you
call in the edit mode using the keystrokes shown.
Table 8-2
Operation
Naming Operands
Logic operations in CSF (Control System Flowchart)
Function keys
Explanation
&
F1
AND operation
>=1
F2
OR operation
F3
Input
F4
Negated input
Bin Oper
F5
Call complex functions
#
F5 and F4
Connector
F5 and F5
Negated, connector
After you input a CSF symbol, the cursor jumps to the name field (max. 8
characters) for the operand. If you have selected a symbol length greater
than 8 characters in the project settings, STEP 5 only displays the first 8
characters. If you use longer symbolic operand names, make sure that
they are unique within the first 8 characters.
Example: you have the following assignment:
Operand
Symbol
F 100.1
F 1.1
F 1.7
Myflag 100
Myflag 1.1
Myflag 1.7
Comment
In CSF, the selected symbolic operand names are all displayed or printed
as Myflag1.
There are two methods of naming operands, as follows:
1. The operand can be named immediately after selecting a symbol
(automatic cursor positioning), or if you have exited the name field
[?????], you can return to it with the Return key.
2. Entering the operand names in the name fields of the completed
segment, guided by the long cursor.
8-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Editing Symbolic
Operands
When you press F1 = Disp Symb in the output mode, STEP 5 displays a
list of operands in absolute and symbolic form for the open segment.
You can then edit this list. If you use longer symbol names, make sure that
the names are unique within the first 8 characters. The symbolic operand
names are reduced to 8 characters on the screen and when printing in LAD
and CSF.
If you make changes, it is advisable to update the assignment list if you
have not already selected this function in the job box.
Note
You can only change the operand of a connector using the function
“Delete” and “New Entry.”
Reconfiguring a
Segment
If, while editing a segment its layout has become awkward (e.g. as a result
of repeated branches) you can redisplay the segment by pressing the
SHIFT F7 = Extras and F2 = New Disp even if the segment does not yet
have all the required parameters. The screen is then reconfigured and the
display layout optimized.
Note
You can only exit a segment or block when all the names and parameters
have been input correctly (make sure the formats are correct).
8.2.1
Editor Functions: Modifying and Deleting
Overview
When you input the first operator at the position marked by the long cursor
in the empty segment, a function block is created with two input operands
and one output. You can create a serial chain of functions with a maximum
of 5 AND/OR operators.
Modifying a
Segment
The number of input operands can be increased (see example):
1. You can append by positioning the long cursor below the lowest input of
the long box.
2. You can insert and position in a function block.
(limit = 2 1/2 times the screen height)
You can convert an input to a function block:
3. Place the cursor on the corresponding operand identifier and press F1
= & or F2 = >=1.
You invert an input
4. by positioning the cursor on the operand identifier and pressing F3 =
Input or F4 = Negated input.
The current input then has the opposite effect to the previous one. You
can modify an edited function by positioning the cursor on the function
identifier in the box and overwriting it with the required operation.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-5
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Deleting
The following rules apply when deleting operands and functions in
segments ( DEL):
1. An input located under the long cursor is deleted. The function block
itself is reduced in length by one line, see Figure 8-2 (A).
2. If you delete a connected input, the function element before this input is
also removed. The input is then displayed as non-connected, see
Figure 8-2 (B).
3. A function element with two operand inputs is removed. The remaining
operand then occupies the free input of the next block, see Figure 8-2
(C).
4. Function elements with two inputs (one of which is connected) are
removed from the segment after deleting the operand. The function
elements before the other input now influence the next block directly.
Example
Long cursor + DEL
&
I 10.0
I 10.1
ÌÌÌ
<1
I 20.0
I 10.0
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
I 10.0
&
I 10.1
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
I 10.1
&
(A)
I 10.1
<1
&
I 10.1
I 10.0
I 10.0
I 10.0
(B)
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
????????
(C)
<1
I 20.0
I 20.1
ÌÌ
ÌÌ
&
I 20.0
I 20.1
<1
I 10.1
<1
(D)
I 20.0
I 20.1
Figure 8-2
Deleting Operands and Functions (Example)
If you want to mark a named input operand as undefined, it is sufficient to
type in a question mark as the first character of the input field.
8-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Appending
Operands
Position the long cursor on the lower edge of the function block and
press F3. An undefined operand is added to the bottom of the block (A).
(A)
<1
I 10.0
I 20.0
ÌÌÌ
Long cursor +
Figure 8-3
Appending a
Function Block
<1
I 10.0
I 20.0
????????
F3
Appending Operands
Position the long cursor on the input operand to be replaced by a function
block and press F1 or F2.
STEP 5 places the selected function block with two inputs (if necessary
with implicit expanding) before the previous input. The operand identifier is
transferred to the upper input of the new block.
Horizontal and vertical expanding, i.e. in this case moving the segment to
the right and down is performed implicitly.
&
I 10.0
???????
<1
I 20.0
(B)
Figure 8-4
Inserting
Operands
Appending a Function Block
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Position the long cursor on the input of the function block above which
you want to insert an input operand.
2. Press SHIFT F7 = Extras, F7 = Exp Vert and then F3 = Input.
A non-connected operand is inserted in the block. After you have named
the operand, you can invert the input with F4.
I 10.0
&
I 10.1
Long cursor+
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F7
(Exp Vert) +
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
Figure 8-5
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
I 10.0
<1
????????
I 20.0
F3 (input)
Inserting Operands
8-7
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Inserting a
Function Block
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Position the long cursor on the input of the box before which you want
to insert a new function.
2. Press SHIFT F7 = Extras, F6 = Exp Hor and select the required
function, in this case F1 = &.
I 10.0
I 10.1
&
ÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌ
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
Editing
Connectors
&
????????
Long cursor + F6 (Exp Hor) +
Figure 8-6
&
I 10.0
<1
I 20.0
F1 ( & )
Inserting a Function Block
STEP 5 places the selected function block so that the upper input is
connected. The operand at the lower input is undefined.
Connectors and negated connectors are intermediate flags in binary logic
operations. A connector is input in CSF like a function block. If it follows the
last block of a segment it is handled and displayed as an output.
Inserting
You want the intermediate result written to a flag F20.1 at the output of the
AND block.
1. Name the connector, e.g. F20.1 (A) and press the Return key.
Connector Stack
You obtain a connector stack by
2. Positioning the cursor on the connector and pressing F5 = Bin Oper
again and F4 = # or F5 = / and typing in the flag name, in this case
F 30.1.
With implicit expanding, the previously entered connector is moved one
line down.
Connector before Output
Inputting connector F 20.1 before the output results in the situation shown
in (B).
I 10.0
&
I 10.1
<1
I 20.0
I 10.0
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Long cursor
(Exp Hor.)
+ F5
(Bin Oper) + F4
=
(#)
Q 10.1
&
/ F 30.1
# F 20.1
I 10.1
I 20.0
(A)
Figure 8-7
+ F6
<1
=
Q10.1
=
F20.1
(B)
Editing connectors
You can delete a connector by positioning the cursor on the connector and
pressing DEL.
8-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3
Complex Functions
Overview
Table 8-3
In the editing mode, the following functions can be called with SHIFT and
function keys or F5 = Bin Oper:
Complex Functions in CSF
Operation
Keys (function keys)
Math.
ADD, SUB
MULT, DIV
SHIFT F1
and
(with FBs/FXs)
AND
OR
XOR
SHIFT F1
and
Blocks
JU FB, JC FB
DO FX, DOC FX
JU..., JC...
C DB, CX DX
SHIFT F2
and
(Shift) L/T
SHIFT F3
and
SHIFT (with FBs/FXs)
SLW, SLD
SRW
SSW, SSD
RLD, RRD
Convert (with FBs/FXs)
DEF, CFW
DUF, CSW
DED, CSD
DUD
FDG, GFD
Compare
!=
><
>=
<=
>
<
F1, F2
F3, F4
(1) Arithmetic operations:
Addition, subtraction
multiplication, division
F5
F6
F7
(8) Digital logic operations:
AND operation, words
OR operation, words
Exclusive OR operation, words
F1, SHIFT F1
F2, SHIFT F2
F4, SHIFT F4
F6, SHIFT F6
(2) Call blocks as follows:
FB unconditional, FB conditional
FX unconditional, FX conditional
OB, PB, SB unconditional, conditional
DB, DX
F7
(3) Load and transfer operations
Load and transfer operand
SHIFT F3
and
F1, SHIFT F1
F2
F3, SHIFT F3
SHIFT F4,
SHIFT F5
SHIFT F4
and
F1, SHIFT F1
F2, SHIFT F2
F3, SHIFT F3
F4
F5,
F6
SHIFT F5
and
Bin Oper
CD, CU
F5
and
Bin Oper
SP, SE
SD, SF
SS
F5
and
F1,
F3,
F2
F5
F4,
F6
F1, F2
(4) SHIFT and rotate operations
SHIFT word/double word left
SHIFT word right SHIFT word/double word
with sign right
Rotate left, right
(6) Convert operations
BCD->binary, form 1’s compl., 16 bit
Binary->BCD, form 2’s comp., 16 bit
BCD->binary, form 2’s compl., 32 bit
Binary->BCD, 32 bit
Fixp -> floatp, floatp -> fixp, 32 bit
(7) Comparator operations (between two
operands):
Compare for equal to, not equal to
Compare for greater than or equal to, less
than or equal to
Compare for greater than, less than
(9) Counter operations:
Counter value incremented, decremented
by 1
SHIFT F1/F2
SHIFT F3/F5
SHIFT F4
(10) Timer operations:
Start timer as pulse, extended pulse
Start timer as ON/OFF delay
Start timer as stored on delay
F6
F7
(5) Binary latching operations:
Priority resetting flip-flop
Priority setting flip-flop
F4
Connector
F5 and
R/S
S/R
Explanation
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
#
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F6 and
8-9
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Rules for
Representation
In CSF, the following rules apply to the complex functions listed in
Table 8-3:
1. All operations (1) to (10) in Table 8-3 are represented as long boxes in
which the operands are displayed on the left before the processing and
on the right the result of the processing. STEP 5 enters the operation
selected with the function keys in the long box itself.
2. Combinations of several complex functions are possible in a segment.
Make sure, however, that the data types match up.
A combination of complex function elements with binary function
elements is only possible with the complex element comparator.
Parallel branches are not allowed.
3. Some function elements can be extended, i.e. the number of inputs can
be increased provided the operation allows.
4. The shift/rotate function (4) requires the shift parameter n to be entered
in the long box, i.e. the number of bits by which the content of the
operand is shifted left or right. The maximum possible shift depends on
the format of the operand (16 or 32 bits).
5. With the functions Math and Compare you can specify a different
operand type in the long box. The type fixed point number = F is the
default.
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long box.
8-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3.1
Arithmetic Operations
Overview
The operators ADD, SUB, MULT and DIV combine two operands in ACCU
1 and 2 to produce a result in ACCU 1. Arithmetic operations can be
cascaded with other complex functions.
At the highest input:
arithmetic operations
shift operations
conversion operations
digital logic operations
At the output:
arithmetic operations
shift operations
conversion operations
comparator operations
digital logic operations
The arithmetic operations correspond to the statements (STL):
load operand 1;
load operand 2;
execute the required logic operation;
transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Operand types : KF, DW, IW...
Examples
Editing an ADD operation for two fixed point numbers:
1. Press *** or F6 = Seg End and then SHIFT F1 = Math.
2. Select the required operation, here F1 = ADD.
STEP 5 displays the long box with undefined inputs and outputs and the
default operand format F.
?????????
?????????
Figure 8-8
+F
KF + 12345
?????????
DW 12
+F
DW 14
Editing an Add Operation
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the 1st operand, here KF + 12345 and press the Return key.
5. Type in the 2nd operand, in this case DW 12 and press the Return key.
6. Name the operand to which the result will be transferred (DW 14) and
press the Return key.
The segment now appears as shown on the right-hand side of the figure.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-11
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Inserting an Input
Position the long cursor between the two inputs and press F3 = Input and
name the input.
DW 10
DW 12
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
Figure 8-9
Appending an
Input
Long cursor + F3 = Input
DW 10
xF
xF
???????
DW 14
DW 12
DW 14
Inserting an Input
Position the long cursor at the bottom of the function box and press F3 =
Input and name the input.
DW 10
DW 12
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
xF
DW
14
DW 10
DW 12
???????
xF
DW 14
Long cursor + F3 = Input
Figure 8-10
Inserting a
Complex Function
at the Input
Appending an Input
Position the long cursor on the 1st input operand, select a complex
function, in this case SHIFT F1 = Math and F1 = ADD and label the
operand.
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
DW 10
DW 10
xF
DW 14 ???????
DW 12
Long cursor + SHIFT F1 (Math)
+ F1 (ADD)
Figure 8-11
Inserting a
Complex Function
at the Output
xF
DW 14
DW 12
Inserting a Complex Function at an Input
Position the long cursor on the output operand, select a complex function,
in this case SHIFT F1 = Math and F1 = ADD and label the operand.
DW 10
DW 12
xF
ÌÌÌÌ
ÌÌÌÌ
DW 14
Long cursor + SHIFT F1 (Math)
+ F1 (ADD)
Figure 8-12
8-12
+F
DW 10
xF
+F
DW 12
DW 14
???????
Appending a Complex Function at an Output
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3.2
Block Calls
Overview
Using block calls in STEP 5, you can call further blocks in the user
program from any block allowing a structured program sequence. A block
call is programmed in CSF as a long box. Only one block call per segment
is allowed.
In an empty segment, you can enter a block call directly using the function
keys.
Example 1
Conditional Program Block Call.
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and SHIFT F4 = JC.. in the empty segment.
2. Type in the input operands, in this case I 10.1 and I 10.2. Specify the
destination block, in this case PB 24 in the right input field and
complete with the Return key.
?????????
&
?????????
I 10.1
Example 2
JC
PB 24
Conditional Program Block Call
Unconditional Program Block Call
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F4 = JU.. in the empty segment.
2. Specify the destination block, in this case PB 24, in the right input field
and complete with the Return key.
JU
Figure 8-14
Example 3
?????????
&
I 10.2
Figure 8-13
JC
JU
?????????
PB 24
Unconditional program block call
Unconditional FB call in an empty segment
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Blocks and F1 = JU FB.
The editor displays the “roof” of the block with the cursor in the labelling
field.
2. Type in the name of the function block to be called, in this case FB 10.
The function block with its formal operands is displayed.
3. Type in the name in absolute or symbolic form. Move to the other fields
using the Return key.
FB 10
FB 10
TEST
?????????
?????????
?????????
?????????
Figure 8-15
INP1 OUTP
TEST
????????? I 1.0
INP2
INP2
COUN
I 1.2
T 32
C8
INP1 OUTP
Q 1.0
INP2
INP2
COUN
Unconditional FB Call
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-13
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3.3
Overview
Loading and Transfer Operations
The function is displayed as a long box with the operand to the left and the
result to the right. The function SHIFT F3 = Shift and F7 = L/T correspond
to the following STL statements:
load operand (DW, DD, IW...),
transfer to operand (DW, DD, IW...).
After generating the long box (see above) you simply enter the operands
displayed as [?????].
8.3.4
Overview
Shift and Rotate Operations
Shift and rotate operations belong to the supplementary operations (only
FB, FX). A shift/rotate operation is displayed in an empty segment as a
long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to the left before the shift operation
and the result to the right.
After pressing the function keys SHIFT F3 = Shift and the required function
at the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box in which
you enter the required operation.
The character cursor flashes below the parameter n. Here, you enter the
number of bits by which the content of the operand will be shifted.
The function corresponds to the STL statements:
load operand
shift/rotate operand by n bits
transfer result to operand (ACCU 1).
Example
Shifting the input operand IW 12 seven bits to the right and transferring to
DW 12.
1. Press *** or F6 = Seg End followed by SHIFT F3 =Shift.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = SRW. STEP 5 displays
the long box (left).
?????????
Figure 8-16
SRW 0
????????? IW 12
SRW 7
DW 12
Shifting the Input Operator
3. Position the cursor on the parameter n in the box, in this case 0, and
type in the number 7.
4. Type in the input and output operands.
Note
It is not possible to change the parameter n later.
8-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3.5
Latching Operations
Overview
Using the latching functions, the RLO can be stored statically outside the
processor. You can specify how the latching function works after pressing
F5 = Bin Oper and then selecting either F6 priority set or F7 priority reset at
the second key level. STEP 5 enters the operands with priority at the top of
the long box.
The latching function is displayed as a box with 2 inputs and 1 output, S is
the set input, R is the “reset” input and Q is the output. Only one latching
function can be inserted in a segment.
The latching function corresponds to the following statements (STL):
A (N)
1st input operand
S (R)
Operand
A
2nd input operand
R (S)
Operand
A (N)
Operand
=
Operand (assignment)
Operand types: F m.n, Q m.n, D m.n ...
The latching function reacts in the following way to changes at the single
inputs depending on the function selected:
State at input
S
R
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
State at output Q
Old state retained
0
1
0 with S/R flip flop 1 with R/S flip flop
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and the required function key at the second
key level, STEP 5 generates an undefined long box at the position of the
long cursor in a CSF segment.
Example
Editing a latching operation with reset priority.
1. Press *** or F6 = Seg End and then F5 = Bin Oper and F7 = S/R.
?????????
?????????
?????????
S
R Q
=
?????????
=
Q 14.0
F 1.0
Figure 8-17
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
I 2.1
S
I 2.2
R Q
Editing a Latching Operation
8-15
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
2. Type in the operand ID for the memory location, in this case F 1.0 and
press the Return key.
3. type in the input operands I 2.1 and I 2.2. Exit each input field with the
Return key.
4. Type in the output for scanning the binary signal state, in this case
Q 14.0 and press the Return key. Following this, press the Insert key.
8.3.6
Overview
Conversion Operations
Conversion operations (BINARY ↔ BCD, 1’s/2’s complement) belong to
the supplementary operations (only FB, FX). A conversion operation is
displayed as a long box with the operand in ACCU 1 to the left before the
conversion and the result to the right. They can be cascaded with other
complex functions at the input and output.
After pressing SHIFT F4 = Convert and selecting the required function at
the second key level, STEP 5 generates the long box in which you can
enter the operation.
This function corresponds to the statements (STL):
load operand
convert the operand
transfer the result to the operand (ACCU 1)
Operand types: DW, DD, IW...
After generating the long box (see above) you must simply type over the
token operands ?????.
8.3.7
Overview
Comparator Operations
The comparator operations combine two digital operands in ACCU 1 and
ACCU 2 to produce a binary result in ACCU 1. They can be cascaded with
other complex functions at the input.
The function corresponds to the statements (STL):
load operand 1
load operand 2
execute the selected comparison
result of logic operation.
A comparison is represented in an empty segment as a long box with the
operands in ACCU 1 and 2 to the left and the result of the comparison to
the right.
After pressing SHIFT F5 = Compare and selecting the required function at
the second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box in which
you can enter the selected operation.
8-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
The selected comparator operation (! =, ><, >=, >, <=, <) is entered in the
left-hand side of the long box and the format of the operands to the right,
as follows:
F = fixed point number (16 bits)
D = double word (32 bits)
G = floating-point number (32 bits)
Note
The type can only be changed once directly after calling the long box.
Changing the type:
1. Position the long cursor on type
2. Position the small cursor on the type letter with Shift + Cursor right
3. Change the type
Example
Operation to compare two fixed point numbers:
1. Open a new segment with *** or F6 = Seg End and then press SHIFT
F5 = Compare.
2. Select the required operation, in this case F2 = >< compare for not
equal to.
STEP 5 displays the long box with token inputs/outputs and the default
operand format F.
Figure 8-18
?????????
><F
?????????
Q
KF + 100
><F
DW 34
Q
=
?????????
=
F 12.1
Editing Compare Operations
3. Confirm the operand format with the Return key.
4. Type in the first operand, in this case KF + 100, and press the Return
key.
5. Type in the second operand, in this case DW 34, and press the Return
key.
6. Identify the operand to which the result will be assigned, in this case
F 12.1, and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown above.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-17
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8.3.8
Overview
Digital Logic Operations
Digital logic operations belong to the supplementary operations (only FB,
FX). They can be cascaded with other complex functions such as
arithmetic operations.
The operators AND, OR and XOR combine two digital operands in ACCU
1 and ACCU 2 and the result is entered in ACCU 1.
The functions correspond to the statements:
load operand 1 (DW, IW, FW...),
load operand 2 (DW, IW, FW...),
combine the operands as words (AW, OW, XOW),
transfer the result to operand (DW, IW, FW...).
Example
AND operation on two operands in words.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Seg End and then press SHIFT F1 =
Math.
2. Select the required function, here F5 = AND.
STEP 5 displays the long box with the token inputs and outputs and the
selected format AW.
?????????
AW
?????????
Figure 8-19
IW 124
????????? FW 10
AW
DW 16
AND Operation
3. Type in the first operation, in this case IW 124, and press the Return
key.
4. Type in the second operand, in this case FW 10 and press the Return
key.
5. Identify the operand to which the result will be transferred, in this case
DW 16 and press the Return key.
The segment then appears as shown on the right-hand side of the figure.
8.3.9
Overview
8-18
Counter Operations
A counter operation is displayed as a long box in the empty segment. The
counter operand is above the box. Depending on your selection at the
second key level, F1 = count down, F2 = count up, the first input of the
counter input is either a decrementing counter CD or an incrementing
counter CU and the second input is the opposite of the first. This results
from the rule that the first input of a counter must always be connected.
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and selecting the required function at the
second key level, STEP 5 generates the “undefined” long box with the
following inputs/outputs:
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
CD Decrement the counter value by one when the RLO changes from 0
to 1 at this input (positive going edge).
CU Increment the counter value by one when the RLO changes from 0
to 1 at this input.
S
Load the counter value from input CV when there is a positive
signal change (0 → 1) at the set input S.
CV Value to which the counter is set, decimal (BCD) coded
0 ... 999, operand type: KC, IW, FW, QW, DW.
R
Reset the counter to the value 0 when there is a 1 at this input. The
output Q is set to 0.
BI
Current counter value in binary.
DE Current counter value in BCD.
Q
The output indicates whether the counter value is
zero = 0 or > zero: = 1.
Counter operand:
Range of values:
Example
C 0 ... C 255
0 ... 999
Editing a counter function count up.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Seg End and then press F5 = Bin
Oper and F2 = CU. STEP 5 displays the long box with the undefined
inputs/outputs.
?????????
?????????
CU
?????????
?????????
?????????
CD
S
CV BI
DE
?????????
R
Q
?????????
?????????
=
?????????
C 10
I 32.0
CU
F 2.0
KC 255
CD
S
CV BI
DE
I 32.1
Figure 8-20
R
Q
DW 64
DW 66
=
F 12.1
Editing a Counter Function
2. Type in the operand (C10) and press the Return key.
3. Type in the operand for CU, in this case I 32.0. Complete the input with
the Return key.
4. Skip the operation for CD by pressing the DEL key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-19
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
5. Type in the operand for setting the counter, in this case F 2.0. Complete
the input by pressing the Return key.
6. Type in the counter value, in this case KC 255, and press the Return
key.
7. Type in the reset input, in this case I 32.1, and press the Return key.
8. Type in the transfer of the counter value to the operands DW 64 and
DW 66 and press the Return key.
9. Type in F 12.1 at the output and press the Return key.
8.3.10
Overview
Timer Operations
Using the timer operations, you can program timed program sequences
and monitoring functions. You select the required timer function by pressing
F5 and selecting the function at the second key level with SHIFT F1 ...
SHIFT F5. STEP 5 enters the selected function in symbolic form at the
start input of the long box. The timer operand is above the box.
A timer function is started when the RLO at the start input changes. With
an OFF delay (SF) the RLO must change from 1 to 0, in all other cases
from 0 to 1. The parameters at the start input have the following meaning:
Symbol
1–-–
1–-V
1 ! – !0
1 ! – !S
0 ! – !T
Key
SHIFT F1 = SP
SHIFT F2 = SE
SHIFT F3 = SD
SHIFT F4 = SS
SHIFT F5 = SF
Meaning
Start timer as pulse
Start timer as extended pulse
Start timer as ON delay
Start timer as stored ON delay
Start timer as OFF delay
After pressing F5 = Bin Oper and selecting the required function at the
second key level, STEP 5 generates the undefined long box with the
following inputs/outputs:
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
8-20
Symbol
Operand for starting the timer functions (the symbol corresponding to the timer functions is shown in the table above).
TV
Input for inputting the timer value.
Operand type: KT, IW, DW ...
The time is a combination of the timer value and the time
base. The timer value represents the number of time periods
for which the timer function is active. The time base specifies
the interval at which the timer value is changed.
e.g. KT = n.i;
n = timer value: 0 ... 999;
i = time base: 0 = 0.01s, 1 = 0.1s, 2 = 1s, 3 = 10s.
R
Reset input for the timer function. When this operand
changes to 1, the timer and Q are set to 0.
BI
Current timer value, binary coded.
DE
Current timer value, BCD coded.
Q
Output indicating that the timer is running (Q = 1) or stopped
or elapsed (Q = 0).
Timer number: T 0 ... T 255
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
Example
Editing a timer function with OFF delay.
1. Open a segment with *** or F6 = Seg End and then press F5 = Bin
Oper + SHIFT F5 = SF.
?????????
Figure 8-21
?????????
0! !T
?????????
TV BI
DE
?????????
R
I 20.0
T 20
0! !T
?????????
?????????
Q
KT 100.1
TV BI
DE
I 20.3
R
Q
=
?????????
=
F 22.1
DW 20
DW 22
Editing a Timer Function with Off Delay
2. Type in the timer number T 20 and press the Return key.
3. Type in I 20.0 to start the timer and press the Return key.
4. Type in the time KT 100.1 (10s) and press the Return key.
5. Type in the reset input I 20.3, and press the Return key.
6. Enter the transfer of the timer value to the operands DW 20 and DW 22
and complete each input with the Return key.
7. Type in F 22.1 at the output and press the Return key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
8-21
Editing Control System Flowcharts (CSF)
8-22
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9
Editing Data Blocks
Overview
Data blocks contain fixed or variable data for the user program to work
with.
The block title and line comments are stored in the corresponding
comment block DC/DCX. STEP 5 stores a block comment in the
documentation block DBDO.nnn/DXDO.nnn.
Both block types are generated automatically when you enter the edited
DB/DX. They are not transferred to the PLC or to an EPROM/EEPROM.
Although it is possible to edit directly in these blocks, it is advisable to input
titles and comment texts in the DB/DX since all the assignments can be
recognized here.
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
Docu
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
After introducing you to the basics of editing a data block, the individual
functions of the editor are described separately.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
9.1
Structure of a Data Block
9-2
9.2
Editing Data Blocks
9-4
9-1
Editing Data Blocks
9.1
Structure of a Data Block
Overview
A data block created with the DB editor is stored in the preset program file
(→ Project) and consists of the following parts:
1. Block preheader
2. Block header
3. Block body and if required
4. Comments
When you load the STEP 5 program in the PLC, only the block header (2)
and the block body (3) are transferred to the PLC memory.
DW 0
DW 1
DW 2
DW 3
DW 4
DW 5
DW 6
Block identifier
Block type
Block number
PG identifier
L i b r a r y n u m b e r
Block length with header (no. of words)
4
1
5
5
5
4
2
0
3
1
3
2
3
8
3
2
4
C
6
5
7
4
7
A
0110 0111
1000
0111
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Block header
5 data words
Block body
max. 2043 data words
DW 2042
Figure 9-1
Block Preheader
Structure of a Data Block
The block preheader contains the data formats of the data words in the
block body. The length of the preheader depends on the number and order
of data formats in the DB. A DVn is generated for a DBn and a DVXn for a
DXn. When you delete a DB or DX, its block preheader is automatically
deleted along with it.
Preheader
Header
Body
Header
Body
DC
DO
Program file
Figure 9-2
9-2
PLC memory
Block Preheader
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
If the block preheader does not exist when you transfer a data block from
the PLC memory or EPROM/EEPROM submodule to the preset program
file, the following message appears on the screen:
Preheader for this block does not exist
a line with possible formats is displayed. Using this line, you can set the
data format you require.
Block Header
The block header is always 5 data words long. The programmer
automatically enters the following information:
Block start-up ID
Block type (DB, DX)
Block number (number between 0 and 255)
Programmin device ID
Library number (number between 0 and 99999)
Block length (including the length of the block header)
Block Body
The block body contains the data words in ascending order starting with
data word DW 0. Each data word takes up one word (16 bits) in the
memory. Your user program works with these data words.
DBs created with the DB editor can contain up to 2043 data words. On the
other hand, a data block generated in the user program can contain a
maximum of 4091 data words in the block body. The maximum length of a
block also depends on the memory capacity of the PLC.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9-3
Editing Data Blocks
9.2
Editing Data Blocks
Calling the Editor
Editor
Data Block
Select the menu command Editor Data Block.... The Edit data block(s)
dialog is displayed on the screen.
If you want to edit a data block, type in its name in absolute format (for
example DB15) or its symbolic name.
If you want to search for a particular data word in one or more data blocks,
enter the block(s) in the block list in absolute form (maximum 6 DBs) or
enter one DB with a symbolic name. You can then enter the number of the
data word, e.g. 123.
If you press SHIFT F8 = Help, STEP 5 displays a list of possible inputs.
Click < Edit > to open the data block editor.
Screen Layout
Figure 9-3 shows the editing field of the DB editor with the function keys of
the basic menu and a displayed data block.
You can press SHIFT F8 = Help to obtain an explanation of the function
keys on the screen.
Entries
The editing field is divided into lines and columns in which you enter data
using the function keys menu or the mouse.
Saving a Block
Press F7 = Enter or the Insert key.
Canceling the
Function
Press ESC.
9-4
If you interrupt the intended sequence with another operation, the PG displays
the message: First finish repetition factor! The operation
cannot be executed at this point because the editor is in the repetition mode
and this must first be terminated.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
Input Field
Figure 9-3 shows the editing field of the DB editor with the function keys for
the basic menu and with a data block displayed.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
LIB=
DB2
(6) (7)
C:[email protected]@ST.S5D
(8) (9)
(10)
Data block title
LEN= 37
(13)
/ 22
(11) (12)
1:
2:
3:
4:
6:
8:
9:
10 :
11 :
12 :
13 :
14 :
15 :
16 :
28 :
30 :
F
KH
KF
KF
KG
KG
KT
KT
KC
KC
KY
KY
KM
KM
KS
S
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
F Lib no
FFFF;
- 32768;
+32767;
- 1469368 - 38;
+1701412+39;
001.0;
999.3;
000;
999;
000,001;
255,255;
00000000 00000000;
11111111 11111111;
’Text line with 24 chars”;
’END’;
F
Data word comment
Hex number, upper limit
Fixed point no., lower limit
Fixed point no, upper limit
C Floating point no, lower limit
Floating point no, upper limit
Timer value/time base, 0.1s
Timer value/time base, 9990 s
Counter value, lower limit
Counter value, upper limit
Byte or address of a DB
Byte or address of a DB
Bit pattern, lower limit value
Bit pattern, upper limit value
ASCII characters enclosed in ’ ’
ASCII characters enclosed in ’ ’
F Line Fwd F Line Back F Title
1 Expand DC 2 Delete DC- 3 Expand DF 4 Delete DF 5 KG Test
Figure 9-3
Fields and Entries
Table 9-1
No.
6
F Comment F
7 Enter
Help
8 Cancel
Input field of the DB Editor
The fields on the screen have the following significance:
Displayed Fields
Input Field
Explanation
(1)
DB field
This displays the block number (here: DB 2) that you entered when you filled
in the job box.
(2)
Program file
This field displays the drive and the name of the program file (here: drive C:
with the program file DATAxxST.S5D).
(3)
LIB field
In this field you can input a maximum 5-digit long DB library number (number
from 0 to 99999) for the DB.
(4)
LEN field
This field displays the block length in data words, including the block header.
The number after the slash is the length of the DB preheader. This display is
updated whenever you enter a complete line.
(5)
Title field
Here, you can enter a maximum 32-character long title for the data block.
(6)
DW number
field
This displays the number of the data word (DW). If the format involves
several DWs, the number of the lowest DW is displayed. You can jump to the
last data word of the data block by selecting the last DW number or a
number higher than the last DW number.
(7)
: field
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Both at this point and in the format field you can insert or delete lines using
the function keys. If you delete a line, the whole line including the comment
is deleted. When you exit the line with the cursor, all following DW numbers
are updated.
9-5
Editing Data Blocks
Table 9-1
No.
Displayed Fields, continued
Input Field
Explanation
(8)
Repetition
factor field
With the repetition factor, you can reproduce 1 up to a maximum of 12 DWs
with the same format. The repetition factor specifies how often the marked
block of data words will be entered in the DB. The highest possible repetition
factor is 255. All the data words up to and including the cursor position are
repeated. The following DW numbers are updated automatically. Data word
comments are not reproduced, they remain in their old position.
Before executing a repetition factor, the DB editor checks whether the
number of DWs to be reproduced plus the existing DWs will exceed the
maximum number of 2043 DWs (without DB header). If this is the case,
STEP 5 displays the message: Memory or internal buffer full. The
function is then not executed.
(9)
Format field
You input the DW format you require in this field. If the field is already
displaying a format, you can overwrite it. If a format cannot be represented,
the identifier F appears in the format error field. If you convert a format that
requires several DWs (KG), the next DW is also converted. If several DWs
can be represented by a single DW (S, KS) only one DW will be converted.
(10)
Editing area
Here, you input data in the current format. If non-interpretable data occur
when you change a format, this is indicated in the error field by F.
(11)
Format error
field
With data formats requiring several DWs (KS, S, KG), a comment allocated
to a DW that is not the first DW cannot be displayed on the screen. A “C”
indicates these suppressed comments.
(12)
Comment
display field
With data formats requiring several DWs (KS, S, KG), a comment allocated
to a DW that is not the first DW cannot be displayed on the screen. A “C”
indicates these suppressed comments.
(13)
Comment field
Here, you can input a data word comment, if required, for each data word.
This is a text up to a maximum of 32 characters long. After the 32nd
character, the cursor jumps to the beginning of the comment line again. You
can exit the comment line by pressing the Return key. You can only display
suppressed comments by changing the data format.
9-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
Function Keys
The function keys of the basic menu
F
F Lib.No.
1 Expand DC 2 Delete DC
F
F Line Fwd
3 Expand DF 4 Delete DF
F Line Back
5 KG Test
F Title
6
Key
9.2.1
F Comment
7 Enter
F Help
8 Cancel
Explanation
F1 = Expand DC
Expand the data word comment; i.e. all the
following comment fields are moved one line down.
F2 = Delete DC
Delete a data word comment; i.e. all the following
comment fields are moved one line up.
F3 = Expand DF
Expand a format; i.e. all the following format fields
are moved one line down.
F4 = Delete DF
Delete a format; i.e. all the following format fields
are moved one line up. In the last line of a DB with
the format KG this function is only executed if you
change the format to KM.
F5 = KG Test
Floating point test. The floating point number in the
data field is displayed in hexadecimal form with its
exponent (1 byte) and mantissa (3 bytes). This can
also be modified. Exit with the Insert key.
F7 = Enter
The data block is stored in the preset program file.
F8 = Cancel
End editing without storing.
SHIFT F2 = Lib No
Input the library number.
SHIFT F4
= Line Fwd
Move down one line.
SHIFT F5
= Line Back
Move up one line.
SHIFT F6 = Title
Block title.
SHIFT F7=
Comment
Block comment.
SHIFT F8 = Help
Display explanation of the function keys.
Editing Block Comments
Overview
Block comments are texts with which you can add information to data
blocks. The maximum number of characters of all block comments in a
block is 16 K characters. Block comments are stored in a documentation
file (DOCFILE) as follows:
The block and the documentation file are stored in the preset program
file. A maximum of 255 documentation files can be stored in one
program file under S5-DOS.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9-7
Editing Data Blocks
Documentation files are not transferred to the PLC or to an
EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
The number of the documentation file corresponds to the block number,
e.g. DBDO.015 belongs to DB 15.
The documentation files are assigned to the corresponding blocks and
preceded by the identifier #:
DBn → #DBDO.nnn
DXn → #DXDO.nnn
Note
Use the printer control character $EJECT to achieve a form feed. This
string must be in upper case letters, otherwise STEP 5 does not recognize
the command.
Ready to Start ?
You have selected [X] with comments in the settings (→ Project). The basic
menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The DB contains at least
one data word.
How to Input
Comments
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Press SHIFT F7 = Comment or press the COM key twice.
STEP 5 opens the empty editing field for the block comment or displays
an existing text. To make sure that the editor can assign the text to the
data block, it automatically generates a 7-character string $1 @.
Do not delete or modify this string, otherwise STEP 5 can no longer
identify the block comment as belonging to the particular data block.
2. Edit the text using the alphanumeric keyboard.
3. You can complete each line with the Return key.
STEP 5 marks the end of a line with a vertical arrow. If your text covers
more than one line, a line break is set automatically.
Inserting
Characters
With F1 = Insert/Overwrite you can change the mode. The selectable mode
is always displayed.
1. Position the cursor on the position in the text where you want to insert
characters.
2. Press F1 = Insert and insert the text.
3. To exit the insert mode: press F8 = Return or the Insert key.
F
1 Insert
F
2 Delete
F
5
Insert L
F
6 Delete L
F
1 Overwrite
9-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
Deleting
Characters
Position the cursor on the first character to be deleted.
1. Press F2 = Delete.
2. Position the cursor after the last character to be deleted.
3. Press F2 = Delete.
Completing/Saving
a Block Comment
Press F8 = Return or the Insert key.
STEP 5 displays the data block to be edited on the screen. The text input
up to this point is retained. If you save the data block, STEP 5 then saves
the block comment.
Press the Insert key.
9.2.2
Inputting the Block Title
Overview
The block is identified by the block title. A block title is a maximum of 32
characters long. You can use both upper and lower case letters.
The title is stored in the comment block belonging to the data block. STEP
5 assigns this name automatically (DCn is assigned to DBn). The comment
block number is the same as the data block number, e.g. DC 123 belongs
to DB 123.
Ready to Start ?
You have selected Comments : yes in the settings (→ Project). This basic
menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. There is at least one
data word entered in the DB.
How to Input the
DB Title
Press SHIFT F6 = Title or press the COM key. The cursor jumps to the
input field for the block title.
1. Type in the text or correct an existing text.
2. Press the Return key.
The title is buffered, but is only saved in the comment block in the program
file when you save the whole block.
9.2.3
Influencing the Length of the Block Preheader
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The length of the block preheader depends on the number of data formats
and their order. If you enter data words with the same format one after the
other and avoid changing the data formats too often you obtain a shorter
block preheader.
9-9
Editing Data Blocks
Example
Starting point
The data formats are mixed: DW0/1=KH, DW2/3=KF, DW4=KH and
DW5=KF. The block preheader is 10 data words long.
DB3
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
LEN= 11 / 10
KH=
KH=
KF=
KF=
KH=
KF=
FFFF;
1A2B;
+ 12345;
– 00099;
80F1;
+ 06787;
The data formats are grouped together: DW 0 to DW 2=KH, DW 3 to DW
5= KF. The block preheader is now 6 data words long.
DB3
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
LEN= 11 / 6
KH =
KH =
KH =
KF=
KF=
KF=
FFFF;
1A2B;
80F1;
– 00099;
+ 06787;
+ 12345;
When you output data blocks from the PLC, the block preheader must exist
in the program file, otherwise STEP 5 displays the message
Preheader does not exist for this block.
In this case, you must select one of the possible formats (KM, KH, KY...).
9.2.4
Entering the Library Number
Overview
The library number is a 5-digit number (0 to 99999) to identify STEP 5
blocks.
Ready to Start ?
The block in which you want to input the library number is open. The DB
body must contain at least one DW.
How to Input the
Library Number
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib no.
The cursor is located in the displayed LIB field.
2. Type in the LIB no or modify the existing LIB no.
3. To exit the LIB field, press F7 = Enter or the Insert key.
If you want to exit the field without making an entry, press F8 = Cancel or
ESC.
9-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
9.2.5
Changing Data Formats
Overview
You can change data formats by positioning the cursor on the format and
overwriting it.
Example
You want to change the format in DW 1 to a bit pattern.
1: KH = FFFF;
1. Position the cursor on the format field.
2. Type in the characters KM.
Result:
1: KM = 11111111 11111111;
9.2.6
Inputting Data Words
Overview
If the preset program file does not contain a DB with the DB number you
have selected, STEP 5 displays the message: Data element does
not exist.
You can then start to input data words. If the DB already exists, it is
displayed beginning at DW 0.
You can enter a maximum of 2043 data words in a data block (body). If you
use formats requiring several data words, STEP 5 displays the lowest data
word.
Limit value
Format
lower
Meaning
upper
KH
0000
FFFF
Hexadecimal number
KF
–32768
+32767
Fixed point number
KG
–1469368–38
+1701412+39
Floating point number
KT
000.0
999.3
Time value + time base
KC
000
999
Counter value
KY
A
000.000
255.255
Byte or address of a DB
KM
00000000.000000 11111111.111111
00
11
Bit pattern
KS
S
ASCII characters, max. 24
characters per line
Text format
The following table shows the number of data words required for the
formats.
Format
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
DWs occupied
KH, KF, KT, KC, KY, KM
1
KG
2
KS, S
1 to 12
9-11
Editing Data Blocks
How to Input Data
Words
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Type in the required data format in the format field.
STEP 5 automatically adds the equality sign.
2. Type in the data in the specified data format following the equality sign.
STEP 5 automatically adds a semicolon, displays the next editing line
and repeats the data format you have selected in this line.
The following examples explain how to input different data formats.
Example 1
Hexadecimal numbers:
You want to input KH = 0000 in DW 0 and KH = FFFF in DW 1.
1. Type in the characters KH.
STEP 5 automatically adds the equality sign.
2. Type in the hexadecimal string 0000.
STEP 5 automatically completes the line and displays the next line in
the format KH.
3. Type in the hexadecimal string FFFF.
The cursor is now positioned on DW 2.
Example 2
Floating point numbers
You want to enter the floating point number –0,1469368*10–38 in DW 2 and
the number + 0,1701412*1039 in DW 4. With some negative floating point
numbers, rounding errors can occur.
The cursor is located on DW 2.
0:
1:
2:
KH = 0000;
KH = FFFF;
KH =
1. Position the cursor on the format field.
2. Type in the character string KG.
3. Type in the numerical strings –1469368 –38 and +1701412 +39
Result:
1:
2:
4:
9-12
KH = FFFF;
KG = –1469368–38;
KG = +1701412+39;
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
Example 3
ASCII characters
You want to input the characters text lines with 24 chars starting from DW
6 with the format KS and S and END in DW 28.
The cursor is positioned on DW 6.
4:
6:
KG = +1701412+39;
KG =
1. Position the cursor on the format field
2. Type in the characters KS.
3. Type in text lines with 24 chars, the cursor jumps to the next line at
DW 18.
4. Overwrite data format KS with S. Type in the characters END.
The characters END are ASCII characters and are not interpreted as
the end of the block.
Result:
4: KG = +1701412+39;
6: KS = text lines with 24 chars;
18: –S = ‘END’;
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9-13
Editing Data Blocks
9.2.7
Inputting Data Word Comments
Overview
Data word comments are texts that you can enter in each line of a data
format.
A data word comment is a maximum of 32 characters long and always
assigned to the first data word (with format KS, S and KG). You can input
data word comments in upper case and lower case letters and they can be
up to 32 characters long. Data word comments are stored in the comment
block belonging to the data block. STEP 5 assigns the name of the
comment block automatically (DCn for DBn). The comment block number
is the same as the data block number, e.g. DC 123 belongs to DB 123.
Ready to Start ?
You have selected [X] with comments: yes in the project settings (Section
4.1.1). The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The DB
contains at least one data word.
How to Input Data
Word Comments
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Position the cursor on the relevant data word line with SHIFT and
cursor right.
2. Type in a text with a maximum of 32 characters or correct an existing
text.
After the 32nd character, the cursor jumps to the start of the comment field.
3. Press the Return key.
9.2.8
Overview
Storing a Comment
The comment block is generated automatically when you first store the
data block with comments.
If the comment block already exists, STEP 5 displays the message: DCn
already in destination file, overwrite?
Press the Insert key to store the comment.
9-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
9.2.9
Reproducing the DWs
Overview
With this function you can reproduce a group of DWs (1 to 12 data words
of one format). The repetition factor “n” specifies how many times the
marked data words are required in the DB. You can select a number
between 2 and 255 as the repetition factor. When you reproduce a group of
data words, you must take into account the maximum data length in a DB
(2043 words).
If there are too many data words for a DB, STEP 5 displays
Memory or internal buffer full.
The function is not executed.
When you reproduce a group of data words, the original block is included
in the reproduced blocks. This means that if you specify n repetitions of the
group, on completion of the function, the group exists n times. The DW
numbers coming after the reproduced groups are updated.
If you enter a one or two digit repetition factor, you must pad out the
number with blanks or type in the character ( < ) or exit the field using the
cursor right key. You then position the cursor in the last format field to be
reproduced. The function is executed when you press the Return key.
Example
You want data words 1 and 2 twice in the DB. The basic menu of the DB
editor is displayed on the screen.
Initial situation
Result
0:
1:
2:
3:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
KF = +00123;
KH = 8F1A;
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 001,255
KF = +00123;
KH = 8F1A;
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 8F1A
KH = 4BBB;
KY = 001,255;
1. Position the cursor after 1: with SHIFT and cursor left.
2. Type in the number 2.
3. Move the cursor to the right into the editing field and position it on the
number 8 either with the character < and the cursor right key twice or
the cursor right key four times or the space bar twice and cursor
right twice.
4. Move the cursor down to the number 4 in DW 2.
5. To reproduce the data words, press the Return key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9-15
Editing Data Blocks
9.2.10
Testing Floating Point Numbers
Overview
Floating point numbers are positive and negative fractional numbers and
are represented as an exponential number. You enter the format KG at the
PG for floating point numbers. Floating point numbers always occupy a
double word (32 bits) in the PLC memory. The mantissa occupies 3 bytes
and the exponent 1 byte. If you press the function key F7 = KG Test you
can display floating point numbers in hexadecimal format and modify them.
Ready to Start ?
The basic menu of the DB editor is displayed on the screen. The DB
contains at least one data word.
Example
Testing the floating point number 0,1234567 +12 in hexadecimal format.
The floating point number is in data word 1.
KG = +
1234567+ 12
1. Position the cursor on the + of the mantissa.
2. Press F5 = KG Test.
The number is now displayed in hexadecimal format beside the
floating point number:
KG =
+ 1234567+ 12
25
72FA5F
Exponent Mantissa
3. To terminate the display, press ESC or Insert. You can change the
exponent and mantissa in the hexadecimal format.
4. To enter your changes, press the Insert key.
5. To discard your changes, press ESC.
9-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing Data Blocks
9.2.11
Inserting / Deleting a Line
Inserting a line
Using various keys, you can insert or delete DWs and comment lines in a
DB.
Cursor on
Key
:
field
Forma Editing Comme
t field
area
nt field
Result
Expand
vertical
Line inserted, DW and
comment line moved
one line down from
cursor position.
F3
= Expand
DF
Data format inserted,
data format moved
one line down from
cursor position,
comments not moved.
F1
= Expand
DC
Comment line
inserted, DWs not
moved, comments
moved one line down
from cursor position.
Deleting a Line
Cursor on
Key
“:”
field
Forma Editing Comme
t field
area
nt field
Result
Delete key
Data word and
comment line deleted,
following lines moved
one line up.
F4
= Delete
DF
Data format deleted,
following data formats
moved one line up,
comments not moved.
F2
= Delete
DC
Comment deleted,
following comments
moved one line up.
Gray shading indicates that the function possible at this cursor position.
Note
If you use F3 = Expand DF or F4 = Delete DF, the content of the data
block can be changed when using the format KG owing to rounding
up/down errors.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
9-17
Editing Data Blocks
9-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
10
Editing DB Screens
Overview
DB screens are special data forms for the S5-135U and S5-155U. The
parameters you enter depend on the CPU in the PLC. These DB screens
belong to the particular PLC and do not contain comments.
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Single DB Screens
Docu
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
The following DB screens can be used:
DB 1
I/O assignment
This contains a list of the digital inputs and outputs
(I/Os with relative byte addresses from 0 to 127), IPC
flag inputs and outputs for the S5-135U and the timer
field length.
DX 0
Defaults of certain system program functions for the
for the S5-135U S5-135U, e.g. for processing the PLC start-up in
multiprocessor operation.
Defaults of some system program functions for the
DX 0
for the S5-155U S5-155U, e.g. cold restart, warm restart, process
interrupts etc.
S5-155H
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
10.1
Editing DB Screens
10-2
10.2
Editing the DX 0 Screen (for the S5-135U)
10-4
10.3
Editing the DX0 Screen (for S5-155U)
10-6
10-1
Editing DB Screens
10.1 Editing DB Screens
DB1 I/O
Assignment for the
S5-135U
In multiprocessor operation, each CPU must be assigned digital inputs and
outputs, IPC flags and the timer field length. The PG displays a table on
the screen in which you can enter these assignments as decimal numbers.
The numerical values are stored consecutively in the DB.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Session settings:
Program file
Name of the current program file
Mode:
Online, if a PLC is connected and you want to edit in
the PLC.
For more information about the settings refer to File Project Set F4.
Starting the Editor
Editor
DB Screen...
Select the menu command Editor DB Screen.... The Edit DB screen
dialog box is displayed on the screen.
1. Decide whether you want to edit the block in the program file or in the
PLC.
2. Type in the block, e.g. DB 1.
3. Select DB1, I/O assignment in the list box with F3 and enter the
settings with < Edit >.
The PG displays the I/O assignment dialog.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
DB
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
IPC flag inputs
IPC flag outputs
Timer field length
F Delete L F Delete E F
1 Insert L 2 Insert E 3
Figure 10-1
10-2
Edit
1 - I/O assignment:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
,
,
F
4
– ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
F
5
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
F
6
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
F
7
,
,
,
,
Enter
,
,
,
,
F
8
,
,
,
,
Help
Cancel
I/O Assignment Screen
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing DB Screens
The feasible and permissible numerical values depend on the configuration
of the programmable controller. Refer to the manual of your particular
programmable controller.
Entering the Data
The cursor is in the first input field of the DB screen. Follow the steps
outlined below:
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to enter or overwrite a
value.
2. Type in the value in decimal.
After three digits, the cursor automatically jumps to the next field. If you
press the Return key, you jump to the next line.
Insert a
Line/Element
Position the cursor in the line before which you want to insert a line or
element and press F1 = Insert L or F2 Insert E.
Delete a
Line/Element
Position the cursor in the line you want to delete and press the delete
segment key.
Delete a Character
Press the DEL key or overwrite with blanks.
Enter the Screen
Press the Insert key.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
DB
Edit
1 - I/O assignment:
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
IPC flag inputs
IPC flag outputs
Timer field length
F Delete L F Delete E F
1 Insert L 2 Insert E 3
Figure 10-2
1,
2,
3, 120, 121,
,
,
,
,
0,
3,
4,
5, 118, 119, 120, 122, 123, 124,
2,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
126, 127,
1, 17, 18, 19, 21, 21, 22, 23, 24,
:
0,
,
,
,
,
,
,
128, 129, 254, 255,
3,
4,
5,
6,
8,
8,
9, 222,
,
:
2,
:
,
:
:
F
4
F
5
F
6
F
7
Enter
F
8
Help
Cancel
Example of a Completed DB Screen for the S5-135 U
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
10-3
Editing DB Screens
10.2 Editing the DX 0 Screen (for the S5-135U)
DX 0 for the
S5-135U
DX 0 contains the system data for the S5-135U in the form of a DB screen
for this PLC. How to complete the screen is described in the programming
instructions for the PLC.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Session settings:
Program file:
Name of your current program file.
Mode:
Online, if a PLC is connected and you want to edit in
the PLC.
For more information about the settings refer to → Project.
Editor
DB Screen...
Editing
Select the menu command Editor DB Screen.... The Edit DB screen
dialog box is displayed.
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Specify whether you want to edit the block in the program file or in the
PLC.
2. Type in the block e.g. DX0
3. Select DX0 for S5-135U.
4. Enter your selections with the Return key. The PG displays the DX 0
screen shown below:
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
DXO - param ass (S5 135U
Block: DX
.O
Edit
CPU 928B, CPU 928, CPU 922)
RESTART
(C = COLD, W = WARM RESTART)
_1
(1=W AFTER POWERUP
(2=C AFTER POWERUP
(3=C WITH REM., ONLY
FOR CPU 928B)
Synchronize multiprocessor start
YES
Block transfer of IPC flags
NO
Addressing error monitoring
YES
Cycle time monitoring (X 10 MS)
15
(R–PROC.: 1 – 400)
(CPU 928: 1 – 600)
256
(R–PROC.: 1 – 128)
(CPU 928: 1 – 256)
No. of timer cells
Accuracy of float. point arithmetic
#24-BIT mantissa – only CPU928, -B#
F
1
Figure 10-3
10-4
F
2
F
F
3 Select 4
F
5
16 -
BIT - MantissA
F
F
6 Continue 7
Enter
F
8
Help
Cancel
DX 0 Screen for the S5-135 U, Page 1
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing DB Screens
F3 = Select
F3 = Input
F6 =
Continue
F7 = Enter
F8 = Cancel
Display possible parameters at the cursor position or
Input the parameter at the cursor position using the
keyboard.
Go to the next page or return to the previous one.
Enter and save the data.
Return to the previous menu.
The feasible and permissible numerical values depend on the configuration
of the programmable controller. Refer to the manual for your particular
programmable controller.
Values deviating from the basic setting are displayed red or inversed on the
screen. The cursor is located in the first input field of the DX 0 screen.
DX 0 for S5-135U
Page 2
With F6 = Continue, you display the page 2 of the DX0 screen.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
Edit
DXO - param. ass. (S5 135U: CPU 928B, CPU 928, CPU 922)
Block: DX
1
System stop if event occurs and error OB does not exist:
Address. error (OB 25)
_ YES
Cycle error (OB 26)
Yes
NO
Timer error (OB 33)
Yes
Controller err(OB 34)
Yes
Acknowl. error (OB 23,24)
Command code error (OB 27,29,30)YES
Runtime error (OB 19,31,23)
Process int. servicing
YES
LEVEL
- triggered
Interruptability of user program by interrupts:
Mode 1
1: All interrupts at block bounds
2: All interrupts at operation bounds
3: Only process interrupts at operation bounds
4: Only proc. and controller interrupts at op. bounds
X: (X=10,...17) Time int. from OB10 - OBX and controller/procInts. at op. boundaries #only poss. with CPU 928, -B#
F
1
Figure 10-4
F
2
F
F
3 Select 4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
Enter
F
8
Help
Cancel
DX0 Screen for the S5-135 U, Page 2
Entering the Data
Follow the steps below:
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to change a value.
2. Select the parameter with F3 = Select or if F3 = Input is displayed, type
in the parameter using the keyboard.
3. To call page 2 of the DB screen, press F6 = Continue and type in the
parameters as on page 1.
4. To enter DX 1, press the Insert key or to cancel your input press ESC.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
10-5
Editing DB Screens
10.3 Editing the DX0 Screen (for S5-155U)
DX 0 for the
S5-155U
DX 0 contains the system data for the S5-155U in the form of a DB screen
for this PLC. How to complete the screen is described in the programming
instructions for the PLC.
Settings for the
Editing Session
Session settings:
Editor
DB Screen...
Editing
Program file:
Name of your current program file.
Mode:
Online, if a PLC is connected and you want to edit in the
PLC.
Select the menu command Editor DB Screen.... The Edit DB screen
dialog box is displayed.
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Specify wether you want to edit the block in the program file or in the
PLC.
2. Type in the block e.g. DX 0
3. Select DX 0 for S5-155U CPU 946/947 in the list box (F3) and enter the
settings with < Edit >.
The PG displays the DX 0 screen shown below:
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
DXO - param. ass. (S5 155U
Block: DX
.O
Edit
CPU 946/947)
Mode:
-150U
Restart after power up:
1
(1 = warm restart
(2 = cold restart)
(3 = manual start)
Warm restart procedure:
1
(1 = warm restart
(2 = cold restart with memory)
Number of timer cells:
256
(0...256)
Cycle time monitoring ( X 10 MS ):
20
(11...255)
Synchronize multiprocessor start:
YES
Block transfer of the IPC flags:
NO
F
1
Figure 10-5
10-6
F
2
F
F
3 Select 4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
Enter
F
8
Help
Cancel
DX0 Screen for the S5-155 U, Page 1
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing DB Screens
F3 = Select
Displays possible parameters at the cursor position or
F3 = Input
Input the parameter at the cursor position using the
keyboard.
F6 =
Continue
Goes to the next page or returns to the previous one.
F7 = Enter
Enter and save the data.
F8 = Cancel
Return to the previous menu.
Values deviating from the basic setting are displayed red or inversed on the
screen. The permitted values depend on the configuration of the
programmable logic controller.
DX 0 for S5-155U,
page 2
With F6 = Continue, you can display page 2 of the DX0 screen
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOLZ
Edit
DXO - param. ass. (S5 155U, CPU 946/947)
Block: DX
.O
Time int.:
Time int. servicing: YES
Basic clock ( X 10 MS ): 10
Clock pulse process.: 1
Priority: 1
( 1..255)
( 1=Factor 1, 2, 5, 10
( 2=Factor 1, 2, 4, 8)
Hardware process int. (only 155U mode) :
System
System
System
System
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
A/B:
E:
F:
G:
NO
NO
NO
NO
Priority:
Priority:
Priority:
Priority:
2
2
2
2
Process int. input byte 0 (only in 150U mode) :
Process int.:
F
1
Figure 10-6
F
2
YES
F
F
3 Select 4
Priority: 2
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
Enter
F
8
Help
Cancel
DX0 Screen for the S5-155 U, Page 2
Entering the Data
Follow the steps below:
1. Position the cursor in the field in which you want to change a value, e.g.
Mode S5-155U or S5-150U.
2. Select the parameter with F3 = Select or if F3 = Input is displayed, type
in the parameter using the keyboard.
3. To call page 2 of the DB screen, press F6 = Continue and type in the
parameters as on page 1.
4. To enter DX 0, press the Insert key or, to cancel your input, press ESC.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
10-7
Editing DB Screens
10-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11
Editing the Assignment List
Overview
With symbolic programming, you can specify a string of alphanumeric
characters, e.g. BUTTON-ON instead of an absolute operand, e.g. I 1.1.
Before you can program with symbolic operands, you must create a list of
assignments between the absolute and symbolic operands using the
STEP 5 symbols editor. While making these assignments, you can also
write an operand comment for each operand.
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Docu
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Page
11.1
General Aspects of Working with the Editor
11-2
11.2
Creating the Assignment List
11-6
11.3
Editing Support
11.4
Modifying the Assignment List
11-9
11-14
11-1
Editing the Assignment List
11.1 General Aspects of Working with the Editor
Ready to Start?
You can select the length of the symbolic operands and the operand
comments (File Project Set F4, see Section 4.1.1)
symbolic operand:
8 to 24 characters (8 default),
comment:
max. 40 characters (40 default).
These settings are valid for all your work with the assignment list. You can
increase the length easily later. You can, however, only decrease the
length to that of the longest symbol or comment. The files ?????Z?.INI
must first be deleted (see Section 11.4 Management Assignment Lists
Delete INI).
The assignments and modifications to the assignments are made in the
assignment list. After editing, this file is converted to the symbols file
(*Z0.INI) when you store the source file.
You must enter the name of the symbols file in the settings. This name is
then automatically used for the assignment list.
Calling the Editor
Editor
Assignment List
F7
Select the menu command Editor Assignment List. The editor for the
assignment list (*Z0.SEQ) is called immediately. STEP 5 then displays an
(empty) assignment list with columns for the following:
– absolute operands,
symbolic operands,
operand comments and
→ additional comments, beginning with a semicolon.
→ form feed (character string PA)
Creating an
Assignment List
To create the assignment list, follow the steps outlined below.
1. You edit the assignment list as the source file (extension *Z0.SEQ).
2. The assignment list is translated into the symbols file (three files with
the extensions Zx.INI, x = 0, 1, 2) when you store the symbols file. If
errors occur during the conversion, STEP 5 writes the errors in an error
file (extension *ZF.SEQ). You can display or print out this file with the
functions 〈→ Management, Assignment lists, Output Error List).
If you have assigned texts to the function keys for editing the
assignment list (→ Programmable function keys) the file *ZT.SEQ is
also created.
11-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
Assignment list
Symbols file
[email protected]@Z0.INI
[email protected]@Z0.SEQ
convert
[email protected]@Z1.INI
[email protected]@Z2.INI
[email protected]@ZT.SEQ
Error during
conversion
File for programmed
function keys
Figure 11-1
[email protected]@ZF.SEQ
Error file
Creating an Assignment List
3. The stored symbols file is used to translate the user program into
machine code and for the output.
Permitted Operand
Types
The following table lists all the operand types to which you can assign a
symbolic name in the assignment list.
Table 11-1
Operand
Overview of the Permitted Operand Types
Explanation
Operand
Explanation
C
Counter
IW
Input word
D
Bit in data word
OB
Organization block
DB
Data block
OW
Word in ext. I/Os
DD
Data double word
OY
Byte in ext. I/Os
DL
Data word, left byte
PB
Program block
DR
Data word, right byte
PW
Peripheral word
DW
Data word
PY
Peripheral byte
DX
Extended data block
Q
Output
F
Flag
QB
Output byte
FB
Function block
QD
Output double word
FD
Flag double word
QW
Output word
FW
Flag word
S
Extended flag
FX
Extended function block
SB
Sequence flag
FY
Flag byte
SD
Ext. flag double word
I
Input
SW
Extended flag word
IB
Input byte
SY
Extended flag byte
ID
Input double word
T
Timer
Table 11-2
Overview of Permitted Operand Types
Note
Variables blocks (VB) can also be assigned a symbolic name.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11-3
Editing the Assignment List
Screen Layout
The lines and areas of the editing field have the following significance:
(1)
(2)
Assig. list: C:STEP5\S5_DATEN\EXAMP1Z0.SEQ
Symbol
Operand
(3)
Line: 1
insert
Comment
(4)
Text 1
(5) F
1 Mark
F Text 2
F Text 3
F Text 4
F Mode
F Page Fwd F Page Back F Help
2
3
4 Find
5 Replace
6 Enter
Paste
Cut
7 Save
Figure 11-2
Screen Layout with Lines and Areas of the Editing Field
Table 11-3
Screen Areas
8 Cancel
Screen Areas
Line
11-4
Explanation
(1)
Drive and name of the assignment list. The name is preset
with the name of the symbols file selected in the settings.
Up to 32 characters of the complete file name are
displayed. If the name is longer, a shortened version is
displayed.
(2)
Number of the line in which the cursor is located.
(3)
Mode display, can be switched over between insert and
overwrite mode with SHIFT F5 = Mode.
(4)
Editing Area This area is divided into three columns:
Operand
Column for entering the absolute operands. This column
width cannot be changed
Symbol;
Column for entering the symbolic operands,The column
width depends on the setting you made in
Object\Setting\Page2.
Comment;
Column for entering the operand comments.The column
width depends on the setting in page 2.
(5)
Function key menu for calling editing functions
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
Function Keys
The keys have the following effects:
F1*
= Mark
Stores a selected text (line, text field or text you have typed in)
in the buffer from where you can copy the text to any part of the
assignment list using F2* = Paste. Stores texts in memory that
have been typed in and can be called using the function keys
SHIFT F1 = Text 1 to SHIFT F4 = Text 4.
F2*
= Paste
F3 *
= Cut
Fetches a text copied with F1*= Mark and pastes it at the cursor
position.
F4*
Find operands, lines, text passages or strings or go to the
beginning or end of the assignment list. If you enter a search
key, the text string will only be found if it is an exact match
including upper and lower case letters.
= Find
Deletes the line containing the cursor or deletes a selected
passage of text. The deleted text is written to the buffer and
allows text to be inserted using F2* = Paste. A text you put in
the buffer previously is lost.
F5 *
= Replace
Replaces character strings (maximum 20 characters including
blanks) with another character string. The search key must be
identical to the string to be replaced including upper and lower
case characters.
F6
= Save
Save the source file without conversion, e.g. if you want to take
a break. You can resume work with the assignment list
immediately.
Complete the editing session and store the assignment list. The
conversion to the symbols files is started automatically.
F7
= Enter
F8
= Cancel
SHIFT F1
= Text 1
SHIFT F2
= Text 2
SHIFT F3
= Text 3
SHIFT F4
= Text 4
SHIFT F5
= Mode
SHIFT F6
= Page Fwd
SHIFT F7
= Page
Back
SHIFT F8
= Help
Cancel the editing session without storing the assignment list.
Output text 1 with programmed function key.
Output text 2 with programmed function key.
Output text 3 with programmed function key.
Output text 4 with programmed function key.
Select the editing mode: insert or overwrite.
Page one screen down.
Page one screen up.
Display the function key assignment.
Keys with * call further key levels
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11-5
Editing the Assignment List
11.2 Creating the Assignment List
Procedure
Type in the character string for the absolute operand, e.g. I 1.1.
1. Position the cursor in the symbols column using the mouse or TAB.
2. Type in the character string for the symbol without preceding it with a
hyphen, e.g. Signal 1.
In the assignment list itself, you do not enter the hyphen before the
symbolic operand. The column width corresponds to the symbol length you
selected in the project settings (see Section 4.1.1). If you do not make an
entry in the symbols column (the symbols field is empty) STEP 5 displays
the prompt:
Accept absolute operand as symbol?
Operand
Comments
Yes
The character string of the absolute operand is used as the symbolic operand in the symbols file. In the assignment list, this field
remains empty. The symbolic operand is only entered in the assignment list following a conversion (→ Management, → Convert
INI > SEQ).
No
The absolute operand is not used as the symbolic operand, the
field remains empty.
If you want to add an explanatory text to the symbolic operands, a
maximum 40 character wide comment column is available. The operand
comment can also be input if you have selected Comments: no in the
settings (see Section 4.1.1). The operand comments (upper and/or lower
case letters) are not separated, but are also stored in the symbols file.
1. Position the cursor in the comments column with the mouse or TAB.
2. Type in the character string for the operand comment, e.g. example of
a comment.
3. Exit the line with the mouse or press the Return key.
Additional
Comment
If there is no space for your comment, you can also add an additional
comment. To do this, type in the character ( ; ) as the first character in the
operand column followed by the required additional comment. The
character ( ; ) marks the line as an additional comment line. The semicolon
must always be in the first column of the operand field. You can enter
additional comments in any line.
The number of characters available for entering an additional comment is
the total of the operand length (10 characters) the preset symbol and
comment length and the characters available in between the columns.
Depending on the preset symbol and comment lengths, 19 to 76
characters are possible.
The special character ( ; ) ( Fig. 11-3 ) can no longer be deleted by the
editor. If you want to eliminate this character, you must delete the whole
line (→ F3 = Cut, F1 = Line ).
11-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
Note
Additional comments and printer control characters only exist in the
assignment list. If you generate an assignment list from the symbols file
using → Management, Convert INI > SEQ, additional comments and
printer control characters (.PA) are lost.
Form Feed
If your assignment list is long, you can divide it into pages by entering a
control character. To do this,
type in .PA in the operand field beginning in the first column.
You cannot make any further entries in this line.
When you call up and output the assignment list, this control character
produces a form feed in the printout. The control character is not entered in
the symbols file (*Z0.INI).
Complete Editing
Follow the steps below:
1. Press F7 = Enter.
The assignment list is stored and translated into the symbols file. If no
errors occur, STEP 5 displays the message n lines processed,
no errors found.
(n = number of lines).
2. Click on OK or press the Return key.
STEP 5 exits the editor and returns to the menu.
Special Characters
For symbols, blanks and most special characters can be used with the exception
of backslashes “\”. Illegal characters are rejected with an error message.
Note
Whenever possible do not start or end with a blank. They can hardly be
recognized on the screen or in printouts!
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11-7
Editing the Assignment List
Errors when
Editing
If one error occurs during the translation, STEP 5 displays the message
error found in line n. Absolute parameter does not
match OPID”. (OPID = operand identifier).
The editor remains active, the incorrect line is displayed as the first line on
the screen. After you have eliminated the error in the assignment list, you
can start a new translation by entering again.
If several errors occur, STEP 5 displays the message:
n lines processed, m errors found. Display error list?:
Yes:
No:
the error list is displayed
you exit the editor
STEP 5 records the error in the *ZF.SEQ file.
You can output this error list with the management function
→ Assignment lists, Output Error List.
Assig. list: C:EXAMP1Z0.SEQ
Operand
Line:
12
- Insert -
Comment
Symbol
I 1.0
Signal
Example of comment
IW 124
IWORD124
Input word 124
Q 1.0
OUTP. 1.0
Output 1.0
QB 122
QBYTE122
Output byte 122
QD 100
QD-100
Output double word 100
F 1.0
FLAG. 10
Flag 10
S4095.7
S-FLAG
New flag 4095.7
; An additional comment begins with a semi-colon.
; The comment length is the sum of the columns:
; Operand + symbol + comment + spaces between
New flag, flag word 64
SW 64
S-F 64
Counter 6
C 6
COUNT 6
; Form feed with the characters
; .PA
F Text 1 F Text 2 F Text 3 F Text 4 F Mode
1 Mark
Figure 11-3
11-8
2 Paste
3 Cut
4 Find
Line: 1
F Page Fwd
5 Replace 6 Save
F Page Back F Help
7 Enter
8 Cancel
Example of the Assignment List
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
11.3 Editing Support
Overview
STEP 5 provides editing functions when you create the assignment list and
they can be activated using the function key menu. The individual functions
are described below.
F1 = Mark
F Text 1
1 Mark
F Text 2
2 Paste
F Text 3
3 Cut
F
4
F
1
F
2
F
3 Field Sta
F
4 Field End
Line
Text
Text 4
Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
5
File
F Page Fwd
6 Fct Keys
With this key, you can write selected lines, character strings and whole
fields of lines to a buffer, from where you can fetch it again when it is
required (copy). You can also transfer text fields to a different assignment
list.
F1
= Line
Mark the line containing the cursor so that it can be copied
elsewhere.
F2
= Text
Mark a text you have typed in (max. 40 characters) for
copying.
F3
Mark the start of a field of lines (including the line in which
= Field Sta the cursor is located).
Note on the repetition factor
The field start character @ is set until the field is marked.
F4
= Field
End
Mark the end of a field of lines (including the line in which
the cursor is located).
This field can also be transferred to another assignment list,
→ F5 = File
F5
= File
Save the marked field in a different assignment list. This file
does not need to exist first.
F6
You can assign texts you have typed in (max. 40 characters)
= Fct Keys to four function keys so that you can call up regularly
recurring strings during the editing session
(→ Programmable function keys).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11-9
Editing the Assignment List
F2 = Paste
F
1
Text 1
Mark
F
1
Line
F Text 2
2 Paste
F
3
Text 3
Cut
F
2
F
3
Field
Text
F Text 4
4 Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
4
F
5
File
A line, text you have typed in or a field of lines is inserted before the line in
which the cursor is located, i.e. pasted from the buffer. You can specify a
repetition factor if you wish to copy the content of the buffer several times.
You can also insert a different assignment list in the assignment list you are
working on.
Note on the repetition factor
The cursor cannot be positioned on the input field for the repetition factor,
it only jumps to this field after a number has been entered in the repetition
factor line.
F1
= Line
F2
= Text
F3
= Field
F5
= File
The marked line or a line written to the buffer with the delete
function is inserted before the line in which the cursor is
located.
The text you have typed in and marked is inserted before
the line in which the cursor is located.
The marked field of lines or a previously deleted field is
inserted before the line marked by the cursor.
The marked field of lines is transferred (copied) to a different
assignment list whose name you must specify. The file must
already exist, and its previous contents will be overwritten.
Note
If you accidentally overwrite a file, you can recreate it by generating the
assignment list from the symbols file using → Management, Convert INI >
SEQ. The conversion, however, ignores comments and control characters.
11-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
F3 = Cut
F Text 1
1 Mark
F Text 2
2 Paste
F Text 3
3 Cut
F
1
F
2
F
F
3 Field Sta 4 Field End
Line
F
4
Text 4
Find
F Mode
5 Replace
F
5
With this function you can delete a line or field. The deleted line or field is
written to the buffer. If you have already copied a field or line to the buffer
this is overwritten. You can then copy the content of the buffer elsewhere
→ F2 = Paste.
F1 = Line
Delete the line containing the cursor. The line is written to
the buffer.
Mark the start of a field.
F3 = Field
Sta
Note
The field start character @ is set until the field is marked.
F4 = Field
End
Mark the end of a field. As soon as you press this key or
click on it with the mouse, the block is deleted and written
to the buffer.
F4 = Find
F
1
F
1
Text 1
Mark
Text +
F Text 2
2 Paste
F Text 3
3 Cut
F
4
F
2
F
3 Operand+
F
4 Operand –
F
5
F Page Fwd
6 To Start
F Page Back
7
End
Text –
Text 4
Find
F Mode
5 Replace
Line
The cursor is moved to a specified line or to the beginning or end of the
text. It is also possible to search for operands or text strings.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F1
= Text +
Search for a character string in the operand comments or
the additional comments (following (;) ) starting from the
cursor position.
F2
= Text –
Search for a character string in the operand comments or
the additional comments (following (;) ) backwards from the
cursor position.
11-11
Editing the Assignment List
Note
The search key must be identical to the text including upper and lower
case letters.
F3
= Operand +
F4
= Operand –
F5
= Line
F6
= To Start
F7
= End
Search for absolute operands from the cursor position.
Search for absolute operands backwards from the cursor
position.
Jump to the line with the specified line number.
Position the cursor at the beginning of the file.
Position the cursor at the end of the assignment list.
F5 = Replace
F
1
Text 1
Mark
F
1 Conf.
F Text 2
2 Paste
F Text 3
3 Cut
F
4
Text 4
Find
F
2 No Conf
F
3
F
4 All
F Mode
5 Replace
F
5
You can replace a character string (max. 20 characters) either
automatically or after a prompt for confirmation.
11-12
F1
= Conf
The character string is searched for in the assignment list n
times (n = repetition factor) from the cursor position and is
replaced by the new string you entered. Before it replaces a
text, STEP 5 prompts you for confirmation.
Yes
The characters are replaced.
No
The characters are not replaced, the cursor jumps
to the next character string (if n > 1) and the
prompt is repeated.
Cancel: The function is stopped.
F2
= No Conf
The character string is searched for in the assignment list n
times (n = repetition factor) from the cursor position and
replaced by the text you have typed in. No confirmation is
prompted.
F4
= All
The character string is searched for throughout the whole
assignment list and replaced by the new string.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Editing the Assignment List
Programmable
Function Keys
You can assign character strings (max. 40 characters) to four function
keys, so that you can insert regularly recurring text strings at any position
in the assignment list. The key assignment is stored in the file *ZT.SEQ.
Programming
You have selected Symbols: yes in the project settings (see Section 4.1.1).
1. Press F1 = Mark.
STEP 5 displays the next key level.
2. Press F6 = Fct Keys.
The editor for the function keys is displayed. The cursor is flashing in
the first line.
3. Type in the character string and press the Return key.
4. Move the cursor from line to line using the Return key or cursor
up/down keys.
The mouse cannot be used except to activate F7 = Enter.
F
1
Key :
Text :
Shift F1
:Example
Shift F2
: Operand comment
Shift F3
:Message
Shift F4
: Operating
F
2
F
3
F
4
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
F
5
F
6
F
7 Enter
5. You can delete characters marked by the cursor using the DEL key and
characters left of the cursor with backspace.
To complete editing:
6. Press Insert or cancel with ESC.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
11-13
Editing the Assignment List
11.4 Modifying the Assignment List
Overview
If you want to modify an assignment list you have already created and
translated, you can edit the assignment list providing it still exists. If the
assignment list does not exist, this is generated automatically from the
symbols file and output.
Remember that when editing, you cannot exceed the preset operand
comment and symbolic operand length. If you want to use longer operand
symbols and comment texts in an existing assignment list, there are two
ways of doing this:
1. You can create a new assignment list (File Project Set F4, tab 3)
and copy the existing assignment list to this new file using the editing
functions F2 = Paste and F5 = File.
2. You can delete the files ??????Z?.INI (Management Assignment
Lists Delete INI). You can then increase the symbol or comment
lengths in File Project Set F4 (tab 3). When you next start the
editor, it uses the new settings.
How to Modify and
Change the Field
Lengths
Follow the steps below:
1. Type in the drive and name of the new symbols file you want to create
in the settings (page 1) and set the symbols and comment length on
page 2. These lengths must be the same or longer than the existing
lengths.
2. Call the assignment list editor (Editor Assignment List)
STEP 5 displays a new, empty assignment list.
3. Copy the file you want to change into the current file by pressing F2 =
Paste and F5 = File.
STEP 5 displays the message: file name
Z0.SEQ
4. Here, enter the drive and file name of the existing assignment list and
complete your input with the Return key.
After copying the file you can change to the editing mode (Insert) with F8 =
Return. You can now edit the assignment list as usual. To overwrite entries,
change to the overwrite mode F5 = Mode.
Inserting Lines
You can insert lines at any point. In the input mode, pressing the Return
key creates an empty line below the line containing the cursor. The vertical
expand key inserts an empty line above the line containing the cursor. In
the overwrite mode, position the cursor at the beginning of the next line
with the Return key.
Overwriting Files
When storing the modified assignment list, the existing symbols file and the
assignment list with the same name are overwritten without prompting you
to confirm your intention.
11-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
12
Bus Paths
Overview
Online connections between programmers and the modules of the PLC are
not only established by direct connecting cables (point-to-point connection)
but also via the bus systems SINEC H1, SINEC L1 or SINEC L2 and the
PLC bus (with the S5-155U).
You can create, store and activate these connections with the bus paths
function.
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Secction
Docu
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Page
12.1
Bus Paths
12-2
12.2
Editing a Bus Path
12-3
12.3
Example
12-7
12-1
Bus Paths
12.1 Bus Paths
General
Paths are permanent connections from a PLC to a station. Via this path,
you can perform all the programming functions according to the protocol
just as with a direct point-to-point connection.
A path consists of the following:
start node. (e.g. PG/AS511, PG/CP-H1. PG/CP-L2),
bus (1 or more)
nodes (e.g. CP),
end nodes (e.g. CPU)
You edit and store station addresses in the offline mode.
– An edited path is stored under a path name (File Project Set F4)
and this can be activated at any time provided it exists physically.
– You can store several paths with their path names in a selectable path
file (File Project Set F4) and activate a path using its name.
– The establishment (activation) of a path is supported. This is, however,
only possible in the online mode.
– The termination (deactivation) of a path is supported by this function.
Assignment Path >
File
You can assign 4 files to each path:
Program files....ST.S5D
Symbols files....ZO.INI
Printer files....DR.INI
Footer files....F1.INI or ....F2.INI
These file names are saved along with the path in the path file. The
assignment does not affect existing files. You can also assign files that do
not yet exist and that you will create later. By assigning files to a path, you
do not change the project settings. To set these files in the current project,
you must select the path in the project settings (set the path option to
always or confirmation).
PG/AS51
Path name: EXAMP1
KOR/MUX
CP-H1
Address: 0
CP-H1
Ethernet
address: 080006010000
Password:
SINEC H1
ENDP
Figure 12-1
12-2
Example of an Edited Path
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Bus Paths
12.2 Editing a Bus Path
Settings
The interface for the start node (AS511, H1 or L2) must be set. For more
information about the project settings refer to Section 4.1.1.
Starting the Editor
After selecting the Bus path function the Select Bus Path dialog box is
displayed. You can set the following:
Editor
Bus Paths F8
Path file
Path name
Setting Bus Paths
The inputs you can make in the Select Bus Path dialog box are described
in the following table:
Key level
2
Explanation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
F1
Edit:
The path editor is started. You can now edit the bus path in the working field displayed. The function keys are assigned a new function.
F2
Print
You branch to the documentation function level.
F3
Dir
Prints the (path) directory of the specified path file.
F4
All paths:
Prints all the path names in the specified path file.
F5
Cur path
Prints the currently set path in the path file.
F8
Cancel:
Returns to the last menu (select function).
F3
Select:
The Path file and path name dialog box is displayed. This lists all the path files and
path names. You can enter the path or file marked by the cursor.
F4
Activate:
With this function, the set path is displayed. You can correct through to the end point
step by step using the function F3 = Single or in one step (F5 = All). Selected nodes
are marked by (*). With the CPs (H1, L2 and L1) you can read out the system
identification with F1 = n SYSID. This data cannot be modified.
F5
Terminate:
The connection set up with F4 is terminated in the order determined by the path.
F6
Delete:
The path name is deleted in the selected path file.
F8
Cancel:
Return to the last menu. You exit the bus path function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
12-3
Bus Paths
Editing Bus Paths
F1 This starts the bus path editing function. Here, you have two
possibilities:
1. The path name exists.
The path is displayed in the path field. You can delete the nodes one by
one using F6, beginning with the last node. Use the function to insert
new nodes.
2. You are creating a new path.
By specifying selectable nodes one after the other you can create a
path to suit your system. If you select an unsuitable path configuration,
the message
not pref. path
is displayed.
Note
The path is set up even if the message not pref. path appears.
Siemens, however, cannot guarantee that such path will function.
Selecting Nodes
If you press one of the function keys displayed in the menu, a
corresponding node is displayed graphically. You then change to a new
function key level. Here, you can select a further node or bus. Within these
function key levels, only nodes or buses suitable for the configuration you
have selected are available.
Node addresses
Each node has an address assigned either by jumper or switch settings or
assigned using the software. The bus editor recognizes two node
addresses:
Address (KOR/MUX, CP L1 and CP L2). When you edit, you must type
in the address in decimal in the address field.
– KOR/MUX address from 1 to 30.
– SINEC L1 address from 1 to 30
– SINEC L2 address from 1 to 31
Ethernet address. This only occurs with CP H1 bus system, it must be
entered in hexadecimal.
Start Node
You can select the following start nodes at the highest key level of the
editor:
F2
PG/AS511
F3
PG/CP-H1.
F4
PG/CP-L2
During editing, these start nodes are not dependent on the set interface.
The functions of the function keys from now on depend in part on the start
node you have selected.
12-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Bus Paths
Function Keys
In the editing mode (F1) the function keys are assigned as follows for all
function levels:
Function
F1 = ENDP
F2 = KOR-MUX
F3 = CP-H1
F3 = PLC bus
F3 = PG/CP-L2
F4 = CP-L2
F4 = PG/CP-H1
F5 = CP-L1
F6 = Del Elem
F7 = Enter
Explanation
Add the end node (end point).
Add a bus of the type AS511.
Add a node of the type CP-H1.
Add a bus of the type PLC bus (backplane bus). This
is only possible with the S5-155U.
End node of the type PG/CP-L2.
Add a node of the type CP-L2.
Add an end node of the type PG/CP-H1.
Add a node of the type CP-L1.
Deletes the last node and/or bus from the path.
The edited path is saved. Step 5 returns to the
previous level.
With F3 and the cursor on the path file or path name
input field, the Select path file and path name dialog is
displayed with all the path names and path files
SHIFT F7 =
Files
You can edit the files assigned to this path.
F8 = Cancel
Return to the last menu without saving.
SHIFT F8 = Help Displays information about the functions of the
function keys at the current level.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
12-5
Bus Paths
Editing (Files for
the Path)
After selecting the Files function, the four file entries for the current path are
displayed. You can edit these and save them again. You can enter any file
names you wish.
With a new path or after deleting the file entries, only the file name
extensions are displayed.
Key Level
1
2
Explanation
F1
Proj Sett
The file names from the project settings are used.
F3
Select
The select file box is displayed. This lists the existing files of the various
types (depending on the cursor position). You can select one of these and
activate it with Enter
Delete
The four file entries for the path are deleted. No existing files are modified,
but rather the assignment between the path and the files is canceled.
80/132 C
If the cursor is located in the input line for the footer file, you can change
over between footer files ...F1.INI (80 characters wide) and ...F2.INI (132
characters wide). With F3 = Select, footer files corresponding to the current
setting are listed.
Enter
You buffer the file entries made up to now and return to the menu. The file
entries are only saved in the path file when you save the path.
Cancel
Cancels the editing and you return to the menu. All changes you have
made are discarded.
Shift F3
F4
F7
F8
If the error message Drive and project settings different appears or if Specify
drive from project settings is displayed as the directory, the drive identifiers of the files
must match those in the project settings, before the selected files can be entered in the currently
set project (path option in the project settings set to Confirm or Always).
With F1 Project Setting, the files can be entered in in the path file from the currently set project and
the file names can then be edited or selected (F3).
12-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Bus Paths
12.3 Example
Task
You want to create the following path:
PG/AS511
CP-H1
Addr.2
CP-H1
Ethernet
address: 080006010001
ENDP
KOR/MUX with address 1
The AS511 interface is set. You have selected the function Editor, Bus
Paths F8.
Operation
The Select Bus Path box is displayed.
1. Specify the path file.
2. Type in a new path name.
3. Press F1 = Edit.
An empty working field is displayed along with the following function
keys:
F2 = PG/AS511
F3 = PG/CP-H1
F4 = PG/CP-L2
4. Press F2 = PG/AS511.
5. Press F2 = KOR/MUX
The KOR/MUX bus is added .
6. Press F3 = CP-H1
The CP-H1 node with the SINEC H1 bus is added.
7. Press F3 = CP-H1
The CP-H1 node with the SINEC H1 bus is added.
8. You can now type in the MUX address, the Ethernet address and if
required the password. Move the cursor to these fields using the cursor
down key.
9. Press F1 = ENDP
The end point, i.e. the destination of the bus connection, is added. The
screen should appear as follows when the path is complete.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
12-7
Bus Paths
PG/AS511
KOR/MUX
Path name : EXAMP1
CP-H1
Address : 1
CP-H1
Ethernet
address : 08000601000
Password:
SINEC H1
ENDP
The bus path has been edited completely. The path must now be stored.
10. Press F7 = Enter.
The path is stored in the path file and you can activate it at any time.
12-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
13
Printer Parameters
Overview
Before you can print out files or redirect them to a file in a printable format
you must do the following:
Set the parameters for your printer
Select and edit the footer and enter text (see Chapter 14).
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
13.1
Docu
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Setting Printer Parameters
Page
13-2
13-1
Printer Parameters
13.1 Setting Printer Parameters
Overview
A variety of printers can be connected to the programmer. The parameters
required for the printer must be set and stored in a printer file (*DR.INI) in
the system directory.
There are “off the shelf” printer files available for many printer types. These
contain settings for specific printers and the type of printout (portrait,
landscape). In the project settings, you can double-click Printer file to
obtain a list of printer files (*DR.INI) available in the system directory or
press F3 to display a printer list box.
Setting
Select the printer file of type *DR.INI in the Documentation tab page of the
project settings. The asterisk (*) stands for the six-character name of the
printer file. For more information about settings, refer to Section 4.1.1.
Setting Parameters
Editor
Printer
Parameters
Dialog Box
You prepare a control character record for your printer and store it in a file
of the type DR.INI. This controls the printout directly on the printer. You
make these entries in the Printer parameters dialog.
The printer parameters dialog is displayed (example below). The file
C:[email protected]@DR.INI for the HP III (C) printer was selected in the
Documentation tab page of the project settings.
Printer file: C:..\S5_HOME\[email protected]@DR.INI
Printer name:
HP III (C)
Page format
: ( X ) A4
Skip_over
: ( X )Yes
Wait time
: [CR 0 * 25 MS ]
Interface:
( )
A3
Line/page: [72]
( ) No
LPT 1 ( )
Busy :
(X) Yes
( ) No
[ LF 0 * 25 MS ]
LPT 2 ( )
Control character function
LPT 3 ( )
Default
(X)
Control character string
Start sequence
End sequence
Pitch
(10 characters/inch)
Pitch
(12 characters/inch)
Pitch
(17 characters/inch)
Horizontal tabulator
Left column index
13-2
Edit
[
[
[ 1B, 5B, 31, 77;
[ 1B, 5B, 32, 77;
[ 1B, 5B, 34, 77;
[;
[ 01; ]
]
]
]
]
]
]
F
1
F
2
F
3 Select
F
4
F
F
5 Save As 6 Save
F
7
Info
F Help
8 Cancel
F
1
F
2
F
3 Edit
F
4
F
F
5 Save As 6 Save
F
7
Info
F Help
8 Cancel
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Printer Parameters
Parameters
The following list explains entries in the parameter assignment box.
Input field
Explanations
Printer file
The printer settings are stored in this file. You can specify the name under
→ Project or with F5 = Save as.
Page format
A4
Lines/page
Number of lines per page.
Skip_over:
Yes
No
The control character FF (form feed) is output to trigger a form feed. The
remaining page is output with empty lines up to the number specified in
LINES/PAGE providing no lines contain characters.
Busy
Not relevant for the PT88/PT89/PT10. This only affects older printer
types. Following each character sent to the printer, STEP 5 waits a
specified time (WAIT TIME) for confirmation from the printer before
sending the next character.
No
No confirmation is expected.
Yes
A confirmation is expected.
Wait time
You can set the wait time for a confirmation (in milliseconds).
CR
LF
A3
for carriage return
for line feed
Interface
The port LPT1, LPT2 and LPT3 on which information is transferred to the
printer can be selected by entering an X. The default is LPT1.
In the printer files supplied, LPT1 is set (X). The default setting of the PG
assigns the parallel device interface to LPT1. No further interfaces for
connecting a printer are assigned to the LPT2 and LPT3 ports.
Control character
function
You can edit a control character string for your printer. A character string
can be up to a maximum of 127 bytes long. Only hex. characters are
allowed.
Start sequence
Before each print job
End sequence
After each print job
Pitch
Here you select the number of characters per inch.
(10 char/inch)
NORMAL
(12 char/inch)
CONDENSED
(17 char/inch)
SUPER CONDENSED
Horizontal tabulator
With this the printer head is positioned on a column. The
dummy character for the dynamic entry of this column is 00. The next
column with a printable character is calculated from the current position
of the head and the number of blanks following it. This position is entered
in the control character string.
Left column index
The dummy character for the horizontal tabulator is calculated with this. It
is the index of the left page column of the printer and specifies whether it
begins with 0 or 1.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
13-3
Printer Parameters
Printer names
Explanation of the printer names in the shipped printer files.
Name
Meaning
Emul.
A3, A4
Norm.
Comp.
L/P
(C)
Emulation
Page format: A3, A4
Print type: normal
Print type: compact
Lines/page
Identifies printers of other vendors for which Siemens does not guarantee
perfect operation.
Function Keys
In this box, you can activate certain functions using function keys as
explained in the table.
Key
Function
F3
1. (Select)
When the cursor is positioned on an input field in which you can select
various parameters, the function key Select is displayed. You can select
parameters with F3.
2. (Edit)
When the cursor is positioned on an input field in which you can type in
characters, the function key Edit is displayed. You can position the cursor
on the character field with F3.
3. (Edit control character functions)
When the cursor is on an input field under Control character function, the
Edit softkey is also displayed. With F3, you can open an editing window
for control characters for your printer. You enter your input with the Insert
key.
F5 = Save As
The printer file is stored under the name you select. Once you press this
key the cursor jumps to the field with the file name. You can now change
this if you wish. The Return key stores the parameter settings under this
name.
F6 = Save
This stores the selected parameters in the current printer file:
F7 = Info
With this key, you can obtain information about the field marked by the
cursor. You clear this text from the screen using the cursor keys
(→ Appendix, key assignment).
F8 = Cancel
Return to the calling level.
13-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
14
Footer Editor
Overview
With this function, you can write a new footer or modify an existing one.
The size of the editing field displayed is adapted to the number of footer
characters. A field in which an entry can be made is highlighted. You
cannot write in fields marked with ## since these are reserved for
automatically generated text, for example:
SIMATIC S5
Program file
Block
Segment
Page number
Editor
Test
PLC
Management
STEP 5 Block
...
Data Block
...
DB Screen ...
F1
F2
Ctrl+F1
Assignment List
Bus Paths
F7
F8
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
14.1
Ctrl+F4
Ctrl+F5
Description
Editing Footers
Docu
Page
14-2
14-1
Footer Editor
14.1 Editing Footers
Settings
Select a footer file of type *Fx.INI with the menu command File Project Set (Documentation). The asterisk stands for a six character name and x
stands for 1 (80 characters wide) or 2 (132 characters wide). For more
information about the settings, refer to Section 4.1.1
Starting the Editor
When you start the footer function, an editing window is displayed with a
footer determined by the size you have selected. The upper field is the
input window. You only have direct access to this field. The lower field is
the footer in which the text is inserted automatically. When a field in the
footer is highlighted, you can enter text for this field in the input window
(the cursor flashes in the input window). You can familiarize yourself with
the keys relevant for the footer editor in → Using the footer keys.
Editor
Footer editor
Note
Input field Date:
When you print using the enhanced mode (KOMDOK), this is overwritten
by the current system date.
Fields with ### entered cannot be overwritten.
Editing Window
The screen below illustrates the editing window for 132 character wide
footers. The editing window for an 80 character footer only has 4 fields.
The name of the file is displayed at the top left of the screen. The top right
of the screen tells you whether it is a new file (NEW) or whether you are
modifying (EDIT) an old one.
Footer File: C:NONAMEF2.INI
New
Input field
DATE:
Footer
##
##
*
##
##
##########
###### ##########
F
F
F
1 Text Inp 2 Text End 3
Figure 14-1
14-2
F
F
##
F
4 -> 80 C 5 Save As 6 Enter
F
F Help
7
8 Cancel
Editing Window for 132 Character Wide Footer
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Footer Editor
Function Keys
With the keys F1 to F8, you can activate the following functions:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Key
F1 = Text Inp
Function
Input text in the window displayed above
F2 = Text End
Complete text input
F4
80 C.
Switch to a footer width of 80 characters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
132 C.
Switch to a footer width of 132 characters
F5 = Save As
When you press this key, the Save footer file as dialog is displayed. The
cursor is located in the Footer file field. You can select a file with F3 or by
double-clicking.
F7 = Enter
You save the modified footer file
F8 = Cancel
Cancel and return to the previous level.
SHIFT F8 = Help
Cursor in the footer: (SHIFT + a cursor key)
SHIFT
(4)
Positions the cursor in the next footer field to the left.
+
(6)
Positions the cursor in the next footer field to the right.
(2)
Positions the cursor in the footer field below.
(8)
Positions the cursor in the footer field above (also without SHIFT).
4
6
2
8
Cursor in the input window
4
6
2
8
(4)
Positions the cursor on the previous character .
(6)
Positions the cursor on the next character.
(2)
Positions the cursor on the next line. If the cursor leaves the input
field as a result, text input is terminated.
(8)
Positions the cursor on the line above. If the cursor leaves the input
field as a result, text input is terminated.
Delete character
.
DEL
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The character marked by the cursor is deleted and the remaining
characters are shifted together to close the gap.
14-3
Footer Editor
14-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 3:
Test, Management, Documentation
Test Menu
15
PLC Menu
16
Management Menu
17
Documentation Menu
18
Change Menu
19
Help Menu
20
14-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
15
Test
Overview
This submenu includes test, information and start-up functions that you can
execute on the PG in the online mode.
Test
Requirements
!
PLC
Management
Documenta
Block Status
...
Status Variable
Shift + F6
Shift + F7
Force Variables
Force Outputs
Shift + F8
Shift + F5
Program Test
Program Test
ON
OFF
To use the online functions, there must be a physical and logical
connection between the PG and PLC. Apart from establishing the cable
connection, you must also set the correct bus path for a bus link (SINEC
H1, SINEC L2 or AS511) and the mode on the PG.
Warning
Bus connections and plug connections may not be disrupted while online
functions are active.
This may result in serious functional errors, such as causing the PLC to
STOP, or the programming device to crash.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
15.1
Online Functions
15-2
15.2
Block Status
15-3
15.3
Status Variable
15-7
15.4
Force Variables
15-12
15.5
Force Outputs
15-14
15.6
Program Test ON
15-16
15.7
Program Test OFF
15-17
15-1
Test
15.1 Online Functions
Overview
The following table provides you with an overview of the possible online
functions. The following test functions
signal status display of operands (→ Status variable)
forcing output process interface modules (→ Force outputs) and
modifying process variables (→ Force variables)
require the listing of process variables which you can store in a variables
block (VBnn (1 <= nn <= 255)) after editing. If you use the variables block,
you do not have to input the operands again when you call a test function a
second time. Variables blocks are stored in the program file.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Online Function
PLC Status
Processing in PLC
Explanation
Status block
RUN
User checkpoint
test sequence of statements in the user
program
Status variable1
RUN
System checkpoint
output signal states of process variable
(I, Q, F, S, T, C, D)
Start PLC
STOP > RUN Start cycle
as with manual operation
Stop PLC
RUN > STOP Stop cycle
as with manual operation
Compress memory
RUN, STOP
PLC RAM area
compress memory
Force variables1 2
RUN
System checkpoint
modify process variable (I, Q, F, S, T, C, D)
Force outputs1
STOP
System checkpoint
peripherals
set outputs to signal state (QB, QW, QD)
ISTACK / BSTACK
STOP
PLC memory
system area
output interrupt stack / block stack
Output memory
contents
RUN, STOP
RAM/EPROM,
S5 bus, I/Os
output memory and I/O addresses in
hexadecimal
Memory configuration RUN, STOP
PLC RAM, EPROM
data about user memory of the PLC
(RAM/EPROM)
System parameters
STOP
Release of PLC SW, info about internal PLC structure and
CPU
software release (CPU)
Program test ON
PROG TEST
User checkpoint
test single program steps: PB, FB, FX, OB,
SB, search
Program test OFF
PROG
TEST>
STOP
User checkpoint
terminate program test; executed
immediately
1
2
RUN,
Lists of operands can be stored in variables blocks (VB).
Force variables is also possible offline to allow you to edit variables blocks.
15-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
15.2 Block Status
Test
Block Status
With this function you can test and correct blocks loaded in the PLC (user
memory). STEP 5 outputs the current signal status of the following process
variables:
inputs (I), timers (T) and counters (C)
outputs (Q) (parameter type Q the identifier of an FB (FX))
flags (F, S)
data (D) (the data depends on the DB open at the time of the status
output).
Status processing is subject to the following restrictions:
The status output of the current block parameters of function blocks is
only possible with the S5-135U, S5-155U and S5-115U.
With parameter declarations (formal parameters) and the statement LIR
in an FB or FX, no signal status is displayed.
The operation DO DW/DO FW is processed along with the next
operation as if it were a single operation. For this reason, only the
status of the next operation is displayed.
Some operations terminate the status processing mode, since following
their execution a branch is made to the operating system or to other
blocks, e.g. LIR, BEC and all jumps and blocks calls.
A hardcopy is always possible after status processing has been
terminated.
While status processing is active, the mouse cannot be used.
Input
After you select the function in the Test menu, the Block status list box
appears. Here, you specify the block to be tested (→ User interface, List
box, Section 3.6).
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Block
Explanation
– Without nesting: type in the block type and block
–
Search Key
Here, you can specify the search key of the statement
to be tested. STEP 5 automatically searches for this
and displays the block section containing this term on
the screen. All possible search keys are listed in the
help box.
Overwrite
In this window, you specify whether STEP 5 overwrites
the old block directly following modifications or only
after user confirmation.
Here, you must enter an X to specify whether STEP 5
updates the Z0.SEQ file or not.
Assignment
list
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
number or symbolic name of the block.
With nesting: type in the block to be tested first and
then the sequence of blocks preceding it in the
program (maximum 5) via which the block status is to
be displayed during the test.
15-3
Test
Example of
Nesting
You want to display the status of FB 21 when this has been called by PB 2.
In this case, you enter the blocks as follows:
FB 21, PB 2, OB 1
Block list:
BLOCK 1: FB 21
BLOCK 2: PB 2
BLOCK 3: OB 1
Nesting of the blocks:
OB1
JU PB1
JU PB1
Example for CSF
FB21
PB2
JU PB1
Representation
of the Signal
Statuses on the
Screen
PB4
PB1
PB3
PB5
STL:
The signal states are displayed as a list of status
information.
LAD/CSF:
In the Ladder Diagram and Control System Flowchart, the signal states are indicated by the way
in which the connection lines are displayed.
= = = = = =
Signal state 1
. . . . . . . .
. .
Signal state 0
– – – – – – –
Signal state cannot be represented (for example,
it is not one of the 20 displayable statements; the
number of statements depends on the PLC).
After OK, STEP 5 begins the status processing and displays, for example,
the following screen in CSF:
PB 1
Segment
I 32.0
I 32.1
Figure 15-1
1
0000
&
==
Example 1
=
Q 32.0
=
F 1.1
Status Processing
The display is not updated following each cycle.
All the functions made available in the function key menu (→ Editor, STEP
5 blocks, Section 5.1) can be executed during status processing.
Note
You cannot display addresses.
15-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
Example of STL
In STL, STEP 5 displays the following screen (example):
PB 1
DBADR=0000
Segment
:A
:A
:=
:=
:***
1
I
I
Q
F
STL status
32.0
32.1
32.0
1.1
PB 1
DBADR=
Segment
:JU
:AN
:L
:SE
:L
:T
:JC
Name
INP1
OUT1
INP2
1
STL status
PB
T
KT
T
T
KT
FB
1
9
010.0
9
0
0
10
:TEST
:
F
:
FW
FW
:
:
10.0
12
12
LEN=35
RLO Status/ACCU1 –––ACCU2––––Status
0
0
00000000
0
1
00000000
0
0
00000001
0
0
00000001
SAC
D054
D056
D058
D05A
LEN=20
RLO Status/ACCU1–––ACCU2––––Line comment
Start timer
:BE
The display is not updated after each cycle. All the functions made
available with the function keys (→ Editor, STEP 5 blocks) can be
executed during status processing with the exception of displaying
addresses.
Result of logic operation
Bit operands
Current data block
Content of ACCU 1
Content of ACCU 2
Abbreviations
RLO
STATUS
DBy
ACCU 1
ACCU 2
Abbreviations
STATUS
Status of the result condition code bits
SAC
Step address counter
Identifiers for status display:
R
Timer running
N
Negating bit scan, i.e. with the AT (AND timer) the result
is 0
U
Upwards counter input
D
Downwards counter input
S
Set and start input
E
Enable input
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
15-5
Test
Block Status
Processing
Action
This consists of the following actions:
Operation
Messages/Explanations
Move breakpoint Move the cursor before the required
operand with cursor keys or search
function. Fetch other segments onto
the screen with cursor keys or (+ / –).
STEP 5 continues status processing.
Message: Status processing
active.
Abandon
processing
Press ESC = Cancel once.
The message Status processing
active is cleared.
Continue
processing
Press INSERT = Enter once.
Message: Status processing
active.
Correct program
Press F6-= Edit.
Same operations as in the editor
mode.
Status processing is stopped and you
change to the editor mode.
Enter correction
1. Press INSERT = Enter
2. Acknowledge with yes.
3. Acknowledge with yes if you
want to overwrite.
Prompt Enter modified segment?
...already in PLC, overwrite?
1. Press ESC = Cancel twice.
2. Confirm prompt with yes.
Prompt Exit status?
Stop/terminate
processing
The corrected block is in the PLC and
status processing is restarted.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
Possible messages:
Causes:
Statement not processed
–
–
–
–
Block does not exist in PLC
15-6
block is not called
statement is skipped
a block or sequence of blocks does not exist
PLC in the STOP mode
– he block to be tested does not exist
– the block to be tested calls a further block that
does not exist in the PLC.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
15.3 Status Variable
Test
Status Variable
Using this function you can output the current signal statuses of selected
operands in the form of a list as they occur at the system checkpoint
(→ Appendix, Glossary) during program execution. You enter the operands
to be monitored (process variables) in a list which STEP 5 displays as an
empty table when you call the status variable test function, providing no
variables are entered otherwise the last table saved is displayed (variables
block). With F6 = Activate, or with the Insert key you can display the
current signal state of the listed operands.
The listed operands are called during status processing and their current
signal status is displayed before they are modified by the user program.
Operands:
F
1
Fetch
Figure 15-2
Available in the
Submenu
Changes to the
Operand List
F
2
Formats:
F
3 Delete
F
4
Field
F
5 Save As
Table for Editing the Operand List
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Key
Function
F1 = Fetch
Call a variables block
F3 = Delete
Delete the current line
F4 = Field
Display variables in fields, keys + or – fetch the previous or next field.
F5 Save As
Save the operand list as a variables block
F6 = Activate
Activate status processing (= enter). Only available
when at least one operand is entered
F7 = Save
Saves the operand list in the current variables block
(only available when at least one operand is entered)
F8 = Return
Return to menu selection
SHIFT F8 = Help
Information about certain activities
If you make changes when entering the operand list, that are not saved in
the variables block, you will be asked whether you want to keep the
changes. Answer with Yes or No:
Cancel = ESC
F8 = Return
F1 = Fetch
The text of the prompt depends on whether or not you have selected a
variables block.
No variables block selected: Discard changes?
Variables block selected:
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Discard modified block?
15-7
Test
Action
Cancel
F8 =
Return
F1 =
Fetch
Editing the
Operand List
Reaction to Yes
Reaction to No
Changes are discarded;
STEP 5 displays the function menu.
You remain editing the operand
list,changes can be saved in a
variables block.
Note: The changes must be explicitly saved (F2 = Store or F7 =
Save).
Changes are discarded;
You remain editing the operand
After you complete the
list,changes can be saved in a
command line, specify the variables block.
variables block VBnn.
Note: The changes must be explicitly saved (F5 = Save As or
F7 = Save). Call a new variables
block with F1 = Fetch.
You can enter the following operands in the operand list:
Operand
Permitted data formats
F/Q/I/S
FY/QB/IB/SY
FW/QW/IW/SW
T
C
DW/DL/DR
DB
FD/QD/ID/DD/SD
KM
KH
KH
KT
KC
KH
–
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
(KM, KH)
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
(KG, KY, KS)
After you type in an operand, the PG displays the first format, i.e. the
format not in brackets, in the table above. You can overwrite this format
when making your input.
With the operands DD, DW, DB, DL, DR, you must first specify the
corresponding data block in the operand list. Otherwise, the PG displays
the message No DB selected.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order (syntax)
otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can save the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an existing
variables block with F1 = Fetch.
Note
The last variables block (VB) you saved is loaded automatically when you
call status variable.
15-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
Operations
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Function
Operation
Messages/Explanations
Input an
operand
1.
The PG suggests a data format for
each operand. The cursor is positioned
on the operand.
The cursor jumps to the beginning of
the next line.
2.
After you input the operand press
double arrow key right
Change or keep format
3.
Complete line with Return
Correct
Overwrite incorrect input
Insert operand
1.
2.
3.
Position cursor with cursor
key (up/down)
Press expand vertically
Type in operand
Add operand at
start
1.
2.
3.
Position cursor in top line
Press expand vertically
Type in operand
Delete operand
1.
Position cursor on the first
character of the operand
Press delete character several
times
2.
Delete line
Fetch operand
list
1.
Position cursor on the line to be
deleted
2.
Press F3 = Delete
1.
Press F1 = Fetch
2.
Complete the command line
Display variables block VBnn
Save operand
list
Press F7 = Save
If the syntax is wrong the cursor only
leaves the field after it has been corrected.
You can append operands to the list
when the cursor is positioned below
the last line of the list.
The current line is deleted with the
operand and format, the next lines are
closed up.
If you have made changes, that were
not saved in a variables block, a
prompt is displayed (Discard
changes? or Discard modified
block?)
If you did not make changes or if you
answer the prompt with Yes, STEP 5
fetches the operand list from variables
block VBnn after you have completed
the command line.
STEP 5 saves the operand list in the
currently selected variables block. In
contrast to F2 = Store(Sich_als), you
do not specify a variables block
number. The function is only available
when a variables block is selected.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Store operand
list
1.
2.
Press F5 = Save As
Fill in the command line
Save variables block VBnn
STEP 5 stores the operand list in the
variables block VBnn.
Fetch operand
list as field
1.
2.
Press F4 = Field
Fill in the command line
Field display from variable:
e.g. QB 26 Format: KH
STEP 5 displays an operand list with
20 consecutive bytes starting from
output 26.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
15-9
Test
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (if you are using
words, this reduces to 10 and for double words 5).
At the bottom edge of the screen you can see what percentage of the
operand list is already completed.
Status of the
Operands
(outputting
process variables)
The current signal statuses of the process variables in the operand list are
output before you modify the user program (i.e. at the system checkpoint).
Once you have edited the operand list or have displayed it on the screen,
press F6 = Activate or Insert.
The PG displays the signal statuses of the listed variables and the
message status processing active.
VB 5
C:PROBSPST.S5D
PLC in the cycle
Operands:
–MAINSWIT
–EMERSTOP
–I32.2
–IN–POS
–CAR–IN
–C–BACK
–DOOROP
–DOORCL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
32.0
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
Signal states:
KM=1
KM=0
KM=1
KM=0
KM=0
KM=0
KM=0
KM=1
START
I
33.0
KM=1
C–FWDS
C–BWDS
OPENDOOR
Q
Q
Q
32.0
32.1
32.2
KM=0
KM=0
KH=00
1184: Status processing active
Figure 15-3
15-10
Operand List with Binary Inputs/Outputs and a Flag
Byte
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
Operation
During Status
Processing
Possible Messages and Operator Errors
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Action
Operation
Messages/Explanation
Interrupt status
processing
Continue status
processing
Terminate/abort
status processing
Press ESC
The cursor jumps to the first
line in the operand list.
STEP 5 displays the status of
the individual variables again.
If you have made changes,
that were not saved in a variables block, a prompt is displayed (Discard changes?
or Discard modified
block?)
If you did not make changes
or if you answer the prompt
with Yes, STEP 5 displays
the function menu.
Press F6 = Activate
Press ESC twice
Messages
Causes
No DB selected
KH= *data
element missing
You have not specified the data block for an operand.
KT = stopped
The selected timer was not started.
KH = * DB
missing
* illegal
The DB does not exist in the selected program file.
The DB for the specified operands (DD, DW, DB, DL,
DR) is not in the PLC memory or there are not
enough data words.
Operand not allowed in the PLC
15-11
Test
15.4 Force Variables
Test
Force Variables
This online function allows you to modify process variables and to
intervene directly in the process. Before you force variables, you should
consider the reaction of the process to your intervention!
The variables I, Q, F, S, T, C, D can be modified. The PG influences the
variables I, Q and F only in bytes or words in the process image.
With the variables T and C in the format KM and KH, the forcing of
edge flags must be taken into account.
The function can be executed in the STOP and RUN modes of the
programmable controller.
The signal status display is stopped if an incorrect format or operand is
found.
STEP 5 displays the message forcing not possible.
Since STEP 5 modifications are made in bytes, variables cannot be
modified en bloc.
How to use Force
Variables
The following procedure is advisable when working with the force variables
function:
1. Select Test Force variables.
STEP 5 displays an empty table for the operand list providing no
variable is entered. Otherwise the last variables block you saved is
displayed.
2. Make your entries in the operand list and complete the editing with the
Insert key.
The status of the variables is displayed.
3. Cancel the status display with ESC.
The operand list with the current values is displayed.
4. Modify the current values and complete your input with the Insert key.
From point 2 onwards you can repeat the procedure.
Operation
Editing the
Operand List
After selecting the force variables function, STEP 5 displays the empty
table for entering the operand list (Fig. 15-3) or the variables block last
selected for force variables.
Operand
F/Q/I/S1)
FY/QB/IB/SY
FW/QW/IW/SW
T
C
DW/DL/DR1)
DB
FD/QD/ID/DD/SD
–Symbol
1)
15-12
Permitted data formats
KM
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KT
(KM, KH)
1)
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KC
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
–
KH
(KG, KY, KS)
Dependent on operand type
These operands and formats can only be displayed (not controlled).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
After you type in a byte or word operand, STEP 5 displays the first format,
i.e. the format not in brackets, in the table above. You can overwrite this
format when making your input.
With the operands DD, DW, DB, DL, DR, you must first specify the
corresponding data block in the operand list. Otherwise, STEP 5 displays
the message No DB selected.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order (syntax)
otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can store the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an existing
variables block with F1 = Fetch.
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (with word
operands, the maximum is reduced to 10, and with double words 5). At the
lower edge of the screen, the occupation of the operand list is displayed as
a percentage.
The editing options are the same as for the status variables function.
Note
The last variables block (VB) you saved is loaded automatically when you
call force variables.
Status of the
Operands
(displaying
process variables)
The current signal statuses of the process variables in the operand list are
output.
Once you have edited the operand list or have displayed it on the screen,
Press F6 = Activate or Insert.
The PG displays the signal statuses of the listed variables and the
message status processing active.
To interrupt status processing,
Press ESC = Cancel.
The cursor jumps to the first line of the operand list.
Influencing
Process Variables
from the PG
The current signal state of the listed process variables is displayed on the
screen. You can now modify the values of the displayed process variables
in the PLC (force variables).
Modifying the
Value of a Variable
The PG displays the operand list with the column signal states in which the
currently valid signal states are displayed. The message status
processing active and the PLC mode are also displayed.
1. Press ESC = Cancel once.
The PG changes the name of the signal statuses column to force
process image and waits for you to input the forced values. The cursor
jumps to the first line.
2. Enter the forced values line by line and press the Return key after each
input.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
15-13
Test
You complete the input of variable values by
3. Pressing the Insert key.
STEP 5 displays the message End of force fct. and transfers the
modified variables to the PLC.
4. Pressing the Insert key.
The PG changes the name of the Force column to Signal states. You
can see changed signal states.
To stop the force variables function,
5. Press ESC = Cancel twice.
If you have made changes, that were not saved in a variables block, a
prompt is displayed (Discard changes? or Discard modified
block?)
If you did not make changes or if you answer the prompt with Yes,
STEP 5 returns to the basic functions menu (see Section 15.3).
15.5 Force Outputs
Test
Force Outputs
With this function you can set outputs to the required signal state directly.
The function does not influence the process image or program execution,
since the programmable controller must be in the STOP mode.
The outputs of a programmable controller can be forced individually. You
can therefore check their assignment to the actuators of your plant (e.g.
valves, motor etc.). With this function you can check whether output
modules are defect or not plugged and that the wiring is correct.
Single bits cannot be addressed, but only the formats byte, word and
double word.
How to use Force
Outputs
The force outputs function is used as follows:
1. Change the PLC to STOP
2. Call the force outputs function.
STEP 5 displays an empty table for the operand list providing no
operand is entered. Otherwise, the variables block you saved last is
displayed.
3. Enter the operands and complete the list with the Insert key.
4. Type in or modify the required values and complete your entries with
the Insert key .
The PG transfers the values to the outputs of the PLC.
From the third point onwards you can repeat the procedure.
When you select the force outputs function, STEP 5 displays the empty
table for the operand list (Fig. 15-3) or the variables block last selected for
force variables.
15-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
Editing the
Operand List
Inputting
Operands
Operand
Permitted formats
OB
OW
OD
–Symbol
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KM, KY, KS, KF)
KH
(KG, KY, KS)
Dependent on operand type
After you type in an operand, STEP 5 displays the first format, i.e. the
format not in brackets, in the table above. You can overwrite this format
when making your input.
You must type in the characters of an operand in the correct order (syntax)
otherwise the cursor remains in the input field.
You can store the operand list in a variables block (VB). Call an existing
variables block with F1 = Fetch.
The operand list can contain a maximum of 20 operands (with word
operands, the maximum is reduced to 10, and with double words 5). At the
lower edge of the screen, the percentage of the operand list completed is
displayed.
The editing options are explained in Section 15.3.
Setting Output
Variables at the PG
STEP 5 displays the last selected variables block or an empty list in which
you can enter signals and states.
Modifying Output
Values
STEP 5 displays the operand list with the columns Operands and Force I/O
modules.
1. Type in the required forced values line by line and press the Return key
after each input.
STEP 5 displays an X after each entered value. If you type in less
characters than the maximum length, the more significant places are
automatically padded with zeros.
To complete the entry of input values:
2. Press the Insert key.
The PG displays the message End of force fct. and transfers the
modified output values to the PLC.
If you want to stop the force outputs function,
3. Press ESC = Cancel).
If you have made changes, that were not saved in a variables block, a
prompt is displayed (Discard changes? or Discard modified
block?). If you did not make changes or if you answer the prompt with
Yes, STEP 5 returns to the basic menu of the functions. Refer to Section
15.3 Status Variable.
Corrections
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The cursor only exits the input field when the input is correct. If you make
errors inputting the values the cursor remains in the input field.
15-15
Test
15.6 Program Test ON
Test
Program Test ON
With this function, the PLC processes a block step by step. When you invoke the program test function, the program is stopped at the point marked
by the breakpoint (statement in which the cursor is located) and the command output is disabled (all outputs blocked). This means that the program
is only processed as far as the selected statement and the current signal
states and the RLO are output. On the PLC the BASP LED is lit (block all
outputs).
Note
Not all PLCs support the program test function, refer to your PLC manual.
In the program test mode
the processing cycle is stopped,
no inputs or outputs are processed, only the process image can be
modified,
the program can be moved on operation by operation by moving the
breakpoint.
In the program test mode, the PLC stops at the last selected breakpoint.
You can select the following test functions (allowing corrections to be made
if necessary) parallel to the program test:
Status variable
Force variables
Force outputs
Info about the interrupt STACK
Info about the block STACK
Special features of the program test function for specific programmable
controllers are described in the PLC manuals. After calling the Program
test ON function, enter the following information in the box under Selection:
1. a single block (absolute or symbolic name) or a list (nesting) of blocks
you want to check.
2. as search key: an operand you want to check in the block you have
selected.
3. Then click on OK.
STEP 5 displays the selected block in STL. The screen representation
is the same as that for block status (see Section 15.2 Block Status ).
Instead of the function Status the Program test function is displayed.
15-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Test
4. Press the cursor down key.
The breakpoint is selected.
STEP 5 displays information about the operation that has just been
executed. The cursor is positioned in the next statement line. The
processor of the PLC is stopped, i.e. no operation in the user program
is executed unless you trigger it explicitly.
5. Press the cursor down key.
The next breakpoint is selected.
The PLC executes the next operation and the processor stops the
processing again.
If you discover an error that needs correcting, proceed as follows:
6. Press ESC = Cancel twice to exit the program test,. To carry out a
correction while the program test is still active, call an editor.
Since the program test function is still active, the processor of the PLC
is stopped.
To return to the program test mode
7. Call the program test ON function again.
You can now test the corrected program.
Note
Not all function keys are active. The basic menu shows whether or not the
program test is activated.
15.7 Program Test OFF
Test
Program Test OFF
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
This function deactivates the program test.
Select Test Program Test OFF. The PLC changes to the STOP mode
and must be restarted (→ PLC, Start PLC) or by changing the CPU
selector from STOP to RUN).
15-17
Test
15-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
16
PLC
Overview
Within this menu, you can start and stop a PLC connected online and
compress the user memory in the PLC.
PLC
Management
Documentation
Start PLC
Stop PLC
Compress PLC Memory
Change
Shift+F11
Shift+F12
Ctrl+Shift+F2
PLC Info ISTACK
PLC Info BSTACK
Shift+F9
Shift+F10
Output PLC Memory ...
PLC Memory Conf
PLC Sys Parameters
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
16.1
Starting the PLC
16-2
16.2
Stopping the PLC
16-2
16.3
Compressing the PLC memory
16-2
16.4
PLC Info ISTACK
16-3
16.5
PLC Info BSTACK
16-5
16.6
Output PLC Memory
16-5
16.7
PLC Memory Configuration
16-7
16.8
PLC System Parameters
16-8
16-1
PLC
16.1 Starting the PLC
PLC
Start PLC
The Start PLC function triggers a cold restart or warm restart on the
programmable controller. Before the PLC is started with this function, you
are prompted by the PLC to confirm your intention.
Acknowledge the message with yes:
The PLC is set to the selected status, or
Acknowledge the message with no:
The PLC is not started.
If errors occur, this is indicated by messages. The particular message
depends on the CPU you are using.
16.2 Stopping the PLC
PLC
Stop PLC
The Stop PLC function switches the programmable controller to the STOP
mode. The processor stops executing program statements.
In multiprocessor operation (S5-135U) all the processors are set to the
stop mode.
Before the PLC is stopped with this function, you are prompted to confirm
your intention.
Acknowledge the message with yes:
The PLC is set to the stop mode, or
Acknowledge the message with no:
The PLC does not stop.
The messages displayed depend on the CPU you are using.
16.3 Compressing the PLC memory
PLC
Compress PLC
Memory
When you delete blocks in the PLC, these are declared “invalid” in the PLC
RAM but are not physically deleted. Whenever you correct a block, the old
version of the block is invalidated but remains in memory and the corrected
block is written into the RAM. This means that the PLC memory can
become full. The compress memory function deletes invalid blocks and
shifts valid blocks together so that there is memory again for new blocks.
The compress memory function detects the following errors:
wrong block length,
corrupted pattern 7070 in the block header,
invalid block type (with OB, invalid block number).
If STEP 5 detects one of these errors, the function is abandoned and a
corresponding message is displayed.
16-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PLC
16.4 PLC Info ISTACK
The online functions you can select in this submenu provide you with
information about the status of the connected PLC.
PLC
PLC Info ISTACK
Interrupt stack (ISTACK)
Block stack (BSTACK)
Memory and I/O addresses, hexadecimal (output memory contents)
Information about the user memory on the PLC (memory configuration)
Information about the internal PLC structure and the software releases
of the CPU (system parameters)
ISTACK
Interrupt Stack of
the PLC
After you select the ISTACK, a table of control bits and their current
settings is displayed on the screen. You can select the abbreviations using
the cursor and an explanation of the currently marked abbreviation is
displayed in a window at the lower edge of the screen.
The control bits are explained in detail in the PLC manuals. To display the
control bit screen form, the PLC does not need to be in the STOP mode.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOKZ
C o n t r o l
b i t s
NB
PBSSCH
BSTSCH
SCHTAE
ADRBAU
SPABBR
NAUAS
QUITT
NB
NB
B
REMAN
NB
NB
NB
NB
STOZUS
NEUSTA
NB
BARB
BARBEND
MAFEHL
EOVH
BATPUF
X
NB
NB
NB
STOANZ
X
UAFEHL
NB
NB
ASPNEP
AAPSNRA
KOPFNI
PROEND
ASPNEEP
AF
X
PADRFE
ASPLUE
RAMADFE
KEINAS
SYNFEH
NINEU
NB
NB
NB
SUMF
URLAD
STOANZ : Stop bit (internal request)
F
1
Figure 16-1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
F
8
End
Table of Control Bits (for example CPU 928 B)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
16-3
PLC
Once the control bit table is displayed, you can display the ISTACK by
changing the PLC to the STOP mode and pressing the
1. Press the Insert key.
How you handle the plain text display is explained in a window at the lower
edge of the screen which you select by pressing
2. Press HELP.
STEP 5 Window Mode - S50XSOKZ
I n t e r r u p t
D e p t h :
OP–REG:
BLK-STP:
ACCU1:
s t a c k
01
F600
EB07
SAC:
PB-NO.:
REL-SAC:
0000
Condition code:
D00A
10
0000
ACCU2:
0000
CC1
CCO
STATUS
Cause of interr.:
DB-ADD:
DB-NO.:
OVFL
0000
CARRY
OR
ERAB
X
RLO
X
STOPS
NB
STUEB
NAU
SUF
TRAF
QVZ
ZYK
NNNN
PEU
STS
BAU
ASPFA
ERAB
: Last processed statement was first scan
F
1
Figure 16-2
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
5
F
F
6 Continue 7
F
8
Ende
Display of the Interrupt Stack
With F2, you can jump directly to the interrupt point and, if required, edit
the program.
Note
There may be more than one screen page.
16-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PLC
16.5 PLC Info BSTACK
Function
PLC
PLC Info BSTACK
Each time a block is called, the PLC enters the start address of the
currently valid block along with the relative and absolute return address in
the block stack. The return address is the address at which the program
must be continued once the newly called block has been processed.
You can call up this information using the BSTACK function when the PLC
is in the STOP mode.
Block stack
Block no. Block addr. Return address Rel. addr. DB no.
PB 3
OB 1
Figure 16-3
D05A
D0C2
D05B
D0C7
DB addr.
0001
0005
Block Stack
Possible message:
1. Wrong mode at PLC
The PLC is not in the STOP mode.
2. Empty or incomplete stack.
16.6 Output PLC Memory
Function
This function outputs the absolute addresses and their contents on the
screen, printer or to a print file.
The output of the addresses is only possible in the online mode.
Note
Manipulation can cause undefined statuses in the PLC – think out the
consequences before you make changes.
PLC
Output PLC
Memory
Select the menu command PLC Output PLC Memory. The job box
Output PLC memory is displayed. You can browse through the box and
make your selections.
1. Under Output from address: enter the first byte address to be output as
a hexadecimal number ( e.g. ADAC, for S5-155U (20 bit address):
e.g. FADAC).
2. Click Output.
STEP 5 displays the addresses and their contents rolling the screen
downwards in columns.
The address output always begins at an even address.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
16-5
PLC
Non-configured memory areas are marked with XX. STEP 5 outputs a
maximum of 1024 absolute addresses.
To freeze/interrupt the address output:
3. Press ESC = Cancel.
To continue the output, confirm the prompt or press the Insert key.
If you want to make corrections:
4. Click correction and position the cursor on the relevant value with
SHIFT + cursor right/left.
5. Enter the value and complete your input with the Insert key.
The message Enter modified addresses in PLC? appears.
6. Click on yes or no.
To stop and exit the output function:
7. Press ESC = Cancel twice.
No correction:
Press ESC once and reply to the prompt with NO.
After correction: Modified addresses are output: acknowledge the
message.
16-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PLC
16.7 PLC Memory Configuration
PLC
PLC Memory Conf
This function outputs the absolute addresses and their contents on the
screen, to a printer or to a print file.
With this function, you can see the configuration and amount of user
memory being used. The addresses are displayed in hexadecimal form.
The memory assignments and configuration options are described in the
programming instructions for the specific PLC
On the screen, you can see the size of the user memory of the PLC and
the amount currently occupied either in graphical or text form. The display
differs depending on the performance of the PLC.
User memory:
End addr.
S5 type
S5 100 U
CPU ident.
CPU 90
DFFF
Free Memory
Memory occupied
D295
Start addr.
Figure 16-4
D000
Size of the User Memory and Memory Occupied in an S5-100U
M e m o r y
configuration
Memory configuration
End addresses in PLC RAM in hex.
Message
PLC RAM configured to:
3FFE
PLC memory assigned to:
70
Figure 16-5
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Continue?
< Yes >
User Memory Size and Assignment as Text
16-7
PLC
16.8 PLC System Parameters
Function
With this function, you can display the following PLC system parameters
on the screen:
CPU identifier
CPU type
CPU number
memory distribution
block list lengths
PLC
PLC Sys
Parameters
Select the menu command PLC PLC Sys Parameters. The job box PLC
system parameters is displayed.
STEP 5 displays the PLC system parameters on the screen.
The list is spread over two screen pages. The following illustration is an
example of page 1. To move onto page 2 or to terminate the function,
confirm the prompt continue with Yes.
System parameters
Numbers specified in hex.
16-8
PLC software release
Z 01
CPU identifier
S5 100 U CPU 90
PGAS software release
Z 00
I/O module inputs
I/O module inputs
Process image inputs
Process image outputs
Flag memory
Timer memory
Counter memory
RS memory area
0
0
EF00
EF80
EE00
EC00
ED00
EA00
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17
Management
Overview
This main menu includes a series of utilities.
PLC Management
DocumentationChange
Make XREF
F11
EPROM Handling
Ctrl + F2
Automatic Rewiring...
Manual Rewiring...
Assignment Lists >
Convert
Language
Colors
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Description
Section
Page
17.1
Make XRF
17-2
17.2
EPROM Handling
17-2
17.3
Automatic Rewiring
17-7
17.4
Manual Rewiring
17-8
17.5
Assignment Lists
17-11
17.6
Convert V1.x and V2.x
17-17
17.7
Language
17-18
17.8
Colors
17-18
17-1
Management
17.1 Make XRF
Function
Management
Make XRF F11
With this function you can generate a reference list (cross reference list) of
the default program file in a file with the name *XR.INI. This is the source
for cross references in LAD, CSF and STL segments in the I/Q/F list, in the
program structure and in checklists and for the printout of the cross
reference list itself. If you make corrections in a STEP 5 program, you must
regenerate the reference list.
Select the menu command Management Make XRF
After triggering the function in the main menu, this function is executed
automatically.
The reference list is required in the block editor for documentation in the
KOMDOK format and in GRAPH 5 for processing the F2 functions =
Reference.
XRF files (cross-reference lists) can also be generated in the block editor
and before KOMDOK output.
17.2 EPROM Handling
Function
With this function, you transfer STEP 5 blocks from a program file to an
EPROM/EEPROM. This is commonly known as blowing an EPROM.
These memory submodules must be inserted in an EPROM port on the
PG.
STEP 5 supports you in selecting the correct parameters for different
EPROM types.
The following functions are available:
loading blocks in an EPROM/EEPROM
reading blocks from an EPROM/EEPROM and transferring them to the
active program file
erasing EEPROM submodules
displaying information about EPROM/EEPROMs
transferring SYSID parameters
Note
No comment, documentation or variables blocks are transferred to the
submodule.
Management
EPROM Handling
17-2
Select the menu command Management EPROM Handling Ctrl+F2. As
soon as you have selected this function, the EPROM programming dialog
appears.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
EPROM programming
PROGRAM FILE
MODE
C:\ STEP5\S5_DATEN\NONAMEST.S5D
:
WORD
F
F
F
F
F
1 Blow
2 Read
3 Delete
4
5
Figure 17-1
F–> BLOCK F
6 E Info 7
F Help
8 Cancel
EPROM Programming
The program file you selected in the Blocks page of the project settings is
displayed and cannot be changed here. The mode you selected in the
EPROM page of the project settings can also be selected here with SHIFT F5.
You activate the individual functions with the F keys in the function key bar.
Defining the
Function
How to use and define a function is described based on the Blow function
and is basically the same for the other EPROM functions (read, delete and
duplicate).
Press F6 = Mode.
Press F1 = Blow.
Press F12 = Help for block information.
The command line is then displayed at the lower edge of the screen. The
following table explains the possible inputs:
Inputs
Block
Explanation
Complete this input with the Return key.
PBn (e.g.) Single block name.
PB (e.g.)
All blocks of one type.
*
A list is displayed in which you can enter a maximum of 6
blocks.
A
All blocks in the preset program file (→ Project)
Ptr
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
You complete this input with the Insert key.
Blank
Output only on the screen.
*
Standard printout.
1
Normal print.
2
Condensed print.
17-3
Management
Programming
Number
Once you have confirmed your inputs, the following input line is displayed:
PROG NUMBER?
Here, you must enter the programming number. The programming number
identifies the EPROM/EEPROM submodule you are using.
Selecting the
PROG NUMBER
There are two ways of entering this number:
1. Type in the number directly.
2. Select the number using the HELP key. A list supplied with STEP 5
contains the assignments. You can display this list with the HELP key
and can page through it. You can then position the cursor on a
submodule in the list and press the Return key to enter the
programming number in the PROG NUMBER field.
The list of EPROM/EEPROM modules contains the following information:
Term
Explanation
MLFB
Order number of a module.
Prog. no.
The programmer identifies the EPROM/EEPROM submodule
with this programming number. Each number belongs to a
different order number.
Capacity
Memory capacity of the EPROM/EEPROM
Note
The prog.no. 500 is reserved for SIMATIC memory cards. You program
and check these cards the same way as described in this section.
Submodule
Information
Once you have typed in the programming number and pressed the Insert
key, a screen containing submodule information is displayed which you
also acknowledge with the Insert key.
Note
If you type in the wrong Prog. no., EPROM/EEPROMs can be destroyed.
If, for example, you only type in the programming number 57 instead of 457
for submodule 6ES5 372-1AA61, the submodule will be destroyed.
17-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
EPROM INFORMATION
MLFB NUMBER
PROGRAMMING NUMBER
HARDWARE ID
: 6ES5 373–0AA81
: 163
: – – –EPROM HAS NO HARDWARE IDENTIFIER–
CONFIGURATION
:
SOCKET 1 :
SOCKET 3 :
MODE
:
WORD-WORD/FIELD; AS SUBSTITUTE BYTE
CAPACITY
:
PROG NUMBER ?
BLOCK. : PB44
OR
128
*27256
*27256
KBYTES
PTR :
Example of the EPROM/EEPROM Information Screen
How to Activate
Functions
The various EPROM functions activated by function keys (F1 to F8) are
explained in the following table.
Key level
1
KWORDS
SOCKET 2 :
SOCKET 4 :
IF EPROM CORRECT SIMPLY PRESS ENTER KEY
BLOW EPROM
Figure 17-2
64
*27256
*27256
Effect of the function keys
2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F1
Cursor keys → Appendix A4, key assignment
Blow:
Transfer blocks to an EPROM/EEPROM module. Inputs are made as described on
pages 3-257. The transfer is completed with the message
Main function End address nnnnnnnn
Address:
The displayed addresses are physical addresses of the EPROM/EEPROM.
Cancel the transfer with ESC:
F2
The block currently being transferred is completely transferred before the function is
terminated.
Read:
Transfer blocks from an EPROM/EEPROM submodule to the active program file
(→ Project). The transfer is completed with the message :
F3
EPROM check
Delete:
Free from nnnnnnnn
This function erases EEPROMs and memory cards and is completed with the
message:
Main function End address
F5
nnnnnnnn
EPROMs are erased with an erasing unit.
E Info:
Displays information about the submodule inserted in the EPROM slot. Changes to
the next key level.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17-5
Management
Key level
1
2
Effect of the function keys
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
F1
Dir:
Outputs the directory of blocks on the EPROM/EEPROM on the screen or printer. If
a block or block header is found, the block list is displayed on the screen.
Depending on the setting you have selected, the output is completed with the
following message: For a block or a group of blocks:
Block found at
Header end address nnnnnnnn
For all blocks:
F2
EPROM check free from nnnnnnnn Free from is the physical end address of
the last block in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Compare:
Compares the S5 blocks stored in the EPROM/EEPROM with those in the active
program file. The result of the comparison is displayed on the screen or printed out.
During the comparison, messages appear on the screen. The following messages
complete the compare function.
Comparing all blocks:
EPROM check free from nnnnnnnn Free from is the physical end address of
the last block in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Comparing a block or a group of single blocks:
Main function End address nnnnnnnn
If there is a discrepancy between blocks, the following messages are displayed:
Address The relative block address in the submodule.
Ref
The reference is the content of the memory location stored at the relative
block address in the program file.
Act
F3
F5
The actual value is the content of the memory location at which the
relative block address is stored in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Parameters:
Output of EPROM/EEPROM parameters on the screen and comparison with the
parameter values of the submodule inserted in the EPROM slot. If the information
matches up, the PG displays the parameter values as shown in Figure 17-2.
SYSID Inp:
Transfer the data in the SYSID file to the EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
If the EPROM/EEPROM submodule is not completely empty, the following message
is displayed: SYSID writing prohibited
The transfer is completed with the following message:
F6
Main function
SYSID Out:
End address nnnnnnnn
Transfer the SYSID data contained in the EPROM/EEPROM submodule to the
preset SYSID file and display on the screen. The preset SYSID file can be
overwritten with this function. The transfer is completed with the following message:
F8
F8
Main function End address nnnnnnnn
Help
Display function key assignment
Return
Return to function selection
17-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
17.3 Automatic Rewiring
Overview
With the rewiring function, you can rename operands as follows:
automatically, based on an two symbols files or
manually, based on a list of changes you have created (see Section
17.4)
You copy the symbols file belonging to the user program and change the
addresses of the required operands in this file.
The PG uses this new symbols file as a reference list to find the changed
operands automatically in the entire old user program ( or in individual
blocks) and to save the renamed operands in the second program file as a
“new user program”.
The “old” program file is retained if the source and destination files are
different. You can modify any number of operands.
Rules
You can select these operands belonging to the types input I, output Q, flag
F, timer T or counter C in symbolic or absolute format. S flags are not
taken into account.
You can change the addresses but cannot change the symbol for an
operand.
Blocks in which no operands have been changed are stored by STEP 5
unchanged in the “new” program file.
Data blocks cannot be symbolically rewired. To transfer the structure of the
user program unchanged, the data blocks must be transferred separately
to the new file.
Example
The symbols –Flag0 and –Inp0 in the symbols file SYMOLDZ0.SEQ are
assigned to the operands F.0.0 and I0.0 in the program file
REWOLDST.S5D.
In a new symbols file SYMNEWZ0.SEQ, the symbols –Flag0 and –Inp0
are assigned to the operands F 1.2 and I 2.0.
By automatically rewiring, all the same symbols (in SYMOLDZ0.INI and
SYMNEWZO.INI) are assigned to the new operands in the new program
file REWNEWST.S5D .
Note
If you replace I1.0 with I20.0, IB/IW1 does not become IB/IW20.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17-7
Management
Management
Automatic
Rewiring ...
Select the menu command Management Automatic Rewiring..
After you call the function, the PG displays the Automatic rewiring job box.
The name of the user program in which you want to rename operands is
displayed in the program file field. Enter the names of the “new” files to
be created as a result of the modification in the to program file field
and enter the file name of the copy of the assignment list in the with new
symbols file field.
If you only want to rename operands in certain blocks, type in the block list
under Selection or mark all blocks of one type or all blocks (see Section
3.9).
After clicking <Rewire>, STEP 5 outputs a list of the files affected by the
renaming function either on the screen, printer or to a file.
Errors
If an error occurs during the rewiring, the block currently being processed
is not transferred to the new program file and a message displayed to this
effect.
To Stop the
Function
Press ESC = Cancel.
The PG does not store the block currently being processed.
17.4 Manual Rewiring
Function
Management
Manual Rewiring
...
17-8
With this function you can rename operands in an operand list displayed on
the screen. Apart from the new operand addresses, you must also specify
a name for the “new” user program.
Select the menu command Management Manual Rewiring... After you
have selected the function, the PG displays the job box on the screen.
The name of the user program in which you want to rename operands is
displayed in the program file field. Enter the names of the “new” files
created as a result of this modification in the to program file field.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
STEP 5 Window Mode - S5KXS01Z
Manual rewiring
Program file
–>C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
to program file
[PROBSPST.S5D]
–>C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
Selection
Block list
[PB010
]
Output to
(X) Screen
(X) Printer
(X) File
[NONAMELS.INI]
–>C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN
Option
Printout type:
< Rewire >
Figure 17-3
Standard
< Cancel ESC >
< History
F1 >
< Select
F3 >
< Info
< Help
F7 >
Shift+F8 >
Dialog for Manual Rewiring (Example)
After you click <Rewire>, STEP 5 displays the empty table Rewire manual
in which you enter the operands in the old and new program file on the
screen. This list can contain up to 16 operands with the old and new
address in absolute representation. Complete each entry with the Return
key.
After editing the modified operand addresses, complete your input with the
Insert key.
STEP 5 now renames the operands and displays the name of the block
being processed in the Manual rewiring screen form (see Figure 17-4).
When you input the operands, STEP 5 checks each completed input field
immediately for syntax errors and displays the message syntax wrong if
an error is detected.
Printout
If you select output to printer in the selection box, STEP 5 prints out a list
of the renamed operands after you press the Insert key. This list contains
the addresses “old/new”, the number of operands renamed in the block
affected in conjunction with the length information from the block header.
Error messages indicate the operand for which an error was detected.
Following an error, STEP 5 aborts the rewiring function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17-9
Management
Manual r e w i r i n g
Old program file:
WASCHAST.S5D
–>C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
Old operand: Q 32.0
Old operand
F 10.2
PB 2
Number of rewirings:
PB 10
Number of rewirings:
PB 11
Number of rewirings:
Figure 17-4
page 1
New program file:
PROBSPST.S5D
–>C:\S5_DATEN\EXAMPLE
New operand: Q 1.1
New operand: I 7.5
LENGTH=
1
LENGTH=
2
LENGTH=
0
Printout Following Manual Rewiring (Example)
To Stop the
Function
Press ESC = Cancel
Errors
If an error occurs during rewiring, the block in which the error occurs is not
transferred to the “new” program file and a message is displayed to this
effect.
17-10
The PG does not store the block currently being processed.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
17.5 Assignment Lists
Function
With this function you edit the assignment lists required to address
operands symbolically in your user programs.
The following functions are available:
Translation of an assignment list into a symbols file (*Z0.SEQ →
*Z0.INI).
Translation of a symbols file into an assignment list sorted according to
absolute operands or symbolic operands (*Z0.INI → *Z0.SEQ) with or
without sorting the operands.
Fast correction of the assignment list directly in the translated symbols
file (*Z0.INI).
Translation of an old symbols file into an assignment list (Convert stage
V1.x V2.x).
Deleting an assignment list with the corresponding error file.
Deleting a symbols file.
Outputting the list of translation errors (error file).
In the PLC, operands are only processed with absolute addresses. As a
result, the assignment of a symbolic address to an absolute address (e.g.
button 1 → I 1.1) always requires an assignment list with a symbols file
(*Z0.INI) derived from it.
Editing an
Assignment List
How to edit an assignment list is described in Chapter 11.
The source file (*Z0.SEQ) generated following editing, is converted into
three symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI) following translation.
Generating
Symbols Files
The symbols files are generated automatically by STEP 5 after you call
the function Convert SEQ → INI or when you edit the assignment list.
Processing in the
PLC
To translate the user program so that it is suitable for the PLC when it is
loaded, only the symbols files are required.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17-11
Management
17.5.1
Convert SEQ > INI
Function
With this function, you translate the assignment list into the corresponding
symbols file.
Management
Assignment Lists
Convert SEQ →
INI
Select the menu command Management Assignment Lists > Convert
SEQ–>INI.....
After selecting Convert SEQ → INI, STEP 5 displays the Convert
assignment list SEQ –> INI job box in which you type in the name of the
source file to be translated. If you have included absolute operands without
corresponding symbolic operands in the assignment list, the following
message is displayed:
Accept absolute operand as symbol?
Acknowledge this message either with yes or no.
If the conversion is error-free, the following message is displayed
n lines processed, no error found
which you confirm with OK.
If errors occur during the conversion, the message n lines
processed, x errors found is displayed. Once again acknowledge
this message with OK.
Note
If you created an assignment list with English mnemonics for the absolute
operands (Z0.SEQ), the operands will still be output in English if you
output the file in another language. If you want the operands output in, for
example, German mnemonics, you must delete the English assignment
list and convert the symbols file back the assignment list (INI → SEQ).
17.5.2
Convert INI > SEQ
Function
Management
Assignment Lists
Convert INI –>
SEQ ...
With this function, the symbols file is converted to the corresponding
assignment list, and sorted according to absolute parameters, symbols or
as in the symbols file, as you require.
Select the menu command Management Assignment Lists > Convert
INI–>SEQ... After you select this function, STEP 5 displays the Convert
symbols file INI –> SEQ job box in which you type in the name of the
symbols file to be translated and specify how the source file is to be sorted.
After clicking Compile, the file is translated.
The conversion is completed with the message
n lines processed, no errors found
which must be acknowledged with OK.
17-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
Note
When an existing assignment list (SEQ file) is sorted ”according to
absolute parameters” or ”according to symbols”, all additional comments
(;), empty lines and indentations (.PA) are lost.
When the list is sorted ”as in the symbols list”, only the additional
comments remain intact.
Note
During sorting, all the control commands (.PA) and empty lines and
comment lines (;) are lost.
17.5.3
Correct INI
Function
Management
Assignment Lists
Correct INI
With this function, you can correct individual assignments in long
assignment lists (avoiding long conversion times required for all the
assignments).
Select the menu command Management Assignment List > Correct
INI.....
After selecting this function, STEP 5 displays the Correct symbols file job
box in which you can type in the name of the symbols file to be corrected.
After clicking Correct, the following box is displayed:
Symbols file:
C:PROEXAZ0.INI
Operand
Symbol
Comment
Assignment to operand:
Assignment to symbol:
Inputting the
Assignment Line
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 Insert
2 Display
3Del Abs
4 Del Sym
5 Assli Opt
6
Below the three terms Operand - Symbol - Comment there is an input
line. Here, you type in a new assignment in the symbols file.
17-13
Management
The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the input line. The input line is
edited in the overwrite mode.
The DEL = Delete key deletes the character marked by the cursor.
The horizontal expand key inserts a blank at the cursor position.
With the roll screen (up and down) keys you can alternate between
input and display lines.
The Return key and the TAB key move the cursor one input field to the
right.
17-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
When editing the assignments in the symbols file, STEP 5 makes the
following functions available with the function keys.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Function
Explanation
F1 = Insert
The assignment in the input line is entered providing the
operand address is not assigned. Otherwise, the error
message: Key already exists is displayed.
F2 = Display
The assignment to the absolute or symbolic parameter is
displayed if this exists in the symbol file. The display
remains on the screen until you press F2 again.
F3 = Del Abs
The assignment belonging to the absolute parameter
(operand) in the input line is deleted from the symbols file. If
the assignment is not defined, an error message is
displayed.
F4 = Del Sym
The assignment belonging to the symbolic parameter in the
input line is deleted from the symbols file. If the assignment
is not defined, an error message is displayed.
F5 = Assli Opt
The assignment list is optimized.
F8 = Return
After modifications in the symbols file, STEP5 prompts you
to confirm that the source file (Z0.SEQ) should be
generated. If you want to generate the source file, press the
Insert key, otherwise terminate with NO.
1. If you want to insert a new operand in the symbols file:
Type in a free absolute and symbolic address and the operand
comment and press F1 = Insert.
2. If you want to rename the absolute address of an existing operand:
Type in the relevant operand and delete its absolute address with F3 =
Del Abs. Now overwrite the operand with its new address and press F1.
3. If you want to change the symbolic address of an existing operand:
Proceed as described under 2), but delete with F4 = Del Sym.
17.5.4
Convert V1.x and V2.x
Overview
The byte address of an absolute parameter in the “old” assignment list of
the S5-DOS software V1.x and V2.x under PCP/M is three bytes long. In
STEP 5 version V3.x and higher, the byte address is four bytes long owing
to the introduction of new flags (S). For this reason, the “old” symbols file
must be converted to a “new” source file before you can work with it.
Assignment lists created with higher versions do not need to be converted.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
17-15
Management
Management
Assignment Lists
Convert V1.x
and V2.x
17.5.5
Select the menu command Management Assignment Lists > Convert
V1.x and V2.x.Type in the name of the assignment list in the displayed job
box. When you click Compile, the file is converted.
If you have specified absolute operands without corresponding symbolic
operands in the assignment list, the following message is displayed:
Acknowledge the message to suit your requirements.
Delete SEQ
Management
Assignment Lists
Delete SEQ
With this function you can delete an assignment list. At the same time, the
error list file and key assignment file assigned to the file are also deleted.
After you start the function Delete SEQ, STEP 5 displays a job box in
which you type in the name of the assignment list to be deleted if it is not
already displayed.
After clicking Delete, the *SEQ files are deleted. On completion of the
function, the deleted files are listed on the screen.
17.5.6
Delete INI
Management
Assignment Lists
Delete INI
With this function you can delete the symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI,
*Z2.INI).
After selecting the function Delete INI, STEP 5 displays a job box in which
you type in the name of the symbols file to be deleted if this is not already
displayed.
After clicking Delete, the symbols files are deleted. On completion of the
function the deleted files are listed on the screen.
17.5.7
Output error list
Management
Assignment Lists
Output Error
List
STEP 5 collects the error messages occurring during one of the following
conversions.
Conversion of the assignment list *Z0.SEQ into the symbols files
(*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI)
Reconversion of the symbols files into the assignment list (INI → SEQ).
After calling the function Output ErrorLlist a job box is displayed in which
you type in the name of the error file (*ZF.SEQ) to be output and where you
want it output to (screen, printer or file). Click Output to start the function.
17-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Management
Example
File
C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT\PROBSPZ0.SEQ
Translation Assig. list C:PROBSPZ0.SEQ
=> Symbols file C:PROEXAZ0.INI
F1.71
***
Error in line 6: Absolute parameter does not match OPID ***
***
susi
Error in line 7: Wrong operand identifier
***
8 lines processed,
Figure 17-5
2 errors found
***
***
Error List after Editing the Assignment List (Example)
An error message indicates the incorrectly assigned operand, the location
of the error and the error type.
Each time you translate the same assignment list, STEP 5 automatically
overwrites the previously stored error list.
The file is also generated if no error occurs.
17.6 Convert
Function
This function converts project data and user files from the file format of
STEP 5/ST version 6.x to the format of version 7.x. The new file format contains
complete DOS paths. The following conversions are possible:
PJ PX project file from version 6.x to version 7.x
PX PJ project file from version 6.x to version 7.x
PJ+AP PX project file from version 6.x (taking into account the files to
which bus paths are assigned) to version 7.x
Management
Convert ...
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Select the menu command Management Convert. The Convert file formats
dialog appears on the screen. Select the type of conversion, the source file
and destination file.
17-17
Management
17.7 Language
Management
Language...
Select the menu command Management Language. The Select STEP 5/ST
language job box appears on the screen. Enter an X beside the required
language and click Enter.
As an option, you can have the language selection box displayed each time
you restart STEP 5/ST.
17.8 Colors
Management
Colors
Black and White
Display for
STEP 5/ST V 7.0
Select the menu command Management Colors. The S5COLOR Screen
colors job box is displayed.
STEP 5/ST is designed for a color monitor.
If you connect a monochrome monitor to your PC, the dialogs are displayed
in gray tones. If you prefer a black and white display, you can activate this
option for your work station by copying the [email protected]@FT.DAT file to your
home directory and renaming it @@@@@@FT.DAT.
The [email protected]@FT.DAT file is in the \S5_INST subdirectory in the system
directory.
If you select the black and white display, this affects STEP 5/ST optional
packages and COM packages as well as tools such as S5DRV.EXE on your
work station.
Black and white display has priority over user-specific color scheme.
To deactivate the black and white display at your work station, remove the
@@@@@@FT.DAT from your Home directory (see also search order).
User-Specific
Color Display for
STEP 5/ST V 7.0
You can change the color scheme for STEP 5/ST.
This is particularly useful if you want to improve the gray tone display on a
monochrome monitor or cannot distinguish certain colors due to the color
setting of the monitor.
The user-specific color setting is selected using the menu item Management/
Color setting and is stored in the [email protected]@@@FT.DAT file in the Home directory
The user-specific color setting only affects STEP 5/ST on your workstation.
COM packages and tools such as S5DRV.EXE are displayed in the standard
colors.
To deactivate the user-specific color display on your workstation, remove the
[email protected]@@@FT.DAT file from your home directory.
17-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18
Documentation
Overview
The Documentation menu provides a range of functions with which you can
output program sections such as blocks, files and lists on a printer (A3, A4)
or to a file, for example:
program blocks, data blocks, lists, structures
text files (ASCII files)
In addition to this, it is also possible to evaluate certain data according to
different criteria, for example:
output the cross reference list according to selected operands
output the assignment list sorted according to symbolic operands
Documentation
Change
STEP 5 Blocks ...
Data Blocks...
DB Screen s...
Assignment List ...
Program Structure ...
Cross References ...
I/Q/ F List ...
Three-in-One...
Enhanced Output>
Doc Commands >
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Description
Section
Page
18.1
Overview of the Documentation Functions
18-2
18.2
Standard Output
18-3
18.3
Enhanced Output
18-11
18.4
Doc Commands
18-20
18.5
Editing Doc Commands
18-26
18-1
Documentation
18.1 Overview of the Documentation Functions
Standard Output
The program sections are output in the form in which you edited them and
with a footer if you have selected this function. The data can be output
either from the program file or from the PLC (see Section 18.2).
Enhanced Output
The program sections are printed out with additional graphical elements
(lines, boxes etc.) and a footer. This data can only be output from the
program file and not directly from the PLC (see Section 18.3).
Doc Command for
Enhanced Output
All the functions of the enhanced output can be executed by doc
commands which you edit and store in files. Using these commands, you
can run frequently recurring outputs without laborious input routines. Some
doc commands can be used to call further doc command files achieving a
sequential structure. This can be represented graphically with the Edit
structure function (see Section 18.5.6).
Hardcopy
You can print a hardcopy as follows:
1. with the SHIFT + PRINT key
Under Windows 95, this key combination creates a “snapshot” of the
screen that you can print using system functions.
18-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.2 Standard Output
Menu
Figure 18-1 shows the menu options for standard output. With this function,
you can output program sections in their basic form (as you edited them)
either on a printer (A3, A4) to files or on the screen. You can decide
whether to output from the program file or from the PLC.
Documentation
Change
STEP 5 Blocks ...
Data Blocks...
DB Screen s...
Assignment List ...
Program Structure ...
Cross References ...
I/Q/ F List ...
Three-in-One...
Standard output
Enhanced Output>
Doc Commands >
Figure 18-1
Menu Options for Standard Output
Note
For standard output, no cross reference list (file *XR.INI) is necessary.
Example of a
Printout
The following example in the LAD method of representation (PB1, segment
1) contains a STEP 5 block in its basic form, i.e. the blocks are printed out
as you edited them. If you select enhanced output, further graphical
information is added to the printout. The footer is not illustrated.
PB 1
C:EXA4095ST.S5D
LEN=27
Page 1
Segment 1
Segment title PB 1 Seg 1
Segment comment PB 1, Seg 1
07.04.92
!I 1.2
I 1.1
Q 1.1
+-––][---+---]/[---+-------+-------+------+---()-!
!
:BE
Figure 18-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Printout of a STEP 5 Block
18-3
Documentation
Settings
Please check if the following is set::
Program file
method of representation STL, LAD or CSF
Footer file (only if footer: yes is set)
Symbols file (only if symbols:yes is set)
XRF file (→ Make XRF)
Mode (onlirep.ne when you want to output from the PLC)
Printer file (the defaults NONAMELS.INI apply to the PT88)
With or without comment
For more information about settings, refer to the project settings,
Section 4.1.1.
Activating the
Functions
Output
Select a menu command, for example Documentation
STEP5 Blocks...
A job box, in this case, Print STEP 5 blocks, is displayed. In this box, you can
browse and make your selections (see Section 3.6)
You can output to a file, to the screen or to a printer.
If the screen display covers more than one page, the prompt Continue?
yes/no is displayed. You can clear this box from the screen with the
space bar.
As an option, you can add a customized footer to the printout.
18-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.2.1
STEP 5 Blocks
Function
With this function, you can output the blocks of a program file or from the
PLC memory in the LAD, CSF or STL method of representation.
Documentation
STEP 5 Blocks
Select the menu command Documentation STEP 5 Blocks. The Print
STEP 5 block(s) job box is displayed. Here, you can make your selections.
In the following table only the inputs for this function are explained.
Input field
Segment number
from [
]
to [
]
wit STL addresses
18.2.2
Explanations
Output segment numbers from n to n from
a program block.
Only when STL is selected: select the type
of address information.
Data Blocks
Function
Documentation
Data Blocks
Example of an
output
With this function, you can either output individual or all the data blocks of
a program.
Select the menu command Documentation Data Blocks. The Print data
blocks job box is displayed. Here, you can make your selections.
With comments was selected in the settings (see Section 4.1.1, Blocks
tab).
DB 10
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
Figure 18-3
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
C:EXAXXXST.S5D
KH = 0000;
KS = ’DB 10 for S5 90 ’;
KT = 010.1;
KT = 020.1;
KC = 010;
KC = 020;
KM = 00000000 00000000
KM = 00000000 00000000
KF = +00010;
KF = +00020;
KH = 0000;
KH = 0000;
LEN=25
Variables
Block for S590
Actuator
/16
Page 1
Bit pattern 1
Bit pattern 2
Example of Data Block Output
18-5
Documentation
18.2.3
DB Screens
Function
With this function, you can output data blocks containing screen forms.
Documentation
DB Screens
18.2.4
Select the menu command Documentation DB Screen Forms. The
Output DB screens job box is displayed. Here, you can make your
selections.
Assignment List
Function
With this function, you output an assignment list to printer or file.
Documentation
Assignment List
Example
Select the menu command Documentation Assignment List. The job
box Print assignment list is displayed. Here, you can make your selections.
File C:EXA409Z0.SEQ
Operand
Symbol
Comment
I
I
I
I
.
.
.
INP 1
INP 2
INP 3
S 2–1
.
.
.
Input
Input
Input
Input
.
.
.
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.1
Figure 18-4
18.2.5
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.1
Example: Output of an Assignment List
Program Structure
Function
With this function, you can output the call structure (program overview) of the
individual blocks in a user program. You can output the program overview from
the program file or from the PLC. The output is in three parts:
1. List of all blocks (including symbolic names if they exist) including the
length, number of words of the individual blocks.
2. List of all block types in the program file, with the length of each block
type.
3. Program overview in which the nested calls (nesting depth maximum 8
block calls) of the individual blocks starting with the block type OB is
specified. With each block, a further ID is output.
Documentation
Program
Structure
18-6
Select the menu command Documentation Program Structure.
TheOutput program structure job box is displayed.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
Example
Standard output of a program structure with data blocks.
Program
PB
PB
PB
PB
FB
OB
DB
Length : PB
Length : SB
Length : FB
Length : FX
Length : OB
Length : DB
Length : DX
Length :
overview with D B
1 :
2 :
3 :
12 :
10 :
1 :
10 :
64
0
50
0
13
28
0
155
P r o g r a m
o v e r v i e w
w i t h
Page 1
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
Length
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9
21
9
25
50
13
28
D B
Page
2
+–OB 1–+=PB 1–+DB 10–
I
I
I
+=PB 3–+FB 10
I
I
I.
I.
.
.
Figure 18-5
Block Call IDs
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Program Overview with DB
The blocks are output with call IDs. These show you the type of call in the
program.
ID
Explanation
–
Block is called unconditionally
=
Block is called conditionally
#
Block call follows a DO DW or DO FW operation (indirect
addressing)
?
Block call as formal operand An actual operand can be output
as a constant or as MC 5 machine code.
???????
The called block does not exist in the program file
!F113!
There are further block calls that cannot be represented
(nesting depth too great)
!F114!
Recursive block call, e.g. calling an OB in a PB
18-7
Documentation
18.2.6
Cross References
Function
With this function, you output a cross reference list from an existing program
file.
The following information is provided:
cross references to operand areas I, Q, F, T, C.
cross references to data
cross references to I/Os
cross references to block calls
(S flags are not output in the cross reference list. )
cross references to individual symbolic or absolute operands (e.g.
–MOTOR, I1.0)
The cross references are sorted by absolute operands. An entry contains
the following:
the operand
the symbol
the block and segment
an identifier showing use (see Figure 18-6).
Documentation
Cross References
Select the menu command Documentation Cross References. After
you call the function, the Output XREF list job box is displayed. In the
following table only the inputs specific to this function are explained.
Input field
all elements
Explanation
All elements (operands) are listed in the order
I, Q, F, S, T, C, B, P, D on one page.
Flags, data block, inputs, A cross reference list is only output for these
timers, I/Os, outputs,
elements.
counters, block calls
Single operand
18-8
Indicates the occurrence of an operand in all
blocks. If you only specify a single block, an
error message is displayed. F3 = Select is not
possible in this situation.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
X reference list: flags
F
F
32.1 -Flag321
32.2 -Flag322
F
33.3 -Flag333
Operand
Symbolic name
Block
Figure 18-6
Meaning of the IDs
18.2.7
PB 1
PB 1
PB 2
PB 1
1*,
1 ,
1
3*,
2,
2,
4
5,
7?
4 ,
5,
6*
Operand as
assignment
Block no.
Segment no.
Operand
as scan
Example of a Cross-Reference List
Identifier
Explanation
Blank
The operand occurs as a scan (e.g.: -A I 1.0)
*
The operand occurs as an assignment (e.g.: Q 1.1).
?
The operand occurs as a parameter for an FB call. An
actual operand can be output as a constant or as MC 5
code.
#
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW operations (indirect
addressing).
S
The operand is addressed in a standard function block.
!
The operand is addressed in a standard function and in a
user block.
^
Operand references continued.
I/Q/F List
Function
With this function, you output an I/Q/F list. The I/Q/F list takes the form of a
table and provides you with an overview of which bit is occupied in the I, Q,
F, operand areas. One line is reserved for every two bytes of an operand area,
in which the 8 possible bits are marked (see Figure 18-7).
a byte (B)
a word (W)
a double word (D)
Documentation
I/Q/F List
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Select the menu command Documentation I/Q/F list. The Output I/Q/F
list job box is displayed. Here, you can make your selections
18-9
Documentation
Example
Page 1
I / Q / F list:
PB
PB
PB
PB
FB
OB
1
2
3
12
10
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Page 2
I / Q / F list
Existing inputs in program
Byte 0
Byte 2
Byte 4
Byte 6
Byte 8
Byte 10
Figure 18-7
! 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0! B W D!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
XX !
!
!
X !
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
1
3
5
7
9
11
! 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0! B W D!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Example of a Standard I/Q/F List
Meaning of the identifiers in an I/Q/F list:
Identifier
18.2.8
Explanation
Blank
The operand is addressed as a byte, word or double word
operation and not as a bit operation.
–
The operand is not addressed.
X
A bit operation is performed on the operand.
#
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW operations.
S
The operand is addressed in a standard function block.
?
The operand occurs as a parameter of an FB call.
!
The operand is addressed in a standard FB and in a user
FB.
Three-in-One
Function
With this function, you trigger a multifunction job in which
program overview
I/Q/F list
XRF list
are output one after the other without interruption, either on the screen, to
the printer or to a file. For standard output no cross-reference list (file
*XR.INI) is necessary.
Documentation
Three-in-One
18-10
Select the menu command Documentation
three-in-one job job box is displayed.
Three-in-One. The Output
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.3 Enhanced Output
Overview
The enhanced output function, previously also known as KOMDOK allows
you to document STEP 5 and GRAPH 5 programs in detail and for the
most part automatically (using doc commands). In contrast to the standard
output, program data can be sorted and evaluated and also prepared in a
graphical form.
Output is also possible with continuous lines (see Figure 18-8 and Figure
18-9). You can print on either A3 or A4 paper. The printout on A4 paper is a
compressed form of the A3 printout. The objects to be documented must
be located on diskette or hard disk. If you only have programs in the PLC
memory, you must first transfer them from the PLC to diskette or hard disk.
The main feature of the enhanced output is that you can use
doc commands (see Section 18.4) to control the printout with a minimum of
keystrokes. There are doc commands for all the functions of the enhanced
output. You can store doc commands in a selectable file.
You can select the printer setting in the → Editor, Printer Parameters
before printing out.
Selecting
Enhanced
Functions
When you select the enhanced output function, a menu is displayed in
which you can select the following elements for output:
Documentation
Change
STEP 5 Blocks ...
Data Blocks ...
DB-Masken ...
Blocks List
... ...
Assignment
DB1
Screens...
Program Structure ...
List ... ...
CrossBlock
References
List ...
I/Q/F Assignment
List ...
Three-in-One
Program...Structure ...
Cross References ...
Enhanced
I/Q/F Output
List ... >
Doc Commands
S Flag List >
...
Checklist ...
Text File ...
Example of a
Printout
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The first printout ( Figure 18-8) illustrates enhanced output and the second
(Figure 18-9) is a standard printout. Note the difference between the two
figures.
18-11
Documentation
Control System Flowchart
Block:
PB 1 Symbol: Garage Comment: Garage door control with buttons
Segment 1
0000
Lib no.: Length: 25
OPEN DOOR from inside or outside
Outside: Activate keyswitch and OPEN button briefly.
Inside: Press OPEN button briefly.
Door opens until upper limit switch is reached or HALT button is pressed.
&
-OPENout
-Lock
>=1
-OPEN-in
-opDOOR
-LIMtop
-EMERHALT
&
0
0
Operand
DATE:
8.09.92
ACCEPT TEST:
K O M D O K / ST
S I E M E N S TEST:
NAME:
XYZ
VERSION:
V 4.0 (7.9.92)
KARLSRUHE
UNDER:
AUT E1 161 B
FOOTER:
with DR211N
Figure 18-8
OPEN button outside
OPEN button inside
Upper limit switch
HALT or EMER STOP button
Keyswitch outside
Door opened by motor
OPENout
OPENin
LIMtop
EMERHALT
Lock
opDOOR
TEST SYSTEM:
PG 770
KODOEMF2.INI
-opDOOR
=
Operand comment
Symbolic operand
1.2
1.5
1.0
0.0
1.4
1.0
I
I
I
I
I
Q
+
SIMATIC S5
WITH PCP/M-EMULATOR
(V2.1, 8/92)
M S - D O S (V 5.0)
Block:
Program file:
A:GARAGEST.S5D PB 1
FOR FM-NO.:
FOR PR-NO.:
PAGE
1
Segm:
1
Enhanced Printout of a Control System Flowchart
PB 1
-Garage
Segment 1
A: GARAGEST.S5D
0000
Lib No.: Length: 25
OPEN DOOR from inside or outside.
Outside: Activate keyswitch and OPEN briefly
Inside: Press OPEN button briefly.
Door opens until upper limit switch is reached or HALT button is pressed.
&
-OPENout
-Lock
>=1
-OPENin
-opDOOR
&
-LIMtop
-EMERHALT
I
I
I
I
I
Q
1.2
1.5
1.0
0.0
1.4
1.0
18-12
OPENout
OPENin
LIMtop
EMERHALT
Lock
opDOOR
+
=
8.09.92
ACCEPT TEST:
K O M D O K / ST
S I E M E N S
NAME:
XYZ
VERSION:
V 4.0 (7.9.92)
KARLSRUHE
AUT E1 161 B
FOOTER:
KODOEMF2.INI
-OPDOOR
OPEN button outside
OPEN button inside
Upper limit switch
HALT or EMER STOP button
Keyswitch outside
Door opened by motor
DATE:
TEST SYSTEM:
PG 770
with DR211N
Figure 18-9
=
=
=
=
=
=
0
0
SIMATIC S5
TEST:
WITH PCP/M-EMULATOR
(V2.1, 8/92)
UNDER:
M S - D O S (V 5.0)
Block:
Program file:
A:GARAGEST.S5D PB 1
Segm:
1
FOR FM-NO.:
FOR PR-NO.:
PAGE
1
Simple Printout of a Control System Flowchart
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.3.1
Output KOMDOK Blocks
Function
This function prints out blocks in the LAD, CSF or STL methods of representation with or without references, with or without diagnostic setpoint data, in A3
or A4 format. You can also direct the printout to a file (*LS.INI).
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Blocks
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output Blocks. The job box Output KOMDOK blocks is displayed.
In the following table only the inputs specific to this function are explained.
Input
With forward and
backward refs.
Layout
Update XRF
18.3.2
Forward references:
If operands are assigned in the printed
segment, the program sections are also
printed out in which the scans occur.
Backward references:
If outputs or flags are scanned in the printed
segment, the program sections are printed out
in which the assignments occur.
A line in the printout contains as many cross
references per statement as permitted by the
layout. The characters >>> at the end of the
line indicate that there are further cross
references in the program.
If you press F7 an example of a standard
format is displayed.
The XRF file is updated before the blocks are
output.
KOMDOK DB1 Screens
Function
This function prints out the data block with the I/O assignment in A3 or A4 format.
You can also output to a file (*LS.INI).
Documentation
Enhanced Output
DB1 Screens
18.3.3
Explanations
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output DB1
Screens. The job box KOMDOK output DB1 screens is displayed.
KOMDOK Block List
Function
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
With this function, you can output a block list in A3 or A4 format on paper or
to a file (*LS.INI). The list contains all the program and data blocks of the selected
program file.
18-13
Documentation
You obtain the following information about the listed blocks:
block type
block number
symbolic identifier (if you selected symbols: yes)
operand comments
block length
LIB number
documentation files with length information
footer
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Block List
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output Block
List. Depending on the setting, a block list is printed out or output to the
selected file. While the block list is being generated, the message
printout block list
is displayed. When this message disappears and if no error message is
displayed the function is complete and the block list is output.
18.3.4
KOMDOK Assignment List
Function
You can output an assignment list as follows:
in sequential form, as edited
sorted according to absolute operands
sorted according to symbolic operands.
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Assignment List
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output Assignment List. The Output KOMDOK assignment list job box is
displayed.
You can output the assignment list in the following modes:
Inputs
Unsorted
Sorted by absolute
operands
Sorted by symbolic
operands
Layout
Standard
Optional
18-14
Explanation
Unsorted output. The symbols setting is not
relevant.
The output is sorted by absolute operands. A
new page is started for each of these
operands which are output in the order I, Q, F,
S, T, C, B, P, D. Symbols: yes must be set.
The output is sorted by symbolic operands. A
new page is started for each of these
operands which are output in the order I, Q, F,
S, T, C, B, P, D. Symbols: yes must be set.
If you press SHIFT F8 or the Help key, an
example of a standard format is displayed.
Only relevant in A3 format. Operation as
described above.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
When you exit the job box with Output, the following message flashes up:
Printout assignment list
If this message disappears, the function is completed and, providing no
error message has occurred, the assignment list is output.
18.3.5
KOMDOK Program Structure
Function
This function outputs the block calls in a program file in A3 or A4 format on paper
or to a file (*LS.INI). The output has the following conventions:
The type of block call is specified before each block
The block name is entered in absolute form and in symbolic form (only
when you have selected symbols: yes in the project settings, Section
4.1.1).
The maximum nesting depth that can be recorded is 9.
You can output with or without data blocks.
The following calls are listed:
Call
JU
DOU
JC
DOC
C
CX
G
GX
AI
#
*REC*
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Program
Structure
Explanation
Unconditional block call
Unconditional function block (FX) call
Conditional block call
Conditional function block (FX) call
Data block call
Data block (DX) call
Generate data block
Generate data block (DX)
Block as parameter (call formal operand)
Block call
Recursive block call
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output Program Structure. The Output KOMDOK program structure job box is
displayed. The fields specific to this function are explained below.
Input field
Program file
Structure from block
without DB calls
with DB calls
Output to
Explanations
Cannot be selected here. Must be preset
(project settings, Section 4.1.1)
The structure of the program is output starting
from the specified block.
Data blocks are ignored in the structure.
Data blocks are included in the structure.
As in all job boxes.
When you exit the job box with Output, the following message flashes up:
Printout program structure
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-15
Documentation
When this message disappears and if no error message has occurred, the
function is completed and the program structure output.
Example of a
Printout
Program structure without data blocks
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
OB 1
PB 1
FB 10
FX 11
Org.blk. +_JU
PROG 1 +_JC
+_C
Data
+_DO
DX 11
+_CX
F-blk. +_DOC
FX 20
DB 10
Level 5
DB 16
DX 12
Ext.FX +_GX
Ext DB
+_#
Ext DB
DB 14
+_AI
Data
Figure 18-10 Output of a Program Structure without DB
18.3.6
KOMDOK Cross Reference List (XRF List)
Function
With this function, you output cross references within the program file according
to certain criteria from an existing cross reference list (*XR.INI).
The following information is provided:
cross reference list according to operand IDs, for example I, Q, F ...
cross reference list according to single symbolic or absolute operands
(e.g. I 1.0, MOTOR) in the preset file.
Note
Make sure there is always an up-to-date cross reference list (XRF file) of
the valid program file when outputting cross references (→ Management,
Make XRF).
If you modify the program, the cross reference list must be regenerated.
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Cross
References
18-16
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output Cross
References. The job box Output KOMDOK XREF list is displayed. The
input fields specific to the function are explained below.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Selection
all elements
Explanations
All the elements are output in the order I,
Q, F, S, T, C, B, P, D, each type on a
separate page.
Flags, S flags, data block,
These operands are selected singly. A
inputs, timers, I/Os, outputs, cross reference list is then only output for
counters, block calls
these operands.
Single operand
Specify a single operand (absolute or
symbolic). F3 = Select is not possible here.
SHIFT F8 provides information.
Layout
Standard
If you press SHIFT F8 or the Help key, an
example of a standard format is displayed.
Optional
Only relevant in A3 format. Operation as
above.
Standard in compact
form
Compact means: if an operand in a
segment is addressed n times with the
same operation, the segment is not listed n
times but only once.
When you exit the job box with Output, the following message flashes up:
Printout XRF list
When this message disappears and if no error message has occurred, the
cross reference list is output.
18.3.7
KOMDOK I/Q/F List
Function
With this function, you output an I/Q/F list. The I/Q/F list takes the form of a
table and provides you with an overview of which bit is occupied in the I, F, Q
operand areas. One line is reserved for each byte of an operand area, in which
the 8 possible bits are marked. In addition, the I/Q/F list also indicates whether
the command processes
a byte (B)
a word (W)
a double word (D)
Documentation
Enhanced Output
I/Q/F List
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output I/Q/F
list. An I/Q/F list is printed out or output to a file. During the output of the
I/Q/F list, the following message is displayed inversely on the screen:
Printout I/Q/F list
When this message disappears and if no error has occurred, the function is
completed and the I/Q/F list output.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-17
Documentation
Note
Make sure there is always an up-to-date cross reference list (XRF file) of
the valid program file when outputting cross references (→ Management,
Make XRF).
Identifier
Blank
–
X
#
S
?
!
Explanation
The operand is addressed as a byte, word or double word
operation and not as a bit operation.
The operand is not addressed.
A bit operation is performed on the operand.
The operand follows DO FW or DO DW operation.
The operand is addressed in a standard function block.
The operand occurs as a parameter for an FB call.
The operand is addressed in a standard FB and in a user
FB.
Example I/Q/F
List of the Inputs
I/Q/F list inputs
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
! 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B !W D
!
!
!
!
!
X X !
!
X !
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
32
33
34
35
36
37
!7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
! D
BW
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Figure 18-11 I/Q/F List of the Inputs
18.3.8
KOMDOK I/Q/F List for S Flags
Documentation
Enhanced Output
S Flag List
18-18
This function outputs the I/Q/F list for the S flags (see Figure 18-11 I/Q/F
list).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.3.9
KOMDOK Checklist
Function
This function searches through the program file. Depending on the option
selected, the following information is output:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Object
Free operands
No symbol
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Checklist
18.3.10
Explanation
These are operands that occur in the assignment list
but not in the program blocks output in the order I, Q,
F, S, T, C, B, P, D.
These are operands in the program blocks to which
no symbol is assigned in the assignment list. These
operands are output in ascending order.
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output
Checklist. The job box Output KOMDOK checklist is displayed.
KOMDOK Text Files
Function
Documentation
Enhanced Output
Text File
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
With this function you can print out LS files or ASCII files or output them to
an LS.INI file. Text files can have footers added to them although this is not
part of the text file itself. You can therefore add a footer later.
Select the menu command Documentation Enhanced Output
File. The job box Output KOMDOK text file is displayed.
Text
18-19
Documentation
18.4 Doc Commands
Overview
You can execute all the functions of the enhanced output using doc commands.
These doc commands are put together like a program in a file (submit file) and
can be executed by calling this file. The way in which you use the doc commands
decides on the type and order of output.
The following functions are available to process doc commands:
A doc command string consists of doc commands for
presets ($)
commands ( – )
comments ( ; ) (if required)
Structure of the
Doc Commands
You can call individual doc command files by means of a suitable
statement in a doc command sequence (Figure 18-12). Following the call,
the doc commands in the opened file are executed. Once the sequence of
doc commands has been executed, the invoking doc command sequence
is continued.
With these commands, you can create a series of statements (structures).
To allow a better overview of possibly complex structures, the two following
functions are available:
→ Editing the structure
The combination of individual doc command files is represented
graphically.
→ Print out the structure
EXAMP1
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP2
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP3
EXAMP2
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
–PRINT COM:EXAMP3
EXAMP3
$Presets
–Command
–Command
–Command
EXAMP3
$Presets
$Voreinstellung
–Command
–Kommando
–Command
–Kommando
–Command
–Kommando
Figure 18-12 Structures of the Doc Commands (Example)
18-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.4.1
Presets
Table 18-1
Doc Command for Presets
Doc Commands
Explanation
$LAD, $CSF, $STL
Method of representation: of the Ladder Diagram (LAD), Control
System Flowchart (CSF), Statement List (STL).
$KAT:X:\ ...\
Create a directory: the set directory is used with the SUBMIT
commands $PROG, $SYMB, $FOOT, $DLST and -DOCCOMM (see
Table 18-5).
Program file: to select the file in drive X under the name
NNNNNNST.S5D.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
$PROG:X:NNNNNN
$SYMB:X:NNNNNN
Symbols file: to select this file in drive X under the name
NNNNNNZ0.INI.
$SYMB:NO
Symbolic operands: are not output.
$FOOT:X:NNNNNN
Footer file: selected in drive X under the name NNNNNNF2.INI.
$PRFI:X:NNNNNN
The printer file is identified by this name. The program searches first
in the ...\S5_HOME catalog (printer files created or changed by the
user) and then in the ...\S5_SYS\DR_INI\ catalog (printer files
originally supplied and copied to this directory by the installation
program).
$PATH:X:NNNNNN
(PATH name)
Path name: has no effect.
$PAGE:nnnn
Page number: the page number is incremented from the number
nnnn.
$PLST:X:NNNNNN
Output to file: all outputs are stored on drive X under the file name
NNNNNNLS.INI
$PLST:NO
Output to printer again.
$CHARSET:ASCII
Layout: use the ASCII character set (broken lines).
$CHARSET:CHA.
GRAPHICS
Layout: use the IBM character set.
$CONTENT
Directory: from this doc command onwards, a directory is kept. This
preset can no longer be reset in the active submit.
$PAUSE:COMMENT
Interrupt processing the doc command. The comment is displayed at
the lower edge of the screen. By pressing a key the pause is
terminated.
The commands $PROG, $SYMB, $FOOT. $PLST and –DOCCOMM must identify the entire directory. This can be
achieved in three ways:
1. A $KAT command is specified to set the directory and only the drive and file name are specified in the SUBMIT
command, for example:
$KAT:C:\DATEN\TEST
$PROG:C:NONAME
In the SUBMIT, C:\DATEN\TEST\NONAMEST.S5D is used as the program file.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-21
Documentation
Table 18-1
Doc Command for Presets
Doc Commands
Explanation
2. A $KAT command is used and only the drive and the file name are specified, for example:
$PROG:C:NONAME
The directory is the directory for the particular file type from the project settings, in this case the program
file.
3. The full directory is written in the SUBMIT command, for example:
$PROG:C:\DATEN\TEST\NONAME
18-22
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.4.2
Commands
Table 18-2
Doc Commands for Blocks
Doc Commands
Explanation
–BLOCK:A
All blocks
–BLOCK:#
All documentation files
–BLOCK:OB
All organization blocks
–BLOCK:PB
All program blocks
–BLOCK:FB
All function blocks
–BLOCK:FX
Extended function blocks
–BLOCK:SB
All sequence blocks
–BLOCK:DB
All data blocks
–BLOCK:DX
Extended data blocks
–BLOCK:
(e.g. PB1, PB2–PBn)
A list of blocks
–BLOCK:PBx, 1, 3–5
A list of single segments of a block.
If blocks are output with cross references or diagnostic setpoint data, you must indicate this with an
option.
Table 18-3
Doc Commands for Blocks with Options
Doc Commands
–BLOCK(R):A
–BLOCK(O):PBx
–BLOCK(RO):PBx
–BLOCK(D):PBx
–BLOCK:#NNNNNN
Table 18-4
Explanation
All blocks with cross references.
PBx in an optional layout (only relevant for CSF and A3 output).
PBx with cross references in an optional layout (only relevant for
CSF and A3 output).
PBx in the preset method of representation (LAD, CSF, STL) with
diagnostic setpoint data.
Documentation block with the name NNNNNN (max. 8 characters).
Doc Command for Block List
Doc Commands
–BLST
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Explanation
Output the block list of the preset program file.
18-23
Documentation
Table 18-5
Nested Doc Commands
Doc Commands
Explanation
–DOC–COM:x:nnnnnn
The doc command file nnnnnnSU.INI is called and started.
You can call a doc command sequence from other doc command sequences. The maximum nesting
depth is 6. Recursive calls are not allowed and are rejected during the test or when a doc command
file is started (→ Edit structure).
Table 18-6
Directory
Doc Commands
–CONTENT
Explanation
The directory is output with the current footer. The page number
begins automatically at I and is restored on completion of the
directory.
–CONTENT:n
The page numbering of the specified directory begins at n (n= 1, 2...)
A directory of all previous printouts is output if you activate the default $CONTENT (see Table 18-1).
Table 18-7
Check list
Doc Commands
–CHECKLIST/FO
–CHECKLIST/NS
Table 18-8
Program structure
Doc Commands
–XRF:program(OBn)
–XRF(D):program(PBn)
Table 18-9
Explanation
Output the program structure from OBn (n=0–255), without data
blocks.
Output the program structure from PBn (n=0-255), with data blocks
XRF list
Doc Commands
–XRF:GENERATE
–XRF:PRINTOUT(I)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(Q)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(F)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(S)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(T)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(C)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(B)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(P)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(D)
–XRF:PRINTOUT(X)
18-24
Explanation
The operands occurring in the assignment list but not in the blocks
are listed.
The operands used in the blocks but without a symbol in the
assignment list are listed
Explanation
The reference list (*XR.INI) of the set program file is generated.
Output the input operands.
Output the output operands.
Output the flags.
Output all S flags.
Output all timers.
Output all counters.
Output all blocks.
Output all I/Os.
Output all data.
Collective command for all elements.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
Table 18-9
XRF list
Doc Commands
–XRF:PRINTOUT(I1.n)
–XRF:PRINTOUT
(–SYMBOL)
–XRF(C):PRINTOUT,
(I)
–XRF(O):PRINTOUT,
(Q)
Table 18-10
Explanation
Output the XRF list of an absolute operand (n = 0 – 7).
Output the XRF list of a symbolic operand (e.g. -SYMBOL).
Output the XRF list of an input operand in compact form. If the input
is used more than once in a segment
The optional form of the XRF list is output. In contrast to the
standard the cross references are not output sorted according to
blocks but according to operations, blocks and segments.
I/Q/F List
Doc Commands
Explanation
–XRF:IQF
Output the I/Q/F list.
–XRF:IQF S FLAGS
Output the I/Q/F list of the S flags.
Table 18-11
Assignment List
Doc Commands
–SYMF:SEQ
–SYMF:SYM
–SYMF:ABS
–SYMF(O):SEQ
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Explanation
Output the source (sequential) file (unsorted).
Output sorted acc. to symbolic operands.
Output sorted acc. to absolute operands.
Output unsorted single column (only relevant in A3 format).
18-25
Documentation
18.5 Editing Doc Commands
Overview
To edit doc commands, you can activate auxiliary functions using the function
keys. The edited statements are stored in a submit file (*SU.INI).
Apart from this fixed function key assignment, you can also assign texts or
commands to function keys which you activate with SHIFT F1 to SHIFT F7.
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Commands Edit. A
job box is displayed in which you select a submit file. The new file name is
entered in the settings box (→ Project, Settings, Section 4.1.1). As soon as
the screen below is displayed, the cursor is positioned in the first editing
line. You can now edit.
Documentation
Doc Commands
Edit
Submit file editor
F
File : C:EXAMP1SU.INI
001
;TOTAL DOCUMENTATION OF THE PROGRAM FILE ON A3
002
$PROG:A:STDRAN
003
$SYMB:A:STDRAN
004
$SFOOT:A:KODOTE
005
$PRIN:A:PT89
006
-BLIST
007
-XRF:GENERATE
008
-XREF(D):PROGRAM, (OB1)
008
-SYMF:SEQ
009
-SYMF:SYM
010 .
-SYMF:ABS
012
Text1
1 Field
F
Text2
F
Text3
F
Text4
F
Text5
F
Text6
F
Text7
2 Fetch Fld 3 Fetch Fil 4 Fetch Lin 5 Extras 6 Fct Keys 7 Enter
F
Help
8 Cancel
Figure 18-13 Submit File Editor
18.5.1
Function Key Assignment
Assignment
18-26
The following section and table describes the key strokes to assign
functions to keys.
F1 (Key level 1)
Enter the 1st field delimiter. Change to the 2nd
key level.
F3 (Key level 2)
Select the file name for storing the field. Change
to the 3rd key level.
F6 (Key level 3)
The field is stored under the selected file name.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
Table 18-12
Function Key Assignment
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Key level
1
2
Effect of the Function Keys
3
Store the input with the Insert key. Cursor keys
→ Appendix A4, key assignment.
F1
Field
The 1st field delimiter is marked in the current line with B. The 2nd field delimiter
can be moved over further lines with the cursor keys.
F1
Field
The marked field is stored for the current session.
F3
File
The field is stored under a selectable file name but it remains in the buffer.
F3
Select
Select file dialog box is opened
F6
Enter
The field is stored in the selected file.
F8
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
SHIFT
F8
Help
F4
Delete
F5
Find (text)
Search for a max. 30 character string in a field. If the text is found, the 2nd field
delimiter is set in this line.
F5
Repeat
Repeat the last search.
F6
Srch Fwd
Text searched for towards the end of the file.
F7
Srch Back
Text searched for towards the start of the file.
F8
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
SHIFT
F8
Help
F6
Enter
The block is stored for the current session.
F7
Jump
Jump to the start/end of the file or to a selectable line number.
F6
To Start
Jump to the start of the file.
F7
Line
Jump to the selected line.
F8
End
Jump to the end of the file
SHIFT Help
F8
F8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
18-27
Documentation
Table 18-12
1
Function Key Assignment, continued
2
3
SHIFT
F8
Help
F2
Fetch Fld
The currently buffered field is fetched and inserted after the cursor position.
Table 18-13
Existing Submit File
Effect of the Function Keys
Key level
1
2
3
F3
Fetch Fil
A selectable submit file is fetched from a selectable drive.
File
The file is fetched.
Fct Keys
The function assignment is fetched from the file and is active from now on.
Select
F1
F2
F3
Select file dialog box is opened
F6
Enter
The file is fetched without function assignment (as with F1).
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
F8
SHIFT
F8
Table 18-14
Help
Fetch Line/Find Text
Key level
1
2
Effect of the Function Keys
3
F4
Fetch lin
A previously deleted line (with the delete key) is fetched back → Key assignment.
Extras
F5
F4
Del LINE
F5
Find
Search for a max. 30 character string. The repetition factor can be selected.
Repeat
Repeat the last search
Srch Fwd
Search towards the end of the file.
Srch Back
Search towards the start of the file.
F5
F6
F7
F8
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
18-28
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
Table 18-15
Replace Character String
Key level
2
3
Effect of the Function Keys
4
F6
F1
F1
F2
F8
F2
F1
F2
F8
F3
F4
Rep Back
Search to start of file. Text replaced without conf.
F6
Repeat
Repeat the last replacement.
F8
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
SHIFT
F8
Help
Table 18-16
Jump
Key level
2
Replace
A character string is replaced by another. You can enter a max. 30 character long
string and a repetition factor. The text is replaced by the second.
Rep? Fwd
Search to end of file. Replacement must be confirmed.
Yes
The text is replaced.
No
The text is not replaced.
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
Rep? Back
Search to start of file. Replacement must be confirmed.
Yes
The text is replaced.
No
The text is not replaced.
Cancel
Return to previous key level without action.
Rep Fwd
Search to end of file. Text replaced without conf.
3
Effect of the Function Keys
4
F7
Jump
Jump to the start/end of the file or to a selectable line number.
F6
To Start
Jump to the start of the file.
F7
Line
Jump to the selected line.
F8
End
Jump to the end of the file.
SHIFT
F8
Help
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-29
Documentation
Table 18-17
Editing Function Keys
Key level
1
2
F8
18-30
Effect of the Function Keys
3
Fct keys
Assigns the keys SHIFT F1-F8 with a selectable max. 30 character string. This
string is entered in the line marked by the cursor in the editing mode when the
function key is pressed (SHIFT F1 - F8). e.g.
SHIFT+F1:
|$PROG:C:FILE|
SHIFT+F2:
|$SYMB:C:SYMDAT|
F4
Fetch Lin
Fetch back the characters deleted with the delete key (→ Key assignment).
F6
Enter
The function key assignment is entered.
F8
Cancel
The function key assignment is entered.
SHIFT
F8
Help
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.5.2
KOMDOK Test Doc Commands
Function
Documentation
Doc Commands
Test
Displaying the
Error List
The feasibility of doc commands is checked in a selectable file. If errors are
recognized, the cause of the errors is entered in an *SF.INI file.
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command Test. The
Test doc commands job box is displayed. Here, you enter the name of the
file you want to check. When you click Test, the test is started and the
results are displayed.
Errors found while the Doc Command Test function is running are saved
in an error file. You can output these files with Doc Command Output
Log File.
Note
If no errors are found, no error file is created.
Error Message
Test run result for C:EXAMP1SU.INI
001 $CSF
002 $PROG:C:EXA400
*** Error: ***
C:EXA400ST.S5D
not found
003
004 $SYMB:C:EXA409
can be executed
005 $PRIN:C:EXA409
can be executed
1 error(s) found in file C:EXAMP1SU.INI
Figure 18-14 Error Message
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-31
Documentation
18.5.3
Output Log File
Function
Errors found in the functions Test doc commands or Execute doc command
are written to a log file that you can output with this function.
Documentation
Doc Commands
Output Log
File
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command OutputLog File. The Output log file job box is displayed. Here, you can make your
selections. The name of the generated error file is set here.
Fields
18.5.4
Explanation
Log file
Name of the error log file. The generated file name is
the default. You can select a different name with F3.
Screen
Output directly on the screen.
Printer
Output directly to the printer according to the
selections made for printer parameters.
File
Output to a selectable file.
Run Doc Command
Function
With this function, you can activate the doc commands in your file. The current
settings remain valid unless you change them with a presets statement
($PROG:...$CSF, etc.). The preset statements are, however, only valid for the
time when the doc commands are executed.
Documentation
Doc Commands
Run
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command Run. The
job box Run doc commands is displayed. Here, you enter the name of the
file whose doc commands you want to use in the Doc command file field.
You can select a file by pressing F3. Once you start the function with
Execute the doc commands are processed.
Note
If errors occur, you can branch to an error list.
18.5.5
Output Doc Command
Function
Documentation
Doc Commands
Output
18-32
You can print out the content of a doc command file.
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command Output.
The job box Output doc command file is displayed. Here, you enter the
name of the file you want to print in the Doc command file field:. You can
select a file with F3. When you click on Output the doc commands are
printed out.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.5.6
Edit Doc Command Structure
Function
Within the doc commands you can include statements (→ Edit structure) which
call and start other doc command files. This function shows you how the various
doc command files are connected by the structure statements.
This function also allows you to start the doc command editor and modify
the statements of the current doc command file.
Example
The figure shows how the editor represents the connections between doc
command files established by doc commands.
User interface
C:EXAMP1SU.INI
C:EXAMP2
C:EXAMP1
C:EXAMP3
C:EXAMP4
F
F
F
F
1 Edit
2
3
4
Test
Start
F
Err List
5 Print
Figure 18-15 Interconnecting Doc Command Files
Documentation
Doc Commands
Edit Structure
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command Edit
Structure. The job box Edit doc command structure is displayed. Here,
you specify a doc command file name or select a name with F3.
Using this file as the starting point, the relationship between the doc
command files is displayed.
Once you exit the job box with Edit a structure diagram is displayed. The
doc command file with which you called the editor is highlighted.
Moving the Marker
You can change the marking of the individual doc command files in the
structure display with the cursor keys (→ Appendix, Key assignment).
Function Key
Assignment
The following section explains the significance of the various function keys.
F6 = Key level 1
You want to search for a particular doc command file
in the structure file. You change to the 2nd key level.
F1 = Key level 2
The first structure statement file is marked.
The following table shows which key combinations are possible and the
effects of the function keys.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
18-33
Documentation
Table 18-18
Function Key Assignment
Key level
1
Effect of the Function Keys
2
F1
Edit
The doc command editor is called and the content of the current doc command file
is displayed. You can edit these doc commands (→ Editing doc commands).
F2
TEST
The doc command file highlighted (color/gray background) in the structure display is
tested. The result is displayed on the screen immediately. If errors are found, they
are written to an error file.
F3
Start
The doc command file highlighted in the structure display is started. If errors occur
during execution, they are written to an error file and displayed on the screen.
F4
Err List
The error list of the doc command file marked on the screen is displayed and, if
required, printed out.
F5
Print
The doc command file marked in the structure display is output on the printer or to a
file depending on the settings.
F6
Find
Switch to the search functions.
F1
To start
The first doc command file in the structure display is marked and is now the current
file.
F2
End
The last doc command file in the structure display is marked and is now the current
file.
F3
Caller
The doc command file via which the structure display was called is marked and is
now the current file.
F4
Error
Starting from the currently marked file.
F6
Srch Fwd
A selected doc command file is searched for towards the end of the display. If it is
found it is marked and is now the current file.
F7
Srch Back
A selected doc command file is searched for towards the start of the display. If it is
found it is marked and is now the current file.
F8
Return
Return to the calling level.
SHIFT
F8
Help
F8
Return
Return to the calling level without action.
SHIFT
F8
Help
18-34
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Documentation
18.5.7
Output Doc Command Structure
Function
Documentation
Doc Commands
Output
Structure
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The structure of connected doc command files is printed out in A3 or A4 format
or output to a file (LS.INI).
Select the menu command Documentation Doc Command Output
Structure. The job box Output doc command structure is displayed.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Input field
Explanation
Doc command
file
Name of the doc command file about which you want
to see structure information. Starting from this file.
Structure with
doc commands
The content of the doc command files involved is also
printed out, each file on a separate page.
18-35
19
Change
Overview
With this function you can change to other S5 packages. If they are not
already loaded, they must be installed in a directory on a drive. With the
Change function, you exit the STEP 5 package.
Change
Help
COM DB1
AWL Batch
COM 95F
COM155H
Others... F9
Change
Others
F9
All the installed S5 packages available on the drive and in the directory you
have selected are displayed. You can then change to one of these
programs.
With the Others function, you exit STEP 5. The user interface of the
selected S5 package is displayed and you can then continue working with
the new package.
You can return to STEP 5 from any other S5 package. The STEP 5
settings are retained, so that you can resume work immediately without
needing to select new settings.
PG Link
The S5 package PG Link is supplied with the STEP 5 package. It is
installed in the directory C:\STEP 5\S5_ST\PG_PG. If you set the
appropriate path in the selection box, the PG Link program is displayed
and you can start it.
Operation
The Other SIMATIC S5 Programs job box is displayed. Here, the installed
S5 packages you can select are displayed. The lower part of the box
displays stamp information about the S5 package marked by the cursor.
You make your selection in this box (→ Graphical user interface). Once you
have selected a package and confirmed your selection with Start, the user
interface of the selected package is displayed.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
19-1
Change
19-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
20
Help
Overview
With the functions in this menu, you can obtain information about the
currently active STEP 5 package, as follows:
A list of all the function keys (F1 to F10 and SHIFT F1 to SHIFT F9).
Using these keys, you can select STEP 5 functions from the main menu
directly.
Information about the version of STEP 5 you are currently working with.
A list of all the program components in the currently active STEP 5
package.
ment
Documentation
Change
Help
Key Assignement List... Ctrl+FI2
About STEP 5 Version...
F12
Version of S5 Packages Ctrl+F11
User Interface >
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
20.1
Key Assignment List
20-2
20.2
About STEP 5/ST Version
20-2
20.3
Version of S5 Pakages
20-2
20.4
User Interface
20-4
20-1
Help
20.1 Key Assignment List
Help
Key Assignment
List
This list provides you with information about the function keys you can
activate directly in the user interface. These keys allow you to select
certain functions directly without using the menus.
When you select this function, a list explaining the functions of the keys is
displayed on the screen. You can page through this list.
20.2 About STEP 5/ST Version
Help
About STEP 5/ST
Version
A box is displayed containing information about the currently active
STEP 5 package.
20.3 Version of S5 Packages
Help
Version of S5
Packages
A list of all the program components in the currently active STEP5
package is displayed. You can set the drive and the directory in which the
program components are looked for.
The information is output to screen, printer or file. If you output to printer or
file, the layout is the same as the standard output.
Directory: C:\STEP5\S5_ST
Page
1
Version of the data medium:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––-––––––––––––––––––––
Name
Identifier Date
Serial no
PG
Designation
C:S5DXBPX6.VER S792xxxxx
090395
7994–0102–654321
665
PC BASE
V6.6
Version of the S5 command interpreter:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Name
C:S5KXS01X.CMD
C:S5KDS01X.DAT
C:S5KXS03X.CMD
C:S5KDS03X.DAT
C:S5KXS02X.CMD
C:S5KDS02X.DAT
C:S5KXS04X.CMD
C:S5KDS04X.DAT
Identifier
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
Date
010995
010995
010995
010995
050995
050995
050995
050995
Serial no.
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
PG
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
7XX
Designation
S5–KOMI
S5–KOMI
S5–MENU–MANAGER
S5–MENU–MANAGER
S5–KOMI–UP’S
S5–KOMI–UP’S
DIALOGMANAGER
DIALOGMANAGER
Version of the packages:
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Name
C:S5PXS03X.CMD
C:S5PDS03X.DAT
Figure 20-1
20-2
Identifier
V 6.6 44
V 6.6 44
Date
010995
010995
Serial no
7994–0102–654321
7994–0102–654321
PG
7XX
7XX
Designation
XRF,COMP,REW
XRF,COMP,REW
Example of the Versions of the S5 Packages
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Help
Settings
The following must be set:
footer file (only if footers are selected)
printer file (for output to printer/file, the default is the PT 88)
For information about making settings, refer to Section 4.1
Operation
The job box for the version of the S5 packages is displayed. Here, you
make your selections (→ User interface, Job box).
Directory
The version in the directory displayed here is shown. The standard setting
after calling the function is always the S5 system directory. You cannot edit
the Directory field although the field can be selected with the cursor or
mouse. If you select the Directory field, you can select the required
directory with F3 = Select or by double clicking with the mouse.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
20-3
Help
20.4 User Interface
Help
User Interface >
This function provides you with a description of the ways in which you can find
information in the help system.
ment
Documentation
Change
Help
Key Assignment List... Ctrl+FI2
About STEP 5/ST Version...
F12
Version of S5 Packages.. Ctrl+F11
User Interface >
Using Menus
Using Dialog Boxes
Using Proj Settings
General Informaion
Compatibility
Notes
20-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 4:
Other Simatic S5 Programs
STL Editor / STL Batch Compiler
21
Parameter Assignment Software
DB1
22
PG Link
23
20-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Overview
The STL editor/batch compiler optional package has an independent editor
for programming in the STL mode of representation and an independent
compiler for compiling statement lists into a runnable STEP 5 program.
With the batch compiler you can decompile from a STEP 5 program so
that, for example, modifications made to the tested program can be entered
in your source files and your statement list can be updated.
Chapter Overview
Section
Description
Page
21.1
How the STL Editor/Batch Compiler Functions
21-2
21.2
Creating STEP 5 blocks
21-4
21.3
The A1.SEQ Intermediate File
21-9
21.4
Editing and Adding to STEP 5 Blocks
21-12
21.5
Test Run
21-12
21.6
Error Messages
21-12
21.7
Entering STEP 5 Statements with Other Editors
21-13
21.8
Working on the Programming Device
21-15
21.9
The Control Characters of the STL Editor/Batch
Compiler
21-20
21.10
Entering Program Blocks
21-25
21.11
Entering Function Blocks
21-31
21.12
Entering Data Blocks (example)
21-34
21.13
Modifying an STL Source File
21-35
21.14
Compiling with the COMPILER Function
21-36
21.15
Error List
21-38
21.16
Printing
21-38
21.17
SPECIAL Functions for Editing Intermediate Files and
Source Files
21-40
21.18
Error Messages
21-43
The editor also tests the compiled STEP 5 program for your specific PLC
and creates an error list.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-1
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.1 How the the STL Editor/Batch Compiler Functions
Overview
Creating a STEP 5 program with the STL editor/batch compiler differs in
the following way from the LAD, CSF, STL package:
In the LAD, CSF, STL package the statement list is directly edited in the
program file and immediately compiled into machine code.
In the STL editor/batch compiler package editing and compilation are
separate processes.
Editing
During the first step (editing), you write a sequential text file (STL source
file) with the STL editor. It can contain a statement list, which has been
created exclusively with symbols.
Saving
When data is saved using the Enter function or the Insert key, the package
automatically creates an intermediate file in addition to the STL source file.
This intermediate file contains a code which is independent from national
languages (language-independent), but is not yet a machine code. During
this first compilation your statement list is checked for syntax and format.
Compilation
During the second step you start the compilation with a function key. Here
the batch compiler converts the intermediate file into a STEP 5 program
file. If you programmed your statement list symbolically, the batch compiler
requires a symbol file with the relevant assignments.
Test
During the compilation of the program file, the assignments are tested. If
you have entered a specific PLC type, the system checks whether the
operations contained in the program are permitted for your destination PLC
(PLC specific test). A program file created with the STL editor/batch
compiler is identical to a program file created in an LAD, CSF, STL
package.
Decompilation
You can also create a source file from a program file with the STL
editor/batch compiler. This may be necessary, for example, after the STEP
5 program has been tested on the PLC and debugged. It does not matter
whether the program was edited in the LAD, CSF, STL package or in the
STL editor/batch compiler package. During such a decompilation the batch
compiler first generates an intermediate file from the program file. The STL
source file is then created from this intermediate file. The STL source file
can also be created directly in one step from a program file.
21-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Test Run
Tests are carried out during the compilation. In addition to these tests, a
test run for the program file blocks is carried out. During the test run a
check is made, whether formal operands and actual operands in function
blocks have been correctly assigned and match. All errors are listed in an
error list and can be printed out.
The error list, however, only contains the errors of the last session and is
overwritten after every new compilation or test. It is therefore advisable to
print out the error list each time it is created. If a phase is completed
without any errors, no error list is created and an existing list is deleted.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-3
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.2 Creating STEP 5 Blocks
Overview
In the STL editor, you can create your control program as a statement list
with the advantages of a text editor. You write your statement list using the
same commands and the same syntax as in the LAD, CSF, STL package.
The only difference is that you must keep to certain conventions such as
control characters for the start of blocks and comments.
All block types that can be created in the LAD, CSF, STL package can also
be created with the STL editor/batch compiler package. All comments, that
can be written in a block, can also be created. However, plant comments
(DOC file) cannot be written. The STL editor also permits additional
comments that can be placed anywhere in the statement list. However,
these comments are not transferred to the program file and are lost during
a decompilation into the same STL source.
DB0 (reserved in the PLC for the block address list), DB1 (for the I/O
assignment of the S5-135U and S5-155U), DX0 (for the system parameter
assignment, CPU 928, R-processor, S5-155U), DB2 (for the controller list
of R64), GRAPH 5 and assembler blocks are not possible.
Presetting
In this dialog, you select four files:
1. The STL source file you want to edit (A0.SEQ).
2. The intermediate file which is created when you save with the Enter key
or Insert key and contains the statement list compiled into the
intermediate code (A1.SEQ).
3. The symbols file, which contains an assignment list (Z0.INI).
4. The program file in which the STEP 5 program will be written after the
compilation (ST.S5D).
These four files are automatically entered using the same name and can
be altered if necessary. The STL source file and the intermediate file
always have the same name.
The STL editor/batch compiler package provides the following functions:
F1
EDIT
F2
COMPILER
Function Key
21-4
F3
E-LIST
F4
PRINT
F5
SPECIAL
F6
PRESET
F7
AUXIL.
F8
RETURN
Function
EDIT
For creating and editing the STL source file
COMPILER
For compiling and decompiling
E-LIST
For the error list of the test runs
PRINT
For printing the STL source file
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Function Key
21.2.1
Function
SPECIAL
Functions, for generating intermediate files and the STL
source file
PRESET
For changing the presetting;
AUXIL.
Functions, for administrating blocks in the current program
file and
RETURN
For exiting the STL editor/batch compiler.
Editing Functions
Overview
The STL editor displays an editing dialog box on the screen, which is ready
for a statement list. The editing dialog box consists of the following:
A header containing the name of the STL source file.
The input fields for ADDRESS, STATEMENT, OPERAND SYMBOL and
STATEMENT COMMENT, arranged in columns.
The menu with the editing functions.
Function
The editor provides several functions so that your program can be edited
more easily. They are comparable to the symbol editor functions:
F1
BUFFER
F2
COPY
F3
DELETE
F4
SEARCH
F5
REPLACE
F6
ENTER
F7
F8
SAVE
MODE
With the the BUFFER and COPY functions, any character sequence or text
block can be written to a buffer or to a sequential file and copied at any
point in the program (copy and paste function). That means, you can move
or include segments again and again.
You can also read in other STL source files or single blocks from them with
the copy function. The buffer, copy and delete functions can be combined
with a repetition factor.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-5
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The SEARCH and REPLACE functions make it easier to correct your
program:
You can move quickly and to locations in your file. You can alter individual
character sequences, for example symbols or operands, in your entire
statement list using only one function. You can select either the insert or
overwrite mode.
With SAVE you can save your file without exiting the editor. Saving your
STL source file with this function is a sensible precaution if you have to
interrupt a programming session. The ENTER function saves your file and
at the same time compiles it into the intermediate file and then exits the
editor.
Control Characters
To make compilation of the STL source file into a STEP 5 file possible,
certain control characters and conventions must be observed when editing.
#TY identifies the PLC type. After this control character you can enter the
PLC, on which the program will run. The entry must match the setting in
the language category field of the presetting dialog. During compilation into
the program file, the batch compiler checks whether the edited operations
are permitted in the operations set of the PLC. The PLC type can be
entered at the beginning of the STL source file and at block boundaries.
The following names are permitted for the PLC language category.
PLC Type
S5-100 U
Processor
CPU 100
CPU 102
CPU 103
Language Category Names
CPU100
CPU102
CPU103
S5-101 U
S5-101U
S5-110 S
S5-110S
S5-115 U
CPU 941
CPU 942, 943, 944
S5-130WB
S5-135 U
CPU 941
CPU 942
S5-130 W
CPU 921
CPU 922
CPU 928
CPU 928B
CPU 921
CPU 922
CPU 928
CPU 928B
S5-135W
S5-135 W
S5-135 WB
S5-135B
S5-150 A/K
S5-150A
S5-150 S/U
S5-150S
S5-155U
CPU 946/947
S5-155 U
I/O processor
IP 257
IP 257
The program file is only compiled if the name of the PLC in the presetting
(”LANG CAT AREA” field) matches the entry in the #TY lines of the STL
source file. If they do not match, the compilation is canceled at the #TY
line. If you enter “NO” in the presetting for the language category, the
program is compiled without a PLC specific test run.
21-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
i
Include
Command
The #I include command allows linking of any file and can be entered in the
STL source file at the beginning of the file or at block boundaries, in other
words after BE. The command #I is followed by the file name. Here, it is
important that the drive is also entered (for example: #I B:TEST).
The file is included at the intermediate code level, i.e. the file to be included
must exist as an intermediate file. If the disk drive is not entered, the drive
specified for the intermediate file in the presettings is accessed.
If blocks with identical names are found in both files, they must be renamed
before compilation. You can avoid this problem, however, by assigning
symbolic names to the blocks in your STL source files.
If you use symbolic names, the corresponding symbol file must exist since
you cannot compile without the block type and number.
The include command is particularly suitable for user-defined libraries:
standardized programs can be modified with include files to adapt them to
a particular task. To make a modification, for example you then only need
to swap the include files. After the modification the latest version is used to
create the program file.
21.2.2
Compilation
Creating a
Program File
The batch compiler can compile all blocks, a group of blocks or an
individual block from the intermediate file or the STL source file into the
program file. If you have saved all the modifications in your statement list in
the source file with ENTER, only the intermediate file needs to be
compiled. If not, you must start compilation of the STL source file, which
automatically creates an updated intermediate file.
If you programmed your STL source file symbolically the preset symbol file
is linked to the intermediate file during the compilation into the program file.
A symbol file is not created by the STL editor, but must be created with the
symbols editor. If another file is included with the #I include command,
make sure that the symbols file also contains the symbols for this file.
In the command lines of the compiler, you can specify various options:
whether machine code should be generated or the program simply tested
for errors, and whether you want to confirm before overwriting blocks. You
can also decide to have the compiled program printed out.
Decompilation
from a Program
File
Neither STL source files nor intermediate files exist for blocks which were
written with the LAD, CSF, STL package. The STL editor/batch compiler
can create these files from a program file.
The intermediate file is created after decompiling a block, a block group or
all blocks from a program file. When a block, a block group or all blocks are
decompiled from the program file, you can first create the intermediate file
or create the STL source file immediately. You can then modify or extend
the source file.
When you decompile a program, you decide what your “new” STL source
file will look like. The statements contain either symbols only or absolute
parameters only, or both. The control character for the language category
identification (PLC type) is also entered in the intermediate file if a category
was selected in the presettings.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-7
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The STL editor can process files with up to 65535 lines. The number of
lines of the STL source file, however, not only depends on the number of
STEP 5 statements, but also on special statements, comment lines etc. If
the program file you want to decompile is too long, the blocks must be be
distributed in several intermediate files.
Standard function blocks as well as Graph 5 and assembler blocks are not
decompiled.
Compilation
Checks
During the compilation/decompilation, the intermediate code is checked to
make sure that the resulting statement is permitted. It is also checked to
make sure that it is permitted in terms of the block type. The language
category is checked for the PLC type entered in the presettings. If you
program using symbols, the assignments to the operands are checked.
If you have specified both an absolute as well as a symbolic operand in the
STL source file, the symbols file is also checked to make sure that it
matches. If the parameters do not match, the absolute parameter assigned
to the symbol from the symbol file is used and a warning is entered in the
error list. If you program with absolute operands, the symbols file is
irrelevant. Errors found during these checks are entered in the error list.
21.2.3
Overview
Printing
You can create a listing of the STL source file using the print function (in
function selection). However, this function only outputs the preset STL
source file to the printer.
In the command lines of the compiler function, you can select a print
function, so that you can record the result of every compilation run
including the test run.
Layout
21-8
The STL editor/batch compiler provides the printing formats, which are
normally used in the STEP 5 basic package for the layout of your printer
output. You can choose between standard output, normal print, condensed
print and super condensed print. The footer must be 132 characters wide
for the A3 format (F2.INI file) and 80 characters wide for the A4 format
(F1.INI file). The symbol comment is also displayed when super condensed
print is selected.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.3 The A1.SEQ Intermediate File
The intermediate file is the central file in the STL editor/batch compiler
package. It is the basis for all compilation as it is language independent
and not yet in MC5 machine code. At any time, you can create the
following from the intermediate file:
STEP 5 program files,
STL source files,
program versions for a specific process/plant
foreign language program versions
For this reason, it is essential to save the intermediate file and it is
advisable to exit an STL source file with ENTER so that the intermediate
file is updated.
21.3.1
Relationship between the STL Source File and the Intermediate File
STL Editor
STL
source file
Intermediate
file
Compiler
Program
file
The STL source file and the intermediate file are closely connected: they
have the same name and their file identification differs only in one
character (A0.SEQ,A1SEQ). The name of an intermediate file can never
be altered separately from the STL source file. The two files can, however,
be on different drives. Using identical names guarantees that your edited
programs are compiled in the correct intermediate file when you enter your
source file.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-9
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Decompilation
When you decompile a program, the program is also stored in the STL
source file with the same name. Bear this in mind if the STL source file and
the intermediate file are not in the same version or if you do not want to
overwrite the “old” statement list, for example if your first STL source file
contains additional comments. Comments are not written back to the
program file and are lost after the decompilation.
The following rules apply when recreating an STL source file from an
intermediate file:
If no STL source file exists, it is created automatically when you click Edit.
Its name is the name entered in the presettings.
If an STL source file with the same name exists, the intermediate file must
be decompiled explicitly into the STL source file using the INT>SEQ
special function (see below). The STL source file is then overwritten.
If you want to keep an “old” STL source file, enter a name for the new STL
source file before the decompilation of the program file. The intermediate
file is then decompiled into this new file.
You should always check the files selected in the presettings before
compiling and especially before decompiling.
Note
The SEQ>MC5 and MC5>SEQ functions automatically create an updated
intermediate file.
21.3.2
Special Functions
F1
SEQ>INT
F2
INT>SEQ
F3
F4
SEQDELETE INTDELETE
F5
COPY
F6
F7
TEST RUN
SYM-GEN
F8
RETURN
The special functions offer various conversions for creating STL source
files and intermediate files. This may be necessary because the STL
source file and the intermediate file always have the same name, but are
not always the same version.
Table 21-1
Special Functions
Function Key
Function
SEQ>INT
Converts a sequential file into an intermediate file. You use this function if, for example,
your STL source file was written with another text editor and you want to compile it into a
STEP program file, or if the intermediate file no longer exists.
INT>SEQ
Converts an intermediate file into a sequential file. If you have decompiled from a
program file and want to edit it using the STL editor, the intermediate file must first be
converted into a sequential file. This function is especially important if an old version of
the source file exists. This function is also very helpful, when editing the source file with
a foreign language STL editor.
21-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Table 21-1
Special Functions, continued
Function Key
Function
SEQDELETE
With the SEQDELETE function, you can delete sequential files, for example if you want
to generate a new version during compilation. If the compiled files are edited the
sequential files are automatically generated by the editor.
INTDELETE
Intermediate files are deleted using INTDELETE (e.g. old version). They are either
recreated using the SEQ>INT function from an updated source file or when you enter an
edited source.
COPY
If you want to copy the intermediate file and the STL source file to other drives as
backup, use the COPY function. Remember that the files can only be renamed using the
F-AUX tools.
TEST RUN
The TEST RUN can be used to test the compiled blocks of a program file, but also
blocks from the LAD, CSF, STL package to check whether the commands are permitted
for the selected PLC type.
SYM-GEN
The SYM-GEN function creates a symbolic source file from the STL source file, which
contains all symbols and absolute parameters used. This symbolic source file can be
extended by assignments and comments using the symbolic editor. The symbols and
absolute parameters which already exist in the STL source need not be entered again.
21.3.3
Standard Programs
Standard
Programs
Because it is possible to write a statement list using only symbols and
because the intermediate file is non-language dependent, standard
programs can be created.
Debugged blocks and modules can be stored in libraries and then linked
with the include command to form individual programs for specific systems.
This means that you only need to link your new programs to a special
assignment list to obtain system-specific STEP 5 programs for individual
control tasks.
21.3.4
Foreign Language STEP 5 Program Versions
Overview
You can also create foreign-language STEP 5 program versions with the
batch compiler if you have programmed your program in absolute format or
if you have a decompiled intermediate file with absolute parameters. With
the English and the French software versions of this package you create
English and French STL sources.
If you require these functions, change to the F-AUX, F-TRANSFER utility
and copy your German STL source file and intermediate file with a new
name. You must enter this new name in the presetting of the
English/French software version. The INT>SEQ special function converts
the non-language dependent intermediate file into the sequential source
file. This file is then output with English/French STEP 5 commands when
you edit it.
Another possibility is to delete the German sequential source file
(SEQDELETE special function) in the English/French package. A new one
is automatically generated when you use the editing function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-11
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Symbols and comments are not output in foreign languages.
21.4 Editing and Adding to STEP 5 Blocks
Creating Blocks
with the STL
Editor
The name of the STL source file (and possibly also the drive for the
intermediate file) is entered in the presettings. After calling the STL editor
the selected statement list and the editing menu are displayed on the
screen. You can now edit the statement list or add to it using the editing
functions. Always save your modified source file with enter, so that the
intermediate file is updated and your “new” program file is not created with
an “old” program.
If you exit the STL editor with the cancel key and confirm the cancel, the
additions or modifications are not entered in the STL source file.
Editing Blocks
Using the LAD,
CSF, STL Package
Program file blocks must be decompiled before they can be edited in the
STL editor. Once they exist as an STL source file, they can be edited in the
STL editor as described above.
21.5 Test Run
Program File
Testing
The test run takes place after compilation. During the test run the program
file blocks are tested (the parameter transfer of function blocks and the
existence of called blocks are checked). You select a test run for a block, a
group of blocks or all blocks of a program file. If a language category ID
has been entered in the presettings, the test run also checks whether the
statements are permitted for the PLC type. Illegal statements are logged in
the error list.
Testing Special
Blocks
Standard function blocks, Graph 5 and assembler blocks cannot be
created and decompiled with the STL editor/batch compiler but they can be
tested using the test run. The existence and transfer of parameters as well
as the validity of the STL statements for the selected PLC type are also
checked.
21.6 Error Messages
Error messages can occur in the following phases:
Compilation of the STL source file into the intermediate file.
Compilation of the intermediate file into the program file.
Decompilation of the program file into the intermediate file.
Decompilation of the intermediate file into the STL source file.
Program file test (test run).
The error messages are stored by the programming device in an error list
in an ??????AF.SEQ error file.
21-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The error file contains only the error list of the last phase of compilation.
The error file can be output on the screen or printer if the last phase was
completed without errors.
21.7 Entering STEP 5 Statements with other Editors
STL Source File as
the Interface
The STL source file can also be created with other editors. These editors
must, however, be able to process “real” tabs (09H hex). If not, the initial
columns of the subfields must be indicated in the first line of the STL
source file using the #TAB control character.
The first six characters of the file name can be selected to suit your
purposes. The name must consist of six characters. A0.SEQ is always the
last two characters of the name and the extension. This file can only be
processed with the tools of the STL editor/batch compiler package without
problems if its format matches the format of the sequential source file
described below. The STL editor/batch compiler then supports you with the
SEQ>INT special function and compiles the file into the program file.
Alternatively, you can select direct compilation with the SEQ>MC5
function.
Sequential Source
File Format
One data record is entered per statement line. A data block begins with the
tab character (09H) and consists of four data fields that are also separated
by tabs. The end of a data record is marked with “carriage return, CR”
(=0DH) and “line feed, LF” (=0AH). This is automatically added by the
editor at the end of a line after you press the Return key. The maximum
number of characters for the following fields are as follows:
TAB
TAB
TAB
Address
Statement
Operand symbol
TAB
4 chars
13 chars
24 chars
CR, LF
Statement comment
32 chars
This means, that the data block of a blank line consists of four tab
characters followed by the “CR” and “LF” characters.
The data record for comment lines starts with the tab character (=09H),
directly followed by the control characters * and ; for segment and
additional comments. A comment of up to 79 characters can follow and the
line is completed with the “CR” (=0DH) and “LF” characters (=0AH).
Lower and upper case letters are allowed in the data blocks. Lower case
letters are automatically converted into upper case letters by the editor
when they are read in. Accented vowels (umlauts) cannot be used (e.g. ö,é
etc.).
#TAB Control
Characters for
Processing of
External Files
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The #TAB control character allows files without real tab characters (for
example files created in many text programs such as 1st Wordplus) to be
compiled. However, the STL editor cannot edit these files and a “wrong file
format” error message is output.
21-13
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
#TAB must be placed directly at the beginning of the source file. Only
blanks are allowed before it. It must be followed by 4 numbers, separated
by commas, which determine the initial columns of the subfields. No further
entries are allowed in the first line!
21-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Example:
If 1 blank each is required between the subfields as a separation, the first
line of the STL source file is as follows:
#TAB 1,6,21,46 RETURN (CR LF)
The numbers for the columns always relate to the beginning of the line.
The difference between the consecutive entries must be at least as high as
the corresponding lengths of the subfields.
21.8 Working on the Programming Device
Loading the STL
Editor/Batch
Compiler Package
Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Select the Change menu,
2. Start AWL Batch.
The following dialog appears:
PRESETTING
SYMBOLIC LENGTH:
:
LANG. CAT. AREA :
SIMATIC S5 / PDS 09
SYMBOLIC FILE
8 (8-24)
NO
:
A0.SEQ
STL SOURCE FILE :
INTERMED: FILE :
TITLE BLOCK
PATH NAME
F1
Figure 21-1
Presetting
:
NO
:
F2
F3
SELECT
F4
PROGRAM FILE
:
T. BLOCK FILE
:
PRINTER FILE
:
PATH FILE
:
F5
F6
ENTER
F7
F8
Presettings Dialog
The cursor is flashing in the line of the STL SOURCE FILE (A0.SEQ). Your
statement list is saved in this file. It is marked as a sequential file, i.e. as an
ASCII file and it is the source file for the compilation.
Enter the name of your file. In your example the file is named “test”.
1. Enter character sequence Test.
2. Press the Return key.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-15
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
A hard disk is entered as the drive by programming device and the name is
padded out with @@. The INTERMEDIATE FILE (A1.SEQ), the SYMBOL
FILE (Z0.INI) and the PROGRAM FILE (ST.S5D) have the same name to
indicate that they belong together.
If no symbols file, in other words no assignment list with this name exists,
then this is indicated three times: (GESP) is displayed after the file name,
the programming device displays the message “file C:[email protected]@Z0.INI: file
not available”, and in the SYMBOLIC LENGTH field the default 8 is
replaced by 0.
Overwriting Names
If the source file is to be linked to a symbol file with another name during
the compilation and/or is to be compiled into a program file with another
name, then the individual names can now be overwritten. After overwriting
the name press the Return key. These files are also active in other STEP 5
packages and are entered in their presettings when they are loaded. The
names of the files for title block, printer and paths are automatically
adapted to the program file.
Position the cursor in the required line.
Press the arrow key right,
Type in the name.
The PG checks whether the entered files are available. If you want to use
other files, enter their names. If the printer and path file are not available,
their names are deleted when the cursor is moved up or down.
The PATH NAME and TITLE BLOCK (footer) lines are handled in the same
way as in the LAD, CSF, STL package: The name is entered for the path
name and the width is selected for the title block.
Language
Category
In the LANG. CAT. AREA field you should always use the Help key
(position the cursor on one letter of the world NO): press the Help key to
display the programmable controllers (PLCs) and central processing units
(CPUs) are for which the batch compiler can compile and test.
If required, enter the device on which your program will run from the list
displayed as the language category. The batch compiler then checks
whether your statement list corresponds to the PLC language category
when it is compiled into the program file.
In the SYMBOLIC LENGTH field, the symbol length of the selected
symbols file is displayed. You cannot modify this field.
To save this PRESETTING, press
ENTER (F6)
or
the Insert key.
The FUNCTION SELECTION is then displayed.
21-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Function Selection
The FUNCTION SELECTION displays the function keys for the following
editing and processing functions. The following sections explain how to use
them.
F1
EDIT
21.8.1
F2
COMPILER
F3
E-LIST
F4
PRINT
F5
SPECIAL
F6
PRESET
F7
AUXIL.
F8
RETURN
Editing
Starting the Edit
Mode
Press EDIT (F1).
STL source: B:[email protected]@A0.SEQ
ADR.
LINE:
1
– INSERTION MODE
–
STATEMENT COMMENT
OPERAND SYMBOL
STATEMENT
178kB
NEW FILE
F1
BUFFER
Figure 21-2
F2
COPY
F3
DELETE
F4
F5
SEARCH REPLACE
F6
ENTER
F7
SAVE
F8
MODE
Editing Dialog
In this dialog, you can either enter a new statement list or display an
existing statement list for editing (corrections, modifications).
Title Bar
This contains the following fields:
The name of your preset STL source file and the drive.
The line where the cursor is currently positioned
The insert or overwrite editing mode and
The buffer sizes of the memory. This is of interest for processing speed.
Editing Field
The editing field is divided into four columns with fixed widths. The width
and the intended contents of the columns are shown briefly below:
ADR
STATEMENT
OPERAND SYMBOL
STATEMENT COMMENT
4 characters
13 characters
24 characters (maximum)
32 characters
Addresses,
jump labels
Operations, absolute
operands, constants
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Symbols
Comments
Values of the constants
21-17
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Message Line
All messages are displayed in the line above the function key bar, for
example “new file”, if a new statement list is being created.
Function Keys
These editing functions are identical to those of the SYMBOL EDITOR.
They are used to create and process a statement list.
F1
EDIT
Function Keys for
EDIT
21-18
F2
COMPILER
F3
E-LIST
F4
PRINT
F5
SPECIAL
F6
PRESET
F7
AUXIL.
F8
RETURN
The following diagram is an overview of the tools available for the
individual editing functions. If you press one of the function keys available
in the Edit menu, the function key bar displays the key assignment
indicated by the arrow.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
F1
BUFFER
F2
COPY
F3
DELETE
F4
F5
SEARCH REPLACE
F6
ENTER
F7
SAVE
F8
MODE
F7
F8
RETURN
repetition factor:
BUFFER
F1
LINE
F2
TEXT
F3
F4
F5
BLOCK BEGBLOCK END FILE
F6
FCT. KEYS
repetition factor:
COPY
F1
LINE
F2
TEXT
F3
TEXTBLOCK
F4
F5
FILE
F6
BLOCK
F7
F8
RETURN
F5
F6
F7
F8
RETURN
F7
END
F8
RETURN
repetition factor:
DELETE
SEARCH
REPLACE
F1
LINE
F2
F3
F4
BLOCK BEGBLOCK END
repetition factor:
F1
TEXT +
F2
TEXT -
F3
F4
F5
LINE
F6
BEGIN.
repetition factor:
F1
F2
M.INTERR. O.INTERR.
F3
F4
TOTAL
F5
F6
F7
F8
RETURN
Special Keys
In addition to these functions the special keys are available as further
“tools” for editing your file.
Cursor Keys
All the cursor keys can be used to move the cursor.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-19
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.9 The Control Characters of the STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Overview
For certain entries the STL EDITOR requires several control characters so
that the statement list can be compiled into a STEP 5 program file. For
example segment titles and comments, actual operands and block
identifiers must be identified.
These control characters are listed in the table below. This shows the order
necessary for problem-free compilation into the intermediate and program
files. Among other things, the table also shows the conventions
(_represents a blank) and the position of the control characters within the
statement list.
Table 21-2
Control Character in the Statement Column
STATEMENT
Column Control
Characters
Identifier for
Conventions
with
Examples
Position in the
Statement List
Explanations
#TAB
Source file without
genuine tabs
#TAB 1,6,21,46
Always the first
line of a file
Allows compilation of files
created with a different
editor, for example 1st
Wordplus. Applies only to
the compiler, not for the
STL Editor.
#TY
PLC type
with blanks
#TY_S5-155U
#TY_CPU928
Always the first
statement in a
file
Any comments are only in
the STL source file, they
are not compiled and are
lost if you decompile.
#PBn
#OBn
#FBn, #FXn
#DBn, #DXn
(#SBn, not
GRAPH 5
block)
Program block start
Organization block
start Function block
start
Data block start
Sequence block start
without blanks
#PB11
#OB1
#FB25, #FX12
#DB5, #DX33
#SB3
Start of a block;
after a BE
(block end see
operations
below)
Range of values: n= 0 255, depending on the
PLC type. If you want to
enter further statements
after a block end, they
must be preceded by a
block start otherwise the
statements will be lost
when the source file is
compiled. DB0, DB1, DB2
are not permitted.
#BI
Library number
with blanks
#BI_12345
maximum
65535
After the block
start or after the
block name
(see below #N)
For your own library
numbers; you cannot and
do not need to enter the
numbers of standard
function blocks. Any
comments are located
only in the STL source file,
they are not compiled and
are lost if you decompile.
#N
Name of a function
block
with blanks
#N_GARAGE
max. 6 chars.
Before or after
the library
number, but at
the start of the
block
21-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Table 21-2
Control Character in the Statement Column, continued
STATEMENT
Column Control
Characters
Identifier for
Conventions
with
Examples
Position in the
Statement List
#UB
Segment title
()
Formal parameter type The formal
parameter type
must be in
parentheses
(D)
(I)
Directly below
the block name
,
Actual operand for
assigning parameters
to a function block.
First character
in the column;
followed
immediately by
the parameter
,I1.0
Within a block
#|
Include file
with blank,
drive and the
first six
characters of
the file name
#|_A:PRACTI
Only at block
boundaries:
before the first
block or
between BE
and #PBn
#
Symbolic block name
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The control
Only at the start
character is
of a segment
located in the
STATEMENT
column, the title
text is in the
STATEMENT
COMMENT
column.
Explanations
These comment texts are
included in the program
file. For more information
about comments in
STEP 5 programs, refer to
the STEP 5 description in
volume 2 of the manual
for your programming
device.
This control character
allows other files to be
linked. These files must
be available as
intermediate files, i.e.
either completed with the
enter key in the STL editor
or decompiled from a
program. Make sure that
the same block names do
not occur in the files to be
included. When the
program file is compiled,
the last block with the
same name overwrites the
previous block with the
same name. During
compilation, the include
file is linked to the preset
symbols file. This must
also be able to supply the
include file with
assignments.
21-21
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Table 21-3
Control Characters in the ADR Column
ADR Column
Control
Characters
Identifier for
Conventions
with
Examples
*
Segment comment
The control
character is
located only at
the start of a
segment; any
segment title
must immediately
precede the
comment.
;
Additional comment
The control
character is
located in the
ADR. column.
The entire width
of the screen is
available for the
text regardless of
the columns.
21.9.1
Position in the
Statement List
At any point in
the block
Explanations
These additional
comments only exist in
the STL source file.
They are ignored by the
compiler. If you
decompile to the same
source file, the
comments are lost.
STEP 5 Operations in the STL Editor/Batch Compiler and Writing Conventions
All STEP 5 operations are possible in the STL editor/batch compiler. Only
the language category of the programmable controller or the CPU creates
restrictions. Check the operation list of your device when programming.
The following table, which corresponds to the screen columns, lists the
writing conventions for absolute and symbolic programming.
Table 21-4
STEP 5 Operations
ADDRESS
STATEMENT
OPERAND
SYMBOL
Operation with
absolute operand
Operation and
absolute operand
A_I1.2
format-free entry
With symbolic
operand
OperationU
Operation with data
Operation and data Value of the data
format
005.2
L_KT
format-free entry
STATEMENT
COMMENT
“open outside”
button
Symbol
B–OPN O
without hyphen
Formal operands
21-22
Name
Type
TIME
(D)
BO-O
(I)
MODN
(Q)
max. 4 characters
in parentheses
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Table 21-4
STEP 5 Operations, continued
ADDRESS
Data
Address11
STATEMENT
Data format
OPERAND
SYMBOL
KH
Value, 1 data word
per line
KF
6248
KS or S
+ 13512‘display‘
KG
Only single quotes,
up to 11 data
words per line
KT
KC
KY or A
KM
STATEMENT
COMMENT
–1169368–38
max. 1 data double
word per line
123.1
735
125,018
00011100
11101111
Operation with
formal operand
Operation and
formal operand
A_=BO-O
=_=MODN
format-free entry,
the formal operand
must be
immediately
preceded by an
equality sign.
Symbolic
control character
with operand
Symbol
MODN
,I1.2
,DW1
without blanks
Data
Control character
,
Data
Jump labels
control character
with data type ,KT
Value
005.2
Label
ON
M003
Relative
addresses, data
word addresses
17
Block end
BE
You can move from column to column using the Shift + Arrow keys. If you
press the Return key, the cursor always moves to the 1st character of the
STATEMENT column.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-23
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Symbols
If you program with symbols, remember that in contrast to the CSF, LAD,
STL package no hyphen must be placed before the symbol. A block start
can only be entered as a symbol if an assignment of the block type and
number to a symbol exists. If this does not exist, the block start must be
programmed in absolute format, for example #PB3, because the batch
compiler requires the exact block type and its number when it creates the
intermediate file.
The symbols used in the STL editor must be identical to those in the
symbol file. This also applies to blanks: _EMEOFF is not identical to
EMEOFF
Further differences to the CSF, LAD, STL package are
control characters,
blanks in operations must be entered by the user,
data constants and values are in different columns.
21-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.10 Entering Program BLocks
Programming
Example
This illustrates how the STL editor/batch compiler works and the functions
of this package. The program controls a garage door. It opens or closes
from the outside with a key and pushbuttons and from the inside only
“open” and “close” pushbuttons are required. The door is closed after a
delay of 5 seconds.
STL source: B:[email protected] @A0.SEQ
ADR.
STATEMENT
OPERAND SYMBOL
STATEMENT COMMENT
#PB1
OPEN FROM OUTSIDE AND
INSIDE
#UB
*THE “OPEN
OPEN OUTSIDE
OUTSIDE” BUTTON AND THE KEYSWITCH OR THE “OPEN
OPEN INSIDE”
INSIDE BUTTON
*START MOTOR UP. THE MOTOR OPERATES UNTIL THE TOP LIMIT SWITCH
*IS REACHED OR THE EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON IS PRESSED
A(
A
I 1.2
OPEN OUTSIDE BUTTON
A
I 1.4
KEYSWITCH
O
I 1.5
OPEN INSIDE BUTTON
AN
I 1.0
LIMIT SWITCH TOP
S
Q 1.0
MOTOR UP
)
***
#UB
OPEN FROM OUTSIDE AND
INSIDE
*RESET MOTOR UP OUTPUT.
O
I 1.0
LIMIT SWITCH TOP
O
I 1.7
EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON
R
Q 1.0
MOTOR UP
***
#UB
CLOSE FROM OUTSIDE AND
INSIDE
*THE “CLOSE OUTSIDE” BUTTON AND THE KEYSWITCH OR THE “CLOSE INSIDE” BUTTON
*START MOTOR DOWN WITH A START DELAY OF 5 SECONDS.
*MOTOR DOWN RUNS UNTIL THE LIMIT SWITCH BOTTOM IS REACHED OR
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-25
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
*THE EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON IS PRESSED.
A(
A
B–CL O
A
KEYSW
O
B–CL I
)
AN
L
LIM-BOT
KT
005.2
SS
ON-DEL
O
LIM-BOT
O
STOP
R
ON-DEL
L
ON-DEL
T
100
FW
LC
T
102
ON-DEL
FW
ON-DEL
MOT-DN
A
=
BE
Ready to Start?
The STL editor/batch compiler has been loaded, the presetting has been
completed and the editing function has been called.
Set the MODE (F8)
This function can select between two editing modes: insert or overwrite. In
the title bar, the PG displays which mode is selected.
Press MODE (F8), until the required mode is activated.
Block Start
Follow the steps below (the character sequences you enter are written in
italics, the function to be used in bold letters.):
Enter #PB1 as the block start.
Press the Return key twice; by inserting this blank line the program has
a clearer structure while you are writing it.
#UB for the title of the first segment,
Press the shift + arrow right twice to move to the STATEMENT
COMMENT column,
Open from outside or inside
Press the Return key,
Press shift + arrow left once to move to the ADDR column,
Type in * as the control character for the segment comment.
21-26
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Now you can enter the first text of the example. The whole screen width is
available for this entry. Complete each line with Return. To begin a new text
line you begin as described above with the shift + arrow left key and *,
because the cursor only jumps automatically into the statement column.
If you write in the insert mode, keep a check on the end of the line. The
end can otherwise extend beyond the end of the line where it is lost.
The cursor and special keys are available for editing your text. The *
control character, however, cannot be removed by “delete character” but
only by using the DELETE and LINE functions.
SAVE (F7)
With this function you can save your STL source file without leaving the
editor. This means, you can save your work without compiling, for example
if you want a break.
This save function differs from the CSF, LAD, STL package, where you
always exit the editor after saving.
21.10.1
Using the EDIT Function Keys
Overview
F1
BUFFER
F2
COPY
F3
DELETE
F4
F5
SEARCH REPLACE
F6
ENTER
F7
SAVE
F8
MODE
In the explanations of the editing functions, you will see how to use the
BUFFER, COPY and DELETE functions to save parts of your program for
further processing in files and how you can assign character sequences to
function keys.
The repetition factor is a useful tool: after calling a function, you enter a
number at the keyboard of your programming device. The next selected
function is executed with this factor, for example, copy a line 7 times.
The function that has been activated is displayed in the title bar above the
STATEMENT COMMENT. A function must always be exited with RETURN
(F8), before you can continue working in the text.
An action is canceled within a function by using the cancel key and/or the
F8 RETURN key.
!
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Caution
By pressing the cancel key you might lose data! For example, if you
correct a file and then press the cancel key all modifications will be lost.
21-27
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The BUFFER
Function
With this function parts of text can be buffered (written to a clipboard).
Character sequences (40 characters max.), single lines and character
blocks (500 lines max.) are written to separate buffers and can be copied at
any location. The text stored temporarily in the buffer can also be saved in
a sequential file.
The buffer function is also used to assign character strings to function keys
(40 characters max.).
repetition factor:
F1
LINE
The COPY
Function
F2
TEXT
F3
F4
F5
BLOCK BEGBLOCK END FILE
F6
FCT. KEYS
F7
F8
RETURN
Texts in the buffer or in sequential files (buffer file, source file) are inserted
at the cursor position with this function (paste from clipboard). You can also
copy in a complete STL source file at the cursor position.
repetition factor:
F1
LINE
The DELETE
Function
F2
TEXT
F3
BLOCK
F4
F5
FILE
F6
BLOCK
F7
F8
RETURN
With the delete menu you can delete single lines and marked blocks of
text. The deleted text is written to the buffer (cut to clipboard) and can be
retrieved. However, previously buffered text is lost.
repetition factor:
F1
LINE
The SEARCH
Function
F2
F3
F4
BLOCK BEGBLOCK END
F5
F6
F7
F8
RETURN
With the SEARCH function you can jump to the beginning and end of your
file and to specific lines. Line 0 is not allowed. You can also search for any
character sequence up to 20 characters long (words and numbers) in a
field. With TEXT + you search forwards from the cursor position for these
character sequences and with TEXT – backwards. Using SEARCH you
can move easily and quickly within your file.
repetition factor:
F1
TEXT +
21-28
F2
TEXT -
F3
F4
F5
LINE
F6
BEGIN.
F7
END
F8
RETURN
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Remember that the text to be searched for must be identical to the entered
character sequence (case sensitive). This means, you must enter the texts
in the “ADDR” and “statement” fields in upper case letters!
The REPLACE
Function
Any character sequence up to 20 characters (words or numbers) in the
ADDR, OPERAND SYMBOL and STATEMENT COMMENT columns can
be replaced by another sequence. You have the option of replacing singly
with or without confirmation and replacing all occurrences of the string.
Single replacement is only possible from the cursor position downwards.
Make sure that you move the cursor up a line before using this function.
Upper/Lower Case
Remember that the text to be searched for must be identical to the entered
character sequence (case sensitive). This means, you must enter the texts
in the “ADDR” and “statement” fields in upper case letters.
repetition factor:
F1
F2
M.INTERR. O.INTERR.
F3
F4
TOTAL
F5
F6
F7
F8
RETURN
Using REPLACE you can quickly correct your file. For example, when you
want to replace a statement or a symbol in the entire file. Remember that
the character sequence you specify must be exactly the same as the
sequence in the program including blanks.
Replacing a
Character
Sequence
If you only want to replace a character string once you can check the
replacement by selecting M. INTERR; if you select O. INTERR the string is
replaced without asking for confirmation. The cursor must be positioned
above the character string to be replaced because single replacements are
made only from the cursor position downwards.
If the text is cannot be found below the cursor position, “not found” is
displayed in the message line. Move the cursor to the beginning of the file
and repeat the process with REPLACE (F5), M.INTERR (F1) and the
ENTER key twice and YES (F1). O.INTERR starts the same function but
without asking you for confirmation.
Repetition Factor
You can combine the single exchange with the repetition factor. The
character strings are also found in the comments. They are counted but not
replaced, not even if you call M.INTERR, YES. Using the cancel key you
can terminate the replace function before it is finished. The character
sequences which have already been replaced remain as they are.
Exit the REPLACE function with RETURN (F8) and discard all changes
using the
cancel key, acknowledge with the
ENTER key. You now return to FUNCTION SELECTION.
Display your original file again:
EDIT (F1)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-29
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The SAVE and
ENTER Functions
You are already familiar with the SAVE function. It can be used for saving
your work without compiling and without having to open the file again.
With the ENTER function (F6) or the Insert key the file is stored, the
intermediate file is automatically compiled and the editing session is
terminated. During the compilation the created statement list is checked. If
more than one error occurs, an error list is created. If only one error occurs,
its position is shown on the screen and you can correct it based on the
message in the footer.
For more information about the error list, refer to Section 21.15.
Save the file with ENTER (F6): it is compiled and editing is completed. The
FUNCTION SELECTION dialog is displayed.
21-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.11 Entering Function Blocks
Example
The C:FBTESTA0.SEQ file, printed out on the next page, can be used as a
practice example. Again it is the control of a garage door, but this time
programmed as a function block, to show you the differences when editing
this type of block.
Here the program call is programmed symbolically. This means that you
require the following assignment list in the [email protected]@Z0.INI symbol file so
that the compilation will work.
SEQ. FILE: [email protected]@Z0.INI
I1.0
LIM-TOP
LIMIT SWITCH TOP
I1.1
LIM-BOT
LIMIT SWITCH BOTTOM
I1.2
B–OPN O
OPEN OUTSIDE BUTTON
I1.3
B–CL O
CLOSE OUTSIDE BUTTON
I1.4
KEYSW
KEYSWITCH OUTSIDE
I1.5
B–OPN I
OPEN INSIDE BUTTON
I1.6
B–CL I
CLOSE INSIDE BUTTON
I1.7
STOP
EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON
Q1.0
MOT–UP
MOTOR UP
Q1.1
MOT–DN
MOTOR DOWN
T1
ON–DEL
ON DELAY, 5 SECONDS
FB1
GARAGE
FB FOR CONTROLLING A GARAGE DOOR
STL-source: B: FBTESTA0.SEQ
ADR.
STATEMENT
OPERAND SYMBOL
STATEMENT COMMENT
#
GARAGE
FB1 FOR A GARAGE DOOR
LIMT
#N GARAGE
(I)
LIMIT SWITCH TOP
LIMB
(I)
LIMIT SWITCH BOTTOM
BO-I
(I)
OPEN INSIDE BUTTON
BO-O
(I)
OPEN OUTSIDE BUTTON
BC-I
(I)
CLOSE INSIDE BUTTON
BC-O
(I)
CLOSE OUTSIDE BUTTON
KEYS
(I)
KEYSWITCH
STOP
(I)
EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON
MOUP
(Q)
MOTOR UP
MODN
(Q)
MOTOR DOWN
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-31
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
#UB
AN =STOP
OPEN FROM OUTSIDE OR
INSIDE
A(
A
=BO-O
A
=KEYS
O
=BO-I
)
AN =ENDO
S
=MOUP
***
#UB
CLOSE FROM OUTSIDE OR
INSIDE
*RESET THE MOTOR UP OUTPUT
O
=ENDO
O
=STOP
RB =MOUP
***
#UB
CLOSE FROM OUTSIDE OR
INSIDE
*HERE; THE DOOR CLOSES IMMEDIATELY.
A(
A
=BC-I
A
=KEYS
O
=BC-I
)
AN =ENDU
S
=MODN
***
#UB
CLOSE FROM OUTSIDE OR
INSIDE
*RESET THE MOTOR DOWN OUTPUT
O
=ENDU
O
=STOP
RB
=MODN
BE
Ready to Start?
The STL editor/batch compiler package must be loaded.
Return to the example. Complete the PRESETTING dialog with the file
name FBTEST for the STL source file and the intermediate file and
[email protected]@ for the program file and the symbol file. ENTER and call the
editing function.
If you have not left the STL editor/batch compiler package, the FUNCTION
SELECTION dialog of the package is shown.
Return to the PRESETTING dialog and change the name of the STL
source file to FBTEST.
21-32
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Parameter
Assignment
To assign parameters to the function block, in other words to provide it with
actual operands, you write a program block:
STL source: B: FBTESTA0.SEQ
ADR.
STATEMENT
OPERAND SYMBOL
#PB2
STATEMENT COMMENT
PARAMETERS FOR FB1
#JU
GARAGE
,I 1.0
,I 1.1
,
B-OPN I
,
B-OPN O
,
B–CL I
,
B–CL O
,
KEYSW
,
STOP
,
MOT-UP
,
MOT-DN
BE
You can enter the actual operands in either absolute or symbolic form.
Remember that a comma must be placed before every every actual
operand,
and that the order of the parameters must match that of the identifier list
of the formal operands in the function block.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-33
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.12 Entering Data Blocks
Overview
The following data block will be basis for this section. If you require
information on data blocks, refer to the Introduction and to the chapter on
data blocks in the STEP 5 description of your PG manual, volume 2.
STL source: B: FBTESTA0.SEQ
ADR.
STATEMENT
#DB 12
0
KH
1
KM
2
KH
OPERAND SYMBOL
FFFF
1111111 11000000NUMBER
0013
3
KF
–32768
4
KF
+32767
5
KG
–2740000+22
7
KG
–1234000+05
100
KY
022,033
111
KY
022,033
KY
022,033
KY
022,033
KH
ADAC
KH
4538
KF
+32767
KF
+32767
KF
+32767
KF
+32767
KF
+32767
KY
022,033
KY
022,033
Ready to Start?
STATEMENT COMMENT
The STL editor/batch compiler package has been loaded. If you have just
worked through the function block example, you are in the editing function
and the FBTEST file is displayed.
Return to this example, complete the PRESETTING dialog with the file
names FBTEST for the STL source file and intermediate file and TEST
for the program and the symbol file. Enter and start the editing function.
Note
If you enter an address, which does not match the actual address in the DB,
the space is padded with KH 0000 during the compilation (in the example the
address 9 to 99). By doing this, you create space for the data from the
process.
The repetition factor cannot be directly used as in the CSF, LAD, STL
package but only in conjunction with the COPY function.
21-34
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.13 Editing an STL Source File
Overview
If you want to edit an STL source file within the STL editor/batch compiler,
it is displayed on the screen with EDIT and you can edit it using the editing
functions.
In our example the FBTEST file will be included in the [email protected]@ STL
source file, using the include command. FBTESTA0.SEQ must therefore
exist as an intermediate file. We have already done this (see above).
Ready to Start?
[email protected]@ has been entered as the STL source file in the presetting dialog.
EDIT (F1) file [email protected]@.
Jump to the end of the file with
SEARCH (F4),
END (F7), and then change back to the edit mode with RETURN (F8).
The insert mode is selected.
Move the cursor before the first block, between BE and #PBn or to the file
end after the last block end BE;
Expand vertically; now there is enough space for the include command.
#I blank B:FBTEST
Press ENTER (F6) to save and compile and your intermediate file is
updated.
If you now compile the [email protected]@A0.SEQ STL source file into the
[email protected]@ST.S5D STEP 5 program file, the FBTESTA1.SEQ is also
compiled and transferred into the program file. All the blocks edited during
this practice session are then available there.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-35
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.14 Compiling with the COMPILER Function
Overview
After you store your STL source file with ENTER, it exists as an
intermediate file (INT). To compile it into a STEP 5 program, call the
COMPILER function. You can then compile your statement list into the
program file you selected in the presetting dialog. With INT>MC5 the
intermediate file is transformed into the MC5 machine code. With
SEQ>MC5 the STL source file is transformed into the MC5 machine code
and the intermediate file is generated automatically.
You can decompile in the same way: an intermediate file is created from an
MC5 program file with MC5>INT (such an intermediate file is further
decompiled to the corresponding STL source file with the SPECIAL
functions) or you can create both the intermediate file and the source file at
one time with MC5>SEQ.
The SEQ>MC5 function first compiles the intermediate file (SEQ>INT). If
any errors occur here, the INT>MC5 compilation is not started and the
function is terminated. The error messages resulting from the compilation
of the intermediate file are written in the error list. In the same way, the
MC5>SEQ function first starts the MC5>INT compilation and the INT>SEQ
compilation is only started if the intermediate file is created without any
errors.
Operating
Sequence:
Compiling into the
Program File
In the presetting, the FBTESTA0.SEQ STL source file is present.
Call the COMPILER function with F2,
press INT>MC5 (F2) or SEQ>MC5 (F1).
Fill in the following command line:
Compilation of blocks:
OPT:
PRI:
Press the help key to display all possible inputs for each input field.
Press the help key in the Block field:
In addition to the usual inputs in the STEP 5 basic package you can enter
block ranges to be edited, e.g. PB12 –PB21.
Type B in this field and complete with the Return key.
Press the help key in the OPT field.
With “2” you can start a compilation test: your intermediate file is compiled
and checked for errors. It is not stored in the program file, however. Any
errors can be seen in the error list.
Type 2 and press the Return key.
If your program file already contains blocks with identical names and the
OPT field is empty, you are prompted to confirm before overwriting a block;
when confirmed, the old block will be overwritten by the new one with an
identical name. If you use the option “1”, the blocks are overwritten in the
program file without your confirmation.
Press the help key in the PRI field.
21-36
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
The printer output formats are the usual ones for the STEP 5 basic
package: standard print, condensed print and super condensed print. The
paper size DIN A3 or A4 depends on the connected printer.
In our example this field remains empty.
Compilation of blocks: B
OPT: 2
IMP:
Press the Insert key.
The programming device now compiles the blocks and tests them. The
names of the blocks that have been processed and how many errors have
occurred is displayed or a message indicating that there were no errors in
compilation. The function selection dialog is displayed again.
If no errors occurred during compilation, then repeat the compilation. Leave
the option field empty so that the program file is created and enter * in the
PRI field to obtain a printout.
Compilation of blocks: B
OPT:
IMP: *
Press the Insert key.
The blocks of the FBTESTA0.SEQ STL source file are then transferred to
the [email protected]@ST.S5D program file in machine code and saved. Now you
can continue working with FB1 and PB2 in the CSF, LAD, STL package
(e.g. test on the PLC).
How to Decompile
the Program File
This is basically the same as compilation. You simply use the MC5>INT
(F4) or MC5>SEQ (F5) function. It is important for the decompilation that
the required files are set in the presetting. For the command line the same
conventions apply as when compiling. With the help key in the OPT field
the following transfer sequence is possible:
start COMPILER (2),
select MC5>INT (F4),
complete in the command line,
press the Return key.
The intermediate file is now recreated or one with the same name is
overwritten (after confirmation). The MC5>SEQ function automatically
generates the STL source file, which you can edit with the STL editor. With
the MC5>INT function you must create a sequential source file yourself
using the INT>SEQ SPECIAL function (see Section 21.17).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-37
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.15 Error List
The error list is not only a list of the errors which occurred during the
compilation, but it is also a complete log of the compilation: it lists the
blocks compiled without errors and if compilation was canceled it indicates
where this occurred.
To have a real example, create an error in your FB 1 (programmed in
Section 21.11): EDIT your FB 1 and write, for example, only R as reset
commands. When you save with ENTER, a message tells you that errors
have occurred.
1. Now call the E-LIST (F3).
2. Complete the PRI input field in the command line so that you can easily
correct the STL source based on the printout. If you press the help key,
the parameters for the PRI field are displayed.
3. Press the Insert key: Each incorrect statement is shown with a block
identifier, a line number and an explanation. The blocks that were
compiled correctly are also listed.
FILE B:FBTESTAF.SEQ
COMPILATION STL SOURCE B:FBTESTA0.SEQ => INTERMED. FILE B:FBTESTA1.SEQ
R =MOUP
*** ERROR IN LINE
28: OPERAND ILLEGAL ***
R =MODN
*** ERROR IN LINE
45: OPERAND ILLEGAL ***
*** FB1 COMPILED,
2 ERRORS FOUND ***
*** PB1 COMPILED, BLOCK ERROR FREE ***
*** COMPILATION COMPLETED; 2 ERRORS, NO WARNINGS ***
Displaying the
Error List
The error list is displayed on the screen if you leave the PRI field in the
command line empty. If long error lists are displayed on the screen, the
pages are 20 lines long and you can either cancel the display by pressing
the cancel key or view the next screen page using the insert key.
21.16 Printing
Overview
21-38
With this function you only print out the preset STL source file. In the
command line, you simply need to select the layout of your printout. (You
will find detailed information on the printed layout in the STEP 5
description, volume 2, in the chapter dealing with input/output of STL
blocks.) Compiled files can only be printed out with the command lines of
the COMPILER function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Ready to Start?
The printer is connected and ready for operation; if you have an external
printer, you must set parameters in the PRINTER UTILITY PROGram. The
PT 88 printer is the default. The name of the file to be printed is entered in
the presetting of the STL editor/batch compiler, for example, FBTEST. The
function selection dialog is displayed on the screen.
How to Use the
Print Function
Follow the steps outlined below:
Press PRINT (F4)
Fill in the PRI field; the default is standard output in standard print.
Press the ENTER key.
The FBTESTAQ.SEQ STL source file is printed. The function selection
dialog is displayed again.
As in the CSF, LAD, STL package, you can also redirect your printout to a
file. You define this file in the PRINTER UTILITY PROGram and then enter
the name of the printer file in the PRESETTING. For your current printing
job, select a layout as usual in the command line. This layout is then also
transferred to the print file.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-39
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.17 SPECIAL Functions for Editing Intermediate Files and Source Files
Overview
The special functions are used to edit and modify sequential files and
intermediate files. You also have the option of a test run for the compiled
program file. All these activities relate to the files selected in the presetting.
Make sure that the settings are correct before using the functions. In our
example the presetting remains unchanged.
Any function can be stopped with the cancel key.
F1
F2
SEQ>INT
COPY
F3
F4
F5
INT>SEQ SEQDELETE INTDELETE COPY
F6
TEST RUN
F7
F8
SYM-GEN RETURN
Use the COPY function to create back-up copies. Initially, you can copy the
intermediate file and then copy the STL source file to another drive. The
programming device displays a message, for example “hardware error” if a
floppy disk drive is not closed.
To edit the example files without any risk, first copy them to a floppy disk.
Enter the STL source file in the PRESETTING,
Start SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start COPY (F5),
Type in drive: A
Press the Insert key. The intermediate file is also saved on a floppy disk.
When the question appears “Also copy SEQ.source file?”
Press the Insert key (yes).
The intermediate file and the STL source are copied to the floppy disk. The
function selection dialog is displayed again on the programming device.
SEQ>INT
Start the SEQ>INT (F1) function, if, for example, you want to compile an
STL source file that was created with another text editor. With this function
the text file is converted into an intermediate file before it can be compiled
into the program file.
Enter the text file in the PRESETTING,
Activate SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start the SEQ>INT (F1) function. The device displays:” Compilation of the
STL source file into the intermediate file?”
Press the Insert key (yes).
An intermediate file is now available for further editing. The function
selection dialog is displayed again.
21-40
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
INT>SEQ
Start the INT>SEQ (F2) function, if, for example, you decompiled a
program file (with COMPILER, MC5>INT) and you want to edit it in the
editor. For this purpose you have to convert the intermediate file into a
sequential file. Additional comments of the former STL source are lost
during this process.
Specify the required files in the PRESETTING dialog.
Activate SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start the INT>SEQ (F2) function. The device asks: “Compilation of the
intermediate file into the STL source file?”
Press the Insert key (yes).
A new STL source file is then created. The function selection dialog is
displayed again.
SEQ DEL and INT
DEL
SEQ DEL and INT DEL delete the preset STL source file and the
intermeiate file.
Specify the required files in the PRESETTING dialog.
Activate SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start the SEQ DEL (F3) function. The device asks: “Delete the STL source
file?”
Press the Insert key (yes).
The function selection dialog is displayed again.
Activate SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start the INT DEL (F4) function. The device asks: “Delete the intermediate
file?”
Press the Insert key (yes) or cancel (no).
The function selection dialog is displayed again.
TEST RUN
The TEST RUN is additional block check in the preset program file. The
test checks whether the standard function blocks are supplied with the
correct parameters. Any errors detected are written to the error list.
In the command line of this function you can enter single blocks, block
groups, block types or all blocks from a program file; use the help key if
you require more information.
Specify the program file to be tested and, if required, the PLC type in the
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PRESETTING dialog.
Activate SPECIAL functions (F5),
Start the TEST RUN (F6) function,
Complete the command line: for example *,
Press the Insert key,
Select PB1 in the block list.
Press the Return key,
Enter FB1, DB12 in the same way,
Press the ENTER key.
21-41
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Messages are displayed by the programming device during the run. If
errors are reported, print out the error list.
SYM-GEN
From an STL source file SYM-GEN generates a symbolic source file,
which contains all the absolute parameters and symbols used. You can edit
the symbolic source file with the symbols editor to extend assignments and
enter comments. The symbols and absolute parameters appear in the
symbolic source file as often as they were used in the STL source file. To
avoid multiple entries, follow the steps below:
Create the symbolic source file with SYM-GEN
Example:
Absolute
Symbol
Comment
EME-OFF
EME-OFF
EME-OFF
Change to the STEP 5 assignment list editor
Complete the assignment when the symbol or the absolute parameter
occurs for the first time
Example:
Absolute
Symbol
Comment
I 1.0
EME-OFF
emergency off
EME-OFF
EME-OFF
Compile into the symbols file. Here you can ignore the “Symbol already
exists” error messages.
Decompile the symbols file into the symbolic source file (INT>SEQ)
Example:
Absolute
Symbol
Comment
I 1.0
EME-OFF
emergency off
Now the symbolic source file contains only one assignment with the
EME-OFF symbol.
21-42
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
21.18 Error Messages
PLC type illegal:
You have specified an invalid PLC type.
Absolute parameter too long:
System error! Format or the STL source file incorrect.
Actual parameter not permitted:
Specifying actual parameters is only allowed after an FB call.
LIB no. already exists:
The control character #BI is specified more than once.
LIB no. invalid:
Library number too long, or contains illegal characters (max. 5 numbers).
Block in intermediate file not error-free:
Intermediate file (A1.SEQ) is defective (format error).
Recreate intermediate file again from the sequential working (A0.SEQ) file
with the function SEQ>INT.
Block without BE:
Command BE (block end identifier) missing
Block too long:
Distribute program (max. 8 Kbytes).
Block start missing
No # character with absolute and/or symbolic block identifier.
Block type undefined (symbol not found):
In purely symbolic programming, the symbolic block identifier is missing.
Block name already exists:
The control character #N is specified more than once.
Command for PLC type not permitted:
Command for specified PLC type not permitted
Command in block not permitted:
Commands from the extended operations are only permitted in FBs.
Command not defined
Not a permitted MC5 command. Program file (ST.S5D) defective.
Command not permitted:
Not a permitted STEP 5 command.
DB address invalid:
DB address too long, or contains illegal characters (max. 5 characters).
Data position wrong:
With constants, the value must be specified in the “OPERAND SYMBOL” field.
Doc block too long:
Distribute or shorten program documentation (max. 16 Kbytes).
DVS file not opened
Wrong function number:
System error!
Wrong nesting depth:
Final parenthesis does not match (check nesting levels).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-43
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Wrong data record in SEQ-file:
Sequential working file, STL source file or intermediate file defective (format
error).
Wrong format:
Error in format
Error when compiling:
System error!
Error when converting:
Numeric range was exceeded.
Formal parameter not defined
Parameter name and parameter type not defined in FB.
Formal parameter already exists:
The parameter name is assigned more than once.
Formal parameter invalid:
The parameter name contains invalid characters, or the parameter type is not
permitted.
No actual parameter specified:
Following the FB call, the required actual parameter is missing in the
“STATEMENT” field.
No block name specified:
The control character #N and the block name are missing in the function
block.
No data specified:
After specifying a constant type in the “STATEMENT” field, the constant value
is not specified in the “OPERAND SYMBOL” field.
No formal operand specified:
The formal parameter declaration in the “ADR” field of the FB is missing for
the specified actual parameter after the FB call.
No operand ID specified:
Operand ID missing.
No parameter specified:
Parameter missing (when programming in absolute format only).
No Symbol specified:
Operand symbol missing (when programming in symbolic format only).
No LIB number specified:
The library number is missing after #BI.
Comment too long:
System error! Format of the STL source file incorrect. statement comment too
long (max. 32 characters).
Comment block too long:
Distribute or shorten program (max. 16 Kbytes).
Read error
Diskette error, file defective.
Label not defined
Jump label to specified jump destination (symbolic address) in “ADR” field not
entered.
Label invalid:
Jump label with illegal character
Label illegal:
Jump label at illegal position
21-44
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Label too long:
The jump destination entered in the “STATEMENT” field (symbolic address) is
too long (max. 4 characters).
Labels identical:
Jump label exists more than once.
More comments than statements
Segment end missing or segment is too long:
Segment end character *** or screen refresh command for segment end (BLD
255) missing, or segment is too long (max. 255 lines).
Only permitted with STL blocks:
Data block
Only with function blocks:
Extended command set not permitted
Only one title per segment:
The control character #UB is specified more than once at the start of the
segment.
Only after FB call:
Actual parameters are permitted only immediately after an FB call.
Operand illegal:
No operand permitted
Operand too long:
Operand ID too long (max. 2 characters).
Operand ID not defined
Operand ID not defined in STEP 5.
Operand ID illegal:
Operand ID does not match operator.
Operator not specified:
Operator missing in symbolic programming.
Operator invalid:
Operator not defined in STEP 5.
Operator too long:
(max. 3 characters)
Parameter incorrect:
Invalid parameter.
Parameter illegal:
No parameter permitted
Parameter too long (max. 4 characters):
The formal parameter entered in the “STATEMENT” field is too long (max. 4
characters).
Number of parameters wrong:
Declared number of formal parameters in FB is different from the specified
number of actual parameters after FB call. (test run)
Parameter range of the PLC type exceeded:
This parameter value is not permitted with the specified PLC type
Parameter type wrong:
The formal parameter type specified in the “STATEMENT” field is difference
from the assigned actual parameter type after FB call. (test run)
SYS commands not permitted:
omitted
Control character invalid:
The #character is followed by an illegal control character.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
21-45
STL Editor/Batch Compiler
Symbol not permitted:
Command does not permit operand.
Symbol does not match absolute parameter:
Absolute operand and symbolic operand assigned differently in STL source
file and symbols file.
Symbol too long:
System error! Format of the STL source file incorrect. (max. 24 characters)
Symbols file does not exist:
Symbols file missing when programming in symbolic format only.
System commands not permitted:
omitted
Character invalid:
Invalid character used
Line not permitted:
Remember the order (control character) when entering blocks.
Line invalid:
Remember the order (control character) when entering blocks.
Line not processed:
Block type is undefined.
Too many actual parameters:
(max. 40)
Too many formal parameters:
(max. 40)
Intermediate file already exists, delete?:
An intermediate file with the identical file name already exists.
Intermediate file not error-free:
Intermediate file (A1.SEQ) is defective (format error). Compile intermediate file
again from the working sequential file (A0.SEQ) with the function SEQ>INT.
Intermediate file format invalid:
Intermediate file (A1.SEQ) is defective (format error). Compile intermediate file
again from the working sequential file (A0.SEQ) with the function SEQ>INT.
Intermediate file ID wrong:
File was created with tool of a different version. Compile intermediate file
again from the working sequential file (A0.SEQ) with the function SEQ>INT.
Nested include command not permitted. An intermediate file included with
#INCLUDE contains a further #INCLUDE statement.
Symbolic source file exists, overwrite?
A symbolic source file with the identical file name already exists (SYM-GEN
function).
21-46
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Overview
22
With the COM DB1 parameter assignment software, you can assign
parameters to CPUs of the low to mid range of performance. The time
required for successful parameter assignment is minimal.
Up to now, it was only possible to assign parameters to the CPUs in plain
text using DB1. To edit DB1 in plain text, you had to use the DB editor of
the STEP 5 package.
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
22.1
Range of Functions of COM DB1
22-2
22.2
Working with COM DB1
22-6
22.3
Layout of the COM DB1 Dialogs
22-9
22.4
Example of a Complete DB1 Parameter Assignment
with COM DB1
22-18
22-1
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.1 Range of Functions of COM DB1
Overview
This section covers the following topics:
The functions provided by COM DB1 and restrictions in the use of the
software.
The CPUs for which you can assign parameters using COM DB1.
Advantages of
Assigning
Parameters to DB1
with COM DB1
Using this package has the following advantages:
COM DB1 can interpret and modify every DB1 with parameter
assignment data and provide it with comments.
You no longer need to keep to the rules for DB1 parameter assignment
as explained in the PLC manuals since COM DB1 itself takes these
rules into account. You can see the CPU-specific parameters on the
screen. The arguments and the value ranges of the arguments are
available in special list boxes.
COM DB1 can detect input errors in DB1 and indicate these errors in
plain text. Errors in DB1 are detected at the latest when it is transferred
to the PLC or to the program file. This excludes the possibility of setting
incorrect parameters with COM DB1.
COM DB1 can be used to generate further data blocks required for
parameters (e.g. for send and receive mailboxes).
COM DB1 has online capability, in other words, a DB1 can be
transferred online to the CPU. A DB1 can also be uploaded online from
the CPU to the programming device.
You can display a help text related to the current activity at any point
during parameter assignment.
What Does the
COM DB1 Software
Package Include?
22-2
COM DB1 is supplied with STEP 5/ST. It is in the directory
\STEP5\S5_SYS\S5_COM\COM_DB1.
COM DB1 files:
File name
s5pxcdbx.cmd
s5pdcdbx.dat
s5pecdbx.dat
s5pfcdbx.dat
Contents
COM DB1 (command file)
Texts in German
Texts in English
Texts in French
s5picdbx.dat
s5pscdbx.dat
Texts in Italian
Texts in Spanish
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.1.1
What Functions Does COM DB1 Provide?
The COM DB1 parameter assignment software is a user-friendly tool for
assigning parameters to CPUs with a lower to mid range of performance.
The functions provided by COM DB1 are described below. Some functions
can only be executed with the CPU online. These are indicated in the text.
All other functions can be used both online and offline. You select the
online or offline mode in the Defaults dialog of COM DB1.
Creating a New
DB1
You have just edited a DB1 with COM DB1 and want to discard it. Press the
F1 key (New DB1) in the Overview table dialog. The DB1 you hav ejust created
is deleted and the parameter settings of the default DB1 appear in the Overview
table.
You can modify parameters in a DB1 that already exists on the PLC by
selecting “Online”, uploading the DB1 from the PLC and overwriting the
required parameters.
You can modify parameters in a DB1 that already exists in a STEP 5 program
file. You select the STEP 5 program file either in the Defaults dialog or in the
“Loading DB1” dialog. You then load the DB1 from the STEP 5 program file
and overwrite the required parameters.
Creating Empty
Blocks
When you specify a DB in a parameter block, COM DB1 checks to see if
this DB already exists in the PLC (only possible online) or in a STEP 5
program file. If the DB exists but it is not long enough for the parameter
assignment, the length is corrected (for example send mailbox DB with
SINEC L1).
Comments
You can enter a comment relating to the entire DB1 and to the individual
parameter blocks. A comment can consist of up to 80 characters (including
spaces).
Transferring a DB1
You can transfer a DB1 to the PLC if you have selected Online. If there is
already a DB1 on the PLC, you will be asked whether or not you want to
overwrite it.
You can transfer a DB1 to a STEP 5 program file. Specify the STEP 5
program file either in the Defaults dialog or in the Transferring DB1 dialog.
Outputting a DB1
to a Printer
You can print DB1 parameters. All parameter assignment dialogs and the
Overview table can be printed. If you want to use a printer file and/or a
footer file for your printout, the printer file or footer file must already exist,
(created earlier with the STEP 5 package). You specify the printer file or
footer file in the Defaults dialog.
Outputting a DB1
to a File
You can output a DB1 to a file. This is necessary if you want to print the
DB1 on a printer that is not connected to the programming device. You
specify the output file in the Defaults dialog.If you want to use a printer file
and/or a footer file, the same conditions apply as for direct output of DB1 to
a printer. The same contents are output to the file as are output directly to a
printer (! Outputting a DB1 to a printer).
Deleting a
Parameter Block
If you do not want to use parameter blocks, you can delete them in the Overview
table of COM DB1.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-3
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
PLC functions
You can execute PLC functions online:
Compress the PLC memory
Switch the PLC from STOP to RUN, the DB1 parameters are updated
in the CPU
Switch the PLC from RUN to STOP
Help
COM DB1 also provides a range of Help functions to make parameter
assignment easier.
Incorrect parameter assignment is prevented since COM DB1:
Detects errors as parameters are entered
Checks all inter-parameter dependencies within a DB1
Checks that the value ranges of the arguments are not violated
Displays an error message in the event of an error and prompts you to
correct the error (an incorrect DB1 cannot be saved).
22.1.2
Please note the following special features and restrictions:
COM DB1 can only process one DB1 at a time.
COM DB1 cannot check the interdependencies of parameters between
different PLCs (for example whether the same transmission rate is set
for all nodes in a SINEC L2 network).
Direct parameter assignment in the system data is not possible.
Only those CPU functions which could previously be set in DB1 can be
assigned parameters with COM DB1.
If a parameter block in the Overview table of COM DB1 contains no
values, the operating system of your PLC automatically writes the
default parameters into the system data.
Default parameters enclosed between comment characters #
(! representation of the default DB1 in the relevant PLC manual) are
not recognized by COM DB1 and will be lost. (If the default parameters
enclosed in comment characters # come immediately before the DB1
end-of-text identifier END, these characters will be interpreted as
comments for the entire DB1.)
The PLCs listed in Section 22.1.3 can be assigned parameters with
COM DB1. The following rules apply to later versions of PLCs, i.e.
same CPU/same PLC with new revision level:
COM DB1 works with the latest PLC revision level known to it, i.e. in the
case of a later version of a PLC, COM DB1 can only set parameters for the
functions it was able to in the last revision level, and it will not recognize
any newly added parameters/parameter blocks and/or modified value
ranges.
Handling of the individual COM DB1 functions is described in detail in the
example of a complete DB1 parameter assignment at the end of this
section.
22-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.1.3
Which PLCs Can You Assign Parameters to with COM DB1?
Using COM DB1, you can assign parameters to all the programmable controllers/CPUs listed in the
table below:
Programmable controller / CPU
S5-90U programmable controller
Can be assigned parameters with COM DB1
order no. and version (or higher)
6ES5 090-8MA01
A01
♦ Basic unit
6ES5 095-8MA01
A01
♦ with SINEC L2 interface
6ES5 095-8MB01
A01
♦ with two serial interfaces
6ES5 095-8MC01
A01
♦ with SINEC L2-DP interface
6ES5 095-8MD01
A01
6ES5 103-8MA03
A01
♦ CPU 941
6ES5 941-7UB11
A01
♦ CPU 942
6ES5 942-7UB11
A01
♦ CPU 943 with one serial interface
6ES5 943-7UB11
A01
♦ CPU 943 with two serial interfaces *
6ES5 943-7UB21
A01
♦ CPU 944 with one serial interface
6ES5 944-7UB11
A01
S5-95U programmable controller::
S5-100U programmable controller:
♦ CPU 103
S5-115U programmable controller:
and operating system module
♦ CPU 944 with two serial interfaces
and operating system module *
6ES5 816-1BB11/21
A01
6ES5 944-7UB21
A01
6ES5 816-1BB11/21
A01
♦ CPU 945 with 256 Kbyte memory
6ES5 945-7UA11
A01
and operating system module
6ES5 816-5AA01
A01
♦ CPU 945 with 384 Kbyte memory
6ES5 945-7UA21
A01
and operating system module
6ES5 816-5AA01
A01
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-5
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.2 Working with COM DB1
Starting COM DB1
COM DB1 can be started as follows:
1. Start STEP 5.
2. Load COM DB1 with the function Change COM DB1.
The language menu appears on the programming device screen.
22.2.1
Overview
Hierarchy of COM DB1 Display Levels
This section explains how to set parameters with COM DB1 (general
operation), how the COM DB1 dialogs are structured on the screen, how to
make entries in the COM DB1 dialogs and the rules for making entries. The
section also covers the help options provided by the package and error
messages that might be displayed.
You work with COM DB1 in dialogs organized into different levels. The
following applies to all levels of COM DB1:
By pressing one of the function keys F1 to F7 you can execute a COM
DB1 function or change to a lower-level COM DB1 dialog.
You can exit every COM DB1 dialog with the F8 = Return function key
and return to the next higher dialog.
22-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
The following diagram illstrates the operating concept when working with
COM DB1.
Start dialog: Select
language
COM DB1
F5
F1 ...
F5
: In all dialogs
F8 takes you back to
the next higher
dialog
Defaults
1st display level
F6
Overview table
2nd display level
3rd display level
Loading DB1
Transferring DB1
Printing DB1
F2 ...
F4
F6
F7
Parameter block, e.g.CLP
PLC functions
Overview table SINEC L2
F6
SINEC L2 parameter block
4th display level
Figure 22-1
Hierarchical Structure of COM DB1
After starting COM DB1, the first COM DB1 dialog appears. This is the
Language menu. Use the function keys to select COM DB1 in the desired
language.
1st Display Level:
Defaults
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
After selecting the language, the Defaults dialog is displayed. Here, you
enter the settings required by COM DB1 to execute its functions.
22-7
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
You specify the following in the Defaults dialog:
How COM DB1 communicates withthe CPU (online, offline)
Order number of the CPU
Revision level of the PLC.
Entries in the other input fields of the Defaults dialog depend on the
functions you want to execute in the subsequent dialogs. (If, for example,
you want to store a DB1 in a program file, you can enter the name of the
program file (destination file) in the Program file: input field).
2nd Display Level:
Overview Table
When the defaults have been entered, the Overview table dialog is
displayed. The Overview table contains all the parameter blocks possible
for the CPU type defined in the Defaults dialog. The Setting appears
beside each individual parameter block (e.g. Not parameterized,
Parameterized (default), etc.).
You can decide the following in the Overview table dialog:
If you want to load, transfer or print a DB1 that exists in the PLC or in a
program file (DB1 utilities)
If you want to modify or delete parameter blocks of a loaded DB1
If you want to generate a new DB1
If you want to branch to a PLC function.
The first time you change from the Defaults dialog to the Overview table
dialog, a message tells you whether there is a DB1 in a program file and/or
on the PLC. If you load an existing DB1, the Overview table will be
updated.
3rd Display Level:
DB1
Utilities/Parameter
Block.../PLC
Functions
If you have selected a DB1 utility function (e.g. Loading DB1) or a PLC
function at the 2nd display level, the relevant dialog for executing the
function appears then at the 3rd display level.
SPECIAL CASE
3rd display level: SINEC L2 Overview table
If you have selected a parameter block at the 2nd display level, you branch
to the parameter assignment dialog at the 3rd display level. The parameter
assignment dialog contains a list of all the parameters belonging to the
parameter block. Existing parameter assignment data (e.g. after loading a
DB1) appears in the relevant input fields of the parameter assignment
dialog. Some input fields without parameters assigned contain default
values.
One screen page is not sufficient for listing all parameters of the SINEC L2
parameter block. In this case, the parameter block is divided into logical
subunits. After selecting this parameter block in the Overview table dialog,
you branch to the SINEC L2 Overview table dialog containing the logical
subunits.
4th Display Level:
SINEC L2
Parameter Block
22-8
The fourth display level only exists if the SINEC L2 Overview table dialog
with the logical subunits appears at the 3rd display level of COM DB. Each
subunit has its own parameter assignment dialog. At the 4th display level,
SINEC L2 Parameter Block, the same entries can be made as at the 3rd
display level “Parameter Block...”.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.3 Layout of the COM DB1 Dialogs
Overview
All COM DB1 functions can be executed by making entries in dialogs. The
COM DB1 dialogs all share the same basic layout. They are divided into
five areas. The example below of the Clock Parameters (CLP) parameter
assignment dialog shows the divisions of COM DB1 dialogs.
Title
Clock parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Comment line
_
Location of the status word:
Location of the clock data:
Updating the clock during “STOP”:
Corr. factor
Save clock time:
Input/output
area
No.:
No.:
Date/time:
Weekday:
Clock mode:
Date (dd mm yy):
Cl. time (hh mm ss):
Prompting:
Weekday:
Clock mode:
Dae (dd mm):
Cl. time (hh mm ss):
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
Message line
Menu line
Figure 22-2
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Layout of the COM DB1 “Clock Parameters (CLP) Dialog
Title
The titles of all COM DB1 dialogs are one line long and separated from the
rest of the dialog area by one line. It indicates the contents of the COM
DB1 dialog. The title cannot be changed in any COM DB1 dialog.
Comment Line
Here you can enter a comment relating to the parameter block (in the
relevant parameter assignment dialog) or to the entire DB1 (in the
Overview table dialog). The comment line is one line long and can contain
up to 80 characters.
Input/Output Area
The large middle area of the screen is the input area of the COM DB1
dialogs. This area contains fixed texts and input fields, depending on the
display level, in which parameters can be set. Using the keyboard, you can
enter the relevant and permitted parameters for the selected function in
these input fields and then transfer them to a program file or the PLC.
In the same area, you can view the parameter assignment data of a DB1
existing in a program file or on the PLC (output area). This is also the area
where COM DB1 displays list boxes, help windows and warnings to help
you when working with COM DB1.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-9
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Message Line
COM DB1 uses the message line to inform you about current processes,
operator errors or faults. The first time you change from the Defaults dialog
to the Overview table dialog, COM DB1 tells you whether a DB1 exists in a
program file and/or in the PLC.
Menu Line
The menu line (function keys F1 to F8) at the bottom edge of the screen
tells you which function key on the keyboard executes which COM DB1
function. COM DB1 functions which are not possible in offline mode (e.g.
Load from PLC) are not supported by the relevant function keys in offline
mode.
22.3.1
Possible Entries in COM DB1 Dialogs and Rules to Follow
Overview
This section shows you:
How to make entries in the input fields
How to enter comments in the comment line
Points to remember when editing.
All inputs to the COM DB1 dialogs are cursor-oriented.
Making Entries in
the Input Fields
There are two ways of entering parameter values in the input fields with
cursor support:
Entering the text character-by-character at the keyboard.
Selecting the text from a list box belonging to the input field
(if available) (with F3 = Select).
Note
The F6 = Store key then stores the modified parameter assignment data in
DB1. The data is stored only if all parameter settings for the block are free
of errors. After the data is stored, COM DB1 switches automatically to the
Overview table dialog.
Example of : Entering a correction factor character-by-character
1. Position the cursor on the Correction factor: input field
2. Enter the desired parameter at the keyboard (e.g. 9).
3. Complete the entry by pressing the Return or or INSERT key. (Press
ESC to discard the text.)
22-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Example of : Entering the day of the week via a list box
1. Position the cursor on the Weekday: input field.
2. Open the list box belonging to the input field by pressing F3 = Select.
3. Position the cursor on the relevant text line in the list box.
4. Enter the selected weekday in the input field by pressingthe Return or
INSERT key. The selected text appears in the input field. (Press ESC to
cancel the entry.)
Clock parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
_
No.:
No.:
SU
Corr. factor:
Updating the clock in:
MO
Save clock time:
TU
WE
Date/time:
Clock mode:
THUhrzeit (hh mm
Date (dd mm yy):
Weekday:
FRss):
Clock mode:
Promting:
SA
Date (dd mm):
XXUhrzeit (hh mm
Weekday:
ss):
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Location of the status word:
Location of the clock data:
Enable the operating hours counter:
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 22-3
Entering
Comments
COM DB1 Clock Parameters (CLP) Dialog: Selecting the
Weekday
With COM DB1, you can enter
Comments relating to the entire DB1 in the Overview
Table dialog and
Comments relating to each parameter block in the relevant
parameter assignment dialog.
You enter the comment in the comment line provided at the top edge of the
COM DB1 dialog. The comment can be up to 80 characters long (including
spaces).
Example of : Entering a comment for the Clock
Parameters (CLP) parameter block
1. Press the COM comment key in the Clock Parameters (CLP) parameter
assignment form. The cursor then jumps to the comment line.
2. Enter the comment at the keyboard (e.g. Setting the interrupt interval of
maintenance unit 1).
3. Terminate the entry by pressing the Return or INSERT key. (Press
ESC to exit the comment line without changing the original contents.)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-11
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Note
A comment relating to a parameter block is stored together with the
parameter block (with F6 = Store) in DB1.
Rules and Points
to Remember
when Making
Entries in COM
DB1 Dialogs
below, we have collected a few points to remember and rules for setting
parameters for DB1 with COM DB1.
Note
If you do not enter the revision level of the CPU in the Defaults dialog, COM
22-12
DB1 will access the parameter set (parameter blocks, value ranges) of the
highest revision level known to it. COM DB1 enters the valid revision level
in the relevant input field in the Defaults dialog.
In the case of CPU 944 with two serial interfaces, you must also specify the
order number and the version of the operating system module in the
Defaults dialog.
When loading a DB1 created with STEP 5, comments may be lost if:
– the comment is longer than 80 characters
– the comment relating to the entire DB1 is not located immediately before
the END end-of-text identifier
– the comment relating to a parameter block is not located immediately
after the relevant block identifier. Parameter blocks enclosed between
comment characters (#) in the default DB1 will also be lost.
If, before storing a parameter block, you delete a parameter to which a
default value has been assigned, the default value remains valid in the
PLC. The next time the parameter assignment dialog is selected, the
default value appears in the input field of the parameter.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.3.2
COM DB1 Help and Error Handling Concept
Overview
COM DB1 supports you with an extensive help and error handling concept
when programming DB1. This section gives you an overview of the
following:
All the help information which COM DB1 provides during parameter
assignment
All error messages which COM DB1 displays when programming DB1
Help Concept
The COM DB1 help concept is based closely on the STEP 5 concept.
You can request help texts on the screen depending on the selected COM
DB1 dialog and the current cursor position. COM DB1 provides three types
of help:
Message line Message line: Notes and error messages in the message line
of the COM DB1 dialogs
Help screen: Help texts with explanations of the current COM DB1
dialog and function key assignments
Info window: Help texts with information on the input fields
COM DB1 informs you about the following in the message line of the
COM DB1 dialogs (see Figure 22-4):
COM DB1 operator errors (e.g. Invalid entry)
Parameter assignment errors
Currently active COM DB1 functions (e.g. DB1 is being loaded. Please
wait...)
Existence of a DB1 on a program file and/or in the PLC when changing
from the Defaults dialog to the Overview table dialog.
Help Dialog If you press the HELP key inside a COM DB1 dialog, a help window
appears on the screen with a short explanation of the selected dialog and
the current function key assignments.
The old screen contents are deleted and the relevant help text is displayed.
If one screen is not sufficient, you can scroll to the next page using the
INSERT or Return keys.
Press the ESC key to exit the help dialog. The old screen contents are
restored.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-13
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Example
Help dialog: Explanations of the current COM DB1 Clock Parameters
(CLP) dialog and function key assignments.
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameter block for integral clock (CLP):
You can parameterize the integral clock for
– Clock and calendar functions )e.g. to configure a clock-time dependent control)
– Prompt and alarm functions (e.g. to monitor the duration of a process)
– Operating hours counter (e.g. to monitor inspection intervals)
The memory space required is determined depending on the clock functions used. If
DBs are used, COM DB1 checks the PLC or relevant file after the transfer to find out
whether these DBs exist at all and have the required size. It generates these DBs if
necessary. The PLC also starts up if they do not exist!
F3
Opens list box with the permissible entries
F7
Provides information on the input field on which the cursor is positioned
F6
Transfers the changes
<ESC> or F8 Cancels the changes
<COM> or <-:-> Editing a comment relating to the entire parameter block
<ESC>
Closes the window
Figure 22-4
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Help Display: Explanations of the Current COM DB1 “Clock Parameters” Dialog and
Function Key Assignments
Info Window You can request help information about the input fields of COM DB1 by
pressing function key F7 = Info (if active) . Depending on the cursor
position, all possible and permitted inputs are briefly described in an info
window.
In contrast to the help dialogs for explaining function key assignments,
each info window only appears as a “popup” so that the input field remains
visible.
Only one info window can be opened at a time.
The info window must be closed before making entries in the input field or
positioning the cursor on the next input field. Press the ESC key to close
the info window.
22-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Example
Info window: information about the Weekday input field of the COM DB1
Clock Parameters (CLP) dialog.
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Lage
Statuswortes:
_
No.:
Enter
thedes
abbreviation
for the weekday:
MoLage
- Monday,
Tu - Tuesday, We - Wednesday, Th - Thursday, Fr - Friday,
No.: Sa - Saturday, Su der Uhrendaten:
Sunday
Aktualisierung
der Uhr im Stop:
Korrekturfaktor:
If XX
is entered, the clock continues with the
current weekday.
Uhrzeit
retten:the window
<ESC>:
Closes
Datum/Uhrzeit:
Weekday:
Uhrzeitmodus:
Date (dd mm yy):
Cl time (hh mm ss):
Clock mode:
Date (dd mm):
Cl time (hh mm ss):
Prompting:
Weekday:
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 22-5
Error Handling
Concept
Info Window: Information about the Weekday Input Field of the
COM DB1 Clock Parameters (CLP) Dialog
The COM DB1 error handling concept is based closely on the STEP 5
error handling concept. COM DB1 can detect errors and inform the user of
them with messages on the screen.
COM DB1 reacts to the following errors:
Errors detected during loading or transferring of DB1
Errors during programming of DB1 (input errors)
COM DB1 reacts to these errors in following ways:
either
With an error message. Error messages are displayed as in STEP 5 in
a shortened form in the message line on the screen (e.g. Invalid value
range”).
Or with a warning (safety prompt). Warnings are displayed in a
plain-bordered window in the center of the screen (e.g.: Do you want
to discard the parameter assignment?). Such prompts must
be acknowledged with ESC or answered according to the prompt text
with ESC for No, or Cancel or Return for Yes.
Errors detected
during loading When loading DB1 from a program file or the PLC, and during transfer of
DB1 to the program file or PLC, all parameters are checked for:
Value range violations
Parameter dependencies within blocks
Parameter dependencies between blocks
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-15
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
If COM DB1 detects an error ( e.g. Gaps in input or output area
or multiple assignments), it automatically displays the Overview
table in which the parameter blocks concerned are labelled as “errored”:
In the “errored” block, the “genuine” parameter assignment errors are
marked with a ! in front of the input field.
The system enters ( * ) in the input field in those cases where data for
parameters in the “errored” block cannot be “interpreted” (this can only
occur in a DB1 that was programmed with the DB editor of the STEP 5
package).
Note
If you position the cursor on the incorrect ( ! ) parameter in the parameter
assignment dialog, the relevant error message will appear in the message
line.
Example
Marking incorrect parameters in the Clock Parameters (CLP) block after
loading DB1. DB1 has been created with the DB editor of the STEP 5
package.
1. error: DY was entered instead of FY for the position of the status word.
(Typing error, unexpected entry).
2. error: AM was entered instead of PM for the clock mode. (Wrong value
range).
Error:
Unexpected entry in DB1
Clock Parameters (CLP)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Location of the status word:
No.:
Location of the clock data:
FW No.:
1
1 Updating the clock during “STOP”:
Corr. factor:
YES
Save clock time: YES
Date/time:
Clock mode: ! AM
Weekday: FR Date (dd mm yy): 3 9 93 Cl. time (hh mm ss): !14 0 0
Clock mode: AM
Prompting:
Weekday: MO Date (dd mm):
Cl. time (hh mm ss): 9 10 0
6 9
Set the operating hours counter (hhhhhh mm ss):
Enable the operating hours counter:
Error:
displayed
by
COM DB1
Error in time or date entry
F
1
Figure 22-6
22-16
F
2
F
3 Select
F
4
F
5
F
6 Store
Error: Inconsistency in
parameter dependency
F
7 Info
F
8 Return
Display of Incorrect Parameters in the Parameter Assignment Dialog
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Errors When
Programming DB1
Illegal input is blocked by COM DB1 during programming:
The input texts are checked by COM DB1 after the entry has been
completed with the Return key.
You are informed of syntax errors or value range violations with an
error message e.g. Invalid value range). Incorrect parameters
are indicated by a ! in front of the input field.
When the parameter assignment data is stored in DB1 with F6 = Store,
additional parameter dependencies within the block are checked:
The user is informed of “unfulfilled” parameter dependencies with the
warning The parameter assignments cannot be stored since they still
contain errors. After acknowledging with ESC, the incorrect parameter
settings found in this way are indicated with a ! in front of the input field.
Note
If you position the cursor on the incorrect ( ! ) parameter in the parameter
assignment dialog, the relevant error message will appear in the message
line.
Only after all parameters have been correctly entered can the parameter
block be stored with F6 = Store.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-17
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.4 Example of a Complete DB1 Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Overview
Based on a concrete example, this section shows you how to proceed
when assigning parameters with COM DB1. This section is concerned with
the handling of COM DB1 and not with the function requiring values in
DB1.
You will find an explanation of the function and its parameters in the
relevant PLC manual. The example below will familiarize you with handling
COM DB1.
The table below contains:
All the steps required to assign parameters to a PLC;
All the dialogs in which these steps are executed. (We have included
the S5-95U with integral SINEC L2 interface specially for our example).
The individual steps will appear as subtitles in this Chapter.
Table 22-1
Overview of Procedure for Assigning Parameters to a PLC with
COM DB1
Steps to be Executed in the
Following Order and...
1. Install COM DB1
Dialogs Required
2. Start COM DB1
3. Select language
4. Enter defaults
5. Switch PLC from RUN to STOP
6. Load Default DB1 from PLC;
Select Language dialog
Defaults dialog
PLC Functions dialog
Loading DB1 dialog
Enter comment for DB1;
Select parameter block
7. Enter comment for
parameter block
8. Edit parameters
9. Output DB1 to printer
10. Transfer DB1 to PLC
11. Save DB1 to STEP 5 program
file
12. Switch PLC from STOP to RUN
22-18
SINEC L2 Overview table dialog
Basic Parameters dialog
Standard Connection dialog
Printing DB1 dialog
Transferring DB1 dialog
Transferring DB1 dialog
PLC Functions dialog
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Description of
example task
An S5-95U with integral SINEC L2 interface is to be assigned parameters.
The S5-95U will communicate with another PLC via the standard
connection.
The standard connection is assigned parameters with COM DB1 as
described below.
(The parameters and their arguments are taken from the DB1 parameter
assignment example for the standard connection in the SINEC L2 Interface
of the S5-95U Programmable Controller Manual.)
Requirements
Please note the following requirments:
An S5-95U with SINEC L2 interface (Order No.: 6ES5 095-8MB12,
Version 01).
A PG 7XX programming device plugged into the programming device
port of the S5-95U.
The bus connector must not be plugged into the SINEC L2 interface.
The S5-95U must be in the RUN mode.
You have created a program file AG95L2ST.S5E with the STEP 5
package.
You have created a printer file or footer file with the STEP 5 package.
22.4.1
Preparations
Selecting the
Language
After starting COM DB1, the Language menu appears. Use keys F1 to F5
to select the language in which COM DB1 will appear on the screen.
Press F2 = English. (You can exit COM DB1 by pressing F8 = Return or
the ESC key.)
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
COM DB1
Version x.y
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 deutsch 2 english 3 francais 4 espanol 5 italiano 6
Figure 22-7
Setting Defaults
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
F
7
F
8 Return
COM DB1 Language Dialog
You define the defaults for parameter assignment with COM DB1 in the
Defaults dialog as described below.
22-19
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Mode between COM DB1 and the CPU:
After selecting the Defaults dialog, the cursor is positioned in the
Online/Offline: input field.
1. Press F3 = Select to open the list box belonging to the Online/Offline:
input field.
2. Press the Return or INSERT key to enter Online in the input field.
Online appears in the input field.
3. Press the Return or INSERT key to position the cursor on the next
input field.
Defining the Order
Number
To define the order number, proceed exactly as you did for Defining the
operating mode between COM DB1 and the CPU. (You can position the
cursor on either the line 095-8MB22 or 095-8MB02 in the list box.)
Defining the PLC
Revision Level
Enter PLC revision level 01 at the keyboard and complete the entry by
pressing the Return or INSERT key. (You can cancel the entry with ESC,
i.e. the input field is empty again.)
When you have entered all defaults, the dialog appears as shown below:
Defaults
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Online/Offline:
Online
MLFB:
6ES5 095-8MB12
PLC rev. level:
01
Drive:
Program file:
@@@@@@ST.S5D
Drive:
Printer file:
@@@@@@DR.INI
Drive:
Footer file:
@@@@@@F1.INI
Drive:
Output file:
@@@@@@LS.INI
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 22-8
COM DB1 Defaults Dialog
Store the entries by pressing F6 = Store. The Overview table dialog
appears.
Switching the PLC
from RUN to STOP
COM DB1 knows the possible parameter blocks and parameter settings in
the default DB1 for the PLC entered in the Defaults dialog.
COM DB1 displays the following table for the S5-95U:
22-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Permissible parameter blocks
Onboard - Interrupt
Onboard - counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard - analog inputs
SINEC L1
(OBA)
(SL1)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
1
New
DB1
F
F
2 Load
DB1
3 Transfer 4
DB1
Figure 22-9
Changing the
Operating Mode
Settings
F
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC 8 Return
Block
Block
Function
COM DB1 Overview Table
You can change the operating mode of the PLC in the PLC Functions
dialog:
1. Press F7 = PLC function.
2. Change the operating mode by pressing F2 = Run ! Stop. The PLC is
now in the STOP mode.
PLC functions
F
F
F
F
1Compress2 Run –> 3 Stop –> 4
PLC
Stop
Run
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
F
5
F
6
F
7
F
8 Return
Figure 22-10 COM DB1 PLC Functions Dialog
3. Press F8 = Return to return to the Overview table.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-21
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
22.4.2
Loading the Default DB1 from the PLC; Entering Comments for DB1; Selecting
the Parameter Block
Loading and
Modifying DB1
The DB1 in the PLC is to be loaded into COM DB1 and modified.
Loading DB1 from the PLC:
1. Press F2 = Load DB1 in the Overview table (see Figure 22-11).
The Loading DB1 dialog appears as shown below:
Loading DB 1
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Drive:
Program file:
ST.S5D
F
F
F
F
1 Load 2 Load 3 Select 4
from FD from PLC
F
5
F
6
F
7
Info
F
8 Return
Figure 22-11 COM DB1 Overview table Dialog
2. Press F2 = Load from PLC.
When loading is completed the parameter settings of DB1 in the PLC
will be displayed in the Overview table. Since you have not yet set any
parameters in DB1 of the PLC, the default DB1 will be displayed (see
Figure 22-11).
Entering a Comment for DB1
1. If you want to enter a comment, press the COM key. The cursor will
now be in the comment line of the Overview table dialog.
2. Enter the comment, consisting of up to 80 characters; for our example:
Parameter assignment for SINEC L2 interface (standard connection
only)
(! Figure 22-12).
3. Press either the Return or INSERT. The cursor then appears in the first
line of the Permissible parameter blocks.
22-22
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Selecting the parameter block
1. To select the parameter block, position the cursor on the parameter
block SINEC L2.
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameter assignment for SINEC L2 interface (standard connection only)
Permissible parameter blocks
Onboard - interrupt
Onboard - counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard - analog inputs
SINEC L1
(OBA)
(SL1)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
1
Settings
New
DB1
F
F
2 Load
DB1
3 Transfer 4
DB1
F
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC 8 Return
block
block
Function
Figure 22-12 COM DB1 “Overview table” Dialog
2. Press either the Return or INSERT key. The Overview table SINEC L2
dialog appears on the screen.
Entering
Comments for the
Parameter Block
You can enter a comment relating to the SINEC L2 parameter block in the
Overview table SINEC L2 dialog.
1. Press COM. The cursor is now in the comment line.
2. Enter the comment consisting of up 80 characters; for our example:
Parameter assignment for standard connection between station 2 and
station 1.
3. Press either the Return or INSERT key. The cursor then appears in the
line Basic parameters.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-23
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Overview table SINEC L2
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameter assignment for standard connection between station 2 and station 1
Permissible parameter blocks
F
Settings
Basic parameters
Standard connection
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
PLC to PLC connection
Cyclic I/O master
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
Cyclic I/O slave
FMA services
Layer 2 services
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
Not parameterized
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 neuer 2 DB1 3 DB1 4 DB1 5 Delete 6 Select 7 AG8
DB!
Laden
Uebertr Drucken
block
block
Funktion
Return
Figure 22-13 COM DB1 Overview table SINEC L2 Dialog
Editing Parameters
In the Overview table SINEC L2 dialog, you can select the SINEC L2
functions you want to assign parameters to.
Note
You must always define the basic parameters as the first step since these
apply to all SINEC L2 functions. Only after this can you define the
parameters for the special SINEC L2 functions.
Editing Basic
Parameters
Selecting Basic parameters:
1. After selection of the Overview table dialog, the cursor is positioned in
the Basic parameters line.
2. Press either F6 = Store, the Return or INSERT key. The Basic
parameters dialog appears (see Figure 22-14).
Defining the station number
After selecting the Basic parameters dialog, the cursor is positioned in the
Station number: input field.
1. Enter 2 at the keyboard.
2. Store the entry by pressing the Return or INSERT key. The cursor is
now at the next input field. (you can cancel the entry with ESC, i.e. the
input field will be empty again.)
22-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Defining station status:
1. Press F3 = Select to open the list box belonging to the Station status:
input field.
2. The cursor is at the ACTIV(E) line of the list box.
3. Enter ACTIV(E) in the input field by pressing the Return or INSERT
key.
4. Position the cursor in the next input field by pressing the Return or
INSERT key.
5. Enter all further arguments of the basic parameters as described above:
– Either direct at the keyboard (you can call up a display of the value
range of the arguments with F7 = Info) or
– Using the list box.
Refer to Figure 22-14 for the parameter arguments.
When you have entered all basic parameter arguments, the dialog appears
as shown below:
SINEC L2 basic parameters
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Own station number
z
Own station status
ACTIVE
Baud rate:
500
Highest station address on bus:
10
Target rotation time:
5120
Setup time:
0
Slot time:
400
Shortest delay time:
12
Longest delay time:
360
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 22-14 COM DB1 SINEC L2 Basic Parameters Dialog
6. Press F6 = Store. The basic parameters are stored in DB1 and the
Overview table SINEC L2 dialog appears (see Figure 22-14).
Parameterized appears in the Basic parameters line in the dialog.
(Press ESC or F8 = Return to cancel the entry. The Overview table
SINEC L2 dialog then appears in its original form.)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-25
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Editing Parameters
for Standard
Connection
Select Standard connection:
The cursor is in the Overview table SINEC L2 (see Figure 22-15) dialog in
the Standard connection line.
1. Press either F6 = Store, the Return or INSERT key. The SINEC L2
Standard Connection dialog appears.
2. Enter all parameter arguments as described for the basic parameters
either directly at the keyboard or using the list box.
Refer to Figure 22-15 for the parameter arguments.
When you have entered all the arguments, the dialog appears as shown
below:
SINEC L2 standard connection
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Own station address 2
/ Stations active
Location of the receive mailbox:
DB
No. : 9
Location of the receive coordination byte:
FY
No. : 61
Location of the send mailbox:
DB
No. : 8
Location of the send coordination byte:
FY
No. : 60
DW-No.: 0
DW-No.: 0
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1
2
3 Select
4
5
6 Store
7 Info
8 Return
Figure 22-15 COM DB1 Standard Connection Dialog
3. Press F6 = Store. The parameters are stored in DB1 and the Overview
table SINEC L2 dialog appears (see Figure 22-15). Parameterized
appears in the Standard connection line in the dialog.
(Press ESC or F8 = Return to cancel the entry. The Overview table
SINEC L2 dialog then appears in its original form.)
The parameter assignment of example DB1 is now complete.
22-26
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Outputting DB1 to
the Printer
You want to print the DB1 you have just created.
1. Press F8 = Return twice to return to the Overview table dialog.
The Overview table dialog has changed; the SINEC L2 parameter block is
displayed as having parameters assigned:
Overview table
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Parameter assignment for SINEC L2 interface (standard connection only)
Permissible parameter blocks
Onboard interrupt
Onboard counter
(OBI)
(OBC)
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized (default)
Onboard analog inputs
SINEC L1
Timer function block
Clock parameters
System-dependent parameters
SINEC L2
Error return
(OBA)
(SL1)
(TFB)
(CLP)
(SDP)
(SL2)
(ERT)
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Not parameterized
Parameterized (default)
Parameterized
Not parameterized
F
1
Settings
New
DB1
F
F
2 Load
DB1
3 Transfer 4
DB1
F
F
Print
DB1
F
F
F
5 Delete 6 Select 7 PLC 8 Return
block
block
function
Figure 22-16 COM DB1 Overview table Dialog
2. Press F4 = Print DB1. The Printing DB1 dialog appears as shown
below:
Printing DB1
F
1
F
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
F
F
F
F
F
F
8 Return
Print 2 Print 3 DB1 4 DB1 5 Block 6 Block 7 AGprinter
on FD
Uebertr Drucken Loeschen Anwahl Funktion
Figure 22-17 COM DB1 Printing DB1 Dialog
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-27
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
3. Press F1 = Print printer.
This prints the “Overview table” dialog, the Overview table SINEC L2
dialog and all parameter assignment dialogs of the SINEC L2 block.
The number of the page currently being printed is displayed in the
message line.
When printing has been completed, the Overview table dialog
automatically appears.
(If DB1 has not been printed, you will receive a relevant message.)
Transferring DB1
to the PLC
You want to transfer the DB1 you have just created to the PLC.
1. Press F3 = Transfer DB1 in the Overview table dialog (see
Figure 22-18).
The Transferring DB1 dialog appears as shown below:
Transferring DB 1
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
Drive:
ST.S5D
Program file:
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
1 Transfer 2 Transfer 3 Select 4
to FD
to PLC
5
6
7
F
Info
8 Return
Figure 22-18 COM DB1 “Transferring DB1” Dialog
2. Press F2 = Transfer to PLC. The message line now informs you that
DB1 is being transferred. The DB1 in the PLC is simultaneously
overwritten.
When transfer of DB1 is complete, the Overview table dialog automatically
appears. (If there are errors in DB1, a message is displayed and DB1 is not
transferred.) The incorrect parameter block is indicated in the Overview
dialog.
22-28
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Saving DB1 in a
STEP 5 Program
File
You want to save the DB1 you have just transferred to the PLC in a STEP
5 program file (or on diskette). You must specify the STEP 5 program file
ino which DB1 will be stored in the Transferring DB1 dialog. It was a
requirement for our example that you had already created the STEP 5
program file AG95L2ST.S5E with the STEP 5 package.
1. Press F3 = Transfer DB1 in the Overview table dialog (see
Figure 22-19). The Transferring DB1 dialog appears.
2. Enter the STEP 5 program file and the drive (see Figure 22-19).
Transferring DB 1
Drive:
Program file:
F
F
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
C
AG95L2ST.S5D
F
F
F
F
1 Transfer 2 Transfer 3 Select 4
to FD
to PLC
F
5
6
7
F
Info
8 Return
Figure 22-19 COM DB1 Transferring DB1 Dialog
3. Press F1 = Transfer to FD. The message line then informs you that DB1
is being transferred.
When transfer of DB1 is complete, the Overview table dialog automatically
appears.(If there are errors in DB1 a message is displayed and DB1 is not
transferred.) The incorrect parameter block will be indicated in the
Overview dialog.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
22-29
Parameter Assignment with COM DB1
Switching the PLC
from STOP to RUN
You can change the operating mode of the PLC in the PLC functions
dialog.
1. Press F7 = PLC functions in the Overview table dialog (see
Figure 22-20). The PLC functions dialog appears.
2. Change the operating mode by pressing F3 = Stop ! Run. You will be
asked if the parameter settings in the PLC are to be updated.
3. To acknowledge, press the Return or INSERT key. The parameter
settings will be transferred to the operating system of the PLC.
(You can cancel updating in the PLC with ESC or F8 = Return.)
The parameter settings in the PLC have been updated and the PLC is in
RUN.
PLC functions
F
F
SIMATIC S5/COM DB1
F
F
F
F
F
F
1Compress2 Run –> 3 Stop –> 4
PLC
Stop
Run
5
6
7
8 Return
Figure 22-20 COM DB1 PLC Functions Dialog
4. Exit COM DB1 by pressing F8 = Return 4 times.
22-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
23
PG Link
Overview
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
The task of the PG link package is the exchange of STEP 5 blocks or files
between various programming devices.
Section
Description
Page
23.1
Hardware
23-2
23.2
Linking
23-2
23-1
PG Link
23.1 Hardware
Hardware
Requirements
Data exchange with the partner PG is only possible via an active TTY port
(20 mA). If the existing COM1 port is only equipped with a V.24 or passive
TTY port, the S5 interface must be emulated. To do this, a converter
(Köster box) is connected between the PG and the connecting cable to the
partner PG. This converter converts the V.24 port of the PG to an active
TTY port and therefore simulates the S5 interface of an S5 programming
device.
You connect your PG with the partner in one of the two following ways:
Via the active TTY port COM 1
The PG and the partner PG are connected via two connecting cables.
or
Via the passive TTY or V.24 port COM 1
If you have a PG with a passive TTY port or with only one V.24 port COM
1 the passive port must be converted to an S5 interface using a Köster box.
The PG is connected to the Köster box via a connecting cable. The Köster
box is connected to the partner PG via a further connecting cable.
The connecting cables are described in the PG 7xx manuals.
23.2 Linking
Loading PG Link
You load this package with the menu command Change Others ... F9. The
PG Link program is in the directory ...\S5_SYS\S5_COM\PG_PG
As soon as you activate the PG Link package, it is started and you change
to the user interface of the PG Link package.
PG Link
The PG Link package provides the following functions:
Switching the PG to passive. For data exchange, a passive and an active
PG are required.
Sending data from the active to the passive PG
Fetching data from the passiven to the active PG
23-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PG Link
Selecting Your
Settings
Once you have activated the PG link, the Presets box is displayed. Here,
you select the program file (all the block specifications you make refer to
blocks in this program file). You move to this field with SHIFT and the
cursor keys.
The fields path file and path name are not relevant.
Within the box you can make the following entries:
Input field
Function Selection
F3 = Select
The cursor only jumps to the position at which you can
make an input after you press the F3 key.
F6 = Enter
The parameters you input are entered and you call
function selection. The Insert key has the same effect.
F7 = Info
You obtain information about the field marked by the
cursor.
ESC =
Cancel
Return to STEP 5 without any action being taken.
As soon as the presets have been entered (F6), the SELECT FUNCTION
box is displayed. You can make the following entries:
Effect of the function keys
Key level
1
Explanation
2
F1
F3
F1
PASSIVE
This switches the programming device from the ACTIVE to PASSIVE status. The PG to
which data are sent must always be PASSIVE. The passive setting is canceled by
pressing ESC.
SEND
You switch to the next key level in which the data exchange is activated.
BLOCK (send)
The command line:
BLOCK:
SEND TO PARTNER
appears.
You can make the following inputs in the block field.
Example
Explanation
PBx
Single blocks
#DOC
Documentation files
FB
Blocks of one block type
*
Various blocks from a block list
A
All blocks of the preset program file
#
All DOC files
empty
All blocks and DOC files
Complete your input with the Insert key and the transfer to the partner PG begins
automatically.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
23-3
PG Link
Key level
1
Effect of the function keys
2
F2
FILE (send)
The command line
FILE:
SEND TO PARTNER
DEST DR:
appears.
Here, you enter the file names to be transferred:
X:NNNNNNNN.EEE (maximum 8 characters before the period).
e.g.
C:PROGFILE.S5D
DEST DR: here, you enter the required drive.
Complete your input with the Insert key and the transfer to the partner PG begins
automatically.
F5
P-DIR
This outputs the directory of the partner PG. The command line
OUTPUT DIR FROM PARTNER BLOCK:
appears.
Here, you enter the blocks as described under F1. A block list (*) cannot be selected.
Complete your inputs with the Insert key and the display of a block list is started
automatically.
F6
P-PRG.DAT
With this you can set the program file of the partner PG. The command line
SET PRG.FILE PARTNER
FILE NAME:
ST.S5D
appears.
Type in the required file name. When you complete your inputs with the Insert key, the
file is set.
F4
FETCH
This is effectively the same function as SEND, however, you transfer the files or blocks
from the passive to the active PG.
F6
PRESETS
The presets box is displayed
AUX FCT
With this function you can manage blocks and documentation files and select program
files.
You can perform the following functions:
Transfer blocks and documentation files (F1 TRANSFER)
Delete blocks and documentation files, overall reset of the PLC
(F2 DELETE)
Output a directory (F3 DIR)
Change the preset program file (F6 PRG.DAT)
RETURN
Return to STEP 5
F7
F8
23-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 5:
Practical Example
Practical Application of STEP 5
– Programming Example –
24
23-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5
- Programming Example -
Overview
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24
To help you get to know STEP 5 and get used to working with this software
package, this Chapter contains a sample application. The control task
controlling a car wash shows you step by step how to edit, test, document
and archive a user program.
Section
Description
Page
24.1
Introduction to the Example (Control Task)
24-2
24.2
Creating a Carwash Program with STEP 5
24-5
24.3
Transferring Files, Blocks and Segments
24-16
24.4
Checking and Modifying the Program
24-20
24.5
Loading and Testing the Program
24-24
24-1
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.1 Introduction to the Example (Control Task)
Overview
This introduction to the use of STEP 5 based on an example has the
following two aims:
to make the most important system and editing functions on the
programming device available to practised users as quickly as possible
and
to provide information about planning and implementing a project using
the STEP 5 tools for first-time users.
The development of the STEP 5 program to control the process is not part
of this example. Nevertheless, the steps necessary to produce such a
program are explained in Section 24.5.4 Designing a Program for the
Sample Application, in case you would like to write the program yourself.
The complete program consists of the following parts:
an assignment list (absolute operands, symbolic operands),
a function block with 15 segments in the Statement List (STL) method
of representation,
a data block,
the organization blocks for startup and cyclic operation of the car wash.
It is advisable to try out the steps explained in Section 24.2 on your PG.
You will probably only need to edit a few segments. You will find the
complete function block along with all the other parts of the example
program in the directory:
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE .
Brief Description
of the Control Task
The following illustration shows a carwash of a type commonly found at
gas stations and this is what we want to automate with the STEP 5
program.
Figure 24-1
24-2
Carwash
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
The structure of the carwash and the steps necessary to clean the car
result in the following sequence of events:
the carwash moves to a starting position
the car is driven into the washing position
the door of the carwash is closed and the washing is started
shampoo is applied, the car is washed and rinsed, wax is applied and
the car is dried
finally, the door is opened automatically and the car can be driven out.
Certain variables such as the time allowed for drying or for the wax to
distribute evenly, can be modified by the operating personnel. The
controller records the number of washing cycles (i.e. number of cars
washed).
Conditions
Necessary to
Implement the
Example
Based on the detailed schedule for the washing process outlined above,
we can determine the process interfaces, i.e. the inputs/outputs for the
required control system (Figure 24-2). By labelling the I/O signals based on
the verbal description of the process, the control program to implement this
process can be developed.
Inputs
Main switch
Outputs
I32.0
Emergency STOP I32.1
Start carwash
Controller
(S5-95)
Q32.0 Carriage forwards
Q32.1 Carriage backwards
Q32.2 Open door
Car in position
I33.0
I32.3
Carriage front
I32.4
Q32.6 Rotate brushes
Carriage back
I32.5
I32.6
Q32.7 Apply shampoo
Door open
Door closed
I32.7
Q33.1 Apply wax
Q33.2 Dry
Q32.3 Close door
Q33.0 Rinse
Q32.4 DRIVE CAR IN
Q32.5 DRIVE CAR OUT
Figure 24-2
Controller with Process Interfaces
The following figure shows the hardware and software components
required to implement the example. You only require the S5-95 and the
simulator to test the control program.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-3
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Programmable controller
S5-90/95
Inputs
Carwash simulator
(Order no. 6ES5788-8MK11)
Sensors
(simulator contacts)
List of
control
statements
(program)
Contacts
Motors
Solenoid valves
Displays
Outputs
(relays)
Actuators
(lamps on PLC)
Online functions
STEP 5 SW
Figure 24-3
24-4
Programming device
PG
Configuration of the Carwash Example
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.2 Creating a Carwash Program with STEP 5
We will call the carwash control system our project in keeping with the
STEP 5 terminology. Creating the user program on the PG can be divided
into the following phases:
setting up and opening the project
creating the contents of the project (editing and structuring the program)
managing and handling the project.
24.2.1
Setting up the Project
Since the operating system and the programmer startup depend on the
particular PG being used, we must start the description of the example
assuming that the STEP 5 initial menu is already displayed.
File
Project >
Set
F4
Beginning with the menu selection File Project Set F4 you make all the
settings and parameter assignments necessary to prepare for programming.
1. For a new project, you select Project Set. To select the existing
project at a later date, you use Project Load. The six tabs for the
project settings appear. Here you select the files you require for your
project. These files either have defaults or NONAME entered.
STEP5 S5KXS01Z
10
x 18
C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN\PROEXAPX.INI
1
PLC
4 Documentation
2 Blocks
5 Options
Project directory [NONAMEST.S5D
–> C:\STEP5\S5_DATEN
3 Symbols
6 EPROM
]
on exiting STEP 5 /ST:
[X] Confirm always
[X] Save project settings
[X] Note active optional package
[ ] Warnings if incompatible with V6.x
< Enter >
< Cancel ESC > < Project... F6 >
< History
< Edit
< Select
< Info
< Help
F1 >
F2 >
F3 >
F7 >
Shift+ F8 >
Figure 24-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-5
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Making Settings in
the Tab Pages
Make all the settings to prepare for programming the carwash project as
follows:
1. Name the program you want to create for the carwash by entering the
project directory in tab page 5 Options with the following name:
C:\STEP5\S5_Daten
2. In tab page 1 PLC select the mode. As long as there is no PLC
connected, only offline is possible as the mode and this is preset by
STEP 5.
3. In tab page 2 Blocks select the program file:
C:\CARWASST.S5D
Since we want to program in Statement List, set the parameter
Representation to STL by pressing F3.
4. Select the symbols file in tab page 3 Symbols:
C:\CARWASZ0.INI
By clicking [X] or pressing the F3 key, the parameter Display symbolic is
set.
To simplify matters, we will leave the maximum symbol length at 8 characters. Since, however, a more detailed explanation will be helpful, change
the comment length to 40 characters. You must complete this entry with
the Return key.
5. Select a printer file (*DR.INI) in tab page 4 Documentation or overwrite the
default NONAME.
Save the Settings
File
Project >
Save As...
24-6
You return to the menu by clicking Enter.
After selecting Project Save As...; the file Save project settings dialog
appears in which you enter CARWAS as the project file name.
After clicking Save and acknowledging the message Destination file
already on FD, overwrite?, STEP 5 sets up the project file
CARWASPX.INI, which contains the program files and settings.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.2.2
Creating the Program
Once you have specified the project by naming files and selecting
parameters, we can now start entering the statements or operations in the
function block and the timer and counter values in the data block.
Our intention is to show you how to make the inputs and not to work
through the example to the end. We will only make the inputs until they
start to become repetitive. You can copy the complete program with all the
blocks and segments to your working directory from the directory
C:\STEP 5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE under the project name PROEXAPX.INI.
To make the program easier to read, we will work with symbolic operands
in the control statements. This means that we require an assignment list
before beginning editing STL.
The creation of the carwash program therefore involves the following
editing steps:
compilation of a list with the assignments of absolute operands to
symbolic process signal names
creation of the data block for process setpoints and to record the
number of cars washed (i.e. number of process cycles)
creation of a statement list in a function block to control the process.
These steps will give you the opportunity to get to know the three most
important STEP 5 editors.
Editing the
Assignment List
Symbolic operands are names (e.g. OPEN DOOR) of the absolute
operands processed by the controller (e.g. I 32.6, Q 32.2, F 10.0). So that
the programmer “understands” the symbolic operands you are using, an
assignment list (ASSLI) is necessary, in this case, this is edited in the
symbols file with the name C:CARWASZ0.SEQ.
As the basis for creating this list, use the list of process signals (Table
24-1), in which you can see the assignments. Before these symbolic
operands are entered in the ASSLI, they must be reduced to the maximum
8 characters selected in the settings. The use of upper case characters for
the symbols makes the program clearer.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-7
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Editor
Assignment List
F7
1. Start the assignment list STEP 5 editor in the editor menu (or press
function key F7).
Below the top line containing CARWASZO.SEQ, an empty screen form is
displayed with the columns Operand, Symbol and Comment. You have
already stipulated the lengths of the fields for the symbolic operands and
comments.
2. Type in the first line of the assignment list as follows:
Operand
Symbol
Comment
I 32.0
MAINSWIT
Keyswitch “Carwash on”
3. To do this type in the characters: I 32.0 (in the insert mode) and press
SHIFT cursor right or TAB.
4. Type in MAINSWIT (this field is then full, the cursor automatically jumps
to the next field).
5. Type in Keyswitch “carwash on” and press the Return key or TAB.
Figure 24-5 shows you an extract of the assignment list. Enter this list as it
stands in your symbols file. To complete the editor editing session
6. Press the Insert key or F7 = Enter.
This stores the file and starts the translation. The PG generates the
symbols files required by STEP 5 of the type . . . Z*.INI.
File:
C:
CARWASZ0.SEQ
Operand
Symbol
Comment
I 32.0
I 32.1
I 32.3
I 32.5
I 32.6
MAINSWIT
EMERSTOP
IN-POS
C-BACK
DOOROP
Keyswitch “carwash on”
Emergency OFF switch (NC)
Indication “car in position”
Indication “carriage is at back”
Indication “door is open”
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
C-BWDS
OPEN-D
Command to actuator “carriage backwards”
Command to actuator “open door”
Q 32.4
Q 32.5
CAR-IN
CAR-OUT
Display: DRIVE CAR IN
Display: DRIVE CAR OUT
F 10.0
POSEDGE
Edge flag “carwash on/cold restart.”
F 10.7
STARTUP
Restart identifier from OB 20/21/22
C2
STEP
Counter for process steps
Figure 24-5
Assignment List (Section to be Edited)
After the translation, STEP 5 displays one of the following messages:
n lines processed, no errors found or
error in line n and e.g. key not found or
n lines processed, x errors found.
24-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
If no errors are found, you have successfully completed editing the
assignment list. If one error is found, the incorrect line is displayed at the
top.
If x errors are indicated, display or print out the error list as follows:
1. Press OK and Continue.
This brings you in the initial menu.
Management
Assignment
List..
2. Under Management, select the submenu Assignment Lists and Output
Error List.
3. Read the error list directly from the screen or print it out.
4. Make the corrections for the assignment list in the editor and start the
translation again.
Editing the Data
block
Editor
Data Block
1. You call the editor for creating data blocks in the menu under Editor
Data block in the program file .... (or function key F2). Use Figure
24-14 for the contents of the data block.
2. Enter the type and number of the data block to be created in the job
box, in this case: DB5. Confirm this with Edit.
In the header line of the empty input field, the name of the block DB5
and the program file C:CARWASST.S5D appear. The editor specifies
the addresses of the data words beginning with 0.
3. First enter the format for the data word (KH).
If the format is valid the cursor jumps to the next field. If you make an
illegal entry, this is rejected with the message Illegal operation.
4. You must now type in the numerical value in the preset format, keeping
to the corresponding range of values.
Illogical values are not accepted. The cursor will not move even if you
press the Return key.
5. The next DW field (following line) is displayed with the same format. If
you require a different format go back with cursor left and enter the
required format.
DB5
0:
1:
C:CARWASST.S5D
LEN=
KH= 0000;
KC= 000;
6. Type in the remaining data words as shown in Figure 24-14.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-9
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Correcting in the
Data Field
Typing in DW
Comments
Function
Setting
Delete Character
Position the cursor on the character and press
DEL.
Insert Character
Position the cursor on the character you want to
insert a character before and press expand
horizontal, if necessary several times.
Delete Line
Position the cursor in the format field of the line
you want to delete and press DEL.
Insert Line
Position the cursor in the format field of the line
you want to insert a line before and press expand
vertical.
You can type in or overwrite the comments for the data words in upper or
lower case letters with up to a maximum of 32 characters.
Position the cursor in the comment field with SHIFT cursor right. Move
to the next line with cursor down. Insert /delete characters as in the
data field (see above). Insert/delete comment lines using the function
keys F1 = Expand DC and F2 = Delete DC.
Entering the Block
Title
To enter the title Carwash: counters/timers
1. Type in the text after pressing SHIFT F6 or COM.
2. Press the Insert key to return to the DW editing area.
Writing the Block
Comment
You call the editor for the block comment by pressing SHIFT F7 =
Comment or COM twice.
Type in the text from Figure 24-14, completing each line with the
Return key.
Making
Corrections in the
Block Comment
To try out the insert/delete functions in this editor. Position the cursor on the
c of controller in the second line and press F1 = Insert.
The editor is in the insert mode. The softkey label changes to F1 =
Overwrite, i.e the selectable mode is displayed and insert is set.
1. Type in Simatic–. The text is inserted at this point. You return to the
overwrite mode with F1 = Overwrite.
2. Now position the cursor on the S of Simatic– and press F2 = Delete,
move the cursor to the c of controller and F2 = Delete again.
The word you inserted is now deleted.
Completing the
Comment
Inputting the LIB.
No.
Complete the comment with F8 = Return and Insert or Insert twice.
As the final step in the editing session, specify a library number to identify
the block (e.g. DB version).
3. Press SHIFT F2 = Lib no., the cursor jumps to the LIB field, type in the
LIB number, in this case 2. Exit the field with the Insert or the Return
key.
24-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Terminating the
Editing Session
Once your screen contains the information described above:
1. Complete editing the DB by pressing the Insert key.
2. If the message DBn Already in file, overwrite? appears,
confirm with yes.
Your inputs or modifications are now edited and saved (in some cases the
messages must be confirmed twice).
DB 5
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
C:CARWASST.S5D
KH =
KC =
KC =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
0000;
000;
000;
0000;
030.2;
0000;
+00000;
0000;
045.2;
0000;
+00000;
0000;
LIB=2
LEN=17 / 24
empty
counter: no. of cars washed (KH)
counter: no. of cars washed (KF)
empty
setpoint for wax distr. time WT
WT actual value (KH)
WT actual value (KF)
empty
setpoint for drying time DT
DT actual value (KH)
DT actual value (KF)
Editing a Function
Block
Editor
STEP 5 Block
1. You call the editor for creating STEP 5 blocks in the menu Editor
STEP 5 Block F1. The job box is then displayed again.
2. Here you can enter the type and number of the block you want to create
in the job box.
Naming a Block
The possible block types are available in the selection box, and you can
display this as follows:
1. Press F3 = Select.
2. Enter the type and an unused number for the block to be created in the
block field of the selection box, in this case FB 5.
3. Mark the options
Confirm before overwriting and
Update assignment list
with F3 and then close the box with Edit.
The input field of the editor is then opened.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-11
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Entering a Block
Name
The header line contains the block name (FB 5), the program file
(C:CARWASST.S5D) and the length of the block with its header (LEN=0).
The cursor is positioned in the Name field, where 8 characters are
available to name the function block.
1. Type in CARWASH and press the Return key.
The cursor jumps to the field Decl: ... which is only significant for
function blocks in which parameters can be assigned.
2. Exit this field by pressing the Return key again.
The cursor is now positioned in the input field for the first statement. Take
out the printed program excerpt of Section 24.5.4.
1. Type in the statement in segment 1: C DB 5 and then press SHIFT
cursor right or TAB cursor right.
The cursor is positioned in the field for the statement comment.
2. Type in the text call DB 5 (timer/counter values) and then move on to
the next statement field by pressing the Return key.
Typing in the
Segment Title
Segment 1 does not contain any further statements, however, the segment
title has not yet been entered.
1. Press COM and SHIFT F6 = Title
2. Type in Prepare program execution.
You exit this field again by pressing the Return key or Insert.
Typing in
Statements for
Segment 2
We now move on to segment 2.
1. Press Seg End (***)
The cursor is positioned in the first statement field of segment 2.
2. Type in the statements and statement comments based on printed
program excerpt. Write the operands using the symbolic names
specified in the assignment list. These must be preceded by a hyphen
in the statement field.
You can type in all the entries in the statement section without blanks.
However, symbols defined in upper case letters must be written as upper
case letters.
24-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Correcting the
Symbols File
In the 4th and 6th statement lines you will notice that when you type in
-POSPUL, the cursor jumps back to the hyphen and cannot be moved out
of the field. This symbol has not been assigned to an operand (message:
No assignment, symbol not defined), and this must be corrected.
1. Instead of -POSPUL, type in the formal operand F10.1 to be able to
continue editing the segment which is finally completed with the Insert
key.
Reply to the message: Enter changed segment? with yes. You
then change to the output mode.
2. In the output mode of the editor, position the cursor on the 4th
statement again and press F1 = Disp Symb to call the symbols editor.
From the symbols file ...*Z0.INI, the sequence of statements with symbolic
assignments is displayed with the cursor marking the formal operand
F 10.1. Complete this line with the symbol POSPUL and the corresponding
operand comment pulse flag (only 1 cycle!).
3. Press F2 = Edit symb and after typing in the symbol and comment,
press F2 = Insert. Complete the correction by pressing F8 = Cancel.
When you return to the block editor, segment 2 should appear as shown
below.
FB5
Segment 2
:O
:O
:AN
:=
:R
:A
:S
:AN
:AN
:R
:***
C:CARWASST.S5D
0007
LEN= 23
”define operating status”
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
-POSPUL
-STARTUP
-POSPUL
-POSEDGE
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
Output
main switch “carwash on”
restart id from OB 20/21/22
edge flag for positive edge
pulse flag (only one cycle!)
reset restart identifier
update edge flag
no “carwash on” command
no restart identifier
reset edge flag
Correcting
Statements
You make corrections in the statement and comment field in the same way
as when editing the data block. There is, however, one difference: the
delete and insert line functions affect the whole line. To delete a line,
position the cursor on the appropriate statement colon.
Writing the
Segment Comment
Start the segment comment editor as follows:
1. Press SHIFT F6 = Seg com and SHIFT F7 = Comment or press COM
twice.
Under the $ character with the segment number, you can now write your
comment text. (Based on the printout of the program at the end of
Appendix A).
2. Type in the texts for segment 1 and segment 2, completing each line
with the Return key. You return to the block editor with F8 = Return.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-13
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Statements for
Segment 4 and
Segment 5
Once you have pressed Segment end, the cursor is positioned in the first
statement line of segment 3. You can now type in the statements and
comments for segment 4 and segment 5. We have skipped segment 3 and
will insert it later.
One special feature in segment 4 is the program branch with a conditional
jump to the second statement. The jump label CONT must be positioned at
the destination of the jump to mark the re-entry before the statement colon.
Press the cursor left key twice and type in the jump label.
Inserting
Segment 3
1. Use ↑ = scroll forward or ↓ = scroll back to page to segment 3 and
press F5 = Seg fct and then press F5 = Insert again.
After pressing F1 = New, the cursor is positioned in the first statement
of the newly inserted and still empty segment.
2. Edit the segment and complete it by pressing the Insert key and
confirming the system prompts.
24-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.2.3
Documenting the Program
Documentation
STEP 5 Blocks...
You can now print out the program section in FB 5, the data block and the
assignment list. The printer file has the default name NONAMEDR.INI in
page 2 of the settings. Overwrite this with CARWASDR.INI.
Change to the Documentation menu and select the standard output of
STEP 5 blocks. As you will see in the job box, STEP 5 provides you with
the possibility of specifying blocks and segments.
Please proceed as follows:
1. Enter FB 5 from your program file in the job box.
2. Under the options, select the STL address representation and the
printout type standard.
3. The printout is triggered with Output.
The printout contains the following elements for each segment:
the segment title and segment number
the statement section with line comments
the names of the operands in the assignment list.
Your printout of the program CARWASST.S5D should now correspond to
the program excerpt (step 5) shown in Section 24.5.4 apart from the
symbols names.
Follow the same procedure to obtain a printout of data block
DB 5 and the assignment list CARWASZ0.SEQ by selecting the
appropriate submenu items.
You can print out other existing blocks by pressing F3 = Select and
selecting a block in the selection box.
Output to a File
You can output the documentation to a file.
In this case, mark Output to file in the job box and specify the file name
CARWASLS.INI.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-15
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.3 Transferring Files, Blocks and Segments
We interrupted the editing of the carwash program at the 5th segment and
will now add the missing sections from the supplied program. This will
familiarize you with the directory, transfer, copy and delete functions in
STEP 5.
File
DOS File
Copy
The complete program is located under the name PROEXA... in the
directory C:\STEP 5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE. To transfer the file, change over
to the DOS file functions as follows:
1. Select DOS File and Copy in the File menu.
The job box Copy DOS files is displayed. Here, you select the source
and destination directory for the transfer.
2. First check that the directories are correctly selected.
Source drive: C:\STEP 5\S5_SYS\EXAMPLE
Destination drive: C:\STEP 5\S5_DATEN
We want to copy the files PROEXA*.* . To do this:
1. Mark all in the Copy mode window and select yes in the Confirm before
overwriting window.
2. Trigger the transfer by clicking on Copy or pressing the Return key.
If you have selected confirm before overwriting, STEP 5 displays the
prompt File already exists, overwrite? if you repeat a copy
procedure.
3. Confirm the prompt with yes and exit the box after the transfer with
ESC = Exit.
File
DOS Files
Directory
In the menu DOS files directory check that all the PROEXA.. files have
been copied as follows:
set the directory C:\STEP 5\S5_DATEN under Dr/directory.
Apart from the files of the CARWAS... program, the PROEXA... files must
also be entered.
Now that both programs are in the working directory, you can add the
missing program sections to the incomplete program by
transferring the missing segments,
replacing the incomplete block FB5, by FB10 containing the complete
carwash program and renaming it as FB5,
transferring the missing organization blocks (the data blocks are
identical).
Transferring
Segments
24-16
Segments can only be transferred between blocks in the same program.
This means that the function block FB10 must be transferred from the
program PROEXAST.S5D to our program CARWAS... .
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
File
Blocks >
Transfer
To transfer blocks, select Blocks Transfer, STEP 5 then displays a job
box in which you specify the following:
1. under Transfer from you specify the program file PROEXAST.S5D and
under transfer to the program file CARWASST.S5D
When you press F3, STEP 5 displays the files located in the working
directory.
2. In the job box Transfer blocks select the field Block List and enter FB10.
After clicking on Transfer or pressing the Return key, STEP 5 displays
the prompt Transfer comments as well?.
3. Confirm the message with yes.
Note
The messages FC10 Already in file, overwrite? and
FBDO.010 Already in file, overwrite? do not appear the first
time you transfer.
4. Nach dem Kopiervorgang exit the job box with ESC = Exit.
File
Blocks >
Directory > F3
Check the transfer in the block directory in the program file.
1. Select the menu File Blocks Directory or use F3 in the selection
box Block - Directory:Settings.
2. Enter A in the block list.
3. after clicking Output (or pressing the Return key or Insert key) a list of
the blocks in the program file CARWAS... is displayed on the screen.
By marking the corresponding selection, you can also output this list on
the printer or to a file.
Editor
STEP 5
Block...F1
To transfer segments
4. Go into the block editor and select the function block FB10 in the Edit
STEP 5 block(s) job box.
5. Move the cursor to segment 6 using ↓ = scroll down or the + key.
6. Press F5 = Seg Fct and F4 = File.
7. With F8 = Return and ESC = Exit you can now exit FB10.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-17
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
A copy of segment 6 is loaded in the system buffer. To transfer this to FB5
1. Select FB5 in the block editor and move the cursor to segment 5 at the
end of the program.
2. Press F5 = Seg Fct and F6 = Append. Then press F2 = Buffer to
append segment 6 to the program CARWAS.... .
3. Complete the operation with F8 = Return and F7 = Enter. Reply to the
STEP 5 prompts with yes.
You then exit the editor. Repeat the transfer procedure for segment 7.
As you will see, not all the operands in the new segments have been
written as symbols. This is due to the incomplete assignment list in the
previously edited program section. To correct the situation, proceed as
follows:
1. Select Project Set.
2. Enter PROEXAZ0.INI as the symbols file.
3. Save with F6.
Since the block editor can now access the complete assignment list of the
supplied program, the operands in segments 6 and 7 are also displayed in
symbolic form.
You can check this by calling FB5 again in the block editor.
With this procedure, you can append or insert segments from other blocks
into the program file. To transfer and extend larger program sections, this
method is, however, time-consuming.
Transferring and
Renaming Blocks
To replace FB5 in the program CARWAS... with FB10 completely, FB5
must first be deleted including the comments and then FB10 renamed as
FB 5.
File
Block >
Delete >
1. To delete FB5, select File Blocks Delete
2. Enter FB5 in the Block list field.
3. After you press Delete, the system prompts Delete comments as
well?.
4. Confirm this prompt with Yes and the message Block deleted!
with yes.
If you check the block directory, you can make sure that FB5, FC5 and
FBDO.005 have been deleted.
24-18
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
File
Blocks >
Transfer... F5
1. To rename FB10, select File Blocks Transfer and then enter or
select the following:
Transfer from C:CARWASST.S5D
to C:CARWASST.S5D
mark (X) block [FB10] to [FB5]
2. Click on Transfer and confirm the system prompts with yes.
When you check the block directory, you will see that there is a new
FB5/FC5 along with FB10/FC10.
In the editor, check that the new FB5 is complete with 15 segments,
symbolic operands and all comments.
Transferring the
Organization
Blocks
To complete our program containing FB5 and DB5 the missing organization
blocks must also be transferred.
File
Blocks >
Transfer...F5
1. To transfer the OBs, select File Blocks Transfer and
2. enter in the job box
transfer from PROEXA...
and to CARWAS...
Mark Selection (X) Block list and enter OB1, OB20, OB21, OB 22.
3. When you click on Transfer, the system displays the message
Transfer comments as well and then Blocks transferred,
which you confirm with yes.
The unconditional jump operation in OB 1 must now be changed to JU FB5
and the data block call C DB 10 must be changed to
C DB 5 in FB 5, following which the CARWAS... program contains all the
blocks required for the controller.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-19
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.4 Checking and Modifying the Program
Apart from the editing functions, STEP 5 provides a series of functions with
which you can check and document the user program and rename
operands. You can now try out some of these functions on the carwash
program.
Cross References
Management
Generate XRF
STEP 5 stores cross references to statements containing the same
operand (even in other blocks) in the XRF file (*XR.INI). You can generate
this file by selecting Generate XRF in the management menu.
With the menu command File Project Set (Blocks tab), you can enter
the cross reference list file CXR.INI. You can now display the cross
references for each operand in the block editor.
1. Call FB 5 in the block editor and position the cursor in segment 2 on
statement :O -STARTUP.
2. Press F2 = Reference and once again F2 = Disp XRF. The cursor now
flashes under F 10.7, the operand for which the cross references will be
displayed.
3. Confirm with the Return key.
A table of cross references for the selected operand is now displayed
(Figure 24-6). This table contains all the points in the program at which the
relevant operand is “addressed”. The cursor is positioned on the first block
reference OB20 :1/AN.
4. Press F2 = Jump.
The organization block OB 20 is displayed. If necessary, you can change to
the editing mode and make modifications. To return to the table:
5. Press F2 twice and the Return key.
To return to FB5 directly from OB20:
6. Press F2 = Reference followed by F5 = Orig Blk.
You can repeat the jump to a referenced block by positioning the cursor on
FB10:2/AN pressing F2 = Jump. SEG 2 in FB10 is then displayed.
C:CARWASST.S5D
FB5
Segment 2
0007
LIB=2
”define operating status”
LEN=166
Output
Cross references
F 10.7
OB 20:1/AN
OB 22:1/AN
FB 5:2/R
Figure 24-6
24-20
STARTUP
OB 20:1/S
OB 22:1/S
FB 10:2/AN
restart identifier from OB
OB 21:1/AN
FB 5:2/AN
FB 10:2/O
OB 21:1/S
FB 5:2/O
FB 10:2/R
References to the Operand -STARTUP in
CARWAS
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Documentation
Cross References
The documentation menu provides you with a series of lists in which the
cross references are compiled either for a single operand (in this case
F 10.7) or for a group of operands (e.g. I, Q, F, counters). The cross
references can be restricted to a particular block or extended to cover all
the blocks in the program.
Figure 24-7 shows the printout of the cross references for the outputs in
FB5 and the counters and the start-up flag (F 10.7) in all blocks. The
asterisks beside segment numbers indicate that the operand occurs in an
assignment. You can select the list you require by marking the options in
the job box Output XREF list.
FB 5
X reference list: outputs
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
QB
QB
32.0
32.1
32.2
32.3
32.4
32.5
32.6
32.7
33.0
33.1
33.2
32 32 -
-C-FWDS
-C-BWDS
-OPEN-D
-CLOSE-D
-CAR-IN
-CAR-OUT
-ROTATE–B
-SHAMPOO
-RINSE
-WAX
-DRY
X reference list: counters
FB
FB
OB
OB
OB
OB
2
C
C: CARWASST.S5D
5 :
10 :
1 :
20 :
21 :
22 :
-STEP
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
SEGM.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
Processed
FB 5
20
-NUMBER
7*,
4*,
4*,
6*,
5*,
4*,
7*,
7*,
8*,
9*,
12*
3*,
3*,
OB 20
OB 21
OB 22
FB 5
FB 10
3*,
12*,
3*,
12*,
1*
1*
1*
6*
6*
FB 5
FB 10
OB 20
OB 21
OB 22
2*
2*
1*
1*
1*
FB 10
C
LIB=2
LEN=166
8*, 9*, 10*, 15*
8*, 9*, 10*, 11*, 15*
12*, 15*
7*, 15*
6*
5*, 13*, 14*
9*
8*
9*
10*
4*
4*
4*, 5*, 6*, 7*, 8*, 9*, 10*, 11*
13*, 14*
4*, 5*, 6*, 7*, 8*, 9*, 10*, 11*
13*, 14*
S e a r c h for an operand in all blocks
F
10.7
-STARTUP
F
10.7
-STARTUP
Figure 24-7
Search
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
List of Cross References from the Carwash Program
During the editing session, you can specify cross references to be
searched for.
24-21
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Editor
STEP 5 Block...
1. Call FB5 in the block editor and press F3 = Search.
2. As the search key (KEY:) specify an operand, in this case
I 32.4 or -C-FRONT. Press F2 = From Seg1.
the first occurrence of this operand is displayed in segment 8 statement
4.
3. Press F3 = Search again and F3 = Continue.
Segment 10 is displayed with the cursor marking statement line 4, etc.
Rewiring
It is sometimes necessary to assign an operand a new address within the
program. Using the rewiring function, operands can be renamed, i.e.
assigned different I/O addresses. To illustrate how this function works, we
will rename one of the output operands in FB10.
Management
Manual Rewiring
1. Check the file name:
Program file C:CARWASST:S5D
to program file C:CARWASST:S5D
2. Enter FB10 in the job box and confirm with Rewire.
A table appears in which you enter the previous operand (in absolute
representation) on the right-hand side and the new operand on the
left-hand side.
3. Type in the old operand: Q 33.2 new operand: Q 1.7.
4. Complete your input with the Insert key and confirm the following
system messages with yes.
5. Check that the modification has been made as follows: Call block FB10
in the editor and press F3 = Search, type in the search key Q 1.7 and
press F2 = From seg 1.
Segment 12, operand Q 1.7 is entered three times instead of -DRY, i.e. the
signal to open and close the air valves for drying the car is now output via
Q 1.7.
Comparing Blocks
24-22
STEP 5 provides a compare function with which blocks of the same type
and same number in the PLC and PG can be compared. If there is no PLC
connected, blocks in different programs can be compared with each other.
To try out this function, you can compare the FB10 in CARWAS... that was
modified by the rewiring function with the original FB in PROEXA...
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
File
Blocks>
Compare...
1. Select File Blocks Compare.
2. In the job box, enter C:PROEXAST.S5D under compare with program
file and FB10 under block list.
3. When you have done this, click on Compare.
You then obtain an overview of the differences found in segment 12. The
differing STEP 5 operations are listed with their addresses in MC5 code.
4. Repeat the block comparison by marking all blocks (A) in the job box.
STEP 5 displays the comparisons as shown in Figure 24-8. Non-existent
blocks are indicated by the message 020D. You can also recognize that
different FBs are called in OB1.
Compare function
Block
Segment Address C:CARWAS
DB 5
DB 10
FB 5
FB 10
Address
C:PROEXA
Message no. 020D
Message no. 020D
Message no. 020D
12
0084
0089
008B
D781
C781
F781
D2A1
C2A1
F2A1
1
0000
3D05
3D0A
OB 1
OB 20
Comparison no errors
Figure 24-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Block Comparison between CARWAS and PROXEA
24-23
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.5 Loading and Testing the Program
To test the carwash program, you must now connect an S5-90/95 to your
programmer. Establish the permanent connection between the PG and
PLC as follows: change the mode to online Modifiable [cycl.] using F3 =
Select and Enter.
24.5.1
Loading the Program
Load the program as follows:
File
Blocks>
Transfer
F5
1. Select File BLocks Transfer
2. If it is not already set, enter C:CARWASST.S5D as the source in the job
box Transfer from
3. Select to PLC.
4. Under selection, block list enter FB5 in the block list, then DB5 and
finally all OBs.
5. After pressing Transfer, the blocks are copied to the PLC. Confirm this
with yes.
File
Blocks>
Directory...F3
1. Check the loading by outputting a list of the blocks on the PLC.
2. To do this, once again mark all blocks in the job box (A).
3. Select Transfer from PLC.
A list of all the blocks loaded on the PLC is output. The list only contains
the program sections required by the programmable controller. Comments
and block preheaders are not transferred when the blocks are loaded.
Note
System blocks of the PLC are also output.
24-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.5.2
Testing the Program
You can now test your user program, i.e. function block FB5, in the online
mode segment by segment and statement by statement to make sure that
it runs correctly. The decision table (Page 24-35) shows you the reactions
of the PLC on the output side to certain combinations of input signals.
To set or modify the input signals, you can use the eight on/off switches
(I 32.0 ... I 32.7) and two buttons (I 33.0/I 33.1) on the SIMATIC INPUT
simulator (order no. 6ES5788-8MK11). Depending on the required method
of representation of the signal status displays on the PG, select the
function block status or status variable to test the signals.
24.5.3
Block Status
Test
Block Status
...Shift F6
1. On the simulator, switch all the toggle switches down (= off) and set the
mode selector on the PLC to STOP.
2. Select Test Block Status.
3. Enter FB5 in the job box, mark the options with yes and click Output.
Segment 1 appears in the STL method of representation. Below the header
information, the statement, the result of logic operation RLO and the status
of ACCU 1 and ACCU 2 are displayed.
4. Now switch the PLC to RUN.
The corresponding RLO is displayed and at the bottom right the message
Status processing active appears.
5. Start the carwash by flicking up the switches for I 32.0 and I 32.1 (= on).
6. Move the breakpoint for status processing to segment 3 by pressing
↓ = scroll forward twice.
7. Move the cursor to the line following the jump operation by pressing
cursor down three times.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-25
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
The displays disappear and you can see that this statement (following the
branch) is not processed (message Statement not processed). In segment
4, the situation is similar. The processing also stops at the branch.
8. Now move the breakpoint to segment 5, in which the actual washing
process begins.
RLO=1 in line 1 indicates that all the prerequirements such as the initial
carwash position and the step counter (-STEP) setting have been
fulfilled and the washing process can begin.
9. Flick the switches E32.5 and E32.6 up.
The step counter and ACCU 1 have the value 1, the set inputs have the
status 1. On the PLC, output Q 32.4 is lit, i.e. DRIVE CAR IN is
displayed.
10. Move the breakpoint to segment 6 and flick I 32.3 up for car in position.
After pressing the button I 33.0 (start) the washing process is started.
The display goes off (Q 32.4 = 0) and the door is closed (Q 32.3 is lit).
The step counter (-STEP) changes to 2.
11. Move the breakpoint to segment 7 and simulate the closed door by
I32.6 = off and I 32.7 = on.
The parts of the process apply shampoo, rotate brushes and carriage
forwards are started (variable = 1). The step counter switches to 3.
12. Simulate the remaining parts of the washing process by changing the
inputs according to Table 24–2 depending on the position of the
breakpoint.
In segment 11, following I 32.5 = 1, you can see how the wax
distribution time WT is decremented to 0 at one second intervals
followed by the start condition for drying being generated automatically
by the step counter (= 7).
13. Move the breakpoint to segment 12.
You can follow the drying time (DT = 45 s). Simulate the remaining
parts of the process in step 8 and step 9 as described above.
Corrections
In segment 14, the step counter returns to 1, indicating the initial position of
the carwash. This means that the example program is capable of running
and fulfilling the task. If errors occur, they must be corrected using the
information provided by the RLO and contents of the ACCUs and the
status of the signals.
1. Change to the editing mode with F6. You can position the cursor on the
statements you want to modify, delete or insert.
2. Press the Insert key and answer the prompt Enter modified
segment? and the next message with yes.
24-26
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
File
Blocks>
Transfer...F5
With the steps outlined above, you have modified the program in the PLC.
To transfer the modified block to the PG, e.g. for archiving,
1. Select File Blocks Transfer
2. Enter FB5 in the job box.
3. Transfer from (X) PLC
4. Select to program file (X)
Test
Status Variable
Shift + F7
1. Set all the toggle switches on the simulator to off and the mode selector
on the PLC to STOP.
2. Select Status variable in the test menu.
An empty table with the columns Operands: and Formats: appears on
the screen.
3. Working from the signal list, enter all the output operands including
timers and counters in absolute or symbolic format and complete each
line with the Return key.
STEP 5 adds the format to your entries. Once your operand list has the
same contents as shown in Figure 24-9.
4. Press F2 = Save_as and specify the number of the variables block (in
this case VB 5).
PLC in CYCLE
Operands:
Signal states:
-C-FWDS
-C-BWDS
-OPEN-D
-CLOSE-D
Q 32.0
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
Q 32.3
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
-CAR-IN
-CAR-OUT
Q 32.4
Q 32.5
KM= 0
KM= 0
-ROTATE-B
-SHAMPOO
-RINSE
-WAX
-DRY
Q 32.6
Q 32.7
Q 33.0
Q 33.1
Q 33.2
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
KM=
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
-WT
-DT
T 20
T 22
KT= stoppped
KT= stoppped
-STEP
-NUMBER
C 2
C 20
KC= 3
KC= 1
Figure 24-9
Display of the Output Operands in Variables Block VB 5
5. Complete these preparations by pressing the Insert key or F6 =
Activate.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-27
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Test the function block using the status variable function as follows:
1. Switch the PLC to RUN and the toggle switches I 32.0 and I 32.1 to on.
The current values of the operands (initially all 0) and the messages
PLC in CYCLE and Status processing active are added to the Signal
states column. By using the decision table, you can once again check
the reaction of the controller to certain combinations of values at the
inputs.
2. Switch I 32.5 and I 32.6 to on.
The carwash goes to the ready status with Q 32.4 = 1 and C 2 = 1.
3. Simulate the car being driven in by I 32.3 = on and starting the carwash
by setting I 33.0.
To door is closed (Q 32.3 = 1), the step counter changes to 2 and the
action itself is stored in C 20 = 1.
4. Simulate the status door closed by I 32.6 = off and I 32.7 = on.
The PG now displays the signal states shown in Figure 24-10. The
brush carriage now moves forwards with the brushes rotating and the
shampoo jets open.
5. Simulate the movement of the carriage carriage front or carriage back
by switching I 32.4 and I 32.5 on and off.
Continue simulating the inputs until the two times WT and DT are
displayed and terminated with step counter = 8.
In step 9 (I 32.7 = off, I 32.6 = on) DRIVE CAR OUT is displayed and in
the last step (I 32.3 = off) the ready status is re-established with the
display DRIVE CAR IN and step counter = 1.
6. To terminate the status function, press ESC = Exit and you return to the
menu with F8.
STEP 5 displays the signal statuses at the selected breakpoint. By
pressing ESC = Exit once, you can interrupt the status processing and
insert additional operands in the list. Following this, the Insert key
continues the status processing.
Force Variables
24-28
With this function you can modify variables (e.g. I/Q/F) in the process
image byte by byte. You can also display the current signal states with the
PLC in the RUN mode. Once again, an operand list must be prepared for
this function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Test
Force Variables
Shift F8
Select Test Force variables and type in the inputs and outputs as byte
operands (IB and QB) in the empty table Operands - Formats. Complete
each line with the Return key and overwrite the default format with KM.
1. Add C 2/C 20 and T 20/T 22 to the list and then press F6 = Activate.
Your screen will then resemble the screen illustrated in the figure below.
By activating the switches on the simulator one after the other, you can
display the corresponding values at the outputs and counters (much the
same as in the status functions).
2. Press ESC = Exit and switch I 32.0/I 32.1 to on and the PLC from
STOP to RUN.
The PG now displays the column Force process image. You can now
influence the outputs in QB 32/QB 33 directly with the keyboard and
check the way in which the actuators function. Try this out as follows:
3. Enter the bit pattern KM = 00110011 in QB 32 and press Insert.
In the PLC, the output relays 32.0/32.1 and 32.4/32.5 must be switched
on and the message End of force fct. must appear on the screen.
PLC in CYCLE
Operands:
.......................QB 32
.......................QB 33
.......................IB 32
.......................IB 33
- STEP
C 2
- WT
T 20
- DT
T 22
Signal states:
KM= 00000001
KM= 00000000
KM= 00000000
KM= 00000000
KC = 2
KC = stopped
KT = stopped
Figure 24-10 Operands and Signal States
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-29
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
24.5.4
Designing a Program for the Sample Application
Creating the elements of a STEP 5 program (program blocks, segments,
data blocks, assignment lists) for a given task demands a certain
development process. In general, you require the programming instructions
for your PLC and should know the basics of the SIMATIC S5 system.
For the simple case of a carwash, the development process is restricted to
executing the following steps:
Step 1:
S1:
The process to be controlled and the process elements are
represented schematically.
S2:
The input/output signals are listed and given symbolic names.
S3:
The control sequence with its conditions and actions is
represented in a decision table according to the verbal
description of the process.
S4:
The data block is set up.
S5:
The blocks of the program are programmed in STL (a segment
for each process step).
Schematic representation of the process to be controlled
As preparation before writing the program, the carwash is represented
schematically, so that the process peripherals of the controller
(sensors/actuators) and their effects in the control sequence can be
recognized.
To achieve the correct logical combinations in the PLC, it is important to
know the way in which the input elements function. When programming,
you must know whether the contacts are normally open (NO) or normally
closed (NC).
The schematic representation of the carwash provides information for
comparing lists of the process inputs/outputs which will be processed by
the control system as operands. The process signals for the operation and
display elements as shown in Figure 24-11 must also be added to this list.
24-30
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
DRIVE CAR OUT
(Q 32.5)
DRIVE CAR IN
(Q 32.4)
Displays
Operating panel
Messages
Main
switch
(I 32.0)
Start
button
(I 33.0)
Emer.OFF
(I 32.1)
NC contact
Actuating signals
(outputs)
Controller
(PLC)
Carwash
Operator signals
Process signals (inputs)
Figure 24-11 Control Structure with Operator Inputs/Outputs
All the data transferred to and from the control program via the process
interface and required for creating the operand list and describing the
process sequences are now known.
Step 2:
Listing the input/output variables
To describe the process and to write the program, it is easier to use
symbols for the input/output variables. The plant and operator I/Os are then
compiled in a table as shown below.
Table 24-1
List of Process Signals
Operand
Process
element
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Actuator
Display
Display
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Design, Mode of operation
absolute
symbol
Keyswitch, NO
Button, NC
Button, NO
Pressure contact, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Limit switch, NO
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Coupling relay
Lamp or display panel
Lamp or display panel
I 32.0
I 32.1
I 33.0
I 32.3
I 32.4
I 32.5
I 32.6
I 32.7
Q 32.0
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
Q 32.3
Q 32.6
Q 32.7
Q 33.0
Q 33.1
Q 33.2
Q 33.4
Q 33.5
Mainswit
Emerstop
Startwas
In–pos.
C–front
C–back
Doorop
Doorcl
C–fwds
C–bwds
Open–d
Close–d
Rotate
Shampoo
Rinse
Wax–on
Dry
Car-in
Car-out
24-31
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Step 3:
Description of the process sequence, representation of the control
functions in a decision table.
An important step in the program development is to establish the control
sequence based on the schematic representations and the list of all the
process variables. This can be achieved for example in the form of
flowcharts.
A verbal description of the process sequence has been selected and the
control task is solved using a decision table.
The decision table (Table 24-2) should be read as follows:
The conditions that must be evaluated in a logical control step are listed
above the double line and the actions that are executed if the conditions
are fulfilled are listed below the double line.
A column corresponds to a control number which is described verbally
in the sequence and then programmed as a STL segment in step 5 of
the program development.
Process Sequence
1. Prepare for the program sequence.
2. Define the operating status.
The control system defines the process status on when the main switch
is on (I 32.0 = 1) and the PLC has started up (start–up ID in OB
20/21/22 = 1).
3. Switching off the process/stopping the carwash.
To be able to stop the process at any time, e.g. in an emergency
situation a safe switch off procedure is necessary:
if the emergency stop button (I 32.1 = pulse) or the main switch is
switched off (I 32.0 = 0) the control system resets the internal PLC
status and deactivates all the outputs.
4. Moving the process to the initial position.
When the control system starts up, the carwash is brought to its initial
position if it is not already in this position. In the basic position, the door
is open (I 32.6 = 1), the carriage with the brushes is at the back (I 32.5
= 1) and there is no car in the washing position (I 32.3 = 0). The control
system must therefore check that these process statuses are correct. If
not, the appropriate movements:
carriage backwards (Q 32.1 = 1) and/or open door (Q 32.2 = 1)
are started and if there is still a car in the carwash the display DRIVE
CAR OUT (Q 32.5 = 1) must be lit up.
5. Establishing the conditions to start washing.
The carwash status initial position is checked, i.e. the door is open
(I 32.6 = 1), the brush carriage is at the back (I 32.5 = 1) and there is no
car in position (I 32.3 = 0). This initial position is indicated by the display
DRIVE CAR IN (Q 32.4 = 1). The display DRIVE CAR OUT (Q 32.5)
goes off.
24-32
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
6. Driving the car in and starting the washing process.
The car is driven into the washing position (I 32.3 = 1) and the driver
leaves the car and goes to the control panel outside the carwash and
presses the start button for the washing process (I 33.0 = pulse). After
checking car in position (I 32.3 = 1) and start button pressed the control
system closes the door (Q 32.3 = 1) and switches off the display DRIVE
CAR IN (Q 32.4 = 0).
The next parts of the washing process automatic without the driver taking
any further action.
1. Applying shampoo.
After the system checks the input signal door closed (I 32.7 = 1), the
carriage moves forward (Q 32.0 = 1) with rotating brushes (Q 32.6 = 1)
and the shampoo jets open (Q 32.7 = 1). The car is shampooed and
brushed and the dirt loosened.
2. Washing, rinsing.
After checking the front position carriage front (I 32.4 = 1), the control
system switches off the frame drive (Q 32.0 = 0), closes the shampoo
jets (Q 32.7 = 0), opens the water jets (Q 33.0 = 1) and moves the
carriage backwards (Q 32.1 = 1) once again with the brushes rotating
(Q 32.6 = 1). The car is cleaned and rinsed.
3. Applying wax.
After checking carriage back (I 32.5 = 1) the drive is switched off
(Q 32.1 = 0), the water jets closed (Q 33.0 = 0) and the brush drive
switched off (Q 32.6 = 0).
The carriage is now moved forward (Q 32.0 = 1) with the jets for
applying wax open (Q 33.1 = 1).
4. Forming a wax film.
When the front position is reached (I 32.4 = 1), the wax jets are closed
(Q 33.1 = 0) and the frame moved backwards again (Q 32.1 = 1).
5. Once the back position is reached (I 32.5 = 1), the drive is switched off
(Q 32.1 = 0). The wax sprayed onto the car now requires a certain time
(WT) to be distributed and to form a complete film on the surface of the
car. The control system therefore waits until WT has elapsed. Once WT
has elapsed, the next step of the process is enabled.
6. Drying the car.
The drying process is initiated by starting the drying time DT and
simultaneously opening the air valve (Q 33.2 = 1). When DT has
elapsed, the air valve is closed (Q 33.2 = 0) and the door opened (Q
32.2 = 1).
7. Driving the car out.
After opening the door (I 32.6 = 1), the door drive is switched off
(Q 32.2 = 0) and the display DRIVE CAR OUT is lit (Q 32.5 = 1).
8. The carwash is empty.
If there is no car in position (I 32.3 = 0) the system switches off the
display DRIVE CAR OUT (Q 32.5 = 0) and resets the step counter to
zero.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-33
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
The washing cycle is now completed. Once the car has been driven out,
the carwash returns to the initial position (here, point 5) and the display
DRIVE CAR IN is lit. The next car can be driven in and the washing
process started again.
Note: The movement of the brushes to adapt to the height and profile of
the car is not included in the example. This would be performed by a
different subprogram.
The following diagram (Figure 24-12) is a graphical representation of the
process sequence. The numbers in brackets indicate the assignment to the
process steps described and at the same time to the segment number in
the decision table.
To separate one process step from another in terms of the program, an
internal step counter is used. Once an operation is completed, the control
system increments this counter by 1 and includes the current counter
reading in the conditions for executing the next process step. The
assignment and step counter reading are shown on the left in Figure 24-12
.
START
Preparation: program execution
Definition: operating status
CARWASH ON?
(1)
(2)
no
Reset outputs and counters
(3)
END
yes
COLD RESTART?
Go to initial setting
Reset step counter
Internal
step counter
:0
:1
Initial status
Start: washing process
(5)
:2
:3
:4
: 5/6
:7
:8
Apply shampoo
Wash/rinse
Apply wax
Formation of wax film
Dry
Drive car out
(7)
:9
Carwash empty
Check: checkback signal
(4)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10/11)
(12)
Washing process
(13)
(14)
(15)
END
(1) = Control no. in decision table,
i.e. segment in example program
Figure 24-12 Flowchart of a Carwash Process
24-34
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Q 32.2
Q 32.7
Apply shampoo
Q 33.0
Q 32.6 Q 32.6
Q 32.3
Rotate brushes
Q 33.1
Q 32.0 Q 32.1 Q 32.0 Q 32.1
Q 32.5
Q 32.1
Q 32.2
DRIVE CAR OUT
Carriage fwd (Q 32.0), bwd (Q 32.1)
Open (Q 32.2), close (Q 32.3) door
M 10.1
Q 32.4
1
KF + 1
2
0
I 32.6
Door open (I 32.6), closed (I 32.7)
Q 33.2
Q 32.5
DT
WT
WT = 0 DT = 0
8
6
5
4
I 32.7
I 32.6
I 32.5
Carriage front (I 32.4), back (I 32.5)
I 32.5
I 32.3
Carwash stop (reset outputs)
Dry
Apply wax
Wash/rinse
Display: DRIVE CAR IN
Counter reading KF
Wax application time WT, drying time DT
Pulse counter for switch on
Step counter for washing process
”Start” (washing process) button
M 10.1
I 32.1
”Emeergency OFF” button
I 32.0
I 32.0
Main switch/PLC start-up (OB20...22)
Car in position
I 32.3
I 32.3
I 33.0
5
3
2
4
OPERATIONS/actions
3
I 32.4
9
8
7
6
CONTROL no. (Segment)
10
I 32.5 I 32.4
11
I 32.5
7
12
13
I 32.6
9
I 32.3
Decision Table for the Carwash Program
14
Table 24-2
Before we can move on to the next steps in creating the STEP 5 program,
the program structure must first be established. Only a structured program
can run on a PLC.
As simple as our example program may be, for it to run properly not only
the program or function block with the control statements for the washing
process and the corresponding data block are required, but also at least
one organization block (OB 1). OB 1 is responsible for the cyclic execution
of the program in the processor. In addition to this, the start–up blocks (OB
20/21/22) are also necessary. These are responsible for the cold or warm
restart of the process under different conditions.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
24-35
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Without explaining the functions of the organization blocks in greater detail,
Figure 24-13 illustrates the program structure with the block names as they
are used in the example.
OB 1
FB 5
OB 20
DB 5
Carwash program
OB 21
OB 22
Figure 24-13 Structure of the Carwash Program
Step 4:
Specifying the data block
There are two further requirements for the control system:
The service personnel should be able to change the times for wax
distribution WT and the drying time DT.
The number of washing cycles should be recorded and the number
output when required.
These functions are best implemented by setting up a data block (Figure
24-14). The data block contains the setpoints for WT and DT as well as the
actual values of the timers in the formats KH and KF.
DB 5
”Carwash: counters / timers
The service personnel enter the setpoint times for the formation of the way
film WT and
the drying time DT in the DB. The controller stores the corresponding actual
times here
in the formats KH and KF.
DW
Default
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
KH =
K =
H
KC =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
KT =
KH =
KF =
KH =
Comment
0000;
0000;
000;
0000;
030.2
0000
+00000
0000;
045.2
000;
0000;
030.2
empty
counter for number of cars washed (KH)
counter for number of cars washed (KC)
empty
setpoint for wax distribution time WT
WT actual value (KH)
WT actual value (KF)
empty
setpoint for drying time DT
DT actual value (KH)
DT actual value (KF)
empty
Figure 24-14 Contents of the Data Block for the Carwash (Printout)
24-36
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
Step 5:
Programming (here only the first 5 segments)
FB 5
Segment 1
C: CARWASST.S5D
0000
LIB=2
LEN=166
”Prepare program execution”
Before the carwash program stored in function block FB 5 can be processed, DB 5
which
is called in FB 5 must be open (operation: C DB5)
:C
DB5
call DB5 (timer/counter values)
0005
0006
:***
Segment 2
0007
”Define operating status”
When the carwash is switched on or following a cold restart, the program sets pulse flag F 10.1 for one
cycle. THis is evaluated in segment 4 and if necessary the carwash is brought to the initial position.
The operating status itself is represented by edge flag F 10.0 (pos.edge) for the events ”main switch
on” or ”cold restart”. A warm restart of the carwash is only possible after F 10.0 is reset by ”main
switch off”.
0007
0008
0009
000A
000B
000C
000E
000F
0010
0011
Segment 3
:O
:O
:AN
:=
:R
:A
:S
:AN
:AN
:R
:***
0012
I:
F :
F :
F :
F :
F :
F :
I :
F :
F :
32.0
10.7
10.0
10.1
10.7
10.1
10.0
32.0
10.7
10.0
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
-POSPUL
-STARTUP
-POSPUL
-POSEDGE
-MAINSWIT
-STARTUP
-POSEDGE
main switch ”carwash on”
restart identifier from OB 20/21/22
edge flag for positive edge
puls flag (only one cycle!)
reset restart identifier
update edge flag
no ”carwash on ”command
no restart identifier
reset edge flag
”Define operating status”
When the carwash is switched off or the emergency stop button is pressed, the outputs in QW 32 and
QB 33 are set to zero and the program is terminated.
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
001A CONT.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
:A
:A
:JC
:R
:L
:T
:T
:BEU
:***
I :
32.0
I :
32.1
=CONT
C
2
KB
0
QW
32
QB
33
-MAINSWIT
-EMERSTOP
-STEP
main switch ”carwash on”
emergency stop button not pressed
(program branch)
reset step counter
reset outputs in QB 32
”
”
in QB 33
block end
24-37
Practical Application of STEP 5 - Programming Example
FB 5
C: CARWASST.S5D
Segment 4
001B
LIB=2
LEN=166
”Move to initial position”
The pulse generated in segment 2 when the carwash is switched on or cold restarted triggers the
carwash to move to the initial position if necessary. The carriage is brought to the “back” position,
the door is opened and if a car is in position the request DRIVE CAR OUT is displayed
001B
001C
001D
001E
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
0026
0027
0028 CONT
:AN
:JC
:R
:L
:T
:T
:AN
:S
:AN
:S
:A
:S
:***
F : 10.1
=CONT
C
2
KH
0000
QW
32
QB
33
I :
32.5
Q :
32.1
I :
32.5
Q :
32.2
I:
32.3
Q :
32.5
-POSPUL
pulse flag “carwash on/cold restart”
-STEP
reset step counter
-C-BACK
-C-BWDS
-DOOROP
-OPEN-D
-IN-POS
-CAR-OUT
reset outputs
“
”
carriage not in back position
move carriage backwards
door is not open
open door
car still in the carwash
display: DRIVE CAR OUT
Segment 5
0029
”Set up initial situation”
The initial position of the carwash is checked and when this is confirmed the request “DRIVE CAR IN”
is displayed.
step counter to ACCU 1
:L
C
2
0029
-STEP
request: step 0
:L
KC
000
002A
:!=F
002C
I : 32.3
-IN-POS
no car in position
:AN
002D
I : 32.5
-C-BACK
carriage in back position.
:A
002E
I : 32.6
-DOOROP
door is open
:A
002F
Q : 32.4
-CAR-IN
display: DRIVE CAR IN
:S
0030
Q : 32.5
-CAR-OUT
reset: DRIVE CAR OUT
:R
0031
:CU
C
2
-STEP
increment step counter by 1
0032
0033
:***
The complete program including all comments and the assignment list can
be found in the directory C:\S5_DATEN\DEFAULT under the name
PROEXAST.S5D.
24-38
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Part 6:
Data Management
STEP 5 Data Managment
25
24-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
STEP 5 Data Management
Overview
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
25
This chapter describes the structure of the user memory and how it is
distributed in STEP 5. Tables show you which directories contain the files
important to STEP 5. The product information contains detailed information
about the directories and files on your device.
Section
Description
Page
25.1
RAM Memory Requirements for STEP 5/ST V 7.0
25-2
25.2
Memory Distribution
25-3
25.3
STEP 5 Directory Structure
25-7
25.4
STEP 5 Files
25-9
25.5
Available Blocks and Parameter Limits
25-11
25-1
Data Management STEP 5
25.1 RAM Memory Requirements for STEP 5/ST V 7.0
Overview
To allow STEP 5/ST V 7.0 to operate with all its functions in conventional
memory, a free RAM memory capacity of at least 550 Kbytes is required
after you have loaded the operating system.
The management of the user memory is already optimized on a PG
supplied with STEP 5.
If you install STEP 5 later or if you change the configuration of your system
or load other drivers or programs, it may be necessary to change the
assignment of the user memory to avoid errors.
Memory
Configuration
The memory configuration and management can affect the following:
Which programs can be run
How fast programs can be run
How much data a program can work with
How much data can be stored between one working session and the
next.
User Memory
The basic configuration of the user memory is on the mother board of your
programming device. This can be extended by a memory expansion card.
All programs must be loaded in the user memory before they can be run.
Your PG has two different types of user memory:
Conventional memory
Extended memory.
Programs running under MS-DOS normally use the PG’s conventional
memory. To allow programs to use the extended memory, you must install
a memory manager to coordinate access to this memory.
25-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Data Management STEP 5
25.2 Memory Distribution
Example
The diagram illustrates an example of memory distribution:
Extended
memory
EMM386.EXE
High memory
area
HIMEM.SYS
Upper memory
blocks
EMM386.EXE
Extended Memory
HMA 64 Kbyte
High Memory
Area
ROM-BIOS
1 Mbyte
SETUP
ARCNET
Hardware
expansions,
area available
for programs
by using
EMM386.EXE
UMBs
VGA-BIOS
Video area
Video-RAM
UMBs
Video-RAM
Video area
640 Kbytes
Conventional memory
DOS Data Area
BIOS Data Area
Int. Vector
Conventional
Memory
The conventional memory has a standard capacity of 640 Kbytes in all
PGs. Programs can use the conventional memory without the special
commands required for other types of memory.
MS-DOS occupies part of the conventional memory. The device drivers
and commands specified in the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files
take up further user memory space. The remaining memory is available for
user programs.
Upper Memory
Blocks
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
In addition to the conventional memory, your PG also has a 384 Kbyte
memory known as the upper memory blocks. This area is immediately after
the 640 Kbytes of the conventional memory. This area is normally reserved
for your additional hardware, however parts of it can be made available by
a memory manager.
25-3
Data Management STEP 5
High Memory Area
The high memory area (HMA) is a special 64 Kbyte field in the additional
memory located directly above the 1 Mbyte address.
Extended Memory,
XMS
Most programs use the conventional memory. They cannot use the
extended memory because the addresses which identify the locations of
the programs in the extended memory are too high for these programs to
recognize. Only the addresses in the 640 Kbyte area of the conventional
memory are recognized by all programs.
You can activate more user memory in your programming device by
installing a memory manager. These programs allow access to the
extended memory and the upper memory blocks.
25.2.1
MS-DOS Memory Manager
A memory manager is a device driver that allows access to or manages
certain types of memory.
MS-DOS (5.0 and 6.2) has the following installable memory managers:
HIMEM.SYS manages access to the extended memory
EMM386 allows access to the extended memory. It also allows access
to the upper memory blocks (UMBs).
To install a memory manager, use the DEVICE command in your
CONFIG.SYS file. Although memory managers occupy a part of the
conventional memory, they make up for this by allowing access to far
greater areas of memory in the extended memory or upper memory area
than they themselves occupy.
Running MS-DOS
in the High
Memory Area
MS-DOS is usually run in the conventional memory. This restricts the
conventional memory available for user programs. MS-DOS can also be
run in the extended memory. In this case, it uses the 64 Kbytes of the high
memory area (HMA). Since few programs use this area it may prove useful
to run MS-DOS here.
Running MS-DOS in the extended memory area has the following
advantages:
Approximately 40 Kbytes of conventional memory are released
It uses the high memory area, part of the extended memory used by
very few programs.
The command DOS=HIGH,UMB specifies the area of the user memory in
which MS-DOS will be located and determines whether or not upper
memory blocks will be used.
Using the Upper
Memory Blocks
Another way to gain more memory over and above the 640 Kbytes of user
memory is to install the memory manager EMM386.EXE.
The memory manager can make available part of the extended memory
area from 640 Kbytes to 1 Mbyte reserved for hardware. These parts are
known as the upper memory blocks or UMBs.
Use: with the command DEVICEHIGH <driver file> in the CONFIG.SYS
file, you load drivers in the upper memory blocks.
25-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Data Management STEP 5
Setting up a Larger
User Memory
Even when your memory capacity is adequate, you may not be able to run
a program. Memory-resident programs often occupy part of the user
memory so that there is not enough user memory free.
Normally this results from having too little conventional memory.
In this situation, making use of HIMEM.SYS has the following advantages:
It makes the extended memory available to programs which use this
memory according to XMS (the EXtended Memory Specification).
It prevents system errors caused by programs with contradictory
memory requirements.
It allows you to run MS-DOS in the high memory area of the extended
memory.
It allows EMM386 to use the extended memory.
It allows the use of the upper memory blocks (UMBs) in conjunction
with EMM386.EXE.
Order of the
Drivers
The order of the drivers in your CONFIG.SYS file can be important. It can
have an effect on the rational utilization of memory and the problem-free
running of various programs.
The following list shows the order in which you should load device drivers
in your CONFIG.SYS file (with the command DEVICE or DEVICEHIGH):
1. HIMEM.SYS.
Example:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM:SYS /M:1
The option /M:1 stipulates the ROM-BIOS used.
The driver HIMEM.SYS should be the first driver to be loaded in
CONFIG.SYS.
2. EMM386.EXE
Example:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM I=B000-B7FF I=C800-DFFF
X=E000-E0FF I=E100-F5FF FRAME=D000
This command loads the MS-DOS memory manager EMM386.EXE
from the \DOS directory in the user memory. It manages the extended
memory and the upper memory area.
3. All device drivers which use the extended memory.
To keep as much conventional memory free as possible and to increase
the functionality of STEP 5/ST, do not load any drivers that will not be
used.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
25-5
Data Management STEP 5
Parameters
25.2.2
RAM
This parameter provides you with an EMS window.
FRAME
This parameter indicates the place in the memory at
which the EMS window should be located.
I=B000-B7FF
This 32-Kbyte area is normally intended for the Hercules
software video interface. Since this area is not occupied
on your programming device, it can be used as user
memory.
I=C800-DFFF
When your programming device is shipped, this area is
not occupied by hardware. It can therefore be used as
user memory.
X=E000-E0FF
If this area is occupied by hardware, it must be excluded
(not for the PG 740 and PG 760).
I=E100-F5FF
The area for the SETUP program can be used since
EMM386 activates the protected mode and SETUP cannot be run in this mode (not for the PG 740 and
PG 760).
Explanation:
I = Include, X = Exclude
Optimizing Hard Disk Access
SMARTDRIVE is an optimizer program that uses part of the extended
memory to accelerate hard disk access.
DEVICEHIGH=C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.SYS 2048 /X
The above command loads SMARTDRV.SYS in the upper memory area of
the user memory above the 640 Kbyte boundary. The number 2048
stipulates the maximum size of the cache as 2048 Kbytes. Values between
128 Kbytes and 8182 Kbytes (8 Mbytes) can be selected.
25-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Data Management STEP 5
25.3 STEP 5 Directory Structure
STEP 5/ST uses a strictly defined directory structure. The structure consists
of 4 separate directories.
System directory All the files required for running the program are
installed here. The user must not make any
changes whatsoever within the system directory.
The complete system directory can be made
read-only (exception: subdirectory S5_COM\...
must not be set to READ-ONLY).
Home directory
The files modified by the user are stored here.
These include the batch files for starting the program, various INI files describing the workstation
(device-specific data) and printer parameter files
and path files modified by the user (DR.INI and
AP.INI).
SINEC
The shipped MS–DOS drivers for SINEC L2 or
H1 (SIMATIC NET network drivers) are copied to
this directory. This directory is on C: and you cannot select a different drive for it.
S5_INFO
The product information and readme files are copied to this file. This directory is on C: and you
cannot select a different drive for it.
The system and home directories can be located on different drives. You can
also select the directory name you wish to use during installation.
dr:\system_directory\S5_SYS\
S5_COM\
All STEP 5/ST programs
and system files
Com adapter for V5 & V6
COM packages (this subdirectory must not be RO!)
S5.COM\ AWLBAT\
STL Batch Compiler
S5.COM\ COM_DB1\
COM DB 1
S5.COM\ PG_PG\
PG-PG Link
EXAMPLE\
STEP 5 sample programs
DR_INI\
Shipped printer parameter
files (*DR.INI)
AP_INI\
Shipped path files (*AP.INI)
S5_INST\
Installation components
The part of the path shown in lower case letters:
dr:\system_directory
can be selected by the user during installation. All the directory names in
upper case letters are created automatically with these fixed names.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
25-7
Data Management STEP 5
Home Directory
dr:\home_directory\S5_HOME\
Device-specific data
User Directory
lw:\home_directory\S5_DATEN\
This is the default directory
for user data after STEP
5/ST is installed. After initial
installation, the directory is
empty.
The parts of the path shown in lower case characters (dr:\home_directory) can
be selected by the user during installation. All the directory names shown in
upper case letters are created automatically with fixed names.
During the standard installation, only the drive can be selected. The directory
is always \STEP5\S5_HOME\..
Search Order
Due to the separation into a system and a home directory, original files (as
supplied) and files modified by the user are maintained separately. Files
shipped with the package that are modified by the user are stored in the home
directory (applies only to Version 7.0 packages!). This means that the original
files are retained in the system directory.
Due to this strategy, there is a fixed order when searching.
STEP 5/ST V7.0: Files are searched for first in the home directory and then
in the system directory.
COM packages: Here, remember that the system directory V7.0 is different from the system directory of the COM adapter. The COM packages use
their own system directory ...\S5_SYS\S5_COM.
This division is necessary to allow the COM packages to run.
The printer parameter files (*DR.INI) and path files (*AP.INI) shipped with the
package are kept in their own subdirectories below the system directory to
maintain a clearer structure.
File:
First
System
directory\DR_INI
for V7.0
packages
directory
System
directory\AP_INI
for V7.0
packages
Home
directory
System directory
for V7.0
packages
System
directory\S5_COM
for
COM-pack
ages
System directory
for V7.0
packages
??????DR.INI Home
directory
??????AP.INI Home
STEP5.S5K
S5KXS06X.S5K Home
directory
[email protected]@@@??.INI Home
directory
25-8
2nd attempt
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Data Management STEP 5
25.4 STEP 5 Files
Overview
This section is an overview of the directories that contain files relevant to
STEP 5. For detailed information about directories and files on your device,
refer to the product information.
C:\STEP5
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Standard setting during installation:
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS
STEP 5 system directory with the STEP 5 basic package
C:\STEP5\S5_HOME
The S5.BAT file with which you start the STEP5 basic package and
P tools.
C:\STEP5\S5-SYS\EXAMPLE
This directory contains a sample program with program blocks and an
assignment list.
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\S5_INST
Contains installation components, backups of individual S5 program
components
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\S5_COM\PG_PG
Link between two PGs for exchanging STEP 5 blocks and files.
C:\STEP5\S5_SYS\S5_COM
Default directory for optional packages (COMs), COM DB1,STL, Batch
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
25-9
Data Management STEP 5
25.4.1
Functions of Certain STEP 5 Files
Overview
The list below contains the files in which STEP 5 stores its settings and data.
Most of the files are stored in the STEP 5 working directory. The question marks
in filenames stand for characters that can be selected by the user.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Paths
S5 MEMORY.DAT
[email protected]@@@CF.INI
??????PX.INI
Programs
??????ST.S5D
Assignment list
??????Z0.SEQ
??????ZF.SEQ
??????Z0.INI
??????Z#.INI
??????ZT.SEQ
Printer
??????DR.INI
??????F1.INI
??????F2.INI
??????LS.INI
Specific files
??????XR.INI
??????SU.INI
??????SF.INI
??????TX.INI
Bus selection
??????AP.INI
25-10
Settings
Stores the last values entered in job and list boxes.
(STEP 5 Configuration File) This contains the path and the name of the
??????PX.INI file last used. Location: STEP 5 home directory.
Data from the project settings.
STEP 5 program file.
Sequential assignment list.
Assignment error list: list of the errors when translating ??????Z0.SEQ- into
the ??????Z0.INI file.
Symbols file, translated assignment list.
Assignment list index files (# = 1 or 2).
Stores function key assignments.
Printer parameters
Footer file (80 characters)
Footer file (132 characters)
Print to file
(Reference list) cross reference list
Doc commands (submit) for documentation
Submit error list
Key macros
Path file containing edited bus paths.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Data Management STEP 5
25.5 Available Blocks and Parameter Limits
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Block
OB
PB
SB
FB
FX
DB
Parameter limits
Input/
Call in
output at program
PG
1 - 39
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
max. 4096 segments per
block;
- Length max. 4096 words
per block;
– per segment 256 statements (words)
– max. 2048 DW per
Extended data block
DX
0 - 255
0 - 255
block (with header)
– max. (6 • 256)+40
Comment block for OB
Comment block for PB
Comment block for SB
Comment block for FB
Comment block for FX
Comment block for DB
Comment block for DX
Segment comment for OB
Segment comment for PB
Segment comment for SB
Segment comment for FB
Segment comment for FX
Segment comment for DB
Segment comment for DX
OC
PC
SC
FC
FCX
DC
DCX
#OBDO
#PBDO
#SBDO
#FBDO
#FXDO
#DBDO
#DXDO
1 - 39
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
1 - 39
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Plant comment
#Name
–
Variables block
VB
# and
max.
8 chars
1 - 255
Name
STEP 5
name
Organization block
Program block
Sequence block
Function block
Extended function block
Data block
–
Comment
blocks per S5D file
– Size: max. 16 Kbytes
– max. (6 • 256)+40
blocks per S5D file
– Size: max. 16 Kbytes
8 Kwords
per block
- max. 255 blocks per S5D file
PLC function
Max. size S5D file: 4Mbytes
LAD + CSF: max. 400 screen elements per block, max. 50 lines / 8 columns
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
25-11
Data Management STEP 5
25-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A
Appendix
Chapter
Overview
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Section
Description
Page
A.1
Key Assignment
A-2
A.2
Brief Operating Instructions
A.3
Key Macro
A-15
A.4
Programming Rules
A-18
A-8
A-1
Appendix
A.1
Key Assignment
Overview
The keyboard of a personal computer can have different functions
assigned to the keys, i.e. the key functions depend on the currently active
software. This also applies to the STEP 5 software:
As soon as you load STEP 5, the keys take on specific S5 functions. There
are two types of keys:
dynamically assigned keys (function keys)
keys with a fixed assignment
Dynamically
Assigned Keys
(Function Keys)
The keys F1 to F8 are known as function keys. Depending on the software
level at which you are currently working, these keys are assigned the
functions that are possible and also required at this level. The function keys
are displayed in the menu at the lower edge of the screen. Some of the
keys have a double assignment, function keys F1 to F8 and SHIFT F1 to
SHIFT F8.
Keys with a Fixed
Assignment
Such keys always have the same function, e.g. within STEP 5, the HELP
function or the cursor control. These can also have multiple uses in
combination with the SHIFT, ALT or CTRL keys.
A.1.1
Keys in LAD/CSF
Table A-1
Key name
Function control keys
Key
HELP
PRINT
Prints out the whole
screen on a printer or
to a file
Prints out the whole
screen on a printer or
to a file
Disabled
New, optimised screen In “Edit” also with
extras (SHIFT F7) and
display
F2 = New disp
Disabled
Changes to ”symbol
correction”
In “Output”, only
available with F1. In
“Edit” also with extras
(SHIFT F7) and F2 =
New disp
Changes to the editing
mode (correction)
Disabled
In “Output” also with
F6.
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
CTRL
END
Editing mode
5
CORR
Segment
comment
A-2
Remarks
Displays a help text on Displays help
the screen
information
PAUSE
Zoom-in
Edit
HELP
Hardcopy
Half screen
Output
÷
COM
Changes to the
As output
comment input mode –
branch to segment title
or segment comment
Also available with
SHIFT F8
In “Output” and “Edit”
also with SHIFT F6.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Table A-1
Function control keys, continued
Key name
Key
Output
Insert segment
Delete segment
Table A-2
Key name
Cancel
(escape)
Insert
SHIFT
Remarks
In “Output” also in
segment functions with
SHIFT F4. In segment
functions the segment
is written to the buffer
file.
Deletes the displayed Disabled
segment. The segment
is not buffered.
In “Output” also in
segment functions with
SHIFT F4. In segment
functions the segment
is written to the buffer
file.
Terminating Keys
Key
ESC
0
Insert
Return
Enter
segment
Edit
Disabled
A segment is inserted
before the current
segment. An empty
screen is displayed
and you change to the
editing mode
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ENTER
***
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Output
Edit
Changes back to the Modifications within a
previous level
field can be
cancelled. Otherwise
you change to
“Output”. Newly
entered segments
are deleted.
Remarks
If you exit “Edit” the segment
is displayed in its old form. If
the segment has been input
as a new segment, the
previous one is displayed.
Also with F8.
Stores the currently
displayed block if it
has been changed.
Changes back to the
calling level.
Stores the currently
Same as F7.
edited segment.
Displays the segment
in its newest form.
Disabled
Completes input in
fields. In empty fields
the cursor is moved
one field to the right.
A new segment is
inserted after the
segment displayed.
An empty screen is
displayed and you
change to the editing
mode.
Enters the segment
you are currently
working with and
opens a new
segment.
In “Edit” also with F6.
A-3
Appendix
Table A-3
Key name
Control Keys
Key
Page up
9
Page down
3
SHIFT Page
up
SHIFT
SHIFT Page
down
SHIFT
Page one
segment
forwards
9
3
+
Page one
segment
back
Segment
end
SHIFT
Segment
start
SHIFT
Remarks
Moves the displayed As “Output”
segment one line
down.
In list boxes one page down.
Moves the displayed As “Output”
segment one page
down.
Rolls the displayed
segment one page
up.
As “Output”
The next segment is
displayed.
Jump to the end of
the current line.
The previous
segment is
displayed.
Jump to the start of
the current line
Disabled
Jump to the end of
the displayed
segment.
Disabled
Jump to the start of
the displayed
segment.
Disabled
Jump to the end of
the input field on
which the cursor is
positioned.
Disabled
Jump to the start of
the input field on
which the cursor is
positioned.
TAB
+
SHIFT
Edit
In list boxes one page up.
+
Input field
end
Input field
start
Output
Moves the displayed As “Output”
segment one line up.
TAB
+
In “Output” also in the
”segment functions” with F2.
In “Output” also in the
”segment functions” with F2.
Horizontal
expand
7
Disabled
Expand the segment
by one column at the
cursor position.
Not permitted at the left
margin of a LAD segment. In
“Edit” also with SHIFT F7 =
Extras as F6 = Exp Hor
Vertical
expand
1
Disabled
Expand the segment
by one line at the
cursor position.
Not permitted in the two top
lines of LAD segments.
Disabled
Deletes a single
character marked by
the cursor.
Delete
character
marked by
cursor
A-4
.
DEL
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Table A-3
Key name
Delete
subfield
Control Keys
Key
SHIFT
Output
Edit
Disabled
Deletes a whole
subfield.
Disabled
Deletes a single
character to the left of
the cursor.
Positions the cursor
on the next input
field to the right. At
the end of the line
jumps to the first
position in the line.
As “Output”. Within
the input field you
can also move the
cursor to the position
right of the short
cursor.
Positions the cursor
on the next input
field to the left. At the
start of the line
jumps to the last
position in the line.
As “Output”. Within
the input field you
can also move the
cursor to the position
left of the short
cursor.
Positions the cursor
on the input field
above the long
cursor.
As “Output”
Positions the cursor
on the input field
below the long
cursor
As “Output”
As cursor right
The editing mode to
modify the input field
is activated. Empty
input fields are
deleted with this
mode change. This
key completes the
input field and moves
on to the next field to
the right.
As cursor left
Completes the input
field, moves to the
next input field to the
left.
.
Remarks
DEL
Delete
character
left of cursor
Cursor right
Cursor left
Cursor up
Cursor
down
6
4
8
2
Change to
input field
SHIFT
Change to
next input
field
SHIFT
6
4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-5
Appendix
Table A-4
Key name
Connector =
F9
Negated
connector =
F9
Not defined
?
A-6
Special Keys
Key
Output
Also F5 = Bin Oper
and F4 = #
Disabled
Inputs a negated
connector at the
cursor position
Also F5 = Bin Oper
and F5 = /.
Disabled
Input fields are
marked as undefined
when this key is
pressed first after
selecting the input
field
F9
?
Remarks
Inputs a connector at
the current cursor
position
F9
SHIFT
Edit
Disabled
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
A.1.2
Key Assignment STL
Overview
Table A-5
The following tables only explain the key assignment when the functions
are different from those for LAD or CSF. All other key functions are listed
under → Key assignment LAD/CSF.
Key Assignment STL
Key name
Key
Cancel (escape)
ESC
Half screen
PAUSE
Segment
comment
Cursor right
Cursor left
÷
COM
6
4
Change to next
input field
SHIFT
Change to
previous input field
SHIFT
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Output
Remarks
Return to
previous level.
Delete newly input segments
Changes the
comment mode
between operand
and statement
comments.
As “Output”
Also SHIFT F4
Changes to the
input mode for
segment title, if
pressed twice to
the
segment/block
comments.
As “Output”
In “Output” also
with SHIFT F6.
Disabled
Move right within an input field. At
the end of the field, jump to the first
position of the next input field.
Disabled
Move left within an input field. At the
end of the field, jump to the last
position of the previous input field.
Disabled
Move to the next input field of the
STL line.
Disabled
Move to the previous input field of
the STL line.
6
4
Edit
A-7
Appendix
A.2
Brief Operating Instructions
Job Boxes
The majority of selectable functions must first have parameters assigned
and then be activated. You assign parameters after calling the function in
job and list boxes.
Within these boxes, you can move the cursor with the mouse or the TAB
key and the cursor keys. In certain fields (colored or inverse display) you
can call further list boxes with F3 = Select.
This menu provides functions with which you can organize your program
and files.
Project
You make all the required settings for a program once and store them in a
project file (*PJ.INI). Settings include the following:
storage location for the various files
method of representation (LAD/CSF/STL)
files required for the project
mode
parameters for printing out, etc.
Settings
In the pages of the project settings, you enter the files and parameters for
your project. This box is divided into six pages.
Tabs
The selected parameters and files are later entered in the corresponding
job and list boxes. The files and parameters selected on these pages are
valid for all the work in the entire project.
In the tab pages, you can position the cursor using the cursor keys or the
mouse. By double clicking on the parameters, you can either open a list
box or change the default. You can also make selections by pressing the
F3 key twice.
A-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Menu Commands
File
Project >
Set
Load ...
Save
Save As ...
Blocks >
Directory ...
Before you start the actual programming, you set all the parameters
required for a project in the tab pages of the project settings.
A project file created with the set function is loaded. Loading the file
makes all the settings it contains valid for your work. The previously valid
settings are overwritten.
This saves all the settings made in the project settings tab pages in the
current project file (*PJ.INI).
Save the settings in a new (selectable) project file (*PJ.INI).
Here, you manage blocks and documentation files on the PG or the PLC.
The following functions are available:
This outputs a directory on the output device selected in the job box
(PG-PLC).
Transfer ...
Transfers blocks and documentation files from file to file, file to PLC, PLC
to file. You select the source and destination in the displayed job boxes.
Compare ...
Directory ...
You can compare single blocks with each other, single blocks of a group
of blocks or all blocks of a program file with a second program file. You
can compare file with file, file with PLC, PLC with file.
Deletes blocks on the PG and PLC,
documentation files only on the PG.
Triggers a PLC overall reset
STEP 5 blocks in the program file are checked and compressed.
With this function you manage files without having to change to the
operating system level. You select a directory or search for a particular
file in a directory using the job box. The following functions are available:
This lists the contents of a directory.
Copy ...
You can copy single files or groups of files.
Delete ...
You can delete single files or groups of files.
Delete ...
Compress
DOS file >
PCP/M file >
Directory ...
Copy
PCP/M ->DOS ...
Copy
DOS -> PCP/M ...
Delete ...
DOS Commands
Exit
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
With this function you can handle PCP/M files.
A directory created under PCP/M is displayed in the directory of PCP/M
files job box, depending on your specifications.
This converts PCP/M files to S5-DOS ST/MT files.
This converts STEP 5 files created with S5-DOS ST/MT into PCP/M files.
PCP/M files on a PCP/M medium are deleted.
With this function, you change to the DOS level
You exit STEP 5/ST.
A-9
Appendix
Editor
STEP 5 Block ...
Using this menu you can start various program editors.
With this function, you can start the LAD/CSF or STL editors. The job box
Edit STEP 5 block(s) is displayed. Here, you select a block. The editor
selected in the settings is then displayed.
With this function you supply parameters and start the editor for data
blocks.
With this function you supply parameters and start the editor for DB
screens.
As soon as you activate this function, the editor for the assignment list is
called directly.
With this function you can create, store and activate connections that are
not established as point-to-point connections. You can create bus paths
in the Select Bus Path job box.
You create a control character record for your particular printer which is
stored in a printer file.
With this function you can create a new footer file or modify an existing
file.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Data Block ...
DB Screen ...
Assignment List
Bus Paths
Printer Parameters
Footer Editor
Test
With this menu, you activate the test, information and start-up functions
with the PG in the online mode. There must be a physical and logical
connection between the PG and PLC. You create this connection in the
project settings pages in the mode field.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Block Status
Status Variables
Force Variables
Force Outputs
With this function you can test and correct blocks loaded on the PLC. You
select the block to be tested in the block status list box.
With this function you output the current signal states of selected
operands at the system checkpoint during program processing. You edit
the operand list in an empty table.
With this function you can modify process variables and intervene in the
process. You edit an operand list in the displayed table.
With this function you can set outputs to on or off. The PLC must be in
the STOP mode.
With this function, a block in the PLC is processed step by step. You
select the box in the program test ON list box which you can then
manipulate or search for an operand that you want to monitor.
This switches off the program test function.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Program Test ON
Program test OFF
A-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
PLC
Start PLC
With this function you trigger a cold or warm restart on the programmable
controller.
Stop PLC
This changes the PLC to the STOP mode.
Compress PLC
Memory
With this function you can eliminate invalid blocks on the PLC and shift
the valid blocks together.
PLC Info ISTACK
A table of the control bits and their current status is displayed on the
screen. With the PLC in the STOP mode, the interrupt stack is output to
allow you to analyze the cause of an error.
PLC Info BSTACK
This provides you with information about the start address of the
currently valid block and the relative and absolute return address in the
block stack.
Output PLC Memory
This function outputs the absolute addresses of the PLC and their
contents on a selectable medium.
PLC Memory Conf
This outputs the memory configuration and indicates how much of the
user memory in the PLC is currently occupied.
PLC Sys Parameters
This displays the system parameters of the PLC on the screen.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Management
This menu provides you with a series of utilities required in many
situations when working with the STEP 5 editing and test functions.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
The settings for the individual functions must already be made in the
project settings tab pages.
Make XRF
This generates a cross reference list for the set program file. As soon as
you activate this function, a cross reference list is generated.
EPROM Handling
With this function you can transfer (blow) STEP 5 programs from the
selected program file to EPROM/EEPROM submodules. The EPROM
Programming box is displayed.
Automatic
Rewiring ...
The operands are renamed automatically based on a modified or new
assignment list. The Automatic rewiring job box is displayed. Here, you
select the new program file name to program file and with new symbols
file. The function is then executed immediately.
Manual Rewiring ...
You rename operands in an operand list. The Manual rewiring job box is
displayed. Here, you select the new program file name to program file.
Following this, you enter the operands in a table.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-11
Appendix
Assignment Lists >
With this function you can process the assignment lists required for
symbolic addressing of operands in your user program.
Convert
SEQ >INI
You convert the assignment list to the corresponding symbols file. You
enter the name of the source file to be converted in the Convert
assignment list SEQ > INI job box.
Convert
INI >SEQ
You convert the symbols file to the corresponding assignment list, and
you can have this sorted according to absolute or symbolic operands.
You enter the name of the symbols file to be translated and the type of
sorting you require in the Convert symbols file INI > SEQ job box.
Correct INI
With this function you can change the name of the symbols file to be
corrected. You enter the name of the symbols file to be corrected in the
Correct symbols file job box. Following this, you can correct the symbols
file.
Convert
V1.x and V2.x
Symbols files created with earlier versions (V1.0, V2.0) can be
converted.
Delete SEQ
This function deletes an assignment list.
Delete INI
You delete the symbols files (*Z0.INI, *Z1.INI, *Z2.INI).
Output Error List
You output the error list created if errors occurred during the conversions.
Convert ...
With this function, project data are converted from the file format of STEP
5/ST Version 6.x to the format of version 7.x.
Language ...
You select the language you want to work in.
Colors ...
You can change the colors of the screen displays.
Documentation
STEP 5 Blocks ...
You output the blocks of a program file in the methods of representation
LAD, CSF and STL with or without cross references and with or without
diagnostic SP data. You select the output you require in the Print STEP 5
block(s) job box.
Data Blocks ...
You can output either individual or all the data blocks of a program.
DB Screens ...
This function outputs data blocks containing screens. Select the blocks in
the Output DB screens job box.
Assignment List ...
You output an assignment list. If the assignment list is not already set,
you can select it in the Print assignment list job box.
Program Structure ...
This outputs the call identifiers of the individual blocks of a program file.
You select the required blocks in the Output program overview job box.
Cross References ...
You generate a cross reference list from an existing program file. Select
the required operands in the output XRF list job box. A cross reference
file does not need to exist.
I/Q/F List ...
You output an I/Q/F list. Select the required group of operands in the
Output I/Q/F list job box.
With this function you output the program overview, the I/Q/F list and
cross reference list with one command.
Three-in-One ...
A-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Enhanced Output >
Blocks ...
This function, previously known as KOMDOK, allows you to document
STEP 5 programs comprehensively and with little effort using doc
commands. In contrast to the standard output, the printouts have
graphics added to them. Using doc commands, you can structure the
printout for your needs.
You print out blocks of a program file in the methods of representation
LAD, CSF and STL with or without cross references and with or without
diagnostic SP data.
DB1 Screens ...
With this function, you can output data blocks that contain screens to a
printer or file.
Block List ...
This function prints out a list of all the program and data blocks of the set
program file.
Assignment List ...
You output an assignment list. You can print this either in sequential form
as edited or sorted according to absolute/symbolic operands.
Program Structure
This prints out the call structure of the individual blocks in a program file.
Cross
References ...
This prints out cross references from a cross reference list according to
specific criteria.
I/Q/F List ...
This prints out an I/Q/F list. The I/Q/F list shows you which bits in which
bytes of the operand groups F, I, Q are assigned.
S Flag List ...
With this function, you output the I/Q/F list of S flags.
Checklist ...
This function checks through the configuration data. Depending on the
option, the free operands, operands without symbols, and operands
without setpoint data for the I/Q/F operands.
Text File ...
You can print out *LS.INI files or any ASCII files.
DOC Commands >
You can control all printouts made with the enhanced output function
using doc commands. These commands are put together like a program,
stored in a file and started when the file is called. You can also call up
other doc command files using an appropriate statement in a doc
command string. This allows you to structure the printout.
Edit ...
You edit doc commands and store them in a submit file.
Test ...
Doc commands in a selected file are checked to make sure they can be
executed. Errors are indicated and saved in an error file.
Output Log File ...
With this function, yo can output the log file created during the test.
Run
The doc commands in a file are started.
Output ...
You can print the content of a doc command file.
Edit Structure
This provides you with information about the links between individual doc
command files. At the same time, you can edit individual DOC command
files.
Output Structure ...
The structure of linked doc command files is output in A4 or A3 format on
a printer or to a file (LS.INI).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-13
Appendix
Change
In this menu, you can change to other S5 packages. These packages
must be installed in a directory on one of the drives. You can then change
to one of the S5 packages displayed. Once you select another package,
you exit the STEP 5 user interface. You can change back to the STEP 5
interface, however, from every other S5 package.
COM DB1
You change to the COM DB1 parameter assignment software. With this
package, you can assign parameters to CPUs of the lower and mid range
of performance, while being sure that no parameter errors occur.
AWL Batch
You change to the STL editor/batch compiler package.
Others ...
You select the S5 package you want to activate in the Other SIMATIC S5
Programs list box.
With these functions, you can display the following information:
Help
Key Assignment
List ...
This displays information about the function keys These are keys with
which you can activate certain functions directly.
About STEP 5/ST
Version ...
This provides information about the current STEP 5 version you are
using.
Version of S5
Packages ...
A list of the individual program components of the STEP 5 software is
displayed.
User Interface >
This menu command provides you with descriptions of ways in which you
can obtain information about certain topics.
Using Menus
Help and information about using menus.
Using Dialog Boxes
Help and information about using dialog boxes.
Using Project
Settings
Help and information about the tab pages of the project settings.
General Information
General information about working with the user interface.
Compatibility
Information about the compatibility of STEP 5/ST V 7.0 with earlier
versions.
Notes
Notes on special topics.
A-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
A.3
Key Macro
Overview
Using the key macro program, you can record key sequences in the block
editor. The sequences are saved in the S5 file ??????TX.INI. This file is on
the drive in which STEP 5 was installed. The name ?????? can be freely
selected by the user.
Selection
You select a key macro file to record or play a macro using dialog boxes in
the dialog language selected for STEP 5.
Playing
A key macro can be run step–by–step. In the dialog box, it is also possible
to assign a macro title and a comment. You can edit these at any time. File
names and macro titles are displayed in a dialog box allowing fast simple
selection. You can save key macros in any directory.
Macro Function
When the macro function is active (recording or playing a key macro) the
current mode is displayed in the right–hand top corner in English.
The following displays are possible:
REQU
Request
Request macro mode
RECI
Record Init
Initialize recording
REC
Record
Record
RECA
Record Abort
Abort the recording
RECE
Record End
Terminate the recording
PLAI
Play Init
Initialize play
PLAY
Play
Play the macro
PLAA
Play Abort
Abort playing the macro
PLAE
Play End
End of playing the macro
Startup Macro
The macro with the name [email protected] is a special case. This startup
macro is started automatically when you call STEP 5/ST providing the key
macro file [email protected] is located in the home directory. If necessary, you
can create the startup macro yourself.
Special Case
Downwards compatibility to the Version 6.6 key macros is not possible due
to the changed user interface of STEP 5/ST and the new recording format.
The hotkeys (CTRL– A, CTRL– E, CTRL– D), as used in Version 6.6 are no
longer used for the key macro functions (record, play).
When using the hotkeys, you should note that the key assignment varies from
language to language.
It is not possible to use the mouse to operate STEP5/SR during recording.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-15
Appendix
The following new hotkeys are now available with Version 7.0:
Table A-6
Operations
Key Macro
Function
CRTL+ALT+D
When used in the ”Normal Mode” (no mode display),this calls the ”Select Macro”
dialog box.You can select a macro for recording or playing.
CRTL+ALT+D
During the recording of a macro (mode display ”REC”)this stops the recording.
ESC
During the playing of a macro (mode display ”PLAY”)this stops the play mode and
aborts the currently activekey macro.
CRTL+ALT+T
If you selected the single step playing of a macro in the ”Select Macro”dialog box,
you can play the macro step–by–step (in other words key–by–key) using this hotkey.
Each step in the macro must be confirmed by the key combination CTRL+ALT+T
This function is extremely useful when checking that a macro does what it is intended to do. The single step mode is not displayed separately.
Recommendations
for the Use of Key
Macros
The key macro function is intended mainly for keyboard sequences that you
use regularly in the editors. Automated sequences within menus and dialog
boxes including changes to packages can only run correctly when the
conditions at the time of playing the macro are the same as the conditions
when you recorded the macro. For this reason, it is advisable to restrict the
use of key macros to limited tasks where the conditions can be checked easily.
Note the following points when using key macros:
Central start point:
Create a few start points within the packages where you start or play
your key macros and document these points in the key macro
comment.
Examples of typical start points:
Within the menus
open
Within editors
FILE menu item not
Correction mode
Fast selection:
Select a macro title to indicate the purpose of the key macro.This allows
a faster selection in the ”Macro Selection” dialog box.
Correct start point and necessary conditions:
Document the start point or required conditions (for example STL) for
playing the key macro in the macro comment.
A-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Recording Key
Strokes Within the
User Interface.
Menus You should only use the following keyboard input within the user
interface:
ALT+<letter> for changing to the corresponding menu
<letter> for selecting a menu item in the selected menu
Acceleration keys (function keys combined with UNSHIFT, SHIFT, CTRL
and ALT) for a direct jump to the most important menu items.
Do not under any circumstances use display control keys (cursor keys, tab
stop etc.) before operations within the user interface.
Dialog boxes
Under no circumstances use the display control keys (cursor keys, tab stop
etc.) for operation within dialog boxes.
Do not use check boxes during the recording.
Prior to recording the macro, make all the selections necessary in check
boxes in the dialogs.
Checking key macros:
After creating a key macro, you can check its effects by playing it in the
single step mode, key–by–key.
Note
The recording or playing of a macro is interrupted when other packages
are selected with the menu items ”Change/Others...”, ”STL Batch”, ”COM
DB1” and ”DOS Commands” and is resumed after you return from the
packages.
Keyboard Editor
In STEP 5/ST, you can reassign the functions of the F keys using a keyboard
editor. When you save the resulting S5K files, remember the search order.
The keyboard files STEP5.S5K and S5KXS06X.S5K are shipped with STEP
5 in the system directory\S5_INST. After copying these two files to the home
directory, you can adapt them using the keyboard editor.
When you call STEP 5/ST, the keyboard file STEP5.S5K is used for the STEP
5/ST sections and the keyboard file S5KXS06X.S5K for the STEP 5/ST V6.x
sections (COM adapter).
The functions of most F keys can be reassigned with the keyboard editor.
Note
Please note that the key combinations ALT–<number> and ALT–<letter>
must not be assigned a function because these keys are already required
by the STEP 5 package. This also applies to the key for the macro
function.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-17
Appendix
A.4
Programming Rules
Overview
This section describes some of the programming rules for changing
between the methods of representationm LAD, CSF and STL. A program
block written, for example, in STL cannot always be represented as a
Ladder Diagram or Control System Flowchart. This also applies when you
change from one of the graphical methods of representation (LAD and
CSF) to the other.
STL
CSF
Figure A-1
LAD
Scope and Limits of the STEP 5 Methods of Representation
Note
Programs you have written in LAD or CSF can always be translated back
to STL.
A.4.1
Graphical Input in LAD and CSF
Input in LAD,
Output in CSF
If you use too many nesting levels when inputting in LAD, you may exceed
the display limits for output in CSF.
LAD
– INP. 1 – INP. 2 – INP. 4 – INP. 6
– OUTPUT
– INP. 3
– INP. 5
– INP. 7
Figure A-2
A-18
Example of Nesting when Inputting in LAD
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
CSF
– INP. 1
&
>=1
– INP. 2
&
– INP. 3
>=1
– INP. 4
&
– INP. 5
>=1
– INP. 6
– OUTPUT
– INP. 7
Figure A-3
Input in CSF,
Output in LAD
Example of the Nesting above Output in CSF
Too many entries in a CSF box can exceed the display limits (8 levels) in
LAD.
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 6
– INP. 7
Figure A-4
&
OUTPUT
Example of Nesting when Inputting in CSF
LAD
– INP. 1
Figure A-5
Output of a
Complex Element
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 6
– INP. 7 –OUTPUT
Example of the Nesting above Output in LAD
The output of a complex element (latch, comparator, timer or counter) must
not be ORed.
– FLAG 1
– INP. 1
S
– INP. 2
R Q
– INP. 3
Figure A-6
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
&
–OUTPUT
Only AND Boxes are Permitted after a Complex
Element
A-19
Appendix
Connectors
Connectors are temporary flags used to save logic operations that recur
often. To make things clearer, the rules for connectors are listed separately
for LAD and CSF. Following the rules, there is an example to illustrate both
methods of representation.
Connectors in LAD
LAD
STL
F...
#
:A F...
:= F...
Figure A-7
Connector in LAD and STL
A connector is set to the result of the logic operation produced by the
operations programmed before it on the power rail. The following rules
apply:
Connector in series
LAD
#
...
STL
Figure A-8
...
:A
:A(
:A
:= F
:A F
:A
Connector in Series
Connectors in series with other connectors. In this case the connector is
treated as a normal contact.
Connector in a parallel branch
LAD
#
...
STL
Figure A-9
: A. . .
:A(
:A...
:O(
:A...
:= F
:A F
:)
:)
:A...
Connector in a Parallel Branch
In a parallel branch , a connector is treated like a normal contact. The
entire parallel branch must be enclosed in parenthesis of type O (...).
A-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
A connector must never follow the power rail immediately (connector as
first contact) or come directly after a power rail has been opened
(connector as first contact in a parallel branch).
Connector in CSF
CSF
STL
– # F. . . –
:= F...
:U F...
Figure A-10
Connector in CSF and STL
The connector is set to the result of the logic operation as a temporary flag
for the entire binary logic operation before the connector. The following
rules apply:
Connector at the first input of an AND or OR box
CSF
STL
&
–#F
Figure A-11
:= F...
:A F...
:A...
:A...
Connector at the First Input
The connector is not within parenthesis.
Connector not at the first input of an OR box
CSF
STL
>=1
PREVOP #F
Figure A-12
:O...
:O(
PREVOP
:= F...
:A F...
:)
Connector not at the First Input
The binary logic operation before the input is enclosed in parentheses of
the type O (...).
Connector not at the first input of an AND box
CSF
STL
&
PREVOP #F
Figure A-13
:A...
:A(
PREVOP
:= F...
:A F...
:)
Connector not at the First Input
The binary logic operation before the input is enclosed in parenthesis of the
type A (...).
Only allowed with CSF, this cannot be represented graphically in LAD !
(in the figures: PREVOP = previous logic operation)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-21
Appendix
STL
:A
:A
:A
:A(
:A
:A
:A
:O
:A
:A
:)
:A
:=
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
&
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
&
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
&
>=1
– FLAG 4
– OUTPUT
– OUTPUT
– FLAG 4
LAD
– INP. 1
Figure A-14
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 2
– FLAG 4
- OUTPUT
Example without Connectors
STL
:A
:A
:=
:A
:A(
:A
:A
:=
:A
:O(
:A
:=
:A
:)
:)
:=
:A
:=
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
– FLAG 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– FLAG 2
– FLAG 2
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 3
– FLAG 4
– FLAG 4
– OUTPUT
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
Connector 1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
&
– INP. 5
&
&
# – FLAG 1
# – FLAG 2
>=1
Connector 2
0(
# - FLAG 3
&
# – FLAG 4
)
– OUTPUT
Connector 3
Connector 4
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– FLAG 1
#
0(
Figure A-15
A-22
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– FLAG 3
#
- FLAG 2
#
- FLAG 4
#
- OUTPUT
)
Example with Connectors
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Input in STL
A.4.2
You must keep to the programming rules if you want to translate the
program to LAD or CSF. If you have not kept to the rules and attempt to
make corrections when outputting in LAD or CSF, errors can occur when
you save the program without the PG displaying an error message.
AND Operation
With AND operations, the operands are connected in series, the signal
states of the A or AN operations are scanned and ANDed.
LAD: Contact in series
LAD
Figure A-16
Figure A-17
&
STL
U....
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
...
– INP. 1
CSF
– INP. 2
...
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
...
UND Operations in STL, LAD, CSF
STL
Figure A-18
STL: statement A...
AND Operation
STL
:A
:A
:=
CSF: Input of an AND box
CSF
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
.
.
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
.
.
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
LAD
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Example of the Rule for AND Operations
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-23
Appendix
OR Operation
Scan the signal state and perform an OR operation.
LAD: only one contact in a parallel branch
CSF: input of an OR box
STL: statement O...
LAD
>=1
CSF
O....
STL
STL
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
..
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
Figure A-19
A-24
LAD
- INP. 1
- INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
- INP. 4
&
>=1
– INP. 3
–INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Example of the Rule for OR Operations
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
AND before OR
Operation
1st parallel branch
next parallel branch(es)
LAD
&
CSF
A. . . .
A....
STL
&
>=1
>=1
O...
A...
LAD:
more contacts in a parallel branch
CSF:
AND box before OR box
STL:
statements
O ...
parallel branch A ...
A ...
STL
:A
:A
:O
:O
:A
:A
..
.
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
CSF
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
&
>=1
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
Figure A-20
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
LAD
– INP. 3
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
– INP. 4
– INP. 5
&
Example of the Rule for an AND before OR operation
A-25
Appendix
Parenthesis
This rule covers the use of parenthesis with complex, self-contained binary
logic operations and complex elements with operations before and after
them.
A (
Complex
– OPERATION BEFORE
)
– OPERATION AFTER
Complex binary operation
These operations include OR before AND operations.
OR before AND operation
STL
A(
O...
O....
O...
)
A...
STL: statements
A(
OR operation
)
A
LAD: Connect parallel contacts in series.
CSF
>=1
&
CSF: OR box before AND box.
These operations are a subset of the complex binary operations, two
parallel contacts being the simplest operation.
A-26
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Appendix
Complex Elements
(latch, timer,
comparator and
counter functions)
The following rules apply to complex elements:
– no following operation:
no parenthesis
– AND operation follows:
A (...).
– OR operation follows:
O (...), only for CSF.
– Complex elements cannot be followed by other operations.
LAD / CSF
Complex
function
element
A (
)
&
FOLLOP
CSF
Complex
function
element
0(
Figure A-21
)
>
=1
FOLLOP
Parenthesis with Complex Elements
Comparator function
A comparison of floating point numbers is only possible in STL.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
A-27
Appendix
Complex
Elements,
Undefined Inputs
and Outputs
Each undefined input or output must be supplied with NOP 0 in STL.
Only one complex element is permitted per segment.
STL
Figure A-22
A-28
:A
:L
: SE
: NOP
: NOP
: NOP
:A
:=
– INP. 2
DW 10
T
100
0
0
0
T
100
– OUTPUT
:A
: CU
:A
: CD
:A
:L
:S
: NOP
: NOP
: NOP
:A
:=
– INP. 1
– COUNTER
– INP. 2
– COUNTER
– INP. 3
– COUNTV.
– COUNTER
0
0
0
– COUNTER
– OUTPUT
LAD
CSF
T 100
– INP. 2
1
V
TV BI
DE
DW 10
T 100
– INP. 2
DW 10
– OUTPUT
R
1
V
TV BI
DE
R
Q
Q
– OUTPUT
: BE
– COUNTER
– INP. 1
CU
– INP. 2
CD
– COUNTER
– INP. 3
– INP. 1
– INP. 2
– INP. 3
– COUNTV.
S
– ZAEHLW.
CV BI
DE
– OUTPUT
R
Q
CU
CD
S
CV BI
DE
Q
R
– OUTPUT
: BE
Example of Undefined Inputs and Outputs in STL, LAD and CSF
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
A
Absolute address
This is the physical address (number) of the memory location of an
operand, at which it is accessed.
Access rights,
access protection
With STEP 5, it is also possible to work from the PG via a bus link. The
system manager then assigns attributes to the files: read only, read/write
etc. These access rights to programs are set prior to editing in the project
settings.
Actual operand
The actual operand (parameter list in the calling block) replaces the formal
operands in an FB/FX when it is called.
Assignment list
List of assignments of absolute and symbolic operands and operand
comments. The assignment list is edited as a sequential file (*Z0.SEQ).
When you save it, this sequential source file generates the symbols file
(*Zn.INI, n = 0, 1, 2).
B
Block
A block is a section of a user program for a specific function, structure or
use. In STEP 5, a distinction is made between blocks containing
statements (OB, PB, SB, FB/FX) and blocks containing data (DB/DX) and
variables blocks (VB) that are not used in the program but contain lists of
variables for test purposes.
Block body
The block body contains statements/logic operations in segments or it
contains process data (in DBs).
Block header
STEP 5 automatically sets up the header (length 5 DW) containing the
start identifier, type and number of the block and the PG identifier, the
library number and the block length (including the preheader).
Block preheader
In data and function blocks (DB/DX, FB/FX), STEP 5 generates an
additional block header with the formats of the data used (DV/DX) or the
identifiers of the jump labels (FV/FVX). The preheader is not transferred to
the PLC or to EPROM/EEPROMs.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-1
Glossary
Blow
Transferring STEP 5 blocks to an EPROM/EEPROM submodule.
Breakpoint
To test sequences of statements in blocks, a breakpoint can be set. This is
a point at which the RLO can be observed in the program (Test, Block
status/Status variable). Program execution is stopped at the breakpoint
and the signal states of the actual operands are output.
Buffer
Temporary store to which selected program or text sections are written
during editing so that they can be recalled and copied or transferred. The
next buffer command overwrites the current content.
Bus selection
With the bus selection utility (Editor, Bus Paths) connections from the PG
to selected stations can be set up and activated. All STEP 5 functions can
be performed via such a bus path just as with a poin-to-point connection.
C
Change
STEP 5 menu for calling other S5 packages (e.g. GRAPH 5). It is possible
to change to one of the loaded packages displayed in the list box and then
return to STEP 5 at any time.
Comment
STEP 5 provides a wide range of possibilities for adding comments and
explanations to programs. Comments are not transferred to the PLC. STEP
5 accepts statement, segment and plant comments. Since data blocks do
not have segments, a block comment is created.
– Statement comments and line comments for DB/DXs (max. 32 characters)
and segment titles (with DBs block titles) are stored in comment blocks
(OC, PC, SC, FC).
– Segment comments and block comments for DB/DXs with a maximum of
16K characters are stored in documentation blocks (e.g. #PBDO.nnn).
These are assigned to the ”program” block (PB, SB,FB etc.).
– The plant comment (explanation of the user program) is stored in an S5
documentation file with a freely selectable name (#DOCFILE, name =
max. 8 characters.
Compress memory
When blocks are deleted in the PLC, they are first declared invalid in the
user memory. Whenever a block is corrected, an unaltered old block
remains in memory. The STEP 5 function ”Test, PLC control, Compress
memory” eliminates invalid blocks and closes the gaps between valid
blocks to create more memory.
Connector
An intermediate flag used to temporarily store the RLO (also inverted), so
that the RLO can be used elsewhere avoiding repetitive logic operations.
Glossary-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
Control System
Flowchart CSF
Representation of the logical relationships of a control task in the form of
function symbols complying with DIN 40719, Part 6.
Cross reference
If the function ”Management, Make XRF” is activated, STEP 5 generates
the cross references to other uses of each operand and writes the
references to a special program file *XR.INI. You can call up this
information in the block editor (F2 Reference) covering more than one
block.
Cross reference
list
This is created by STEP 5 from the set program file after the function has
been selected in the ”Documentation, Standard output or Enhanced
output”. The list contains the symbol for every absolute operand and
indicates the blocks and segments where they occur.
Cursor
The STEP 5 editors use a large cursor (known as the long cursor) and a
small cursor. The long cursor indicates the current editing position in the
editing field. It is displayed inversely and its length is generally the length of
the actual input field. The small cursor is character-oriented and is used for
precise editing in the editing fields.
In LAD/CSF, the long cursor supports the graphical design of the segment
in conjunction with the mouse. The cursor is moved within the grid of 8
columns and 50 lines (= 2.5 x screen height). In the ”small cursor” mode,
no mouse operation is possible.
Cycle time
The time required for the program to run through once in cyclic program
execution. This time determines the maximum reaction time of a PLC to an
external signal.
D
Data block DB/DX
These blocks contain data (e.g. bit patterns, constant values) with which
the program works. After it has been called, a data block remains ”open”
until another data block is called.
Directory
With the STEP 5 function ”Directory, of program file” or ”of PLC”, the block
list of a program file is displayed or printed out. The block type, number,
length and the library number (not if PLC is selected) of each block is
displayed.
Documentation
The STEP 5 menu ”Documentation” provides functions for outputting
program blocks and elements on a printer or to a file. In the ”standard
output”, the elements are output as they appear on the screen, in the
”enhanced output”, graphical elements are added and a footer with user
information is appended to each page.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-3
Glossary
Documentation
block
This contains the segment comments assigned to blocks (#OBDO.nnn, #
PB.., #SB.., #FB..) and a block comment for data blocks (#DBDO.nnn).
Documentation file
(DOCFILE)
The documentation file (#NAME) contains block-specific plant comment.
E
Editor
A software tool for creating blocks in the form of Statement Lists (STL),
Ladder Diagrams (LAD) or Control System Flowcharts (CSF) depending on
the settings. Special editors are used to create data blocks, or assignment
lists and for writing segment and plant comments.
The STEP 5 ”Editor” menu provides access to the central tools for
programming, creating blocks, designing logic controls and for acquiring
process data. During a session with an editor, other editors are also
available.
EPROM handling
This is a utility that can be started in the ”Management” menu and is used
to load (blow) and erase user programs in EPROM/EEPROM submodules.
F
Flag
Flags are internal memory locations that can be addressed either bit or
byte oriented (identifier F). Intermediate results of operations are written to
flags.
Footer
This is a labeling field appended to the bottom of each page printed out.
The footer can be either 80 or 132 characters wide. This is selected in the
project settings (Documentation page).
Formal operand
An operand that can be assigned parameters and that is connected to a
substitution statement. In the FB/FX, only the operation to be performed on
the operand is specified. The actual operand is substituted for the formal
operand based on a parameter list when the block is called.
Function block FB
This type of block contains programs or program sections (subprograms),
particularly functions which are required frequently (standard function
blocks) in the form of STEP 5 statements (basic and supplementary
operations). FBs are intended for multiple use. The actual operands are
transferred to the FB via the parameter list when it is called.
Glossary-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
Function element
A function element in LAD/CSF represents the relationship between ”input
– processing – output” in a control system as a box with the signal flow
”conditions – function – operations”.
STEP 5 recognizes binary function elements, e.g. ”&”, ”= >>”, connectors,
timers/counters and complex word–oriented function elements (digital
functions) e.g. arithmetic, shift or convert operations. Owing to the different
operand types, it is not normally possible to cascade binary and complex
function elements.
Function keys
These can have a fixed assignment (e.g. delete key, cancel etc.) or may be
assigned functions appropriate to the current editor and situation (keys F1
...F8 – activated by pressing the keyboard key or clicking on the buttons at
the lower edge of the screen).
I
Input field
An operand field in LAD/CSF in which the operand with its type identifier
and parameter or symbolic name (with hyphen) can be entered. An input
field is ”undefined” when it contains 9 question marks. The field is ”not
connected” when it can remain empty without an operand.
Interrupt stack
ISTACK
At each program execution level, the system program writes an entry in the
interrupt stack whenever the PLC is interrupted, so that after the interrupt
has been serviced, the program returns to the previous level. The
information output (Test, PLC info) includes the address of the interrupt
point with the current condition codes, the contents of the ACCUs and the
cause of the interrupt.
I/Q/F list
This provides information about the bit assignments in bytes (W, DW) of
the operand groups inputs (I), flags (F) and outputs (Q) (Documentation,
standard output, I/Q/F list and enhanced output).
Job box
A dialog window for defining STEP 5 functions. Apart from naming the
object to be processed, you can also select processing or output options.
With the ”select” function in the job box list box is displayed in which files
and blocks etc. can be found and selected.
L
Ladder Diagram
(LAD)
Graphical editing language for STEP 5 blocks in logic control programs,
derived from circuit diagrams (DIN 19 239).
Library number
Five digit number to identify blocks (block number)
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-5
Glossary
List box
A dialog window called in the job box for finding and selecting objects
(blocks/files) in drives, directories and programs for processing with STEP
5.
Long box
Function element
M
Management
The STEP 5 ”Management” menu provides functions with which the user
program can be manipulated (generating cross references, rewiring
operands, translating assignment lists etc.) and for storing blocks on
EPROM/EEPROMs. This menu also includes an editor for creating path
files for PG bus connections, the language option and the submenu for
screen color settings.
Memory areas
There are three memory areas in each PLC: the user area, the system
area (BSTACK, ISTACK, address lists, counters, timers, flags, PII, PIQ)
and the peripheral area (addresses of the process I/Os).
Memory
configuration
STEP 5 function which displays the amount of user memory occupied in
the PLC.
N
New display
When editing in LAD and CSF, this function (half screen key) reorganizes
the screen and optimizes the display of the current segment, even when
the operands are still incompletely labeled.
Node
Nodes are stations (PLC, PG, server) connected to a network. They are
identified by a unique name. A bus path leads from the start node to (e.g.
PG/AS511) via one or more nodes (e.g. CP) to an end node (e.g. CPU in
the S5-135). Each node has a network address (node number).
O
Object
An item which can be selected for processing in the STEP 5 ”Object”
menu. According to this definition an object can be one of the following:
– a project, i.e. the configuration of a user program
– a block, i.e. an editable and callable program module
– a PCPM file that can be converted to an S5–DOS/ST/MT file or deleted
– an S5–DOS/ST/MT file that can be converted to a PCPM file or deleted
Operand
Glossary-6
Process variable that can be addressed in absolute form (e.g. I 32.0) or in
symbolic form (e.g. VALVE 1).
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
Operand comment
These can be added to the symbols in the assignment list. They can be
entered and modified directly in the block editor.
Organization block
OB
These contain STEP 5 operations (basic operations) particularly block
calls. OBs are called by the operating system or by the user to call special
functions and trigger certain reactions from the PLC. OBs are part of the
user program and form the interface to the system program.
Overall reset
Deletes all the blocks loaded in a PLC.
P
Path file
A path file contains a selected (edited) bus path with all the node names
and addresses. It is called using the required path name with the extension
*AP.INI. The PG then establishes the path automatically.
PG link
Direct connection of two PGs via connecting cables.
Plant comment
Text file for adding comments to a user program. This is not linked to a
block. The file name must be preceded by the character #. The other 8
characters can be selected freely.
Printer file
This file contains the parameters for the printer (formats, control
sequences). It is named in the project settings. Its extension is *DR.INI and
it is stored in the system directory.
Process image
If the operand groups I or Q are addressed by STEP 5 statements, the bits
on the I/O modules are not scanned or modified directly, but rather a
special area of the system memory in the PLC, known as the process
image.
The process image of the inputs (PII) and outputs (PIQ) is processed and
updated cyclically by the CPU. During start–up and at the start of every
cycle, the signal states of the input modules are transferred to the PII. At
the end of the program cycle, the CPU transfers the signal states in the
PIQ to the output modules.
Process
peripherals
All the sensors (limit switches etc.) required for process input and the
actuators and indications required for process output.
Process variable
A process variable, also known simply as a variable, is an operand to
which a process–dependent value can be assigned. These values can be
variable or constant. The operands adopt a signal state.
Program block
→ Block
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-7
Glossary
Programming
number
This is used to identify the type of EPROM/EEPROM plugged in. This is
assigned to the order number of the specific submodule. When a function
is invoked (e.g. blow EPROM), STEP 5 examines the programming
number and then displays the parameters of the submodule. This avoids
errors when submodules are exchanged.
Program structure
Program overview display in which the nested calls of individual blocks is
indicated starting from the OB (Documentation, Standard output and
Enhanced output).
Project
The term ”project” (STEP 5 menu) is used to identify all the STEP 5 files
belonging to one user program in a project file (*PX.INI). This project file,
which can be both loaded and saved, contains all the information, e.g.
parameter settings and directory/file names for straightforward processing
and maintenance of the user program
Direct I/O access
User
program
Process image
inputs (PII)
(OB, PB, SB, FB,
Process image
outputs (PIQ)
FX, DB, DX)
- cyclic
- time-driven
- interrupt-driven
Update
process image
Update
process image
Input
modules
flags
timers
counter
other
system data
S5 – BUS
User
memory:
Output
modules
Data blocks
Memory area (CPU module)
Project settings
Settings tab pages selected in the File, Project menu to define a project by
naming the program files and selecting operating modes and type of
representation on the PG/PC. All subsequent work in editing sessions
relates to the selections made here.
R
Result of logic
operation RLO
Glossary-8
The signal state at a particular point in the program, which is used for
further binary signal processing. The RLO is the result of bit–oriented logic
operations or the truth statement for comparator operations. It can, e.g. be
combined with the status of operands or operations are executed
depending on the previous RLO (e.g. conditional jumps). The RLO is in bit
1 of the condition code byte.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
Rewiring
This function assigns different or new addresses to operands in the user
program. The function ”Management, Automatic/Manual Rewiring”
renames the operand in the whole program although the assignment only
needs to be entered in a list once for each operand. Only the address and
not the symbol is changed.
S
Search
This function allows operands, segments or addresses to be located
quickly within the program file. Before the function is started, the search
key (identical the item to be found including upper and lower case letters)
must be specified.
Segment
A segment is a unit of a block which contains a sequence of logic
operations (at least one) which implement a particular task and produce an
intermediate result that can be used for further program execution. A
segment can consist of any number of statements, however, in LAD and
CSF, the number of operations is restricted to 6 or 7 owing to the size of
the editing field on the screen. A segment is completed with ***.
Segment identifier
To allow the editor to assign a segment comment to the correct segment,
the editor automatically generates a 7–character string preceded by the $
character (e.g. [email protected]). The number is the number of the of the
segment. This identifier must not be modified or deleted otherwise the
assignment of comment to block is lost.
SINEC H1
This is a bus system (network) for industrial environments complying with
IEEE 802.3 (ETHERNET). PGs, PCs and PLCs can be connected. A bus
segment has up to 100 stations connected to it and can be up to 500 m
long. Segments are connected by repeaters. A maximum of two repeaters
can be inserted between any two stations.
SINEC L1
This is a bus system for implementing small distributed automation
systems with simple resources. Only PLCs can be connected. A master
PLC organizes the data traffic on the bus cable. The other PLCs are
operated as slaves.
SINEC L2
This is a bus system based on the PROFIBUS standard (DIN 19245).
There are both active and passive stations. Active stations can only access
the bus when they have the token. The token is passed on in the logical
ring in ascending order of the station addresses. Up to eight segments with
a length between 0.2 and 1.2 km depending on the data rate can be
connected via repeaters.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-9
Glossary
Standard function
block
These are ready programmed ”off–the–shelf” function blocks for special
applications. Each standard function block has a serial number assigned to
it. The blocks represent self-contained functions that are required regularly
in the user programs.
Start address
The start addresses of all blocks in the user program are stored in the address
list of DB0.
Statement
The smallest independent unit of a program. It represents a task to be
performed by the processor. A statement consists of the operation and the
operand. The operand consists of the type identifier (e.g. I, Q, F, DW) and
the parameter (e.g 10.5, 25).
Statement
comment
This is an explanatory comment added to an STL statement. It is stored
with the segment titles in comment blocks (OC, PC, SC, FC/FCX).
Statement List
An assembler–type alphanumeric input language for programmable
controllers (DIN 19239) with one statement per program line. It can be
used universally both for simple and complex control tasks. The statements
are input and assigned addresses in the order in which they will be
processed.
Status
This function outputs the signal state of operands (bit 2 in the condition
code byte). This status function is an online function and is selected in the
”Test” menu.
Symbols file
The list of the assignment of symbolic to absolute operands stored in a
source file. Blocks programmed using symbolic operands are converted to
absolute address format with the help of the symbols file. They can then be
understood by the processor.
Glossary-10
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary
System checkpoint
The system checkpoint is the interface between the operating system of
the PLC and the user program. OB1 is called at the system checkpoint. In
each cycle, the PLC operating system passes through the system
checkpoint. At this point the process variables have the same state as the
current process image.
ÏÏÏ
STOP
START
At the system checkpoint (Figure), the PG can be used to monitor or
modify the signal states of the process variables and to set an output
signal.
Process image
inputs
PII
Peripheral
inputs
User program
System
checkpoint
OB 1 is
called
Process image
outputs
PIQ
System program cycle
System
identification file
SYSID
OB 1
F 5.3
I 10.1
User checkpoint
e.g.
block call
JU PB1
.
.
.
BE
PB 1
I 2.0
I 1.1
Breakpoint e.g.
F 1.0
.
.
.
BE
Peripheral
outputs
User program cycle
The SYSID file (Settings, Page 1) contains identification data and
characteristics, e.g. for the communications processors (CPs).
T
Test
The STEP 5 Menu ”Test” provides functions for testing user program
blocks with the PLC online with the PG: These tests include logical and
feasibility tests beyond the boundaries of one block. At the same time,
information and correction functions are available depending on the PLC
mode and the states of the process signals.
Text editor
Tool for creating and working with segments and operand comments in
Documentation blocks. Documentation blocks are called using the job/list
box in the STEP 5 block and data block editor.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Glossary-11
Glossary
U
User checkpoint
During program execution, process variables are changed dynamically and
transferred to the process peripherals by the PLC at the end of each cycle.
To be able to follow the changes to the variables while the program is
running, the signal states of the variables can be output at any point in the
program (status variable or program test ON).
OB 1
Operating
system
of the
PLC
Organization of the
block
execution
S
FB
PB
U
U
U
PB
FX
U
U
SB
FB
U
Organization
block (OB)
S=System checkpoint
U
Program, sequence
block (PB, SB)
Function
block
(FB, FX)
U= User checkpoint (selectable)
V
Variables block VB
A variables block is used to store the content of the screen (operands,
process variables) entered during the test functions status variables and
the force functions, block.
W
Wildcards
Glossary-12
*=
name.
?=
Placeholder for a character string or format-dependent
Placeholder for a character.
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
A
B
About STEP 5/ST version, 20-2
Absolute addresses, number, 16-5
Active port, TTY, 23-2
Actual operand, 6-5
Additional comment, assignment list, 11-6
Address, displaying, 6-3
Addresses, displaying, 6-3
Appending
function blocks, 8-7
inputs, 8-12
operands, 8-7
Arithmetic operations, 7-11, 8-11
Assignment, path file, 12-2
Assignment list, 17-11
creating, 11-6
editing, 11-1, 17-11
editing area, 11-4
enhanced output, 18-14
error message, 11-8
example, 11-8
function keys, 11-4
inserting a line, 11-14
modifying, 11-14
operand comment, 11-6
operand identifier, 11-8
operand types, 11-3
programmable function keys, 11-13
project settings, 4-8
screen layout, 11-4
standard output, 18-6
variables block, 11-3
Authorization, 2-25
for upgrade packages, 2-26
installing, 2-25
of STEP 5/ST for PCs, 2-25
uninstalling, 2-25
Block
address list, 4-13
compare, 4-19
comparing, 24-22
copying a segment, 5-18
creating with the STL editor, 21-12
delete, 4-20
deleting a segment, 5-21
editing, 5-2
saving, 9-4
selecting, 4-20
storing, 6-2
transferring, 4-17, 24-16
Block body, 6-5, 9-3
function block, 6-5
Block call ID, 18-7
Block calls, 7-12, 7-13, 8-13
Block comment, 24-10
completing, 9-9
completing/saving, 9-9
editing, 9-7
form feed, 9-8
inputting, 9-8
number of characters, 9-8
saving, 9-9
Block directory, 4-13
Block header, 6-5
function block, 6-5
library number, 9-3
Block length, data block, 9-3
Block list, 4-18
enhanced output, 18-13
Block parameters, 6-5
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index-1
Index
Block preheader, 4-17, 6-5
data block, 9-2
function block, 6-5
influencing the length, 9-9
Block range, 4-18
Block selection, 3-8, 3-16, 4-14, 4-18
how to select blocks, 3-16
Block stack of PLC, BSTACK, 16-5
Block start, 21-26
Block status, 15-3, 15-3, 24-25
Block title, 9-9, 24-10
Block types, 4-18
Blocks
changing, 5-25
compressing, 4-21
management, 4-13
Blow, EPROM, 17-2
BSTACK, 16-5
displaying, 16-5
BUFFER function key, 21-28
Bus path, 12-1
editing, 12-3
function, 12-2
Bus paths
all paths, 12-3
cur. path, 12-3
deleting, 12-3
dir, 12-3
editing, 12-3, 12-4
printing, 12-3
selecting, 12-3
set up, 12-3
setting, 12-3
terminating, 12-3
C
Cache memory, 25-6
Calling, editor, 11-2
Change, further, 19-1
Change menu, 19-1
Changing, data format, 9-11
Character
deleting, 9-9, 10-3, 24-10
inserting, 9-8, 24-10
Character set, project settings, 4-9
Characters
deleting, 5-14
inserting, 5-13
Checklist, enhanced output, 18-19
Cold restart, PLC, 16-2
Index-2
Color settings
black and white, for STEP 5/ST V 7.0, 17-17
user-defined, for STEP 5/ST V 7.0, 17-17
Colors, 17-17
COM DB1
advantages, 22-2
available functions, 22-3
changing the mode, 22-21
comments for parameter blocks, 22-23
contents of the package, 22-2
defining the order number, 22-20
editing parameters, 22-24
error handling, 22-15
error messages, 22-13
example of DB1 parameters, 22-18
help and error concept, 22-13
help concept, 22-13
help dialog, 22-13
info window, 22-14
language selection, 22-19
loading and modifying DB1, 22-22
parameter blocks, 22-23
PLC parameter assignment, 22-5
PLC revision level, 22-20
printing DB1, 22-27
programming errors, 22-17
saving DB1 in a program file, 22-29
screen comment line, 22-9
screen input output area, 22-9
screen layout, 22-9
screen menu line, 22-10
screen message line, 22-10
screen title, 22-9
special features, 22-4
standard connection, 22-26
starting, 22-6
switching the PLC to STOP, 22-20
transferring DB1 to the PLC, 22-28
COM DB1 dialogs
entering comments, 22-11
entries in input fields, 22-10
rules, 22-10
special rules, 22-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
COM DB1 functions
creating a new DB1, 22-3
creating empty data blocks, 22-3
deleting a parameter field, 22-3
entering comments, 22-3
help functions, 22-4
output to file, 22-3
PLC functions, 22-4
printing DB1, 22-3
transferring DB1, 22-3
COM DB1 parameter assignment software, 22-1
COM port, 2-27
Command mode, 5-10
key strokes, 5-10
Comment
for DW, 24-10
saving, 6-4, 9-14
statement, 6-3
Comment block, 5-15, 6-3
Comment length, 4-8
Comments, editing, 5-8
Common functions in STL, LAD, CSF, 5-1
Comparator operations, 7-16, 8-16
Compare, blocks, 4-19
Compiling, 21-7
checks, 21-8
creating a program file, 21-7
decompiling a program, 21-7
with the compiler function, 21-36
Completing, block comment, 9-9
Complex function
CSF editor, 8-9
key assignment LAD, 7-9
rules for representation, 8-10
Complex functions
inserting at input, 8-12
inserting at output, 8-12
Compress
blocks, 4-21
PLC memory, 16-2
Connecting a PLC to the PG, 2-27–2-30
Connecting a printer to a PC, 2-27
Connecting cable, 2-28, 2-29
COM 1, 2-30
Köster box, 2-30
length key, 2-29, 2-30
TTY port, 2-28
V.24 port, 2-29
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Connecting cables
order number, 2-30
overview, 2-30
Connector
deleting, 8-8
editing, 8-8
LAD, 7-8
negated, CSF, 8-8
negated, LAD, 7-8
Connector assignment, active TTY port, 2-31
Contact, inserting, 7-5
Contents of the package, 1-1
Context-sensitive help, 3-7
Control character, STL editors/batch compiler,
21-20
Control characters, 21-6
#TAB, 21-15
Control System Flowchart, editing, 8-1
Conventional memory, 25-3
Conversion operations, 7-16, 8-16
Convert (management), 17-16
Converting
INI –> SEQ, 17-12
SEQ –> INI, 17-12
V1.x and V2.x, 17-14
Copy
blocks, 4-17
DOS file, 4-24
PCPM files, 4-28
COPY function, in the STL editor, 21-28
Correct INI, 17-13
Counter operations, 7-18, 8-18
Creating, assignment list, 11-6
Cross reference, creating, displaying, 5-22
Cross reference list, enhanced output, 18-16
Cross references, 24-20
creating (Make XRF), 5-23
displaying (Display XRF), 5-23
CSF, 8-1
CSF editor, 8-2
complex functions, 8-9
general functions, 8-2
simple editing functions, 8-4
Cursor control, 2-36
Cursor keys, 21-19
Index-3
Index
D
Data, inputting, 10-3, 10-5, 10-7
Data block
block body, 9-3
block header, 9-3
block preheader, 9-2
editing, 9-1, 9-4, 24-9
inputting, 21-34
inputting data words, 9-11
library number, 9-3
standard output, 18-5
structure, 9-2
title field, 9-5
Data block editor, 9-4
editing area, 9-6
format error field, 9-6
format field, 9-6
repetition factor, 9-6
Data block preheader, 4-17
Data flow, keyboard editor, 2-34
Data format
changing, 9-11
force outputs, 15-14
Data pool copy, 2-18
Data word
inputting, 9-11
number field, 9-5
Data word comment, 9-14
Data word comments, inputting, 9-14
Data words, reproducing, 9-15
DB 1 I/O assignment for the S5-135 U, 10-2
DB 1 screen, editing, 10-2
DB screen
editing, 10-1
standard output, 18-6
DB screen form
S5-135U, 10-1
S5-155U, 10-1
DB Screen Forms, editing, 10-2
DB1
outputting to printer, 22-27
saving to program file, 22-29
transferring to the PLC, 22-28
Delete
block, 4-20
block type, 4-20
DOS file, 4-25
editor functions, 8-5
DELETE function, in the STL editor, 21-28
Delete INI, 17-15
Delete SEQ, 17-15
Index-4
Deleting
characters, 5-14, 9-9, 10-3
lines, 9-17
lines/elements, 10-3
segment, 8-6
Destination drive, changing, 2-9
Dialog boxes, input, 3-8
Directory, PCPM file, 4-27
Display
in LAD/CSF, 5-16
in STL, 5-16
operand comment, 5-16
Display levels, in COM DB1, 22-6
Doc command
editing, 18-25
syntax, 18-21, 18-22
Doc command file, 4-9
Doc command syntax
assignment list, 18-24
block list/commands, 18-22
checklist, 18-23
directory, 18-23
I/Q/F list, 18-24
nested doc commands, 18-23
program structure, 18-23
XRF list, 18-23
Doc commands, 18-20
editing the structure, 18-32
error list, 18-31
outputting the log file, 18-31
outputting the structure, 18-34
presets, 18-21
printing, 18-31
running, 18-31
structure, 18-20
testing, 18-30
Documentation
commands, 18-22
doc command, 18-2
enhanced output, 18-2
hardcopy, 18-2
settings, 4-10
standard output, 18-2
Documentation block, 5-9
command, 5-10
deleting text, 5-9
inserting text, 5-9
DOS commands CTRL+F10, 4-30
DOS file, deleting, 4-25
DOS files, 4-22
Dos files, copying, 4-24
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
Dr/directory, 4-23
DX 0
for S5-135 U, page 2, 10-5
for S5-155 U, page 2, 10-7
for the S5-135 U, 10-4
for the S5-155 U, 10-6
DX 0 screen (S5-135 U), editing, 10-4
DX 0 screen (S5-155 U), editing, 10-6
Dynamic, project settings, 4-5
E
EDIT function key menu, 21-27
Editing
assignment list, 11-1, 17-11
block comments, 9-7
bus paths, 12-3
completing, 11-7
connectors, 8-8
control system flowcharts, 8-1
data blocks, 9-4, 24-9
DB 1 screen, 10-2
DB screens, 10-1
doc commands, 18-25
DX 0 screen (S5-135 U), 10-4
DX 0 screen (S5-155 U), 10-6
files for the bus path, 12-6
footer, 14-2
function blocks, 6-6
ladder diagrams, 7-1
new function block, 6-7
operand list, 15-8
serial and parallel rungs, 7-5
starting the edit mode, 21-17
statement list, 6-1
symbolic operands, 7-5, 8-5
Editing area, assignment list, 11-4
Editing field, 21-17
Editing functions, 21-5
Editing support, 11-9
Editor, 5-2
calling, 11-2
graphical user interface, 5-2
selecting, 9-4, 10-2
Editor functions, modifying and deleting, 8-5
EMM386.EXE, 25-4–25-6
installing, 25-5
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Enhanced output, 18-11
assignment list, 18-14
block list, 18-13
checklist, 18-19
cross reference list, 18-16
I/Q/F list, 18-17
KOMDOK assignment list, 18-14
text files, 18-19
Entering, screen, 10-3
EPROM, 17-2
blowing, 17-2, 17-5
defining functions, 17-3
deleting, 17-5
programming number, 17-4
reading, 17-5
EPROM (E info), 17-5
compare, 17-6
dir, 17-6
parameters, 17-6
SYSID inp, 17-6
SYSID out, 17-6
EPROM programmer, connection to the PG,
2-30–2-31
EPROM programming number, selecting, 17-4
Error, during editing, 11-8
Error list, 21-38
displaying, 18-30
output, 17-15
STL editor, 21-12
Error log file, outputting, 18-31
Error messages, 21-43
assignment list, 11-8
Establishment, bus paths, 12-2
Ethernet address, bus paths, 12-4
Example
assignment list, 11-8
conditions for implementing, 24-3
creating the program, 24-7
editing the assignment list, 24-7
Exit SHIFT+F4, 4-30
Extended memory, 25-2
Extended memory, XMS, 25-4
External prommer, connection to PC, 2-30
F
Field lengths, modifying, 11-14
Index-5
Index
File, transferring, 24-16
File and directory selection, 3-14
File directory, outputting, 4-23
File management, functions, 4-22
File mode, 4-7
File selection, 3-8
Floating point number, 9-12
data block, 9-16
testing, 9-16
Floating-point number, testing, 9-16
Footer
editing, 14-1, 14-2
settings, 4-10
Footer editor, 14-1
editing window, 14-2
starting, 14-2
Footer file, project settings, 4-9
Force, PLC, 16-1
Force outputs, 15-14
data format, 15-14
Force variables, 15-12, 24-28
Forced value, modifying, 15-13
Forced values, modifying, 15-15
Foreign language versions, of a STEP 5 program, 21-11
Form feed, 11-7
block comment, 9-8
segment comment, 5-12
Formal operand, 6-5
Format field, 9-6
Function
bus paths, 12-2
calling, 3-6
Function block, 6-5
appending, 8-7
block body, 6-5
block header, 6-5
block preheader, 6-5
editing, 6-6, 24-11
input, 21-31
inserting, 8-8
modifying, 6-8
structure, 6-5
Function description, 2-39
Function element, 7-2
Function key, in tab pages, 3-12
Function key assignment in output mode, 5-6
Function key menu, 3-3
STL editor, 21-18
Index-6
Function keys, 2-36, 11-5, 12-5
assignment list, 11-4
programmable, 11-13
programming, 11-4, 11-13
submit file editor, 18-25
Function selection, 3-6, 21-17
G
General functions
with the CSF editor, 8-2
with the editor, 11-2
with the LAD editor, 7-2
Generate XRF, 17-2
H
Hard disk, optimizing hard disk access, 25-6
Hardware, installing for STEP 5, 2-27
Hardware requirements, PG link, 23-2
Help, 3-3, 20-1
getting, 2-6
key assignment list, 20-2
on the currently active S5 program, 20-1
user interface, 20-4
High memory area, 25-4
HIMEM.SYS, 25-4–25-6
loading, 25-5
HMA. Siehe High memory area
I
I/Q/F List, 18-9
I/Q/F list, 18-17
enhanced output, 18-17
identifier, 18-10
standard output, 18-9
Include command, 21-7
Information, about the installed software, 2-6
Information line, 3-3
Input
appending, 8-12
dialog boxes, 3-8
inserting, 8-12
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
Input elements
hotkeys, 3-4
key macros, 3-4
keys in the function key menu, 3-5
user interface, 3-4
Input field of DB editor, 9-5
Inputting
data, 10-3, 10-5, 10-7
data word comments, 9-14
operands, 15-15
Inserting
characters, 5-13, 9-8
function blocks, 8-8
input, 8-12
line, 5-14
lines, 9-17, 11-14
lines/elements, 10-3
operands, 8-7
Installation
completion, 2-13
from CD-ROM, 2-19
from server, 2-16
home, 2-17
standard, 2-9
starting, 2-12
STEP 5 drivers, 2-32
STEP 5 under Windows, 2-20
types, 2-8
user-defined, 2-14
what to do afterwards, 2-13
Interface
project settings, 4-5
TTY, 23-2
V.24, 23-2
Intermediate file, A1.SEQ, 21-9
Interrupt stack, 16-3
IPC flags, 10-2
ISTACK, displaying, 16-3
K
Key assignment
complex functions LAD, 7-9
copying, 2-41
deleting, 2-40, 2-41
editing, 2-39
language selection, 2-38
modification, 2-33
printing, 2-41
restrictions, 2-39
saving, 2-41
Key assignment (PC)
copying, 2-41
printing, 2-41
Key assignment list, 20-2
Key combination, 2-39
Key descriptions, 2-40
Keyboard
cursor control, 2-36
function keys, 2-36
MFII cursor control, 2-36
MFII function keys, 2-36
Keyboard assignment for S5, 2-35–2-36
Keyboard editor
calling in MS-DOS, 2-36
calling in Windows 3.x, 2-36
calling in Windows 95, 2-36
Keyboard editor for PCs, 2-33
menus, 2-37
Keytop text, 2-39
Keytops
GRAPH 5, 2-40
PG keyboard, 2-40
KOMDOK
block list output, 18-13
outputting DB 1 screens, 18-13
outputting KOMDOK assignment list, 18-14
program structure, 18-15
Köster box, 2-28
J
Job box, 3-8, 3-9
dialog elements, 3-9
function keys, 3-10
keys with special functions, 3-10
memory, 3-11
mouse, keyboard, 3-10
search key, 5-4
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
L
LAD editor, 7-2
general editing functions, 7-2
Ladder Diagram, 7-1
logic operation, binary, 7-4
Index-7
Index
Ladder diagram
connector, 7-8
connector, negated, 7-8
inserting a contact, 7-5
screen layout, 7-2, 8-2
Language, 17-17
selecting, 2-8
Language category, 21-16
Language selection, key assignment, 2-38
Latching operations, 7-14, 8-15
Library number, 5-7
data block, 9-3, 9-7
entering, 9-10
Line
deleting, 9-17, 24-10
inserting, 9-17, 11-14, 24-10
Line/element, inserting, 10-3
Lines, inserting, 5-14
Lines/elements, deleting, 10-3
load, Project, 4-3
Load and transfer operations, 8-14
Loading
project, 4-2, 4-12
STL editor/batch compiler, 21-15
Loading the program, 24-24
Logic operation, binary, LAD, 7-4
Logic operations, digital, 7-17, 8-18
Long box
CSF, 8-10
LAD, 7-10
M
Main menu, selecting functions, 3-2
Make XRF, 17-2
Management, 17-1
block directory, 4-13
Managing, blocks, 4-13
Memory, 3-13
distribution, 25-3–25-4
Memory area, 16-6
Memory capacity, 25-5
Memory configuration, 16-3, 16-7, 25-2
Memory management, 25-2
order of drivers, 25-5
Memory manager, 25-4–25-6
EMM386, 25-4–25-6
HIMEM.SYS, 25-4
Memory requirements, for STEP 5/ST V 7.0,
25-2
Menu bar, 3-2
Index-8
Message line, 21-18
MFII keyboard, 2-36
Mode, settings, 4-5
Modification mode, 4-5
Modify, editor functions, 8-5
Modifying
assignment list, 11-14
field lengths, 11-14
function blocks, 6-8
output values, 15-15
segment, 8-5
N
New function block, editing, 6-7
New segment, 5-18
appending, 5-18
inserting, 5-18
Node, selecting, 12-4
O
Offline, project settings, 4-5
Online, project settings, 4-5
Online functions, in test menu, 15-2
Online help
calling, 3-7
topics, 3-7
Operand
absolute, 5-26
appending, 8-7
data format, 15-8
naming, 8-4
search, 5-26
search/find, 11-11
symbolic, 5-26, 5-27
operand
actual, 6-5
formal, 6-5
Operand areas, outputting the I/Q/F list, 18-9
Operand comment, 5-8, 11-6
displaying, 5-16
number of characters, 11-2, 11-6
Operand identifier, 11-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
Operand list
confirming changes, 15-7
data block, 15-8
editing, 15-8
number of process variables, 15-10, 15-13
permitted data format, 15-12
variables block, 15-8
Operand types, permitted, 11-3
Operands
inputting, 15-15
inserting, 8-7
naming, 7-4
Optimizing hard disk access, 25-6
Order number, connecting cables, 2-30
Output error list, 17-15
Output values, modifying, 15-15
Output variable, setting at the PG, 15-15
Outputting, KOMDOK DB1 screens, 18-13
P
Package, STL Editor/Batch Compiler, 21-15
Parallel prommer, 2-30
Parameter assignment software COM DB1, 22-1
Parameter block comment, entering, 22-23
Parameter list, 6-5
Parameters, editing, 22-24
Passive port, TTY, 23-2
Path file
assignment, 12-2
bus paths, 12-2
project settings, 4-6
Path name
bus paths, 12-2
project settings, 4-6
Path option, project settings, 4-6
PCP/M file, 4-26
copying, DOS –> PCP/M, 4-29
PCPM file
copying, 4-29
deleting, 4-30
directory, 4-27
PCPM files, copying, 4-28
PG keyboard, 2-39
PG Link, 23-1
functions, 23-2
PG link, 19-1
Plant comment, 5-8
number of characters, 5-8
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
PLC, 16-1
cold restart, 16-2
forcing, 16-1
info stack, 16-3
memory, 16-7
memory configuration, 16-7
memory contents, 16-5
overall reset, 4-20
stopping, 16-2
switching from STOP to RUN, 22-30
system parameters, 16-8
PLC info BSTACK, 16-5
PLC interface, 2-27
PLC memory, compressing, 16-2
PLC type, project settings, 4-5
Port
AG-S5, 2-27
TTY, 2-27
Port pin assignment, 2-27
Presets, PG link, 23-4
Printer file, project settings, 4-9
Printer interface, 4-9
Printer name, 13-4
Printer parameters, 13-1
dialog box, 13-3
Printing
layout, 21-8
STL editor, 21-8
STL source file, 21-38
Process image, 15-12
Process variable
displaying, 15-13
forcing, 15-12
influencing from the PG, 15-13
modifying, 15-12
operand, 15-7
outputting, 15-10
Product information, 1-1
Program blocks, inputting, 21-25
Program data, 23-4
Program file, 4-7
file mode, 4-7
project settings, 4-7
Program structure
enhanced output, 18-15
standard output, 18-6
Program test OFF, 15-17
Program test ON, 15-16, 15-16
Programmable function keys, 11-13
Index-9
Index
Programming number, 17-4
Project, 4-2
load, 4-12
save, 4-12
save as, 4-12
setting up, 24-5
settings, 4-4
structure, 4-2
Project directory, 4-10
Project file, 3-3, 4-2
Project settings
assignment list, 4-8
character set, 4-9
comment length, 4-8
dynamic, 4-5
footer file, 4-9
interface, 4-5
offline, 4-5
online, 4-5
path file, 4-6
path name, 4-6
PLC type, 4-5
printer file, 4-9
symbol length, 4-8
symbols file, 4-8
XRF file, 4-7
Projects, 4-1
Prommer, connection to PC, 2-30–2-31
Prommer type, 4-11
PX.INI file, 4-12
R
Range of functions of COM DB1, 22-2
Relative operation address, displaying, 6-3
Repetition factor, 9-6
REPLACE function, in the STL editor, 21-29
Replacing a string, 21-29
Representation, 4-7
switching over, 5-7
Reproducing, data blocks, 9-15
RESD, file mode, 4-7
Resource files (keyboard editor), testing, 2-42
Rewiring, 17-7, 24-22
automatic, 17-7, 17-8
canceling, 17-8, 17-10
manual, 17-8
printout, 17-9
Index-10
S
S5 identifier, 3-3
S5 keyboard assignment, 2-35–2-36
S5 packages, change, 19-1
Sample configuration
MS-DOS 5.0, optimization, 2-23
WIN 3.x, 2-24
WIN95, 2-24
Save, project, 4-3, 4-12
Save as, project, 4-3, 4-12
Save function, in the STL editor, 21-27
Saving
block comment, 9-9
blocks, 9-4
comment, 6-4
comments, 9-14
SAVE and ENTER, 21-30
Screen
entering, 10-3
switching between monochrome/color, 2-41
Screen display, 4-16
Screen layout
assignment list, 11-4
LAD, 7-2, 8-2
Screen lines, meaning, 7-3, 8-3, 11-4
Search, 5-4, 5-26
SEARCH function, in the STL editor, 21-28
Search key, 5-4
assignment list, 11-11
job box, 5-4
Segment, 5-15
appending, inserting, transferring, deleting,
5-17
buffering, 5-20
copying, 5-18
copying to another block, 5-20
deleting, 5-21, 8-6
in CSF, 8-3
in Ladder Diagram, 7-3
modifying, 8-5
moving, 5-21
reconfiguring, 8-5
search, 5-26
transferring, 5-21, 24-16
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
Segment comment, 5-8, 5-12, 24-13
completing, 5-14
form feed, 5-12
number of characters, 5-12
saving, 5-14
Segment title, 5-8, 5-15
length, 5-15
Selecting
editor, 9-4, 10-2
enhanced output, 18-11
Selecting functions, in the main menu, 3-2
Sequential source file, editor format, 21-13
Serial and parallel rungs, editing, 7-5
Setting, printer parameters, 13-2
Settings
documentation, 4-10
footer, 4-10
footer editor, 14-2
project, 4-4
Shift and rotate operations, 7-14, 8-14
Signal state
displaying, 15-7
forcing, 15-15
signal state
forcing, 15-12
number of statements, 15-4
operand, 15-7
representation, 15-4
SIMATIC Memory Cards, EPROM, 17-4
Simple editing functions, CSF, 8-4
SINEC H1, 15-1
SINEC L2, 15-1
SMARTDRV.SYS, 25-6
Software
detailed information, 2-6
supplied with the PG, 1-1
Software requirements, 2-2
Special characters, 11-7
Special features
installing STEP 5 under Windows 3.x, 2-20
installing STEP 5 under Windows 95, 2-21
STEP 5 under MS-DOS, 2-20
SPECIAL functions, 21-40
intermediate and source files, 21-40
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Special functions
COPY, 21-40
INT>SEQ, 21-41
SEQDELETE and INTDELETE, 21-41
STL editor, 21-10
SYM-GEN, 21-42
test run, 21-41
Special keys, 21-19
Standard output, 18-3
assignment list, 18-6
data blocks, 18-5
I/Q/F list, 18-9
program structure, 18-6
STEP 5 blocks, 18-5
three-on-one, 18-10
XRF list, 18-8
Standard printer, 2-27
Standard programs, 21-11
Start node, in bus paths, 12-4
Starting
in WIN-NT, 2-22
STEP 5/ST, 2-21
Starting the PLC, 16-2
Statement
comment, 6-3
correcting, 6-2
inputting, 6-2
Statement comment, 5-8
Statement list, 6-1
Station addresses, bus paths, 12-2
Status processing
actions, 15-6, 15-11
block nesting, 15-4
calling, 15-4
messages, 15-11
representation of the signal states, 15-4
restrictions, 15-3
screen layout in STL, 15-5
Status variable, 15-7
STEP 5
installing STEP 5 under Windows, 2-20
practical application, 24-1
Index-11
Index
STEP 5 blocks
creating, 21-4
modifying and extending (STL editor),
21-12
STEP 5 data management, 25-1
STEP 5 operations, in the STL editor/batch
compiler, and writing conventions, 21-22
STEP 5 statements, working with other editors,
21-13
STL addresses, 4-7
STL editor
general functions, 6-2
simple editing functions, 6-3
STL Editor/Batch Compiler, 21-1
compiling, 21-2
control characters, 21-20
decompiling, 21-2
saving, 21-2
test run, 21-3
testing, 21-2
STL source file
and intermediate file, 21-9
modifying, 21-35
Stop, PLC, 16-2
Structure
editing, 18-32
logic example, 18-20
Structure of a data block, 9-2
Submodule information, 17-4
Symbol length
assignment list, 11-2
project settings, 4-8
Symbolic operand, 5-26
Symbolic operands, editing, 7-5, 8-5
Symbols, 21-24
Symbols file, 4-3
correcting, 24-13
creating, 17-11
project settings, 4-8
SYSID file, 4-11
System files, 4-3
System identification, 4-11
System parameters of the PLC, 16-8
T
Tab dialog, 3-12
Index-12
Tab page, 3-8
Blocks, 4-7
documentation, 4-9
EPROM, 4-11
options, 4-10
PLC, 4-5
Symbols, 4-8
Tabs and tab pages, 3-12
Termination, bus paths, 12-2
Test, 15-1
requirements, 15-1
Test run, 21-12
checking a program file, 21-12
checking special blocks, 21-12
Testing, floating-point numbers, 9-16
Testing the program, 24-25
Text files, enhanced output, 18-19
Three-in-one, 18-10
standard output, 18-10
Timer operations, 7-20, 8-20
Title bar, 3-2
editing, 21-17
Title field, 9-5
TTY
active port, 23-2
passive port, 23-2
TTY port
active, 2-28
connector assignment, 2-31
U
UMB. Siehe Upper memory blocks
Upper and lower case, 21-29
Upper memory blocks, 25-3
(UMB), 25-4
User installation from server, 2-15
User interface, 3-1
Help menu, 20-4
keyboard editor, 2-37
User interface: dialog boxes, 3-8
User memory, 25-2
V
V.24 interface, 23-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Index
V.24 port, 2-27, 2-28
V.24/TTY converter, 2-29
Variable values, modifying, 15-13
Version of S5 packages, 20-2
Working directory changes, keyboard editor,
2-41
Working with tabs, 3-12
Writing conventions, for STEP 5 operations, in
the STL editor/batch compiler, 21-22
W
Warnings, 4-10
Wildcards, 4-22
Windows, installing STEP 5 under Windows,
2-20
Windows directory, entering, 2-11
Windows integration, 2-10
Working area of screen, 3-2
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
X
XRF
make, 17-2
updating, 5-5
XRF file, project settings, 4-7
XRF list, standard output, 18-8
Index-13
Index
Index-14
STEP 5/ST V7.0
C79000-G8576-C920-03
Siemens AG
AUT E 146
Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 50
D–76181 Karlsruhe
Federal Republic of Germany
From:
Your Name: _ _ _ _
Your Title: _ _ _ _
Company Name:
_
Street:
_
City, Zip Code_
Country:
_
Phone:
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
✄
Please check any industry that applies to you:
❒
Automotive
❒
Pharmaceutical
❒
Chemical
❒
Plastic
❒
Electrical Machinery
❒
Pulp and Paper
❒
Food
❒
Textiles
❒
Instrument and Control
❒
Transportation
❒
Nonelectrical Machinery
❒
Other _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
❒
Petrochemical
STEP 5/ST V7.0
6ES5998-0MA24-03
1
Remarks Form
Your comments and recommendations will help us to improve the quality and usefulness
of our publications. Please take the first available opportunity to fill out this questionnaire
and return it to Siemens.
Please give each of the following questions your own personal mark within the range
from 1 (very good) to 5 (poor).
1.
Do the contents meet your requirements?
2.
Is the information you need easy to find?
3.
Is the text easy to understand?
4.
Does the level of technical detail meet your requirements?
5.
Please rate the quality of the graphics/tables:
Additional comments:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
2
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
STEP 5/ST V7.0
6ES5998-0MA24-03
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement